ValueSAP - Business BlueprintBusiness Blueprint

ASAP Business Blueprint

All FI/CO
Created by: Date of creation: Changed by: Date of the last changes: Version: Report select options:
[- Structure level Include blank questions ]

asap 8/26/2007

_______________

______________________

______________________

Sign Off Date

Signature Customer

Signature Consulting

File location: [C:\Asap\Projects\GE_CI_1\QAdb\Reports\Blueprint_FICO_1.doc]

ValueSAP -

Table of Contents
A. Organization..................................................................................................................................28 1. Financial Accounting..............................................................................................................28 1.1. Chart of Accounts................................................................................................................28 1.2. Consolidation Company.......................................................................................................29 1.3. Subgroup.............................................................................................................................29 2. Enterprise Controlling.............................................................................................................30 2.1. Dimensions..........................................................................................................................30 2.2. Currencies (Consolidation)..................................................................................................31 2.3. Version................................................................................................................................31 2.4. Consolidation Group............................................................................................................31 2.5. Consolidation Unit...............................................................................................................32 3. Asset Accounting....................................................................................................................33 3.1. Depreciation area................................................................................................................33 3.2. Chart of depreciation...........................................................................................................34 3.3. Asset class..........................................................................................................................34 4. Real Estate Management.......................................................................................................35 4.1. Company-Specific (Relevant to Real Estate Management)..................................................35 4.2. System-Specific (Relevant to Real Estate Management).....................................................37 B. General Settings...........................................................................................................................38 1. Time Zones............................................................................................................................39 C. Master Data..................................................................................................................................39 1. General Master Records.........................................................................................................39 1.1. Taxes..................................................................................................................................39 2. Financial Accounting..............................................................................................................39 2.1. G/L Account.........................................................................................................................39 2.2. Ledger.................................................................................................................................40 2.3. Legal Consolidation.............................................................................................................41 2.3.1. Item 41 2.3.2. Subitem............................................................................................................................42 2.3.3. Sets (Namespace)............................................................................................................42 2.4. Funds Management.............................................................................................................42 2.4.1. Funds Center....................................................................................................................44 2.4.2. Commitment Item.............................................................................................................44 2.4.3. Fund 45 2.4.4. Application of Funds.........................................................................................................46 3. Treasury.................................................................................................................................46 3.1. General...............................................................................................................................46 3.1.1. Business Partner..............................................................................................................46 3.1.2. House Banks....................................................................................................................47 3.1.3. Limits 47 3.2. Treasury Management.........................................................................................................47 3.2.1. Class 47 3.2.2. Reference.........................................................................................................................48 3.2.3. Securities Account............................................................................................................48 3.2.4. Position Indicator..............................................................................................................48 3.2.5. Market Data......................................................................................................................48 3.3. Loans..................................................................................................................................48 3.3.1. Loan Products..................................................................................................................48 3.3.2. Collateral..........................................................................................................................49 3.3.3. Collateral Objects.............................................................................................................50 3.3.4. Filed Documents...............................................................................................................50 3.3.5. Condition Structure...........................................................................................................50 3.4. Market Risk Management....................................................................................................51 3.4.1. Reference Interest Rate....................................................................................................51 3.4.2. Yield Curves.....................................................................................................................51 3.4.3. Volatility............................................................................................................................51 2 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP 3.4.4. Reporting..........................................................................................................................52 3.4.5. Prices/NPVs for OTC Transactions...................................................................................52 3.4.6. Scenario...........................................................................................................................52 3.4.7. Market Data Shift..............................................................................................................52 3.4.8. Statistics Type..................................................................................................................52 3.4.9. Correlation........................................................................................................................53 3.4.10. Risk Hierarchy................................................................................................................53 4. Revenue and Cost Controlling................................................................................................53 4.1. Overhead Cost Controlling...................................................................................................53 4.1.1. Cost Element....................................................................................................................53 4.1.1.1. Primary Cost Element....................................................................................................53 4.1.1.2. Secondary Cost Element...............................................................................................53 4.1.1.3. Cost Element Group......................................................................................................53 4.1.2. Cost Center......................................................................................................................54 4.1.2.1. Cost Center...................................................................................................................54 4.1.2.2. Standard Hierarchy for Cost Centers.............................................................................54 4.1.2.3. Cost Center Group.........................................................................................................54 4.1.3. Activity Type.....................................................................................................................54 4.1.3.1. Activity Type..................................................................................................................54 4.1.3.2. Activity Type Group.......................................................................................................54 4.1.4. Statistical Key Figures......................................................................................................55 4.1.4.1. Statistical Key Figures...................................................................................................55 4.1.4.2. Statistical Key Figure Group..........................................................................................55 4.1.5. Business Process.............................................................................................................55 4.1.5.1. Business Process..........................................................................................................55 4.1.5.2. Standard Hierarchy for Business Processes..................................................................55 4.1.5.3. Business Process Group...............................................................................................55 4.1.6. Internal Order...................................................................................................................56 4.2. Product Cost Controlling......................................................................................................56 4.2.1. Procurement Alternative...................................................................................................56 4.2.2. Cost Component...............................................................................................................56 4.2.3. Product Cost Collectors....................................................................................................57 4.2.4. Material Ledger Data........................................................................................................57 4.3. Profitability Analysis.............................................................................................................57 4.3.1. Characteristics..................................................................................................................57 4.3.1.1. Characteristic Definition.................................................................................................57 4.3.1.2. Characteristic Values.....................................................................................................57 4.3.1.3. Characteristic Derivation................................................................................................58 4.3.2. Value Fields......................................................................................................................58 4.3.2.1. Definition of Value Fields...............................................................................................58 4.3.3. Condition Types................................................................................................................58 4.3.3.1. Definition of Condition Types.........................................................................................58 5. Enterprise Controlling.............................................................................................................59 5.1. Consolidation.......................................................................................................................59 5.1.1. Consolidation Chart of Acounts / FS Item Hierarchy.........................................................59 5.1.2. Breakdown Categories.....................................................................................................60 5.1.3. Custom Characteristics.....................................................................................................60 5.1.4. Subitem Category.............................................................................................................61 5.1.5. Subitem............................................................................................................................61 5.1.6. Sets (Namespace)............................................................................................................61 6. Asset Accounting....................................................................................................................62 7. Real Estate Management.......................................................................................................63 7.1. Real Estate Objects.............................................................................................................63 7.1.1. Business Entity.................................................................................................................64 7.1.2. Property............................................................................................................................66 7.1.3. Building............................................................................................................................68 7.1.4. Rental Unit........................................................................................................................71 7.1.5. Rooms 76 7.1.6. Land Register...................................................................................................................78 7.1.7. Correction Items (Germany).............................................................................................78 3 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP 7.1.8. Participation ID.................................................................................................................79 7.1.9. Settlement Unit.................................................................................................................79 7.1.10. Master Settlement Unit...................................................................................................80 7.1.11. Heating System..............................................................................................................81 7.2. Partner................................................................................................................................81 7.2.1. Business Partner Real Estate...........................................................................................81 D. Business Processes......................................................................................................................84 1. Financial Accounting..............................................................................................................84 1.1. Basic Settings......................................................................................................................84 1.1.1. Fiscal Year and Posting Periods.......................................................................................84 1.1.2. Document.........................................................................................................................85 1.1.3. Posting Help.....................................................................................................................85 1.1.4. Tax on Sales/Purchases in SAP System...........................................................................85 1.1.5. Tax on Sales/Purchases in Non-SAP System...................................................................86 1.1.6. Withholding Tax................................................................................................................86 1.1.7. Inflation.............................................................................................................................86 1.1.8. Schedule Manager...........................................................................................................87 1.2. General Ledger Accounting.................................................................................................87 1.2.1. Postings in G/L.................................................................................................................87 1.2.1.1. Park G/L Account Document..........................................................................................87 1.2.1.2. G/L Account Posting......................................................................................................87 1.2.1.3. Recurring Entry..............................................................................................................88 1.2.1.4. Document Reversal.......................................................................................................88 1.2.1.5. Accrual/Deferral Posting................................................................................................88 1.2.2. General Ledger Account Analysis.....................................................................................88 1.2.2.1. General Ledger Line item Analysis................................................................................88 1.2.2.2. Balance Analysis...........................................................................................................88 1.2.2.3. G/L Evaluations.............................................................................................................88 1.2.3. Account Clearing [GL].......................................................................................................89 1.2.3.1. Automatic Clearing........................................................................................................89 1.2.4. General Ledger Planning..................................................................................................89 1.2.4.1. General Ledger Planning...............................................................................................89 1.2.5. Account Balance Interest Calculation (G/L).......................................................................89 1.2.5.1. Account Balance Interest Calculation for General Ledger..............................................89 1.2.6. Closing Operations...........................................................................................................89 1.2.6.1. Foreign Currency Valuation for Open Items...................................................................90 1.2.6.2. Foreign Currency Valuation for Balances.......................................................................90 1.2.6.3. Regroup Receivables/Payables.....................................................................................91 1.2.6.4. GR/IR Clearing Account Maintenance............................................................................91 1.2.6.5. Flat-Rate Individual Value Adjustment due to Default or Credit Risk..............................91 1.2.6.6. Profit and Loss Adjustment............................................................................................91 1.2.6.7. Financial Statement Creation.........................................................................................91 1.2.6.8. Periodic Reports............................................................................................................91 1.2.6.9. Carry Forward G/L Balances..........................................................................................92 1.2.7. Integration........................................................................................................................92 1.3. Accounts Payable................................................................................................................93 1.3.1. Vendor Down Payments...................................................................................................93 1.3.2. Invoices and Credit Memos..............................................................................................93 1.3.2.1. Vendor Document Parking.............................................................................................93 1.3.2.2. Invoice Receipt..............................................................................................................94 1.3.2.3. Vendor Credit Memo......................................................................................................94 1.3.2.4. Document Reversal.......................................................................................................95 1.3.2.5. Recurring Entry..............................................................................................................95 1.3.3. Vendor Account Analysis..................................................................................................95 1.3.3.1. Vendor Line Item Analysis.............................................................................................95 1.3.3.2. Balance Analysis...........................................................................................................95 1.3.3.3. Vendor Account Evaluations..........................................................................................95 1.3.4. Vendor Payments.............................................................................................................96 1.3.4.1. Vendor Payment Request..............................................................................................97 1.3.4.2. Release for Payment.....................................................................................................97 4 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP 1.3.4.3. Manual Outgoing Payments...........................................................................................97 1.3.4.4. Automatic Outgoing Payments.......................................................................................98 1.3.4.5. Vendor Payment Medium Creation................................................................................99 1.3.5. Account Clearing [AP].......................................................................................................99 1.3.5.1. Automatic Clearing........................................................................................................99 1.3.6. Interest Calculation [A/P]..................................................................................................100 1.3.6.1. Vendor Account Balance Interest Calculation................................................................100 1.3.6.2. Calculation of Interest on Arrears - Vendors...................................................................100 1.3.7. Correspondence with Vendors..........................................................................................100 1.3.7.1. Correspondence with Vendors.......................................................................................100 1.4. Accounts Receivable...........................................................................................................101 1.4.1. Customer Down Payments...............................................................................................101 1.4.1.1. Customer Down Payment..............................................................................................101 1.4.2. Invoices and Credit Memos..............................................................................................102 1.4.2.1. Customer Document Parking.........................................................................................102 1.4.2.2. Outgoing Invoice............................................................................................................102 1.4.2.3. Customer Credit Memo..................................................................................................102 1.4.2.4. Document Reversal.......................................................................................................102 1.4.2.5. Recurring Entry..............................................................................................................103 1.4.3. Account Analysis [A/R].....................................................................................................103 1.4.3.1. Customer Line Item Analysis.........................................................................................103 1.4.3.2. Balance Analysis...........................................................................................................103 1.4.3.3. Credit Management Analysis.........................................................................................103 1.4.3.4. Customer Evaluations....................................................................................................103 1.4.4. Customer Payments.........................................................................................................104 1.4.4.1. Payment Advice Note Processing..................................................................................104 1.4.4.2. Release for Payment.....................................................................................................104 1.4.4.3. Manual Incoming Payments...........................................................................................105 1.4.4.4. Automatic Incoming Payments.......................................................................................105 1.4.4.5. Customer Payment Medium Creation............................................................................106 1.4.4.6. Payment Card Settlement..............................................................................................106 1.4.5. Bill of Exchange Receivable.............................................................................................106 1.4.5.1. Manual Payment by Bill of Exchange.............................................................................107 1.4.5.2. Bill of Exchange Usage..................................................................................................107 1.4.6. Account Clearing [AR]......................................................................................................107 1.4.6.1. Automatic Clearing........................................................................................................107 1.4.7. Dunning Notice.................................................................................................................107 1.4.7.1. Automatic Dunning........................................................................................................107 1.4.8. Interest Calculation [A/R]..................................................................................................108 1.4.8.1. Customer Account Balance Interest Calculation.............................................................108 1.4.8.2. Calculation of Interest on Arrears - Customers...............................................................108 1.4.9. Correspondence with Customers......................................................................................109 1.4.9.1. Correspondence with Customers...................................................................................109 1.5. Bank Accounting..................................................................................................................109 1.5.1. Incomings.........................................................................................................................109 1.5.1.1. Cash Journal.................................................................................................................109 1.5.1.2. Electronic Bank Statement.............................................................................................109 1.5.1.3. Manual Account Statement............................................................................................110 1.5.1.4. Check Deposit Transaction............................................................................................111 1.5.1.5. Bill of Exchange Presentation (Debit).............................................................................111 1.5.1.6. Cashed Checks.............................................................................................................112 1.5.1.7. Lockbox (USA)..............................................................................................................112 1.5.1.8. POR Procedure (Switzerland)........................................................................................112 1.5.2. Outgoings.........................................................................................................................112 1.5.2.1. Payment with Payment Requests..................................................................................112 1.5.2.2. Cash Journal.................................................................................................................112 1.5.3. Check Management..........................................................................................................113 1.5.3.1. Manage Check Balance.................................................................................................113 1.5.4. Account Balance Interest Calculation................................................................................113 1.5.4.1. Account Balance Interest Calculation.............................................................................113 5 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP 1.6. Special Purpose Ledger......................................................................................................113 1.6.1. Prepare Ledger.................................................................................................................114 1.6.1.1. Set Up Ledger...............................................................................................................114 1.6.2. Planning...........................................................................................................................114 1.6.3. Actual Posting..................................................................................................................115 1.6.3.1. Direct Data Entry...........................................................................................................115 1.6.3.2. Integration Interface.......................................................................................................116 1.6.3.3. Data Transfer.................................................................................................................116 1.6.4. Periodic Processing..........................................................................................................116 1.6.4.1. Assessment...................................................................................................................116 1.6.4.2. Rollup 116 1.6.4.3. Currency Translation.....................................................................................................116 1.6.4.4. Balance Carried Forward [SL - Special Ledger].............................................................117 1.7. Valuation of Balances Relevant to Balance Sheet................................................................117 1.7.1. Determination of lowest value...........................................................................................117 1.7.1.1. Lowest Value: Market Price Analysis.............................................................................117 1.7.1.2. Lowest Value: Range of Coverage Determination..........................................................117 1.7.1.3. Lowest Value: Determination of Mvt Rate......................................................................118 1.7.1.4. Lowest Value: Price Variances......................................................................................118 1.7.1.5. Lowest value: Products..................................................................................................118 1.7.2. LIFO valuation..................................................................................................................118 1.7.2.1. LIFO: Materials Identification.........................................................................................118 1.7.2.2. LIFO: Group Formation: Execute...................................................................................118 1.7.2.3. LIFO: Lowest Value Comparison...................................................................................119 1.7.3. FIFO Valuation.................................................................................................................119 1.7.3.1. FIFO: Material ID...........................................................................................................119 1.8. Consolidation.......................................................................................................................119 1.8.1. Preparations for Consolidation..........................................................................................119 1.8.1.1. Integration.....................................................................................................................119 1.8.1.2. Setting Up Consolidation Rules.....................................................................................119 1.8.1.3. Applying Consolidation Rules........................................................................................120 1.8.1.4. Decentralized Balance Reconciliation............................................................................120 1.8.1.5. Decentralized Corporate Valuation Postings..................................................................120 1.8.1.6. Decentralized Currency Translation...............................................................................120 1.8.2. Master Data Maintenance.................................................................................................121 1.8.2.1. Acquisition of a Company..............................................................................................121 1.8.2.2. Divestiture of a Company...............................................................................................121 1.8.2.3. Company Merger...........................................................................................................121 1.8.2.4. FS Chart of Accounts Change.......................................................................................121 1.8.2.5. Company Split...............................................................................................................121 1.8.3. Centralized Data Entry......................................................................................................121 1.8.3.1. Data Transfer.................................................................................................................122 1.8.4. Remote Data Entry...........................................................................................................122 1.8.4.1. Data Transfer.................................................................................................................122 1.8.5. Currency Translation........................................................................................................122 1.8.5.1. Central Currency Translation.........................................................................................123 1.8.6. Postings...........................................................................................................................123 1.8.6.1. Standardizing Entries.....................................................................................................123 1.8.7. Intercompany Eliminations................................................................................................123 1.8.7.1. Intercompany Balance Verification.................................................................................123 1.8.7.2. Elimination of IC Payables & Receivables......................................................................124 1.8.7.3. Elimination of IC Revenue and Expense........................................................................124 1.8.8. Elimination of IC Profit and Loss in Current Assets...........................................................124 1.8.8.1. Elimination of IU Profit/Loss in Transferred Inventory.....................................................124 1.8.9. Elimination of IC Profit and Loss in Fixed Assets..............................................................124 1.8.9.1. Elimination of IC Profit/Loss in Fixed Assets..................................................................124 1.8.10. Consolidation of Investments..........................................................................................125 1.8.10.1. Consolidation Method..................................................................................................125 1.8.10.2. First Consolidation.......................................................................................................125 1.8.10.3. Investment Amortization/Write-Up................................................................................125 6 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP 1.8.10.4. Increase/Reduction in Capitalization............................................................................126 1.8.10.5. Subsequent Consolidation...........................................................................................126 1.8.10.6. Transfer Posting FI-LC.................................................................................................126 1.8.11. Information System.........................................................................................................126 1.8.12. Reporting........................................................................................................................126 1.8.13. Data Transfer to Other Systems (e.g. EIS)......................................................................126 1.9. Funds Management.............................................................................................................127 1.9.1. Edit Basic Settings............................................................................................................131 1.9.1.1. Status Management.......................................................................................................131 1.9.1.2. Assigning Cost Element.................................................................................................131 1.9.1.3. Assigning WBS Element................................................................................................131 1.9.1.4. Assigning Cost Center...................................................................................................131 1.9.1.5. Assigning Order.............................................................................................................132 1.9.1.6. Assigning Profit Center..................................................................................................132 1.9.1.7. Warehouse Funds Center Assignment...........................................................................132 1.9.2. Budget Planning...............................................................................................................133 1.9.2.1. Copy CO Plan for FM Budget........................................................................................136 1.9.2.2. Budget Structure Processing.........................................................................................136 1.9.2.3. Editing Commitment Item Group....................................................................................136 1.9.2.4. Budget Version Processing............................................................................................136 1.9.2.5. Original Budget Processing (Bottom Up through Rollup)................................................137 1.9.2.6. Original Budget Processing (Top Down/Bottom Up).......................................................137 1.9.2.7. Budget Release (Top Down/Bottom Up)........................................................................137 1.9.2.8. Budget Release (Bottom Up Using Rollup)....................................................................137 1.9.2.9. Budget Supplement (Top Down/Bottom Up)..................................................................138 1.9.2.10. Budget Supplement (Bottom Up through Rollup)..........................................................138 1.9.2.11. Budget Transfer...........................................................................................................138 1.9.2.12. Budget Return (Outward by Rollup).............................................................................138 1.9.2.13. Edit Budget Document.................................................................................................138 1.9.3. Budget Execution.............................................................................................................138 1.9.3.1. Funds Blocking..............................................................................................................143 1.9.3.2. Funds Reservation.........................................................................................................143 1.9.3.3. Funds Precommitment...................................................................................................143 1.9.3.4. Funds Commitment.......................................................................................................143 1.9.3.5. Manual Commitment Mass Maintenance/Closing in FM.................................................144 1.9.3.6. Payment Transfer..........................................................................................................144 1.9.3.7. Forecast of Revenue.....................................................................................................144 1.9.3.8. Payment Selection.........................................................................................................144 1.9.3.9. Payment Matching.........................................................................................................144 1.9.3.10. Budget Increase...........................................................................................................145 1.9.4. Information System [Funds Management].........................................................................145 1.9.4.1. Reports 145 1.9.4.2. Matching Line Item Totals..............................................................................................147 1.9.5. Fiscal Year Change Operations [Funds Management]......................................................147 1.9.5.1. Preparing Fiscal Year Change Operations.....................................................................148 1.9.5.2. Open Commitment Document Selection........................................................................148 1.9.5.3. Define Transfer Rules....................................................................................................149 1.9.5.4. Commitments Documents Carryforward........................................................................150 1.9.5.5. Reset Commitments Carried Forward............................................................................150 1.9.5.6. Fund Balance Carryforward...........................................................................................150 1.9.5.7. Determining Budget Carryforward..................................................................................150 1.9.5.8. Budget Carryforward......................................................................................................151 2. Treasury.................................................................................................................................152 2.1. Stocks [TR-SE]....................................................................................................................152 2.1.1. Transaction Processing....................................................................................................152 2.1.1.1. Process Stock Transactions...........................................................................................152 2.1.1.2. Reversal 152 2.1.1.3. Release 153 2.1.2. Correspondence...............................................................................................................153 2.1.2.1. Process Outgoing Confirmations....................................................................................153 7 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP 2.1.2.2. Monitor 153 2.1.3. Position Management.......................................................................................................153 2.1.3.1. Disposition Block...........................................................................................................153 2.1.3.2. Deadline Monitoring.......................................................................................................153 2.1.3.3. Stock Split.....................................................................................................................154 2.1.3.4. Stock Swap...................................................................................................................154 2.1.3.5. Post New Stock.............................................................................................................154 2.1.3.6. Post Subscription Rights................................................................................................154 2.1.3.7. Issue Currency Changeover..........................................................................................154 2.1.4. Accounting........................................................................................................................154 2.1.4.1. Posting Release............................................................................................................155 2.1.4.2. Manual Posting..............................................................................................................155 2.1.4.3. Automatic Posting..........................................................................................................156 2.1.4.4. Process Payment Request.............................................................................................156 2.1.5. Closing Operations...........................................................................................................156 2.1.5.1. Period-End Closing........................................................................................................156 2.1.5.2. Key Date Valuation........................................................................................................156 2.2. Subscription Rights [TR-SE]................................................................................................157 2.2.1. Transaction Processing....................................................................................................157 2.2.1.1. Process Subscription Rights..........................................................................................157 2.2.1.2. Reversal 158 2.2.1.3. Release 158 2.2.2. Correspondence...............................................................................................................158 2.2.2.1. Monitor 158 2.2.3. Position Management.......................................................................................................158 2.2.3.1. Exercise Security Rights................................................................................................158 2.2.3.2. Deadline Monitoring.......................................................................................................159 2.2.3.3. Issue Currency Changeover..........................................................................................159 2.2.4. Accounting........................................................................................................................159 2.2.4.1. Posting Release............................................................................................................160 2.2.4.2. Process Payment Request.............................................................................................160 2.2.5. Closing Operations...........................................................................................................160 2.2.5.1. Period-End Closing........................................................................................................160 2.2.5.2. Key Date Valuation........................................................................................................160 2.3. Bonds [TR-SE]....................................................................................................................161 2.3.1. Transaction Processing....................................................................................................161 2.3.1.1. Process Bonds..............................................................................................................161 2.3.1.2. Reversal 162 2.3.1.3. Release 162 2.3.2. Correspondence...............................................................................................................162 2.3.2.1. Process Outgoing Confirmations....................................................................................162 2.3.2.2. Monitor 162 2.3.3. Position Management.......................................................................................................163 2.3.3.1. Exercise Security Rights................................................................................................163 2.3.3.2. Disposition Block...........................................................................................................163 2.3.3.3. Deadline Monitoring.......................................................................................................163 2.3.3.4. Planned Record Update.................................................................................................163 2.3.3.5. Issue Currency Changeover..........................................................................................163 2.3.4. Accounting........................................................................................................................164 2.3.4.1. Posting Release............................................................................................................164 2.3.4.2. Manual Posting..............................................................................................................164 2.3.4.3. Automatic Posting..........................................................................................................165 2.3.4.4. Process Payment Request.............................................................................................165 2.3.5. Closing Operations...........................................................................................................165 2.3.5.1. Period-End Closing........................................................................................................165 2.3.5.2. Interest Accrual/Deferral................................................................................................165 2.3.5.3. Key Date Valuation........................................................................................................166 2.4. Warrants [TR-SE]................................................................................................................166 2.4.1. Transaction Processing....................................................................................................166 2.4.1.1. Process Warrants..........................................................................................................167 8 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP 2.4.1.2. Reversal 167 2.4.1.3. Release 167 2.4.2. Correspondence...............................................................................................................167 2.4.2.1. Process Outgoing Confirmations....................................................................................168 2.4.2.2. Monitor 168 2.4.3. Position Management.......................................................................................................168 2.4.3.1. Exercise Security Rights................................................................................................168 2.4.3.2. Disposition Block...........................................................................................................168 2.4.3.3. Deadline Monitoring.......................................................................................................169 2.4.3.4. Issue Currency Changeover..........................................................................................169 2.4.4. Accounting........................................................................................................................169 2.4.4.1. Posting Release............................................................................................................169 2.4.4.2. Process Payment Request.............................................................................................170 2.4.5. Closing Operations...........................................................................................................170 2.4.5.1. Period-End Closing........................................................................................................170 2.4.5.2. Key Date Valuation........................................................................................................170 2.5. Warrant Bond [TR-SE].........................................................................................................171 2.5.1. Transaction Processing....................................................................................................171 2.5.1.1. Process Warrant Bonds.................................................................................................171 2.5.1.2. Reversal 172 2.5.1.3. Release 172 2.5.2. Correspondence...............................................................................................................172 2.5.2.1. Process Outgoing Confirmations....................................................................................172 2.5.2.2. Monitor 173 2.5.3. Position Management.......................................................................................................173 2.5.3.1. Exercise Security Rights................................................................................................173 2.5.3.2. Disposition Block...........................................................................................................173 2.5.3.3. Deadline Monitoring.......................................................................................................173 2.5.3.4. Issue Currency Changeover..........................................................................................173 2.5.4. Accounting........................................................................................................................174 2.5.4.1. Posting Release............................................................................................................174 2.5.4.2. Manual Posting..............................................................................................................174 2.5.4.3. Automatic Posting..........................................................................................................175 2.5.4.4. Process Payment Request.............................................................................................175 2.5.5. Closing Operations...........................................................................................................175 2.5.5.1. Period-End Closing........................................................................................................175 2.5.5.2. Interest Accrual/Deferral................................................................................................175 2.5.5.3. Key Date Valuation........................................................................................................176 2.6. Convertible Bond [TR-SE]....................................................................................................176 2.6.1. Transaction Processing....................................................................................................176 2.6.1.1. Process Convertible Bonds............................................................................................177 2.6.1.2. Reversal 177 2.6.1.3. Release 177 2.6.2. Correspondence...............................................................................................................177 2.6.2.1. Process Outgoing Confirmations....................................................................................178 2.6.2.2. Monitor 178 2.6.3. Position Management.......................................................................................................178 2.6.3.1. Exercise Security Rights................................................................................................178 2.6.3.2. Disposition Block...........................................................................................................178 2.6.3.3. Deadline monitoring.......................................................................................................179 2.6.3.4. Issue Currency Changeover..........................................................................................179 2.6.4. Accounting........................................................................................................................179 2.6.4.1. Posting Release............................................................................................................179 2.6.4.2. Manual Posting..............................................................................................................180 2.6.4.3. Automatic Posting..........................................................................................................180 2.6.4.4. Process Payment Request.............................................................................................180 2.6.5. Closing Operations...........................................................................................................180 2.6.5.1. Period-End Closing........................................................................................................181 2.6.5.2. Interest Accrual/Deferral................................................................................................181 2.6.5.3. Key Date Valuation........................................................................................................181 9 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP 2.7. Process Deposit at Notice [TR-MM].....................................................................................182 2.7.1. Transaction Processing....................................................................................................182 2.7.1.1. Process Deposit at Notice..............................................................................................182 2.7.1.2. Reversal 182 2.7.1.3. Release 182 2.7.2. Correspondence...............................................................................................................182 2.7.2.1. Process Outgoing Confirmations....................................................................................182 2.7.2.2. Process Incoming Confirmations....................................................................................183 2.7.3. Accounting........................................................................................................................183 2.7.3.1. Posting Release............................................................................................................183 2.7.3.2. Perform Posting.............................................................................................................183 2.7.3.3. Process Payment Request.............................................................................................184 2.7.3.4. Reverse Posting Documents..........................................................................................184 2.7.4. Closing Operations...........................................................................................................184 2.7.4.1. Accrual/Deferral.............................................................................................................184 2.7.4.2. Key Date Valuation........................................................................................................184 2.7.4.3. Realized Gains/Losses..................................................................................................184 2.8. Commercial Paper [TR-MM]................................................................................................185 2.8.1. Transaction Processing....................................................................................................185 2.8.1.1. Process Commercial Paper...........................................................................................185 2.8.1.2. Reversal 185 2.8.1.3. Release 185 2.8.2. Correspondence...............................................................................................................185 2.8.2.1. Process Outgoing Confirmations....................................................................................185 2.8.2.2. Process Incoming Confirmations....................................................................................186 2.8.3. Accounting........................................................................................................................186 2.8.3.1. Posting Release............................................................................................................186 2.8.3.2. Perform Posting.............................................................................................................187 2.8.3.3. Process Payment Request.............................................................................................187 2.8.3.4. Reverse Posting Documents..........................................................................................188 2.8.4. Closing Operations...........................................................................................................188 2.8.4.1. Accrual/Deferral.............................................................................................................188 2.8.4.2. Key Date Valuation........................................................................................................188 2.8.4.3. Realized Gains/Losses..................................................................................................188 2.9. Process Fixed-Term Deposit [TR-MM].................................................................................188 2.9.1. Transaction Processing....................................................................................................188 2.9.1.1. Process Fixed-Term Deposit..........................................................................................188 2.9.1.2. Reversal 189 2.9.1.3. Release 189 2.9.2. Correspondence...............................................................................................................189 2.9.2.1. Process Outgoing Confirmations....................................................................................189 2.9.2.2. Process Incoming Confirmations....................................................................................189 2.9.3. Accounting........................................................................................................................190 2.9.3.1. Posting Release............................................................................................................190 2.9.3.2. Perform Posting.............................................................................................................190 2.9.3.3. Process Payment Request.............................................................................................190 2.9.3.4. Reverse Posting Documents..........................................................................................191 2.9.4. Closing Operations...........................................................................................................191 2.9.4.1. Accrual/Deferral.............................................................................................................191 2.9.4.2. Key Date Valuation........................................................................................................191 2.9.4.3. Realized Gains/Losses..................................................................................................191 2.10. Cash Flow Transactions [TR-MM]......................................................................................192 2.10.1. Transaction Processing..................................................................................................192 2.10.1.1. Process Cash Flow......................................................................................................192 2.10.1.2. Reversal 192 2.10.1.3. Release 192 2.10.2. Correspondence.............................................................................................................192 2.10.2.1. Process Outgoing Confirmations..................................................................................192 2.10.2.2. Process Incoming Confirmations..................................................................................193 2.10.3. Accounting......................................................................................................................193 10 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP 2.10.3.1. Posting Release...........................................................................................................193 2.10.3.2. Perform Posting...........................................................................................................193 2.10.3.3. Process Payment Request...........................................................................................194 2.10.3.4. Reverse Posting Documents........................................................................................194 2.10.4. Closing Operations.........................................................................................................194 2.10.4.1. Accrual/Deferral...........................................................................................................194 2.10.4.2. Key Date Valuation......................................................................................................194 2.10.4.3. Realized Gains/Losses................................................................................................194 2.11. Currency Options [TR-FX].................................................................................................195 2.11.1. Transaction Processing for Standard Currency Options..................................................195 2.11.1.1. Reversal 195 2.11.1.2. Release 195 2.11.2. Transaction Processing for Exotic Currency Options.......................................................195 2.11.2.1. Reversal 195 2.11.2.2. Release 195 2.11.3. Correspondence.............................................................................................................195 2.11.3.1. Process Outgoing Confirmations..................................................................................195 2.11.4. Accounting......................................................................................................................196 2.11.4.1. Posting Release...........................................................................................................196 2.11.4.2. Perform Posting...........................................................................................................196 2.11.4.3. Process Payment Request...........................................................................................197 2.11.4.4. Reverse Posting Documents........................................................................................197 2.11.5. Closing Operations.........................................................................................................197 2.11.5.1. Key Date Valuation......................................................................................................197 2.11.5.2. Realized Gains/Losses................................................................................................197 2.12. Forex Spot, Forward and Swap Transactions [TR-FX].......................................................198 2.12.1. Transaction Processing..................................................................................................198 2.12.1.1. Spot/Forward Exchange Transaction...........................................................................198 2.12.1.2. Release 198 2.12.2. Correspondence.............................................................................................................198 2.12.2.1. Process Outgoing Confirmations..................................................................................198 2.12.2.2. Process Incoming Confirmations..................................................................................199 2.12.3. Accounting......................................................................................................................199 2.12.3.1. Posting Release...........................................................................................................199 2.12.3.2. Perform Posting...........................................................................................................199 2.12.3.3. Process Payment Request...........................................................................................200 2.12.3.4. Reverse Posting Documents........................................................................................200 2.12.4. Closing Operations.........................................................................................................200 2.12.4.1. Key Date Valuation......................................................................................................200 2.12.4.2. Realized Gains/Losses................................................................................................200 2.13. Listed Derivative Transactions [TR-DE].............................................................................201 2.13.1. Transaction Processing..................................................................................................201 2.13.1.1. Reversal 201 2.13.1.2. Release 201 2.13.2. Accounting......................................................................................................................201 2.13.2.1. Posting Release...........................................................................................................201 2.13.2.2. Perform Posting...........................................................................................................201 2.13.2.3. Process Payment Request...........................................................................................202 2.13.2.4. Reverse Posting Documents........................................................................................202 2.14. Process OTC Derivative Transactions [TR-DE]..................................................................202 2.14.1. Transaction Processing..................................................................................................202 2.14.1.1. Reversal 202 2.14.1.2. Release 202 2.14.2. Correspondence.............................................................................................................202 2.14.2.1. Process Outgoing Confirmations..................................................................................202 2.14.3. Accounting......................................................................................................................203 2.14.3.1. Posting Release...........................................................................................................203 2.14.3.2. Perform Posting...........................................................................................................203 2.14.3.3. Process Payment Request...........................................................................................204 2.14.3.4. Reverse Posting Documents........................................................................................204 11 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP 2.15. Options on Interest Rate Instruments and Securities [TR-DE]............................................204 2.15.1. Transaction Processing..................................................................................................204 2.15.1.1. Reversal 204 2.15.1.2. Release 204 2.15.2. Correspondence.............................................................................................................204 2.15.2.1. Process Outgoing Confirmations..................................................................................204 2.15.3. Accounting......................................................................................................................205 2.15.3.1. Posting Release...........................................................................................................205 2.15.3.2. Perform Posting...........................................................................................................205 2.15.3.3. Reverse Posting Documents........................................................................................206 2.15.4. Closing Operations.........................................................................................................206 2.15.4.1. Key Date Valuation......................................................................................................206 2.15.4.2. Realized Gains/Losses................................................................................................206 2.16. Mortgage Loans Given [TR-LO].........................................................................................207 2.16.1. New Transactions...........................................................................................................207 2.16.1.1. Process Inquiry............................................................................................................207 2.16.1.2. Process Application.....................................................................................................207 2.16.1.3. Collateral Value Calculation.........................................................................................208 2.16.1.4. Check Credit Standing.................................................................................................208 2.16.1.5. Loan Approval.............................................................................................................208 2.16.1.6. Process Offer...............................................................................................................208 2.16.1.7. Process Contract.........................................................................................................209 2.16.1.8. Process Disbursement.................................................................................................209 2.16.1.9. Release 209 2.16.2. Create Correspondence..................................................................................................210 2.16.2.1. Generate Correspondence for Specific Business Operation.........................................210 2.16.2.2. Generate Correspondence on a Regular Basis............................................................210 2.16.3. Business Operations for Contract...................................................................................210 2.16.3.1. Change Loan Contract.................................................................................................210 2.16.3.2. Balance Sheet Transfer...............................................................................................210 2.16.3.3. Capital Transfer...........................................................................................................210 2.16.3.4. Enter Charges and Commission..................................................................................211 2.16.3.5. Enter Unscheduled Repayments..................................................................................211 2.16.3.6. Release 211 2.16.4. Rollover..........................................................................................................................211 2.16.4.1. Determine Rollover Conditions.....................................................................................212 2.16.4.2. Select and Assign Rollover Position.............................................................................212 2.16.4.3. Generate Rollover Offer...............................................................................................212 2.16.5. Contract Currency Changeover......................................................................................212 2.16.5.1. Contract Currency Changeover to the Euro.................................................................212 2.16.6. Accounting......................................................................................................................212 2.16.6.1. Payment Transactions Triggered by R/3 System.........................................................213 2.16.6.2. Payment Transactions Triggered by External Partner..................................................214 2.16.6.3. Payment Postprocessing.............................................................................................215 2.16.6.4. Preparations for Posting..............................................................................................215 2.16.6.5. Automatic Posting........................................................................................................215 2.16.6.6. Manual Posting............................................................................................................216 2.16.6.7. Reverse Postings.........................................................................................................216 2.16.6.8. Dunning 216 2.16.6.9. Calculate Interest on Arrears.......................................................................................217 2.16.6.10. Default on Receivables..............................................................................................217 2.16.6.11. Perform Accrual/Deferral............................................................................................217 2.16.6.12. Value Foreign Currency Loans...................................................................................217 2.16.6.13. Create Accounting Reports........................................................................................217 2.16.6.14. Release.....................................................................................................................218 2.16.7. Periodic Processing........................................................................................................218 2.16.7.1. Planned Record Update...............................................................................................218 2.16.7.2. Summarize Documents................................................................................................218 2.16.7.3. Release 218 2.17. Mortgage Loans Taken [TR-LO]........................................................................................219 12 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP 2.17.1. New Transactions...........................................................................................................219 2.17.1.1. Process Application.....................................................................................................219 2.17.1.2. Process Offer...............................................................................................................219 2.17.1.3. Process Contract.........................................................................................................220 2.17.1.4. Process Disbursement.................................................................................................220 2.17.1.5. Release 221 2.17.2. Create Correspondence..................................................................................................221 2.17.2.1. Generate Correspondence for Specific Business Operation.........................................221 2.17.3. Business Operations for Contract...................................................................................221 2.17.3.1. Change Loan Contract.................................................................................................221 2.17.3.2. Balance Sheet Transfer...............................................................................................222 2.17.3.3. Capital Transfer...........................................................................................................222 2.17.3.4. Enter Charges and Commission..................................................................................222 2.17.3.5. Enter Unscheduled Repayments..................................................................................222 2.17.3.6. Release 222 2.17.4. Rollover..........................................................................................................................222 2.17.5. Contract Currency Changeover......................................................................................223 2.17.5.1. Contract Currency Changeover to the Euro.................................................................223 2.17.6. Accounting......................................................................................................................223 2.17.6.1. Payment Transactions Triggered by R/3 System.........................................................224 2.17.6.2. Payment Transactions Triggered by External Partner..................................................224 2.17.6.3. Preparations for Posting..............................................................................................225 2.17.6.4. Automatic Postings......................................................................................................225 2.17.6.5. Manual Posting............................................................................................................226 2.17.6.6. Reverse Postings.........................................................................................................226 2.17.6.7. Perform Accrual/Deferral.............................................................................................226 2.17.6.8. Value Foreign Currency Loans.....................................................................................227 2.17.6.9. Create Accounting Reports..........................................................................................227 2.17.6.10. Release.....................................................................................................................227 2.17.7. Periodic Processing........................................................................................................227 2.17.7.1. Planned Record Update...............................................................................................227 2.17.7.2. Summarize Documents................................................................................................228 2.17.7.3. Release 228 2.18. Refinancing Loans [TR-LO]...............................................................................................228 2.18.1. New Transactions...........................................................................................................228 2.18.1.1. Process Contract.........................................................................................................228 2.18.1.2. Process Disbursement.................................................................................................229 2.18.1.3. Release 229 2.18.2. Create Correspondence..................................................................................................229 2.18.2.1. Generate Correspondence for Specific Business Operation.........................................230 2.18.3. Business Operations for Contract...................................................................................230 2.18.3.1. Change Loan Contract.................................................................................................230 2.18.3.2. Balance Sheet Transfer...............................................................................................230 2.18.3.3. Capital Transfer...........................................................................................................230 2.18.3.4. Enter Charges and Commission..................................................................................230 2.18.3.5. Enter Unscheduled Repayments..................................................................................230 2.18.4. Contract Currency Changeover......................................................................................231 2.18.4.1. Contract Currency Changeover to the Euro.................................................................231 2.18.5. Accounting......................................................................................................................231 2.18.5.1. Payment Transactions Triggered by R/3 System.........................................................232 2.18.5.2. Payment Transactions Triggered by External Partner..................................................232 2.18.5.3. Payment Postprocessing.............................................................................................233 2.18.5.4. Preparations for Posting..............................................................................................234 2.18.5.5. Automatic Postings......................................................................................................234 2.18.5.6. Manual Posting............................................................................................................234 2.18.5.7. Reverse Postings.........................................................................................................235 2.18.5.8. Perform Accrual/Deferral.............................................................................................235 2.18.5.9. Value Foreign Currency Loans.....................................................................................235 2.18.5.10. Create Accounting Reports........................................................................................235 2.18.5.11. Release.....................................................................................................................235 13 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP 2.18.6. Periodic Processing........................................................................................................236 2.18.6.1. Planned Record Update...............................................................................................236 2.18.6.2. Summarize Documents................................................................................................236 2.18.6.3. Release 236 2.19. Policy Loans [TR-LO].........................................................................................................236 2.19.1. New Transactions...........................................................................................................236 2.19.1.1. Check Credit Standing.................................................................................................237 2.19.1.2. Process Offer...............................................................................................................237 2.19.1.3. Process Contract.........................................................................................................238 2.19.1.4. Process Disbursement.................................................................................................238 2.19.1.5. Release 239 2.19.2. Create Correspondence..................................................................................................239 2.19.2.1. Generate Correspondence for Specific Business Operation.........................................239 2.19.2.2. Generate Correspondence on a Regular Basis............................................................239 2.19.3. Business Operations for Contract...................................................................................239 2.19.3.1. Change Loan Contract.................................................................................................239 2.19.3.2. Balance Sheet Transfer...............................................................................................240 2.19.3.3. Capital Transfer...........................................................................................................240 2.19.3.4. Enter Charges and Commission..................................................................................240 2.19.3.5. Enter Unscheduled Repayments..................................................................................240 2.19.4. Rollover..........................................................................................................................240 2.19.4.1. Determine Rollover Conditions.....................................................................................241 2.19.4.2. Select and Assign Rollover Position.............................................................................241 2.19.4.3. Generate Rollover Offer...............................................................................................241 2.19.5. Contract Currency Changeover......................................................................................241 2.19.5.1. Contract Currency Changeover to the Euro.................................................................241 2.19.6. Accounting......................................................................................................................241 2.19.6.1. Payment Transactions Triggered by R/3 System.........................................................242 2.19.6.2. Payment Transactions Triggered by External Partner..................................................243 2.19.6.3. Payment Postprocessing.............................................................................................244 2.19.6.4. Preparations for Posting..............................................................................................244 2.19.6.5. Automatic Postings......................................................................................................244 2.19.6.6. Manual Posting............................................................................................................245 2.19.6.7. Reverse Postings.........................................................................................................245 2.19.6.8. Dunning 245 2.19.6.9. Calculate Interest on Arrears.......................................................................................246 2.19.6.10. Default on Receivables..............................................................................................246 2.19.6.11. Perform Accrual/Deferral............................................................................................246 2.19.6.12. Value Foreign Currency Loans...................................................................................246 2.19.6.13. Create Accounting Reports........................................................................................246 2.19.6.14. Release.....................................................................................................................247 2.19.7. Periodic Processing........................................................................................................247 2.19.7.1. Planned Record Update...............................................................................................247 2.19.7.2. Summarize Documents................................................................................................247 2.19.7.3. Release 247 2.20. General Loans Given [TR-LO]...........................................................................................248 2.20.1. New Transactions...........................................................................................................248 2.20.1.1. Process Application.....................................................................................................248 2.20.1.2. Check Credit Standing.................................................................................................249 2.20.1.3. Process Offer...............................................................................................................249 2.20.1.4. Process Contract.........................................................................................................249 2.20.1.5. Process Disbursement.................................................................................................250 2.20.1.6. Release 250 2.20.2. Create Correspondence..................................................................................................250 2.20.2.1. Generate Correspondence for Specific Business Operation.........................................251 2.20.2.2. Generate Correspondence on a Regular Basis............................................................251 2.20.3. Business Operations for Contract...................................................................................251 2.20.3.1. Change Loan Contract.................................................................................................251 2.20.3.2. Balance Sheet Transfer...............................................................................................251 2.20.3.3. Capital Transfer...........................................................................................................251 14 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP 2.20.3.4. Enter Charges and Commission..................................................................................252 2.20.3.5. Enter Unscheduled Repayments..................................................................................252 2.20.4. Rollover..........................................................................................................................252 2.20.4.1. Determine Rollover Conditions.....................................................................................252 2.20.4.2. Select and Assign Rollover Position.............................................................................252 2.20.4.3. Generate Rollover Offer...............................................................................................253 2.20.5. Contract Currency Changeover......................................................................................253 2.20.5.1. Contract Currency Changeover to the Euro.................................................................253 2.20.6. Accounting......................................................................................................................253 2.20.6.1. Payment Transactions Triggered by R/3 System.........................................................254 2.20.6.2. Payment Transactions Triggered by External Partner..................................................254 2.20.6.3. Payment Postprocessing.............................................................................................255 2.20.6.4. Preparations for Posting..............................................................................................255 2.20.6.5. Automatic Postings......................................................................................................256 2.20.6.6. Manual Posting............................................................................................................256 2.20.6.7. Reverse Postings.........................................................................................................256 2.20.6.8. Dunning 257 2.20.6.9. Calculate Interest on Arrears.......................................................................................257 2.20.6.10. Default on Receivables..............................................................................................257 2.20.6.11. Perform Accrual/Deferral............................................................................................258 2.20.6.12. Value Foreign Currency Loans...................................................................................258 2.20.6.13. Create Accounting Reports........................................................................................258 2.20.6.14. Release.....................................................................................................................258 2.20.7. Periodic Processing........................................................................................................258 2.20.7.1. Planned Record Update...............................................................................................258 2.20.7.2. Summarize Documents................................................................................................259 2.21. General Loans Taken [TR-LO]...........................................................................................259 2.21.1. New Transactions...........................................................................................................259 2.21.1.1. Process Application.....................................................................................................259 2.21.1.2. Process Offer...............................................................................................................260 2.21.1.3. Process Contract.........................................................................................................260 2.21.1.4. Process Disbursement.................................................................................................260 2.21.1.5. Release 261 2.21.2. Create Correspondence..................................................................................................261 2.21.2.1. Generate Correspondence for Specific Business Operation.........................................261 2.21.3. Business Operations for Contract...................................................................................261 2.21.3.1. Change Loan Contract.................................................................................................261 2.21.3.2. Balance Sheet Transfer...............................................................................................262 2.21.3.3. Capital Transfer...........................................................................................................262 2.21.3.4. Enter Charges and Commission..................................................................................262 2.21.3.5. Enter Unscheduled Repayments..................................................................................262 2.21.3.6. Release 262 2.21.4. Rollover..........................................................................................................................262 2.21.5. Contract Currency Changeover......................................................................................263 2.21.5.1. Contract Currency Changeover to the Euro.................................................................263 2.21.6. Accounting......................................................................................................................263 2.21.6.1. Payment Transactions Triggered by R/3 System.........................................................264 2.21.6.2. Payment Transactions Triggered by External Partner..................................................264 2.21.6.3. Preparations for Posting..............................................................................................265 2.21.6.4. Automatic Postings......................................................................................................265 2.21.6.5. Manual Posting............................................................................................................266 2.21.6.6. Reverse Postings.........................................................................................................266 2.21.6.7. Perform Accrual/Deferral.............................................................................................266 2.21.6.8. Value Foreign Currency Loans.....................................................................................266 2.21.6.9. Create Accounting Reports..........................................................................................266 2.21.6.10. Release.....................................................................................................................267 2.21.7. Periodic Processing........................................................................................................267 2.21.7.1. Planned Record Update...............................................................................................267 2.21.7.2. Summarize Documents................................................................................................267 2.21.7.3. Release 267 15 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP 2.22. Trading with Borrower's Notes [TR-LO]..............................................................................268 2.22.1. Borrower's Note Loan Order...........................................................................................268 2.22.1.1. Process BNL Order [Standard].....................................................................................268 2.22.2. Borrower's Note Loan Contract.......................................................................................269 2.22.2.1. Process BNL Contract [Standard]................................................................................269 2.22.2.2. Waiver BNL Contract [Standard]..................................................................................269 2.22.2.3. Release 269 2.22.3. Correspondence.............................................................................................................270 2.22.3.1. Generate Correspondence on a Regular Basis............................................................270 2.22.3.2. Generate Correspondence for Specific Business Operation.........................................270 2.22.4. Business Operations for Contract...................................................................................270 2.22.4.1. Change Loan Contract.................................................................................................270 2.22.4.2. Capital Transfer...........................................................................................................270 2.22.4.3. Enter Unscheduled Repayments..................................................................................271 2.22.4.4. Contract Currency Changeover to the Euro.................................................................271 2.22.5. Accounting......................................................................................................................271 2.22.5.1. Payment Transactions Triggered by R/3 System.........................................................272 2.22.5.2. Payment Transactions Triggered by External Partner..................................................272 2.22.5.3. Preparations for Posting..............................................................................................273 2.22.5.4. Automatic Postings......................................................................................................273 2.22.5.5. Manual Posting............................................................................................................274 2.22.5.6. Reverse Postings.........................................................................................................274 2.22.5.7. Perform Accrual/Deferral.............................................................................................274 2.22.5.8. Value Foreign Currency Loans.....................................................................................274 2.22.5.9. Release 275 2.23. Cash Position [TR-CM]......................................................................................................275 2.23.1. Incoming Data................................................................................................................275 2.23.1.1. Electronic Bank Statement...........................................................................................275 2.23.1.2. Manual Bank Statement...............................................................................................276 2.23.1.3. Check Deposit Transaction..........................................................................................277 2.23.1.4. Bill of Exchange Presentation (Debit)...........................................................................277 2.23.1.5. Lockbox (USA)............................................................................................................278 2.23.1.6. Create Payment Advice...............................................................................................278 2.23.1.7. Payment Advice Processing........................................................................................278 2.23.2. Check.............................................................................................................................278 2.23.2.1. Compare Payment Advices..........................................................................................278 2.23.2.2. Interest Scale...............................................................................................................278 2.23.2.3. Check Cashed Checks................................................................................................279 2.23.2.4. Compare Value Dates..................................................................................................279 2.23.2.5. Clear Customer Account..............................................................................................279 2.23.3. Status Analysis...............................................................................................................279 2.23.3.1. Status Analysis Cash Position.....................................................................................279 2.23.4. Planning.........................................................................................................................280 2.23.4.1. Cash Concentration.....................................................................................................280 2.23.4.2. Integration of Subledgers.............................................................................................280 2.24. Liquidity Forecast [TR-CM]................................................................................................280 2.24.1. Process Planned Items...................................................................................................281 2.24.1.1. Create Planned Items..................................................................................................281 2.24.1.2. Process Planned Items................................................................................................281 2.24.2. Status Analysis...............................................................................................................281 2.24.2.1. Status Analysis Liquidity Forecast................................................................................281 2.25. Financial Budgeting [TR-CBM]...........................................................................................281 2.25.1. Planned Commitment Items............................................................................................281 2.25.1.1. Create Objects.............................................................................................................281 2.25.1.2. Assign to Hierarchy......................................................................................................282 2.25.2. Planned Settings............................................................................................................282 2.25.2.1. Define Plan Profiles.....................................................................................................282 2.26. Evaluation of Actual Values [TR-CBM]...............................................................................282 2.26.1. General Commitment Item..............................................................................................282 2.26.1.1. Create Balance Sheet Commitment Items...................................................................282 16 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP 2.26.1.2. Create Unassigned Revenues/Expenditures................................................................282 2.26.1.3. Create Clearing Commitment Items.............................................................................282 2.26.1.4. Create Dummy Commitment Items..............................................................................283 2.26.2. Assign Commitment Items to G/L Accounts....................................................................283 2.26.2.1. Assign Planned Commitment Items.............................................................................283 2.26.2.2. Assign Accounts for Balance Sheet Commitment Items...............................................283 2.26.2.3. Assign Clearing Commitment Items.............................................................................283 2.26.2.4. Check and Assign Dummy Commitment Items............................................................283 2.26.3. Actual Transfer Postings.................................................................................................283 2.26.3.1. Actual Transfer Posting................................................................................................283 2.27. Market Risk Management [TR-MRM].................................................................................284 2.27.1. Mark to Market................................................................................................................284 2.27.1.1. Effective Rate/NPV Underlyings...................................................................................284 2.27.1.2. Currency Exposure......................................................................................................285 2.27.1.3. Interest Exposure.........................................................................................................285 2.27.1.4. Global Evaluation of Cash Flow...................................................................................285 2.27.2. Value at Risk..................................................................................................................285 2.27.2.1. Variance/Covariance....................................................................................................285 2.27.2.2. Historical Simulation....................................................................................................286 3. Revenue and Cost Controlling................................................................................................286 3.1. Profit and Cost Planning......................................................................................................286 3.1.1. Sales Planning..................................................................................................................286 3.1.1.1. Create Planning Proposal (with Sales Planning)............................................................286 3.1.1.2. Manual Sales Planning..................................................................................................287 3.1.1.3. Transfer of Planned Sales Quantities.............................................................................287 3.1.2. Cost and Activity Planning................................................................................................288 3.1.2.1. Copy Plan from Previous Year to Cost Center Planning.................................................288 3.1.2.2. Copy Actual Data to Cost Center Plan...........................................................................288 3.1.2.3. Redefinition of Plan Version...........................................................................................288 3.1.2.4. Planning Revaluation.....................................................................................................288 3.1.2.5. Budget Planning............................................................................................................288 3.1.2.6. Order Budgeting............................................................................................................289 3.1.2.7. Activity Type Planning....................................................................................................289 3.1.2.8. Definition of Activity Type for Cost Center......................................................................289 3.1.2.9. Transfer of Statistical Key Figures from LIS (Plan).........................................................289 3.1.2.10. Transfer of Depreciation/Interest (Activity-Independent)...............................................290 3.1.2.11. Transfer of Depreciation/Interest (Activity-Dependent).................................................290 3.1.2.12. Transfer of Personnel Costs........................................................................................290 3.1.2.13. Transfer of Scheduled Activity PP -> CO-ABC.............................................................290 3.1.2.14. Transfer of Scheduled Activity from PP to CO-OM-CCA..............................................290 3.1.2.15. Primary Cost Planning (Full Costs)..............................................................................291 3.1.2.16. Primary Cost Planning (Prop./Fixed)............................................................................291 3.1.2.17. Secondary Cost Planning (Full Costs)..........................................................................291 3.1.2.18. Secondary Cost Planning (Prop./Fixed).......................................................................291 3.1.2.19. Cost Element Planning (Order with Integrated Planning)..............................................291 3.1.2.20. Cost Element Planning (Order)....................................................................................291 3.1.2.21. Overall Planning (Order)..............................................................................................292 3.1.2.22. Unit Costing (Order).....................................................................................................292 3.1.2.23. Easy Cost Planning and Execution Services (CO).......................................................292 3.1.2.24. Periodic Reposting of Plan Data..................................................................................292 3.1.2.25. Cost Accrual - Plan......................................................................................................292 3.1.2.26. Process Cost Planning.................................................................................................293 3.1.2.27. Overhead Calculation (Cost Center)............................................................................293 3.1.2.28. Overhead Calculation (Business Process)...................................................................293 3.1.2.29. Overhead Calculation (Overhead Cost Order)..............................................................298 3.1.2.30. Plan Cost Distribution..................................................................................................298 3.1.2.31. Settlement of Overhead Cost Orders (Planning Data)..................................................298 3.1.2.32. Plan Cost Assessment.................................................................................................299 3.1.2.33. Plan Reconciliation......................................................................................................299 3.1.2.34. Splitting 299 17 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP 3.1.2.35. Planned Price Calculation............................................................................................300 3.1.3. Product Cost Planning......................................................................................................300 3.1.3.1. Preparation for Costing..................................................................................................300 3.1.3.2. Standard Cost Estimate with Quantity Structure.............................................................301 3.1.3.3. Standard Cost Estimate Without Quantity Structure.......................................................302 3.1.3.4. Standard Cost Estimate for Co-Products.......................................................................303 3.1.3.5. Costing Analysis............................................................................................................303 3.1.3.6. Price Release with Standard Cost Estimate...................................................................303 3.1.3.7. Reference and Simulation Costing.................................................................................304 3.1.3.8. Easy Cost Planning and Execution Services (CO).........................................................304 3.1.4. Profit Center Planning.......................................................................................................304 3.1.4.1. Copy Plan from Previous Year -> Profit Center Planning...............................................304 3.1.4.2. Copy Actual Costs -> Profit Center Planning..................................................................305 3.1.4.3. Redefinition of Plan Version (Profit Center Planning).....................................................305 3.1.4.4. Excel Upload -> Profit Center Planning..........................................................................305 3.1.4.5. Plan Integration of Profit Centers...................................................................................305 3.1.4.6. Manual Profit Center Planning.......................................................................................305 3.1.4.7. Profit Center Distribution: Plan.......................................................................................306 3.1.4.8. Plan: Profit Center Assessment.....................................................................................306 3.1.4.9. Profit Center Analysis....................................................................................................306 3.1.5. Profit Planning..................................................................................................................306 3.1.5.1. Valuation of Sales Planning...........................................................................................306 3.1.5.2. Creation of Proposal for Sales and Profit Planning.........................................................306 3.1.5.3. Manual Profit Planning...................................................................................................307 3.1.5.4. Planned Allocation of Process Costs to Profitability Analysis..........................................307 3.1.5.5. Planned Allocation Cost Center Costs to Profitability Analysis.......................................308 3.1.5.6. Settlement of Overhead Cost Orders (Planning Data)....................................................308 3.1.5.7. Project Settlement.........................................................................................................309 3.1.5.8. Plan Data Transfer to EC-PCA......................................................................................309 3.2. Actual Cost/Revenue Allocation...........................................................................................309 3.2.1. Overhead Allocation.........................................................................................................309 3.2.1.1. Direct Activity Assignment Using Time Sheet Processing..............................................309 3.2.1.2. Time Sheet Permit.........................................................................................................309 3.2.1.3. Transfer Time Sheet Data to CO....................................................................................310 3.2.1.4. Time Sheet Report.........................................................................................................310 3.2.1.5. Direct Activity Allocation (Controlling).............................................................................311 3.2.1.6. Transfer of Primary Costs to Cost Center/Order.............................................................311 3.2.1.7. Manual Funds Reservation............................................................................................311 3.2.1.8. Manual Funds Reduction...............................................................................................311 3.2.1.9. Manual Cost Allocation..................................................................................................312 3.2.2. Product Cost Allocation....................................................................................................312 3.2.2.1. Simultaneous Costing....................................................................................................312 3.2.3. Profit Center Allocation.....................................................................................................312 3.2.3.1. Actual Data Transfers on Profit Center...........................................................................312 3.2.3.2. Document Entry in Profit Center Accounting..................................................................313 3.2.3.3. Actual Transfer of Additional Balance Sheet Items to EC-PCA.......................................313 3.2.3.4. Manual Entry of Statistical Key Figures..........................................................................313 3.2.4. Cost and Revenue Allocation to Profitability Analysis........................................................313 3.2.4.1. Transfer and Valuation of Incoming Sales Orders..........................................................313 3.2.4.2. Transfer and Valuation of Billing Documents (Direct Sale).............................................313 3.2.4.3. Transfer and Valuation of Billing Documents (Third-Party Transaction)..........................314 3.2.4.4. Transfer and Valuation of Billing Documents (Intercompany Processing).......................314 3.2.4.5. Transfer and Valuation of Billing Documents (Complaints Processing)...........................314 3.2.4.6. Transfer of Customer Agreements to Profitability Analysis.............................................315 3.2.4.7. Direct Posting of Costs and Revenues From FI..............................................................315 3.2.4.8. Automatic Additional Transfer into Profitability Analysis.................................................315 3.3. Period-End Closing (Controlling)..........................................................................................316 3.3.1. Period-End Closing in Overhead Cost Controlling.............................................................316 3.3.1.1. Actual Periodic Reposting..............................................................................................316 3.3.1.2. Accrual Calculation in Cost Center Accounting (Target = Actual Method).......................316 18 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP 3.3.1.3. Accrual Calculation in Cost Center Accounting (Percentage Method)............................316 3.3.1.4. Actual Cost Distribution..................................................................................................317 3.3.1.5. Entry of Sender Activities...............................................................................................317 3.3.1.6. Actual Indirect Activity Allocation (Manual Entry)............................................................317 3.3.1.7. Actual Indirect Activity Allocation (Indirect Entry)............................................................317 3.3.1.8. Target=Actual Activity Allocation....................................................................................318 3.3.1.9. Template Allocation (Overhead Cost Order)..................................................................318 3.3.1.10. Overhead Calculation (Overhead Cost Order)..............................................................318 3.3.1.11. Settlement of Overhead Orders (Actual Data)..............................................................319 3.3.1.12. Settlement of Accrual Orders.......................................................................................319 3.3.1.13. Actual Cost Assessment..............................................................................................319 3.3.1.14. Overhead Calculation (Business Process)...................................................................319 3.3.1.15. Variance Calculation for Overhead..............................................................................324 3.3.1.16. Predistribution of Fixed Costs......................................................................................324 3.3.1.17. Splitting 325 3.3.1.18. Actual Price Calculation...............................................................................................325 3.3.1.19. Revaluation at Actual Prices........................................................................................325 3.3.1.20. Reconciliation Financial Accounting/Controlling...........................................................326 3.3.1.21. Business Process Analysis..........................................................................................326 3.3.1.22. Cost Center Analysis...................................................................................................326 3.3.1.23. Analysis of Overhead Orders.......................................................................................326 3.3.2. Period-End Closing: Periodic Product Cost Controlling.....................................................326 3.3.2.1. Template Allocation (Cost Object)..................................................................................326 3.3.2.2. Revaluation at Actual Prices..........................................................................................326 3.3.2.3. Actual Cost Distribution - Product Costs........................................................................327 3.3.2.4. Overhead Calculation (Cost Object)...............................................................................327 3.3.2.5. Template Allocation (Product Cost Collector).................................................................327 3.3.2.6. Overhead Calculation (Product Cost Collector)..............................................................327 3.3.2.7. WIP Calculation Based on Target Costs........................................................................328 3.3.2.8. Periodic Variance Calculation........................................................................................328 3.3.2.9. Settlement of Cost Object Hierarchy..............................................................................328 3.3.2.10. Settlement of Product Cost Collector...........................................................................329 3.3.2.11. Data Collection for Product Drilldown...........................................................................329 3.3.2.12. Product Cost Analysis in Product Cost by Period.........................................................329 3.3.3. Period-End Closing: Order-Related Product Cost Controlling............................................330 3.3.3.1. Template Allocation (Manufacturing Order)....................................................................330 3.3.3.2. Revaluation at Actual Prices..........................................................................................330 3.3.3.3. Overhead Calculation (Manufacturing Order).................................................................330 3.3.3.4. Preliminary Settlement for Co-Products, Rework...........................................................331 3.3.3.5. WIP Calculation Based On Actual Costs........................................................................331 3.3.3.6. Variance Calculation Cumulated....................................................................................331 3.3.3.7. Settlement of Manufacturing Order to Inventory.............................................................332 3.3.3.8. Data Collection for Product Drilldown.............................................................................332 3.3.3.9. Product Cost Analysis in Product Cost by Order............................................................333 3.3.4. Period-End Closing: Sales Order Controlling....................................................................333 3.3.4.1. Template Allocation (Sales Order).................................................................................333 3.3.4.2. Revaluation at Actual Prices..........................................................................................333 3.3.4.3. Overhead Calculation (Sales Order)..............................................................................333 3.3.4.4. Settlement of Manufacturing Order to Sales Order (Unval. Inventory Only)....................333 3.3.4.5. Results Analysis for Sales Orders..................................................................................334 3.3.4.6. Sales Order Settlement..................................................................................................334 3.3.4.7. Overhead Calculation (Manufacturing Order).................................................................334 3.3.4.8. Product Cost Analysis in Product Cost by Sales Order..................................................335 3.3.5. Period-End Closing: Material Ledger................................................................................335 3.3.5.1. Price Update in Actual Costing......................................................................................335 3.3.5.2. Actual Cost Component Split.........................................................................................335 3.3.6. Period-End Closing for Profit Center Accounting...............................................................335 3.3.6.1. Profit Center Distribution: Actual....................................................................................335 3.3.6.2. Actual Profit Center Assessment....................................................................................336 3.3.6.3. Profit Center Analysis....................................................................................................336 19 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP 3.3.7. Period-End Closing for Profitability Analysis......................................................................336 3.3.7.1. Settlement of Sales Orders............................................................................................336 3.3.7.2. Settlement of Production Variances...............................................................................336 3.3.7.3. Settlement of Internal Orders (Actual Data)....................................................................336 3.3.7.4. Project Settlement.........................................................................................................337 3.3.7.5. Actual Allocation of Process Costs to Profitability Analysis.............................................337 3.3.7.6. Actual Allocation of Cost Center Costs to Profitability Analysis.......................................337 3.3.7.7. Actual Top-Down Distribution.........................................................................................338 3.3.7.8. Analysis of Results and Contribution Margins................................................................338 4. Enterprise Controlling.............................................................................................................338 4.1. Operational Business Planning............................................................................................338 4.1.1. Sales Planning..................................................................................................................338 4.1.1.1. Create Planning Proposal (with Sales Planning)............................................................338 4.1.1.2. Manual Sales Planning..................................................................................................339 4.1.1.3. Transfer of Planned Sales Quantities.............................................................................340 4.1.2. Production Planning..........................................................................................................340 4.1.2.1. Forecast 340 4.1.2.2. Standard SOP...............................................................................................................341 4.1.2.3. Transfer of Results to Demand Management.................................................................342 4.1.2.4. Demand Management...................................................................................................342 4.1.2.5. Planning Scenario Processing.......................................................................................343 4.1.2.6. Long-Term Planning: Evaluation....................................................................................343 4.1.2.7. Master Production Scheduling - Total Planning..............................................................343 4.1.2.8. Master Production Scheduling - Evaluation....................................................................345 4.1.2.9. Overall Material Requirements Planning........................................................................345 4.1.2.10. Material Requirements Planning - Evaluation...............................................................346 4.1.3. Cost and Activity Planning................................................................................................347 4.1.3.1. Copy Plan from Previous Year to Cost Center Planning.................................................347 4.1.3.2. Copy Actual Data to Cost Center Plan...........................................................................347 4.1.3.3. Redefinition of Plan Version...........................................................................................347 4.1.3.4. Planning Revaluation.....................................................................................................347 4.1.3.5. Budget Planning............................................................................................................347 4.1.3.6. Order Budgeting............................................................................................................348 4.1.3.7. Activity Type Planning....................................................................................................348 4.1.3.8. Definition of Activity Type for Cost Center......................................................................348 4.1.3.9. Transfer of Statistical Key Figures from LIS (Plan).........................................................348 4.1.3.10. Transfer of Depreciation/Interest (Activity-Independent)...............................................349 4.1.3.11. Transfer of Depreciation/Interest (Activity-Dependent).................................................349 4.1.3.12. Transfer of Personnel Costs........................................................................................349 4.1.3.13. Transfer of Scheduled Activity PP -> CO-ABC.............................................................349 4.1.3.14. Transfer of Scheduled Activity from PP to CO-OM-CCA..............................................349 4.1.3.15. Primary Cost Planning (Full Costs)..............................................................................350 4.1.3.16. Primary Cost Planning (Prop./Fixed)............................................................................350 4.1.3.17. Secondary Cost Planning (Full Costs)..........................................................................350 4.1.3.18. Secondary Cost Planning (Prop./Fixed).......................................................................350 4.1.3.19. Cost Element Planning (Order with Integrated Planning)..............................................350 4.1.3.20. Cost Element Planning (Order)....................................................................................350 4.1.3.21. Overall Planning (Order)..............................................................................................351 4.1.3.22. Unit Costing (Order).....................................................................................................351 4.1.3.23. Periodic Reposting of Plan Data..................................................................................351 4.1.3.24. Imputed Costs - Plan...................................................................................................351 4.1.3.25. Process Cost Planning.................................................................................................351 4.1.3.26. Overhead Calculation (Cost Center)............................................................................352 4.1.3.27. Overhead Calculation (Business Process)...................................................................352 4.1.3.28. Overhead Calculation (Overhead Order)......................................................................356 4.1.3.29. Plan Cost Distribution..................................................................................................357 4.1.3.30. Settlement of Overhead Cost Orders (Planning Data)..................................................357 4.1.3.31. Plan Cost Assessment.................................................................................................358 4.1.3.32. Plan Reconciliation......................................................................................................358 4.1.3.33. Splitting 358 20 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP 4.1.3.34. Planned Price Calculation............................................................................................359 4.1.4. Product Cost Planning......................................................................................................359 4.1.4.1. Preparation for Costing..................................................................................................359 4.1.4.2. Standard Cost Estimate with Quantity Structure.............................................................360 4.1.4.3. Standard Cost Estimate Without Quantity Structure.......................................................361 4.1.4.4. Standard Cost Estimate for Co-Products.......................................................................362 4.1.4.5. Costing Analysis............................................................................................................362 4.1.4.6. Price Release with Standard Cost Estimate...................................................................362 4.1.4.7. Reference and Simulation Costing.................................................................................363 4.1.5. Profit Center Planning.......................................................................................................363 4.1.5.1. Copy Plan from Previous Year -> Profit Center Planning...............................................363 4.1.5.2. Copy Actual Costs -> Profit Center Planning..................................................................363 4.1.5.3. Excel Upload -> Profit Center Planning..........................................................................364 4.1.5.4. Redefinition of Plan Version (Profit Center Planning).....................................................364 4.1.5.5. Profit Center Planning Integration..................................................................................364 4.1.5.6. Manual Profit Center Planning.......................................................................................364 4.1.5.7. Profit Center Distribution: Plan.......................................................................................364 4.1.5.8. Profit Center Assessment: Plan.....................................................................................365 4.1.5.9. Profit Center Analysis....................................................................................................365 4.1.6. Profit Planning..................................................................................................................365 4.1.6.1. Valuation of Sales Planning...........................................................................................365 4.1.6.2. Creation of Proposal for Profit Planning.........................................................................365 4.1.6.3. Manual Profit Planning...................................................................................................366 4.1.6.4. Planned Allocation of Process Costs to Profitability Analysis..........................................366 4.1.6.5. Planned Allocation Cost Center Costs to Profitability Analysis.......................................367 4.1.6.6. Settlement of Overhead Cost Orders (Planning Data)....................................................367 4.1.6.7. Project Settlement.........................................................................................................368 4.1.6.8. Analysis of Results And Contribution Margins................................................................368 4.1.6.9. Plan Data Transfer to EC-PCA......................................................................................368 4.2. Strategic Business Planning................................................................................................369 4.2.1. Data Modeling..................................................................................................................370 4.2.2. Basic Settings...................................................................................................................371 4.2.2.1. Foreign Currencies........................................................................................................371 4.2.2.2. File Names....................................................................................................................371 4.2.3. Data Basis........................................................................................................................372 4.2.3.1. Characteristics...............................................................................................................372 4.2.3.2. Basic Key Figures..........................................................................................................373 4.2.3.3. Aspect 373 4.2.3.4. Calculated Key Figures..................................................................................................373 4.2.3.5. Comment Tables...........................................................................................................374 4.2.3.6. Fixed Characteristics.....................................................................................................374 4.2.3.7. Summarization Levels....................................................................................................374 4.2.3.8. Currency Translation Types for Data Transfer and Planning Layouts.............................374 4.2.3.9. Derivation375 4.2.3.10. Validation.....................................................................................................................375 4.2.3.11. Data Slices..................................................................................................................375 4.2.4. Data Transfer...................................................................................................................375 4.2.4.1. External Systems...........................................................................................................375 4.2.4.2. Transaction Data...........................................................................................................376 4.2.4.3. Master Data...................................................................................................................376 4.2.4.4. Comments.....................................................................................................................376 4.2.4.5. Master Data Hierarchy...................................................................................................376 4.2.4.6. Transfer Procedure........................................................................................................377 4.2.4.7. File 377 4.2.4.8. Control Report Portfolio.................................................................................................377 4.2.5. Business Planning............................................................................................................377 4.2.5.1. Create Planning Layout.................................................................................................377 4.2.5.2. Maintain Planner Profiles...............................................................................................377 4.2.5.3. Create Distribution Key..................................................................................................378 4.2.5.4. Change Revaluation Factor...........................................................................................378 21 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP 4.2.5.5. Maintain Forecast Profiles.............................................................................................378 4.2.5.6. Maintain Weighting Group.............................................................................................378 4.2.5.7. Object-Dependent Parameters......................................................................................378 4.2.5.8. Maintain Calculation Formulas for Basic Key Figures.....................................................378 4.2.6. Information System...........................................................................................................379 4.2.6.1. Maintain Report Selection..............................................................................................379 4.2.6.2. Print in MS Word for Windows.......................................................................................379 4.2.7. Tools 379 4.2.7.1. Conversion to Release 4.0.............................................................................................379 4.2.7.2. Authorization Management............................................................................................379 4.2.7.3. Data Basis.....................................................................................................................380 4.2.7.4. Data Transfer.................................................................................................................380 4.2.7.5. Data 380 4.2.7.6. Transport 380 4.2.8. Task Functions on Information System.............................................................................380 4.2.8.1. Reports 380 4.2.8.2. Forms 381 4.2.8.3. Variables 381 4.2.8.4. Report Data...................................................................................................................381 4.2.8.5. Report Portfolio..............................................................................................................381 4.2.9. Task Functions on Tools...................................................................................................382 4.2.9.1. Data (Tools)...................................................................................................................382 4.2.9.2. Information System........................................................................................................382 4.3. Consolidation.......................................................................................................................382 4.3.1. Preparatory Work: General...............................................................................................386 4.3.1.1. Creating Dimensions.....................................................................................................386 4.3.1.2. Creating Versions..........................................................................................................386 4.3.1.3. Check Currencies..........................................................................................................386 4.3.1.4. Definition of Ledgers......................................................................................................386 4.3.1.5. Definition of Consolidation Units....................................................................................387 4.3.1.6. Definition of Consolidation Groups.................................................................................387 4.3.1.7. Definition of Cons Chart of Accounts / Cons Chart of Accounts Hierarchy......................388 4.3.1.8. Definition of Breakdown Categories...............................................................................389 4.3.1.9. Definition of Custom Characteristics..............................................................................390 4.3.1.10. Definition of Subitem Categories..................................................................................390 4.3.1.11. Definition of Subitems..................................................................................................391 4.3.2. Preparatory Work: Integration...........................................................................................391 4.3.3. Preparatory Work: Production...........................................................................................391 4.3.3.1. Administration of Authorizations.....................................................................................391 4.3.3.2. Setting up Translation....................................................................................................391 4.3.4. Processes of the Data Monitor..........................................................................................391 4.3.4.1. Non-integrated Financial Data Transfer by Online Entry.................................................392 4.3.5. Processes of the Consolidation Monitor............................................................................392 4.3.5.1. Preparation of Consolidation Group Changes................................................................392 4.3.5.2. Interunit Elimination by Elimination of IU Payables and Receivables..............................392 4.3.5.3. Interunit Elimination by Elimination of IC Revenue and Expense....................................393 4.3.5.4. Consolidation of investments.........................................................................................393 4.3.6. Information System...........................................................................................................393 4.4. Executive Information System (EIS).....................................................................................394 4.4.1. Data Modeling..................................................................................................................395 4.4.2. Basic Settings...................................................................................................................396 4.4.2.1. Foreign Currencies........................................................................................................396 4.4.2.2. File Names....................................................................................................................396 4.4.3. Data Basis........................................................................................................................397 4.4.3.1. Characteristics...............................................................................................................397 4.4.3.2. Basic Key Figures..........................................................................................................397 4.4.3.3. Aspect 398 4.4.3.4. Calculated Key Figures..................................................................................................398 4.4.3.5. Comment Tables...........................................................................................................399 4.4.3.6. Fixed Characteristics.....................................................................................................399 22 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP 4.4.3.7. Summarization levels.....................................................................................................399 4.4.3.8. Currency Translation Types for Data Transfer and Planning Layouts.............................399 4.4.3.9. Data Entry Layout..........................................................................................................400 4.4.3.10. Derivation....................................................................................................................400 4.4.3.11. Validation.....................................................................................................................400 4.4.3.12. Data Slices..................................................................................................................400 4.4.4. Data Transfer...................................................................................................................400 4.4.4.1. External Systems...........................................................................................................400 4.4.4.2. Transaction Data...........................................................................................................401 4.4.4.3. Master Data...................................................................................................................401 4.4.4.4. Comments.....................................................................................................................401 4.4.4.5. Master Data Hierarchy...................................................................................................401 4.4.4.6. Transfer Procedure........................................................................................................402 4.4.4.7. File 402 4.4.4.8. Control Report Portfolio.................................................................................................402 4.4.5. Information System (EC-EIS)............................................................................................402 4.4.5.1. Maintain Report Selection..............................................................................................402 4.4.5.2. Print in MS Word for Windows.......................................................................................402 4.4.6. Tools 403 4.4.6.1. Conversion to Release 4.0.............................................................................................403 4.4.6.2. Authorization Management (EIS)...................................................................................403 4.4.6.3. Data Basis.....................................................................................................................403 4.4.6.4. Data Transfer.................................................................................................................404 4.4.6.5. Data 404 4.4.6.6. Transport 404 4.4.7. Task Functions on Information System.............................................................................404 4.4.7.1. Reports (EIS).................................................................................................................404 4.4.7.2. Forms (EIS)...................................................................................................................404 4.4.7.3. Variables (EIS)..............................................................................................................404 4.4.7.4. Report Data (EIS)..........................................................................................................405 4.4.7.5. Report Portfolio (EIS).....................................................................................................405 4.4.8. Task Functions on Tools...................................................................................................405 4.4.8.1. Data (Tools)...................................................................................................................405 4.4.8.2. Information System........................................................................................................405 5. Asset Accounting....................................................................................................................406 5.1. Handling Fixed Assets.........................................................................................................406 5.1.1. Asset Maintenance...........................................................................................................406 5.1.1.1. Creation of Master Record for Tangible Assets..............................................................406 5.1.1.2. Creation of Group Asset................................................................................................407 5.1.1.3. Asset Master Record Change........................................................................................407 5.1.1.4. Mass Change................................................................................................................407 5.1.2. Receipts...........................................................................................................................408 5.1.2.1. Direct Acquisition of Internal Activity..............................................................................408 5.1.2.2. Processing of Asset Acquisition.....................................................................................408 5.1.2.3. Subsequent Acquisition.................................................................................................409 5.1.3. Depreciation.....................................................................................................................410 5.1.3.1. Creation of Reserves from Gain from Asset Retirement.................................................410 5.1.3.2. Reserves Carryforward..................................................................................................410 5.1.3.3. Depreciation Processing................................................................................................410 5.1.3.4. Manual Depreciation Planning.......................................................................................411 5.1.3.5. Depreciation Posting......................................................................................................411 5.1.3.6. Unit-of-Production Depreciation.....................................................................................411 5.1.4. Business Transactions......................................................................................................412 5.1.4.1. Settlement of Asset under Construction.........................................................................412 5.1.4.2. Post-capitalization..........................................................................................................413 5.1.4.3. Write-up 413 5.1.4.4. Reposting 413 5.1.5. Specific Valuations...........................................................................................................414 5.1.5.1. Closing of Insurance Contract........................................................................................414 5.1.5.2. Index Series..................................................................................................................415 23 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP 5.1.5.3. Revaluation...................................................................................................................415 5.1.6. Investment Support...........................................................................................................415 5.1.6.1. Application for Investment Support................................................................................415 5.1.7. Group Requirements........................................................................................................416 5.1.7.1. Transfer Within a Client.................................................................................................416 5.1.7.2. Creation of Master Record for Tangible Assets..............................................................416 5.1.7.3. Processing of Asset Acquisition.....................................................................................417 5.1.8. Retirements......................................................................................................................418 5.1.8.1. Retirement.....................................................................................................................418 5.1.8.2. Mass Retirement...........................................................................................................418 5.1.9. Closing Operations [Asset Accounting].............................................................................419 5.1.9.1. Multiple Valuations.........................................................................................................419 5.1.9.2. Preparations for Year-End Closing in Asset Management..............................................419 5.1.9.3. Depreciation Simulation / Forecast................................................................................420 5.1.9.4. Mass Change................................................................................................................420 5.1.9.5. Recalculation of Depreciation........................................................................................421 5.1.9.6. Depreciation posting......................................................................................................421 5.1.9.7. Carry Out Year-End Closing in Asset Management........................................................421 5.1.9.8. Integrated Planning in CO..............................................................................................422 5.1.9.9. Periodic Reports............................................................................................................422 5.2. Handling of Leased Assets..................................................................................................423 5.2.1. Asset Maintenance...........................................................................................................423 5.2.1.1. Asset Master Record Change........................................................................................423 5.2.1.2. Mass Change................................................................................................................423 5.2.2. Receipts...........................................................................................................................424 5.2.2.1. Acquisition of Leased Asset...........................................................................................424 5.2.3. Depreciation.....................................................................................................................424 5.2.3.1. Depreciation Processing................................................................................................424 5.2.3.2. Depreciation Posting......................................................................................................425 5.2.4. Business Transactions......................................................................................................425 5.2.4.1. Transfer Leased Asset...................................................................................................425 5.2.4.2. Change in a Leasing Agreement....................................................................................426 5.2.4.3. Lease Payment..............................................................................................................426 5.2.5. Specific Valuations...........................................................................................................426 5.2.5.1. Closing of Insurance Contract........................................................................................426 5.2.5.2. Index Series..................................................................................................................427 5.2.6. Retirements......................................................................................................................427 5.2.6.1. Retirement of Leased Asset...........................................................................................427 5.2.7. Closing Operations...........................................................................................................428 5.2.7.1. Multiple Valuations.........................................................................................................428 5.2.7.2. Preparations for Year-End Closing in Asset Management..............................................428 5.2.7.3. Depreciation Simulation / Forecast................................................................................429 5.2.7.4. Mass Change................................................................................................................429 5.2.7.5. Recalculation of Depreciation........................................................................................430 5.2.7.6. Depreciation Posting......................................................................................................430 5.2.7.7. Carry Out Year-End Closing in Asset Management........................................................430 5.2.7.8. Periodic Reports............................................................................................................431 5.3. Investment Program Handling [Capital Investments]............................................................432 5.3.1. Structuring [Investment Programs]....................................................................................432 5.3.1.1. Program Structuring.......................................................................................................432 5.3.2. Cost Planning [Investment Programs]...............................................................................433 5.3.2.1. Program Cost Planning..................................................................................................433 5.3.3. Fiscal Year Change [Investment Programs]......................................................................434 5.3.3.1. Fiscal Year Change for Program....................................................................................434 5.3.4. Budgeting [Investment Programs].....................................................................................434 5.3.4.1. Program Budgeting........................................................................................................434 5.4. Handling Simple Investment Measures................................................................................435 5.4.1. Appropriation Request [Investment Orders]......................................................................435 5.4.1.1. Appropriation Request Processing.................................................................................435 5.4.1.2. Creation of an Alternate Group of Appropriation Requests.............................................436 24 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP 5.4.1.3. Variant Processing.........................................................................................................436 5.4.1.4. Appropriation Request Planning.....................................................................................437 5.4.1.5. Appropriation Request Approval....................................................................................437 5.4.2. Measure Processing.........................................................................................................437 5.4.2.1. Processing of Internal Orders [Investment Order]..........................................................437 5.4.3. Measure Planning.............................................................................................................438 5.4.3.1. Order Planning..............................................................................................................438 5.4.3.2. Overhead calculation.....................................................................................................438 5.4.3.3. Order Budgeting............................................................................................................439 5.4.4. Release and Implementation of Measure..........................................................................443 5.4.4.1. Order Release...............................................................................................................443 5.4.4.2. Reservation Processing.................................................................................................443 5.4.4.3. Direct Activity Allocation.................................................................................................443 5.4.4.4. Goods Issue Processing [Stock Material].......................................................................444 5.4.4.5. Manual Funds Reservation............................................................................................445 5.4.4.6. Manual Entry of Statistical Key Figures..........................................................................446 5.4.4.7. Manual Funds Reduction...............................................................................................446 5.4.5. Updating [Investment Orders]...........................................................................................446 5.4.5.1. Budget Update [Capital Investment Order].....................................................................446 5.4.6. Analysis............................................................................................................................446 5.4.6.1. Depreciation Simulation/Forecast [Investment Project]..................................................446 5.4.6.2. Processing of Depreciation Simulation Data..................................................................447 5.4.6.3. Order Analysis [Investment Order].................................................................................447 5.4.6.4. Program Analysis...........................................................................................................447 5.4.6.5. Integrated Planning in CO..............................................................................................447 5.4.7. Period-End Closing and Settlement..................................................................................448 5.4.7.1. Overhead Calculation [Investment Order]......................................................................448 5.4.7.2. Settlement Account Assignment....................................................................................448 5.4.7.3. Periodic Settlement........................................................................................................450 5.4.7.4. Investment Settlement [Investment Order].....................................................................450 5.5. Handling Complex Investment Measures.............................................................................450 5.5.1. Appropriation Request......................................................................................................450 5.5.1.1. Appropriation Request Processing.................................................................................450 5.5.1.2. Creation of an Alternate Group of Appropriation Requests.............................................451 5.5.1.3. Variant Processing.........................................................................................................451 5.5.1.4. Appropriation Request Planning.....................................................................................452 5.5.1.5. Appropriation Request Approval....................................................................................452 5.5.2. Measure Processing.........................................................................................................452 5.5.2.1. Project Structuring.........................................................................................................452 5.5.3. Measure Planning.............................................................................................................452 5.5.3.1. Planning Project Dates (Relevant to PS)........................................................................452 5.5.3.2. Overhead Costing/Cost Planning (Relevant to PS)........................................................453 5.5.3.3. Network Cost Planning (Relevant to PS)........................................................................454 5.5.3.4. Manual WBS Date Planning...........................................................................................455 5.5.3.5. Overall Network Scheduling (Relevant to PS)................................................................456 5.5.3.6. Project Budgeting [Investment Project]..........................................................................456 5.5.3.7. Budget Release.............................................................................................................458 5.5.4. Release and Implementation of Measure..........................................................................458 5.5.4.1. Project Release.............................................................................................................458 5.5.4.2. Reservation Processing.................................................................................................458 5.5.4.3. Manual Funds Reservation............................................................................................459 5.5.4.4. Direct Activity Allocation.................................................................................................459 5.5.4.5. Goods Issue Processing [Stock Material].......................................................................460 5.5.4.6. Manual Entry of Statistical Key Figures [Investment Project]..........................................461 5.5.4.7. Manual Funds Reduction...............................................................................................461 5.5.5. Updating [Investment Projects].........................................................................................461 5.5.5.1. Budget Update [Capital Investment Project]...................................................................461 5.5.6. Analysis............................................................................................................................462 5.5.6.1. Processing of Depreciation Simulation Data..................................................................462 5.5.6.2. Integrated Planning in CO..............................................................................................462 25 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP 5.5.6.3. Depreciation Simulation/Forecast [Investment Project]..................................................462 5.5.6.4. Program Analysis...........................................................................................................463 5.5.7. Period-End Closing and Settlement..................................................................................463 5.5.7.1. Project Structuring.........................................................................................................463 5.5.7.2. WBS Cost Planning.......................................................................................................466 5.5.7.3. Project Progress Analysis..............................................................................................467 5.5.7.4. Overhead Calculation....................................................................................................469 5.5.7.5. Account Assignment for Settlement [Investment Project]...............................................470 5.5.7.6. Periodic Settlement [Investment Project]........................................................................471 5.5.7.7. Interest Calculation [Capital Investment Measure].........................................................471 5.5.7.8. Investment Settlement [Investment Project]...................................................................471 5.6. Direct Capitalization.............................................................................................................472 5.6.1. Blanket Order...................................................................................................................472 5.6.1.1. Processing of Internal Orders [Direct Investment Capitalization]....................................472 5.6.1.2. Order Budgeting [Investment - Direct Capitalization]......................................................472 5.6.2. Procurement and capitalization.........................................................................................473 5.6.2.1. Creation of Master Record for Tangible Assets..............................................................473 5.6.2.2. Processing of Asset Acquisition.....................................................................................474 5.6.3. Analysis............................................................................................................................475 5.6.3.1. Depreciation Simulation/Forecast [Investment Project]..................................................475 5.6.3.2. Processing of Depreciation Simulation Data..................................................................475 5.6.3.3. Order Analysis [Direct Investment Capitalization]...........................................................476 5.6.3.4. Program Analysis...........................................................................................................476 5.6.3.5. Integrated Planning in CO..............................................................................................476 6. Real Estate Management.......................................................................................................476 6.1. Real Estate Management....................................................................................................476 6.1.1. Rental 477 6.1.1.1. Application/Rental Request Processing.........................................................................477 6.1.1.2. Rental Unit <-> Application Assignment.........................................................................478 6.1.1.3. Offer Processing............................................................................................................478 6.1.1.4. Lease-Out Processing...................................................................................................480 6.1.1.5. Lease-Out Activation.....................................................................................................484 6.1.1.6. Conclusion of Preliminary Contract................................................................................485 6.1.1.7. Notice Processing..........................................................................................................485 6.1.1.8. Lease-Out Renewal.......................................................................................................486 6.1.1.9. Rental Unit Inspection....................................................................................................486 6.1.1.10. Rental Deposit Release...............................................................................................486 6.1.2. Rental Accounting............................................................................................................487 6.1.2.1. Rental Accounting Debit Position...................................................................................489 6.1.2.2. Posting of One-Time Debit-Side Receivables................................................................490 6.1.2.3. Incoming Payments - Manual.........................................................................................490 6.1.2.4. Account Maintenance....................................................................................................492 6.1.2.5. Incoming Payment Postprocessing................................................................................492 6.1.2.6. Vacancy Debit Position..................................................................................................492 6.1.2.7. Sales Report Entry.........................................................................................................493 6.1.2.8. Carrying Out Accruals/Deferrals.....................................................................................493 6.1.2.9. Select Apportionable Costs............................................................................................493 6.1.3. Rent Change....................................................................................................................493 6.1.3.1. Advance Payment/Flat Rates Adjustment......................................................................495 6.1.3.2. Rent Reduction Processing............................................................................................495 6.1.3.3. Modernization Measure Processing...............................................................................495 6.1.3.4. Expert Opinion Processing.............................................................................................496 6.1.3.5. Comparative Group Rent Adjustment Preparation.........................................................496 6.1.3.6. Data Entry for Cost Efficiency Analysis..........................................................................496 6.1.3.7. Generating Rent Adjustment Data.................................................................................496 6.1.3.8. Activating Rent Adjustment (Including Approval)............................................................497 6.1.4. Service Charge Settlement...............................................................................................497 6.1.4.1. Cost Collector Generator...............................................................................................500 6.1.4.2. Ordering of SCS-relevant material.................................................................................500 6.1.4.3. Measurement Document Creation.................................................................................501 26 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP 6.1.4.4. Carrying Out Service Charge Settlement.......................................................................501 6.1.4.5. D-Tape Import...............................................................................................................502 6.1.4.6. External Settlement Result Posting................................................................................502 6.1.5. Third-Party Management..................................................................................................503 6.1.5.1. Management Contract Maintenance..............................................................................503 6.1.5.2. Management Event Maintenance...................................................................................506 6.1.5.3. Management Contract Debit Position.............................................................................506 6.1.5.4. Owner Settlement..........................................................................................................506 6.1.6. General Contract..............................................................................................................506 6.1.6.1. Editing General Contract................................................................................................507 6.1.6.2. Periodic Posting (General RE Contract).........................................................................510 6.1.7. Input Tax Treatment.........................................................................................................510 6.1.7.1. Periodic Determination of Option Rates.........................................................................511 6.1.7.2. Carrying Out Input Tax Distribution................................................................................511 6.1.7.3. Advance Tax Return......................................................................................................511 6.1.7.4. Input Tax Treatment for Correction Items.......................................................................512 6.1.8. Real Estate Controlling.....................................................................................................512 6.1.8.1. Planning (RE)................................................................................................................513 6.1.8.2. Carrying Out CO Settlement..........................................................................................514 6.1.8.3. Assessment on RE Object.............................................................................................514 6.1.9. Information System...........................................................................................................515 6.1.9.1. Evaluation Report..........................................................................................................515 7. HR Funds and Position Management.....................................................................................515 7.1. Additional Integration with Funds Management and Payroll.................................................515

27 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP -

A. Organization
1. Financial Accounting
1.1. Chart of Accounts
Questions: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 3) What is the document numbering logic? 2) How many natural accounts will each chart of accounts contain? (estimated) 1) Which companies use the same chart of accounts?

Explanation: Possible reconciliation with SD/MM A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: 8) Please provide your current Chart of Accounts. 7) Which additional languages do you wish to use for your charts of accounts? 6) Which maintenance language should be used for each chart of accounts? 5) Will the chart of accounts need to be approved? If so, by whom? 4) Describe how the account number is set up (for example: department, natural account).

28 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP -

1.2.

Consolidation Company

Questions: Q: 1) Determine the smallest units of your corporate structure which are to be used as the basis for a complete consolidation run. Explanation: For example a consolidation unit can be: - a company - a combination of a company and a consolidation business area - a combination of a company and a Profit Center customer-specific organizational unit - customer-specific organizational unit A: Q: 2) Comments for the transfer of consolidation groups by flexible upload from file

Explanation: Instead of manually defining the consolidation groups and/or the hierarchies thereof, this information can also be collected from a data file. To do this, you define an upload method, which shows the format of the file. A: Q: 3) Define suitable, logical file names.

Explanation: If the financial data is delivered in the form of a data file, you can define a logical file name in the master record of the consolidation unit. This logical file name points to a physical file name that is dependent on the operating system used. A: Q: 4) Do you require additional attributes for your consolidation units?

Explanation: Along with numerous predefined characteristics, which are delivered in the standard, it is possible to create custom attributes: For example: industry sector, number of shares A: Q: 5) In which form and at which dates do you collect the reported financial data from the individual companies? A:

1.3.

Subgroup

Questions: Q: A: 29 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc 1) Define the consolidation group according to your requirements.

ValueSAP -

Q:

2) Create suitable hierarchies.

Explanation: When creating the hierarchies, note which evaluations you will require later on. later on. In a view, it is possible to maintain parallel alternative hierarchies for valuations required for different reasons. For example, hierachies can represent legal requirements and/or regional aspects. A: Q: 3) How many consolidated financial statements do you want to create during a year?

Explanation: Set the required consolidation frequencies (monthly, quarterly, half-yearly, annually) and assign these to the consolidation groups. A: Q: 4) Comments to integrated consolidation types

Explanation: When you work in an integrated system, please note the executions under the unit integration. A: Q: 5) Comments for the transfer of consolidation groups by flexible upload from file

Explanation: Instead of manually defining the consolidation groups and/or the hierarchies thereof, this information can also be collected from a data file. To do this, you define an upload method, which shows the format of the file. A:

2. Enterprise Controlling
2.1. Dimensions
Questions: Q: 1) Which consolidation types do you want to set?

Explanation: On the basis of which organizational units should consolidation be carried out? A: Q: 2) Define the dimensions which you want in the system. 30 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP -

A:

2.2.

Currencies (Consolidation)

Questions: Q: 1) In which currencies do you want to the reports generated.?

Explanation: If you want to report in different currencies, you need one ledger per report currency. report currency. A:

2.3.

Version

Questions: Q: 1) Do you intend to consolidate different data categories? If yes, which ones?

Explanation: IST, PLAN or other versions IST, PLAN or other versions A:

2.4.

Consolidation Group

Questions: Q: A: Q: 2) Create suitable hierarchies. 1) Define the consolidation group according to your requirements.

Explanation: When creating the hierarchies, note which evaluations you will require later on. later on. In a view, it is possible to maintain parallel alternative hierarchies for valuations required for different reasons. For example, hierachies can represent legal requirements and/or regional aspects. A: Q: 3) How many consolidated financial statements do you want to create during a year?

Explanation: Set the required consolidation frequencies (monthly, quarterly, half-yearly, annually) and assign these to the consolidation groups. A: Q: 4) Comments to integrated consolidation types 31 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP -

Explanation: When you work in an integrated system, please note the executions under the unit integration. A: Q: 5) Comments for the transfer of consolidation groups by flexible upload from file

Explanation: Instead of manually defining the consolidation groups and/or the hierarchies thereof, this information can also be collected from a data file. To do this, you define an upload method, which shows the format of the file. A:

2.5.

Consolidation Unit

Questions: Q: 1) Determine the smallest units of your corporate structure which are to be used as the basis for a complete consolidation run. Explanation: For example a consolidation unit can be: - a company - a combination of a company and a consolidation business area - a combination of a company and a Profit Center customer-specific organizational unit - customer-specific organizational unit A: Q: 2) Comments for the transfer of consolidation groups by flexible upload from file

Explanation: Instead of manually defining the consolidation groups and/or the hierarchies thereof, this information can also be collected from a data file. To do this, you define an upload method, which shows the format of the file. A: Q: 3) Define suitable, logical file names.

Explanation: If the financial data is delivered in the form of a data file, you can define a logical file name in the master record of the consolidation unit. This logical file name points to a physical file name that is dependent on the operating system used. A: Q: 4) Do you require additional attributes for your consolidation units?

Explanation: Along with numerous predefined characteristics, which are delivered in the standard, it is possible to create custom attributes: For example: industry sector, number of shares 32 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP A: Q: 5) In which form and at which dates do you collect the reported financial data from the individual companies? A:

3. Asset Accounting
Questions: Q: A: Q: 2) If you have more than one enterprise entity: is a holding company the owner of assets used in another enterprise? A: [ ]Yes [ ]No 1) For which of your legal entities will you be implementing FI-AA?

Q: 3) If you have more than one entity, are there affiliated or integrated companies? Please list all affiliates, subsidiaries, trading partners, shares in other companies and integrated companies. A:

3.1.

Depreciation area

Questions: Q: 1) Is there a distinction necessary between book depreciation (for external balance sheet) and tax values (for a tax balance sheet)? A: [ ]Yes [ ]No

Q: 2) Do you require additional parallel valuations for your assets, e.g. for consolidated valuation, for cost accounting purposes or for statutory reasons? If so, please specify A: Q: 3) If you have a separate valuation for cost accounting, do you calculate and record interest? A: [ ]Yes [ ]No 4) Is there a distinction between taxation values and valuation of net assets? 33 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

Q:

ValueSAP A: [ ]Yes [ ]No

Q: 5) Do you need to record depreciation for purposes other than book depreciation? accounting depreciation - Special reserves for special depreciation ? - N Explanation: In addition to book depreciation, is there a need to manage depreciation for other purposes? For example:? - Tax depreciation - Group depreciation - Group currency Cost-accounting depreciation - Special reserves for special depreciation ? - Net worth tax valuation ? - Other ? - Other A: Q: 6) Do you want the values for these other viewpoints to be derived from the book depreciation area or another depreciation area (for example, the cost-accounting depreciation area can be derived from indexed book depreciation values)? A: Q: 7) Which depreciation area do you use for calculating cost-accounting depreciation and passing it on to cost accounting? A: Q: 8) If the cost-accounting depreciation area uses its own valuation, is depreciation calculated from APC or from the replacement value? A: Q: 9) If you claim special tax depreciation, how do you handle it: - Allocation and write-off amounts individually or balanced with each other? - Using a separate depreciation valuation area? A:

3.2.

Chart of depreciation

Questions: Q: A: Q: 2) Are there any statutory asset valuation requirements which would involve parallel valuation in your financial accounting? A: 1) In which countries do you manage fixed assets?

3.3.

Asset class
34

Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP Questions: Q: A: Q: 2) How do you classify your fixed assets at the moment? How do you intend to classify your assets in the future? A: Q: A: Q: 4) Do you manage low value assets (LVAs) as fixed assets, or do you post them directly to an expense account? A: Q: 5) Please list, or provide a list of the asset types that you intend to manage in the Asset Accounting system (e.g. Land, Buildings, Intangibles, etc). A: Q: 6) For each asset category (asset class), list the default depreciation method and the period of depreciation you would like to use. A: 3) Will you manage financial assets in the asset accounting system? 1) Describe how your fixed assets are structured in the balance sheet?

4. Real Estate Management

4.1. Company-Specific (Relevant to Real Estate Management)

Questions: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: 3) Is real estate management your main line of business? [ ]Yes [ ]No 35 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc 2) What are your objectives for the introduction of RE? 1) What are the future aims of your real estate business apart from introducing RE?

ValueSAP -

Q:

4) Do you want to manage objects both in your own country and abroad?

Explanation: Effects on tenancy laws and currencies. A: Q: 5) What are the regional locations (regions) of the objects that you intend to manage with SAP RE? A: Q: 6) Which type of objects do you want to manage (commercial, residential, mixed usage, administrative building, manufacturing facilities, business or shopping centers, exhibition centers, ...)? A: Q: 7) Do you plan to make object-specific task assignments or according to business transactions? A: Q: A: Q: 9) What responsibilities or areas of expertise will be handled by other areas (accounting, controlling, asset accounting, plant maintenance, construction, etc.)? A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 13) Which account plans (special account plans for residential management and so on) do you want to use? Explanation: Refer to FI for more detailed question about the account plan. A: 36 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc 12) How many employees will be working with SAP RE in your production operation? 11) Do you want to offer your Facility Management services to third parties? 10) Do you intend to pass on responsibility for certain tasks to external companies? 8) If your real estate is managed by externals, what responsibilities do the externals have?

ValueSAP -

Q: 14) If you intend to have company codes that opt for input tax, which company codes are they? A: Q: 15) If you have company codes that have to report to the Federal Supervisory Office for Insurance Associations (BAV - specific to Germany), which company codes are they? A:

4.2.

System-Specific (Relevant to Real Estate Management)

Questions: Q: 1) Do you intend to use third-party management?

Explanation: In this case you need at least one additional company code. A: Q: 2) Do you intend to use contribution margin accounting?

Explanation: Contribution margin accounting is usually mapped using Profit Center Accounting. A: Q: 3) Do you want to map owner occupied management?

Explanation: This function will be available in Releases following 46B. A: Q: 4) Do you want the system to map plant maintenance activities for your real estate?

Explanation: Plant maintenance is mapped in the component PM. (Take the building maintenance teams into consideration) A: Q: 5) Do you want the system to map new developments, modernizations or refurbishments using Project System? Explanation: Construction measures are mapped using the PS component. A: 37 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP -

Q:

6) Do you intend to use the organizational units of the Public Sector Industry Solution?

Explanation: The Public Sector Industry Solution is not mapped in ASAP. A: Q: 7) Do you intend to use Loans Management?

Explanation: Loans management is mapped in the Treasury component. A: Q: 8) Do you intend to use Cash Management functions?

Explanation: Cash management is mapped in the component Treasury. A: Q: 9) Do you intend to map your asset accounting in the system?

Explanation: Asset accounting is part of Financial Accounting (FI). A: Q: 10) If you plan to use Business Worklow, which processes would you like to have supported? A: Q: 11) Will you use document management? Do you intend to optically archive correspondence? Do you intend to store floor plans, building plans etc. for objects in the system? A:

B. General Settings

38 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP -

1. Time Zones
Questions: Q: 1) Do you use the SAP System for global transactions covering several time zones? Are your customers, suppliers, plants or distribution centers spread over several time zones? A:

C. Master Data
1. General Master Records
1.1. Taxes

Questions: Q: 1) Will you use an external Tax Package to determine the appropriate tax jurisdiction and/or tax rates to apply to purchasing documents and/or vendor invoices? If yes, name the external package. A: Q: A: 2) Will the tax jurisdiction codes be loaded into SAP?

2. Financial Accounting
2.1. G/L Account
Questions: Q: 1) What procedure do you use when you need to create new account numbers?

Explanation: This can occur centrally or decentralized; Sample accounts can be used. A: Q: 2) Can you define groups of general ledger accounts that require similar information in the master record? A: 39 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP -

Q: A: Q: A:

3) How many retained earnings accounts do you have?

4) For which general ledger accounts do you wish to display line items?

Q: 5) Which accounts do you wish to manage on an open item basis (for example, bank clearing accounts)? A: Q: 6) Which accounts do you wish to maintain in foreign currency (for example, bank accounts)? A: Q: 7) Describe any special requirements when posting to particular general ledger accounts (for example, expense accounts require an associated cost center). A: Q: 8) What criteria do you use to search for G/L accounts?

Explanation: Matchcode A: Q: A: 9) Which of your General Ledger accounts are not relevant to tax?

2.2.

Ledger

Questions: Q: A: Q: 2) Do you have special statutory accounting requirements that are not covered in other R/3 applications? Example: Currency translation of a foreign subsidiary, different fiscal year ends to the international trading partner. Explanation: A special type of rendering of accounts is meant, which requires a characteristic not contained in a standard SAP database. 40 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc 1) Do you have to report in accordance with cost of sales accounting?

ValueSAP A: Q: A: 3) Have you defined the necessary domains and data elements in the ABAP Dictionary?

2.3.
2.3.1.

Legal Consolidation
Item

Questions: Q: 1) Which requirements do you have for the creation and/or structure of your cons chart of accounts (US GAAP, IAS, HGB)? Explanation: Several FS items can be used within one dimension. Therefore financial statements can be created parallel according to different requirements. A: Q: A: Q: 3) Should income statements be created using cost-of-sales accounting or period accounting? Explanation: ATTENTION: then further settings in FI or in CO are necessary! ATTENTION: then further settings in FI or in CO are necessary! A: Q: 4) Do you summarize your operational accounts to group accounts (financial statement items)? A: Q: 5) If yes, do you summarize at the subsidiary level or at the corporate group level? 2) Should retained earnings be disclosed in the balance sheet or in the income statement?

Explanation: How is the data reported - on account level or item level? How is the data reported - on account level or item level? A: Q: 6) Do you require further freely definable classifications for your FS items?

Explanation: The illustration of such classifications takes place via the field "item category". Characteristic values would be for example "balance sheet item", "cash flow" or "key figure". sheet item", "cash flow" or "key figure". A: 41 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP Q: 7) Do you use an integration scenario? If so, you can transfer the FS items from a G/L chart of accounts or a financial statement version. Explanation: When you work in an integrated system, please note the executions under the unit integration. the unit integration. A: Q: 8) Define your selected items for posting financial statement imbalances and for posting deferred taxes, for both retained earnings carried forward as well as the balancing adjustment. Explanation: ANI Balance sheet ANI Income statement Deferred income task balance sheet Deferred income task income statement FS balancing adjustment item Unappropriated retained earnings Unappropriated retained earnings Unappropriated retained earnings A:

2.3.2.
Questions: Q:

Subitem

1) How do you want to define the subitems?

Explanation: Do you want to use the standard? For example: - Subitem category asset transaction type numerical characteristic value 100 - 999 Or do you want to use your own characteristic values? Or do you want to use your own characteristic values? A: Q: A: 2) Which default values do you want to define for the characteristic value of subitems?

2.3.3.
Questions: Q:

Sets (Namespace)

1) Define suitable name spaces for the sets you use.

Explanation: Sets are aggregations of context-releated elements. Sets are needed in all kinds of areas, such as data collection, currency translation, interunit elimination and reporting. You can make life easier by using suitable set names when defining sets. A:

2.4.

Funds Management

Questions: Q: 1) Describe the relationship between the Financial Accounting fiscal year and the Funds Management fiscal year (Budget year/ budget periods) 42 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP A: Q: 2) Provide more details on the number of budget periods, special adjustment periods and description of what is accomplished/processed in this special periods. A: Q: 3) Are there special budgetary structures to cover interim periods / special periods (e.g. if budget has not been approved in time: provisional budgets)? How are these structures related to the budget structures of the adopted budget? A: Q: 4) Please provide detail information on legal requirements within the budget management sector (Financial regulations, internal rules, ....) A: Q: 5) Describe the current budget organizational structure (budget/master data hierarchy) and the current nomenclature/scale. Create a list of the organizational units that are responsible for the budget (execution). Explanation: Describe the current budget organizational structure (budget hierarchy). Please explain the current existing nomenclature/numbering (list the organizational units that are responsible for the budget) A: Q: A: Q: 7) Is it possible to categorize the types of expenditure? Create a list of expenditure types/categories and describe how these relate to the execution level. A: Q: 8) Describe the changes that may be made to the budget structure (master data) within a year. A: Q: 9) Describe the changes that may be made to the budget structure (master data) over a period of years. A: Q: A: 43 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc 10) Describe the quantity and timing of changes of the budget structure 6) Are there any legal requirements for nomenclature /structure of the master data?

ValueSAP -

Q: 11) Describe which information objects (master data) have to remain online in the system, and for how long. A: Q: A: Q: 13) Explain which legacy data (historical data) needs to be transferred from the previous system to Funds Management (level of detail, number of years, ...). A: 12) Provide an overview of the volume of master data (FM).

2.4.1.
Questions:

Funds Center

Q: 1) Is there any special nomenclature for the naming (organization) of the funds center? Describe the existing (planned) structure. A: Q: 2) Generate a list of all information to be stored at funds center level (list of fields, short description, and properties of fields). A: Q: 3) Which information could be changed for a funds center? Create a list of all fields/field contents. A:

2.4.2.
Questions:

Commitment Item

Q: 1) Is there any special nomenclature for the naming (organization) of the commitment item? Describe the existing (planned) structure. A: Q: 2) List the information to be stored at commitment item level (list of fields, short description, and properties of fields). A: Q: 3) Which information may possibly be changed for a commitment item? Generate a list of all fields/field contents. A: 44 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP -

2.4.3.
Questions:

Fund

Q: 1) Generate a list of funds origins (funds, funds from secondary sources). Are these funds from secondary sources budgeted and assigned separately? Should these funds be displayed separately for budgeting and execution? A: Q: 2) Provide an overview of the different fund types (for example, special revenue, donations,....). A: Q: A: Q: 4) Do you receive grants? If so, provide detailed information (USA). 3) Provide a list and a short description of your budget sources.

Explanation: If you manage different funds (financing subsidies): Describe the characteristics/special features/Funds Management requirements for these funds (life, reporting period, special features with reference to the budget and budget execution). A: Q: 5) If you manage different funds (grants): Describe the characteristics/special features/FM requirements for the fund (lifetime, reporting periods, special features with regard to budget and budget execution). A: Q: 6) Is it possible to group the used funds (from secondary sources)? If so, describe the groups and the funds belonging to them. A: Q: 7) Do you have special funds for internal services? How do you distribute the accrued expenses to other funds? A: Q: 8) Do you have to produce financial statements by funds, fund groups, or fund types? Provide an overview of those funds. (USA) A: Q: 9) Are budget/actual reports produced for funds/fund groups/fund type levels? Provide an overview. 45 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP -

A: Q: 10) Is there any special nomenclature (organization) for the name of the fund? Describe the existing (planned) structure. A: Q: 11) List the information to be stored at application of funds/funds level (list of fields, short description, and properties of fields). A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 14) Do you have grants (to be repaid, or not to be repaid) that are part of your budget but are managed separately? If so, provide detailed information. A: 13) Do you have endowment funds? If so, please provide detailed information. 12) Which information could be changed for a fund? Create a list of all fields/field contents.

2.4.4.
Questions:

Application of Funds

Q: 1) Is there any special nomenclature for the naming (organization) of the application of funds? Describe the existing (planned) structure. A: Q: 2) List the information to be stored at application of funds/funds level (list of fields, short description, and properties of fields). A: Q: 3) Which information may possibly changed for an application of funds? Generate a list of all fields/field contents. A:

3. Treasury
3.1.
3.1.1.
Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

General
Business Partner
46

ValueSAP Questions: Q: 1) What "categories" do you use to distinguish between different types of business partner? A: Q: A: Q: A: 3) Are the partners related to each other? 2) Are your business partners natural persons, legal persons, or both?

3.1.2.
Questions:

House Banks

Q: 1) Which bank accounts do you use to process payments for your money market transactions? A: Q: A: 2) Provide an overview of your house banks (the banks you have accounts with).

3.1.3.
Questions:

Limits

Q: 1) For each limit, specify which flows should be included in the calculation (only assets, only liabilities, both assets and liabilities) and whether the amounts should be added or subtracted. A:

3.2.
3.2.1.

Treasury Management
Class

Questions: Q: A: Q: 2) Specify the quantities for each product group (number of securities accounts, number of positions per securities account, number of classes). A: 1) Make a qualified estimate of your average positions for each class (annual average).

47 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP Q: A: 3) Which fields do you require for master data maintenance?

3.2.2.
Questions: Q: A:

Reference

1) For what purposes do you use reference links between transactions?

3.2.3.
Questions: Q: A:

Securities Account

1) How many securities accounts do you have at present?

Q: 2) Do you want to group your securities accounts into position valuation units (across several securities accounts)? A: Q: 3) How do you split the positions in securities accounts that are not part of the premium reserve fund into residual assets, restricted assets and unencumbered assets? (Germany) A:

3.2.4.
Questions:

Position Indicator

Q: 1) How do you structure the balance sheet accounts for securities in the general ledger (determination of account assignment reference)? A:

3.2.5.
Questions: Q: A: Q: A:

Market Data

1) Which rates/prices do you need to value your positions?

2) How do you currently update your security prices (automatically or manually)?

3.3.
3.3.1.

Loans
Loan Products
48

Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP Questions: Q: A: Q: 2) According to which criteria have you classified your loan portfolio (for example, according to product, term, ...)? A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: 6) Do you post loans on the basis of customer accounts? (are payments monitored?) 5) Do you manage foreign currency loans? 4) Roughly categorize the types of loan you manage. 3) Do you manage loans given and/or loans taken? 1) Is there a product sheet or product description for loans?

3.3.2.
Questions: Q: A:

Collateral

1) To what extent do you manage assigned loans (undisclosed assignments)?

Q: 2) To what extent do you manage guaranteed loans? Who are the relevant guarantors? To which loan products do guarantees apply? A: Q: 3) Do you process grants/subsidies to borrowers in conjunction with the relevant institutions? A: Q: A: Q: 5) What other collateral do you have to secure mortgage loans (e.g. life insurance)? 49 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc 4) Do you manage encumbrances (own rights, third-party rights)?

ValueSAP A: Q: A: 6) Which basic data / assignment data do you enter in relation to collateral?

3.3.3.
Questions:

Collateral Objects

Q: 1) How do you determine collateral values? Who produces expert reports (technical department, external expert)? A: Q: A: Q: A: 3) Do you manage encumbrances (own rights, third-party rights)? 2) What other collateral do you have to secure mortgage loans (e.g. life insurance)?

3.3.4.
Questions:

Filed Documents

Q: 1) Do you intend to use file management to control the loan process (e.g. have all the required documents been received?), or merely to archive the filed documents? A: Q: A: 2) What kind of documents do you have to administer?

3.3.5.
Questions:

Condition Structure

Q: 1) Which different condition structures do you use (annuities, installments, final repayment)? To which product categories do they apply? A: Q: 2) What are the resulting condition types (nominal interest, annuity repayment, commitment interest)? A: Q: A: 50 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc 3) To what extent do you manage variable-rate loans? Which loans are they?

ValueSAP -

Q: 4) How do you adjust the conditions for loans due to expire (rollover)? Do you send contract offers or contracts to the customer? Do you apply standard conditions or grant individual conditions? A: Q: A: Q: A: 6) How do you deal with loan discounts and premiums? 5) Which effective interest method do you use?

3.4.

Market Risk Management

Questions: Q: A: 1) Should valuations be differentiated according to the bid/ask rates?

3.4.1.
Questions: Q: A:

Reference Interest Rate

1) Which reference interest rates are required?

3.4.2.
Questions:

Yield Curves

Q: 1) Which yield curves are required? Which reference interest rates (interfaces) should be used as a basis for defining the yield curves? A:

3.4.3.
Questions: Q: A: Q: A:

Volatility

1) Do you use option instruments? Which?

2) Do you require your own volatility type for value at risk calculations?

51 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP 3.4.4.
Questions: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 3) Which additional flows (such as premiums or charges) do you want to include in the valuation? Explanation: For additional flows you use flow category '90'. A: 2) Which product types do you want to value differently from the standard? 1) Which market data parameters are used for position valuation?

Reporting

3.4.5.
Questions: Q: A:

Prices/NPVs for OTC Transactions

1) Should the net present values calculated by the system be saved?

Q: 2) Do you want to include net present values that have been calculated externally in the mark-to-market position valuation? A:

3.4.6.
Questions: Q: A:

Scenario

1) Which market data simulations do you want to carry out?

3.4.7.
Questions: Q: A:

Market Data Shift

1) Do you want to incorporate relative changes to market data in your evaluations?

3.4.8.
Questions: Q:

Statistics Type

1) Do you want to carry out value at risk evaluations (variance/covariance)? 52

Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP A: Q: A: 2) Do you want to calculate your volatilities and correlations?

3.4.9.
Questions: Q: A:

Correlation

1) Do you want to carry out value at risk evaluations (variance/covariance)?

3.4.10.
Questions: Q: A: Q: A:

Risk Hierarchy

1) Do you want to carry out value at risk evaluations?

2) Which risk factors do you want to consider for your risk evaluations?

4. Revenue and Cost Controlling

4.1.
4.1.1.
4.1.1.1. Questions: Q: A: Q: 2) Reserve a number range in the chart of accounts for the definition of CO-specific accounts/primary cost elements: which additional primary cost elements do you need (such as for accruals)? A: 4.1.1.2. Questions: Q: A: 4.1.1.3. Blueprint_FICO_1.doc Cost Element Group 53 1) Define secondary cost elements for planning, allocation and reporting purposes. Secondary Cost Element 1) Define primary cost elements based on the definition of the chart of account.

Overhead Cost Controlling

Cost Element
Primary Cost Element

ValueSAP -

Questions: Q: A: 1) Define cost element groups for planning, allocation, and reporting purposes.

4.1.2.
4.1.2.1. Questions:

Cost Center
Cost Center

Q: 1) Define cost centers as the lowest level in your organizational structure at which you hold one person responsible for the expenses incurred (check whether you have covered the whole organization). A: 4.1.2.2. Questions: Q: 1) Take your corporate organizational structure and build a hierarchy according to levels of responsibilities, with cost centers as the lowest level. A: 4.1.2.3. Questions: Q: 1) Besides the standard hierarchy, do you need other alternative structure (groups) of cost centers (for planning, allocation, and reporting purposes)? A: Cost Center Group Standard Hierarchy for Cost Centers

4.1.3.
4.1.3.1. Questions:

Activity Type
Activity Type

Q: 1) Define the type of activity performed by each cost center. Do this by defining one or more measurable activity type(s) for each cost center. A: Q: 2) Since activity types are posted as secondary cost elements, have you specified the secondary cost elements to which you want to assign the activity type (one-to-one, or one cost element for more than one activity type)? A: 4.1.3.2. Questions: Q: 1) Group your activity types into different categories or similar attributes for planning, allocation and reporting purposes. 54 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc Activity Type Group

ValueSAP -

A:

4.1.4.
4.1.4.1. Questions:

Statistical Key Figures

Statistical Key Figures

Q: 1) Which statistical key figures do you want to use for allocations and reporting (such as telephone units, headcount, and so on)? A: 4.1.4.2. Questions: Q: 1) Define groups of statistical key figures (such as the group for all headcount statistical figures). A: Statistical Key Figure Group

4.1.5.
4.1.5.1. Questions:

Business Process
Business Process

Q: 1) Do you want to define business processes across different areas of your organization and plan, enter, and allocate overhead costs on the basis of these? Explanation: Unlike activity types, business processes can receive costs from more than one cost center. The process costs can then either be allocated to Cost Object Controlling, or to Profitability Analysis. A: [ ]Yes [ ]No 2) Define your business processes (such as sales-order processing).

Q: A:

4.1.5.2. Questions:

Standard Hierarchy for Business Processes

Q: 1) Define the standard hierarchy of processes for planning, allocating and reporting business process costs. A: 4.1.5.3. Questions: Q: 1) Do you group your business processes alternatively by categories or similar attributes so that you can plan, allocate and report on aggregated levels? 55 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc Business Process Group

ValueSAP A:

4.1.6.
Questions:

Internal Order

Q: 1) What business criteria do you use to classify your internal orders (for example, overhead orders, accrual orders, investment orders, statistical orders, and so on)? A: Q: 2) What are the types of orders that will be used in the controlling area (such as investments, marketing, etc.)? A: Q: 3) Should some of the orders be used for information purposes only - that is, should the real posting be on the cost center? A:

4.2.
4.2.1.

Product Cost Controlling

Procurement Alternative

Questions: Q: 1) Are you working with multiple supply sources (different vendors) or multiple production methods (in-house production and subcontracting) for the same material? A:

4.2.2.
Questions: Q: A: Q: A: Q:

Cost Component

1) Define the structure of your product cost components (40 cost components max)!

2) Which cost components should be part of the product`s standard price?

3) Define the calculation method for each cost component.

Explanation: Define the calculation method for each cost component: 1. Activity quantity x activity price 2. Material quantity x price (standard price, moving average price, purchasing info record......) 3. Process quantity x process price 4. Percentage overhead A:

56 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP Q: 4) Do you require an alternative structure that breaks down the activity and process costs in accordance with their original costs (such as wages, salaries, energy, depreciation)? A: Q: 5) Which cost components should be part of the product's cost of goods manufactured in Profitability Analysis? A:

4.2.3.
Questions:

Product Cost Collectors

Q: 1) If you are working with period-based controlling, do you want to have one cost collector for each production method or for each material? A:

4.2.4.
Questions:

Material Ledger Data

Q: 1) Do you intend to value the material with more than one currency or valuation approach? What are those currencies/approaches? A: Q: 2) Do you want to make subsequent allocations of variances (from purchasing, production) for raw materials and material produced in-house? A: Q: 3) Do you want to differentiate between procurement alternatives and manufacturing processes for your actual costs? A:

4.3.
4.3.1.

Profitability Analysis
Characteristics
Characteristic Definition 4.3.1.1.

Questions: Q: 1) List the dimensions (characteristics) that you want to create contribution margin accounting for, according to your reporting requirements. Explanation: Examples of characteristics: - Region - Sales organization - ... A: 4.3.1.2. Questions: 57 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc Characteristic Values

ValueSAP -

Q: 1) For the characteristics defined in the previous question, specify values (such as, regions: North, west, east, south) A: 4.3.1.3. Questions: Q: 1) List the terms (characteristics) that do not have master data, and state how they are dependent on other criteria. A: Q: 2) List the terms (characteristics) that are dependent on each other in a hierarchy. Characteristic Derivation

Explanation: Examples: Determine sales office, region A:

4.3.2.
4.3.2.1. Questions: Q: A:

Value Fields
Definition of Value Fields

1) Define the report rows (value fields) that you wish to analyze.

Q: 2) Are you interested only in the revenues and costs that are directly related to product sales? A: Q: A: Q: 4) Do you also wish to see other income or expenditures that are not related to your regular business activity (e.g. product production or sales)? A: Q: 5) Decide which value fields can be posted as reconcilable with FI (true), and which are to be filled with accrual valuations. A: 3) Do you also wish to see other product-related overhead costs?

4.3.3.
4.3.3.1. Questions:

Condition Types
Definition of Condition Types

58 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP -

Q: 1) Do you want information on accrued values for your result information, that are not defined as conditions in SD, or do you require user-defined condition types in CO-PA for planning purposes? A:

5. Enterprise Controlling
5.1.
5.1.1.
Questions: Q: 1) Which requirements do you have for the creation and/or structure of your cons chart of accounts (US GAAP, IAS, HGB)? Explanation: Several FS items can be used within one dimension. Therefore financial statements can be created parallel according to different requirements. A: Q: A: Q: 3) Should income statements be created using cost-of-sales accounting or period accounting? Explanation: ATTENTION: then further settings in FI or in CO are necessary! ATTENTION: then further settings in FI or in CO are necessary! A: Q: 4) Do you summarize your operational accounts to group accounts (financial statement items)? A: Q: 5) If yes, do you summarize at the subsidiary level or at the corporate group level? 2) Should retained earnings be disclosed in the balance sheet or in the income statement?

Consolidation
Consolidation Chart of Acounts / FS Item Hierarchy

Explanation: How is the data reported - on account level or item level? How is the data reported - on account level or item level? A: Q: 6) Do you require further freely definable classifications for your FS items?

59 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP Explanation: The illustration of such classifications takes place via the field "item category". Characteristic values would be for example "balance sheet item", "cash flow" or "key figure". sheet item", "cash flow" or "key figure". A: Q: 7) Do you use an integration scenario? If so, you can transfer the FS items from a G/L chart of accounts or a financial statement version. Explanation: When you work in an integrated system, please note the executions under the unit integration. the unit integration. A: Q: 8) Define your selected items for posting financial statement imbalances and for posting deferred taxes, for both retained earnings carried forward as well as the balancing adjustment. Explanation: ANI Balance sheet ANI Income statement Deferred income task balance sheet Deferred income task income statement FS balancing adjustment item Unappropriated retained earnings Unappropriated retained earnings Unappropriated retained earnings A:

5.1.2.
Questions:

Breakdown Categories

Q: 1) How many breakdown categories can be derived from your reporting system? Which different details would you like to see within a consolidation chart of accounts? Explanation: The requested detail of FS items is controlled via the breakdown category. The details are delivered in standard by: - Partner - Transaction currency - Year of acquisition Subitem - if necessary up to 5 further custom characteristics - if necessary up to 5 further custom characteristics A: Q: 2) Do you want to differentiate elimination differences between currency-related and other differences? Explanation: The split differences requires the detail of a FS item by transaction currency. currency. A: [ ]Yes [ ]No

5.1.3.
Questions:

Custom Characteristics

Q: 1) Do you need further custom characteristics, in addition to the standard subassignments? 60 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP -

Explanation: Note: - cross-client setting - as the data base is to be extended, these settings should occur at beginning of the project (empty data base required) - subsequent changes are extremely problematic A: [ ]Yes [ ]No 2) If yes how many and which characteristics?

Q:

Explanation: Number of characteristics: Which characteristic values: A:

5.1.4.
Questions:

Subitem Category

Q: 1) Which standard subassignments would you like to use? What requirements do you have for group reporting later on, for example, asset history sheets, equity aging reports, segment reports, etc. ? Explanation: For example to choose from: - Asset transaction type - Functional area - Region Year of acquisition - Period - Equity transaction type - Equity transaction type A:

5.1.5.
Questions: Q:

Subitem

1) How do you want to define the subitems?

Explanation: Do you want to use the standard? For example: - Subitem category asset transaction type numerical characteristic value 100 - 999 Or do you want to use your own characteristic values? Or do you want to use your own characteristic values? A: Q: A: 2) Which default values do you want to define for the characteristic value of subitems?

5.1.6.
Questions: Q:

Sets (Namespace)

1) Define suitable name spaces for the sets you use.

Explanation: Sets are aggregations of context-releated elements. Sets are needed in all kinds of areas, such as data collection, currency translation, interunit elimination and reporting. You can make life easier by using suitable set names when defining sets. 61 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP -

A:

6. Asset Accounting
Questions: Q: 1) How many fixed assets and how many assets under construction do you currently have? A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 4) Do you see a business need to use both internal and external number assignment, depending on the asset class? If so, please specify. A: Q: 5) If you use external number assignment, do you want to allow the assignment of alphanumeric numbers? A: [ ]Yes [ ]No 3) Do you want asset master record numbering to be internally or externally assigned? 2) Which organizational units do you manage in the asset master record?

Q: 6) Do you want to represent asset components using asset sub-numbers? If so, for what purposes do you plan to use asset sub-numbers? A: Q: 7) Are cost centers (business areas) to be defined in the asset master record on a timedependent basis? A: Q: 8) Do you see a business need to create multiple similar asset master records in one step? A: Q: A: 62 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc 9) Do you have assets that require increased depreciation due to multiple shift use?

ValueSAP -

Q: 10) In your enterprise, is there a requirement to shut down an asset (discontinue depreciation) for a period of time? A: Q: A: Q: 12) How long do you intend to continue to manage assets, which are no longer on hand physically, in the system? A: 11) How do you archive your asset master records at the present time?

7. Real Estate Management

Questions: Q: 1) Do you plan to copy Customizing settings of one company code to another company code? A:

7.1.

Real Estate Objects

Questions: Q: A: Q: 2) How should the system map the plant maintenance object structure? (This is generally a hierarchy) Explanation: There is a Customizing setting to structure and update functional locations the same way as for Real Estate objects. A: Q: 3) Where do you intend to store key data? In the RE system or another system? If in another system, which system? Explanation: The main system for the master data could be a CAFM system. A: 1) What real estate object hierarchy do you want the system to map?

63 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP 7.1.1.
Questions: Q: 1) How Many Business Entity Do You Want To Manage With The System?

Business Entity

Explanation: Enter the number of business entities per company code. A: Q: 2) What number range do you want to create for the objects (documents)?

Explanation: The standard Customizing has default values for the object and document number ranges and you can usually copy these default values. You can define the number ranges for each company code for the master data objects, business entity, property, building, rental unit, and for contracts. A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 5) Which object fields are required, optional, display or hidden? 4) Should the numbers of the business entity be unique throughout all company codes? 3) Do You Want Numbers To Be Internally Or Externally Assigned?

Explanation: Determine field status A: Q: 6) Do you want to substitute or validate values when you are editing the objects or processes? If yes, what do you want to substitute or validate and how? A: Q: 7) Is there an organizational assignment of the business entity to the business area, profit center and/or maintenance area? A: Q: 8) Do you want the system to (automatically) assign a functional location to this Real Estate object? Explanation: You have the following options: 0 System does not create a functional location but you can make a manual assignment. 1 Functional location is automatically created and assigned but retroactive changes in the master data or the Real Estate objects (such as 64 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP business area) are not updated in the master data of the functional location. 2 Functional location is automatically created and assigned. Certain changes in the Real Estate objects are automatically updated in the master data of the functional location; Example: The Real Estate object hierarchy is taken into account when the functional location is automatically assigned; the functional location hierarchy is adjusted. If you change the assignment of a rental unit to another building, or you change the building hierarcy, the functional location hierarchy is automatically updated. hierarchy is automatically updated. hierarchy is automatically updated. A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 11) Who edits the objects and processes? 10) Do you want to use a user status for this object and if yes, which ones? 9) Do you want to use the user-fields and if yes, how do you want to fill these objects?

Explanation: If necessary, consider the use of the authorization group field. If necessary, consider the use of the authorization group field. A: Q: 12) Which regional locations, location data, districts, transport connections and maintenance districts do you want to use for the business entities? A: Q: 13) Which Units Of Measurement Do You Want To Preassign To The Business Entity On A Company Code-Dependent Basis? A: Q: 14) Which tenancy laws do you want to use?

Explanation: Country-specific specifications for rental process Country-specific specifications for rental process The tenancy law controls o the service charge settlement o the rental adjustment o periods of notice o periods of notice A: Q: 15) If representative lists of rents are to be assigned to business entities, which ones will you use? A:

65 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP Q: 16) Do you want to preassign the settlement variants (maintenance and heating expenses settlement) to the business entities and if yes, which ones? A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: 19) Which partners have to be maintained for the object? 18) Do you plan to link the object to projects? 17) If you intend to maintain data for option rates, how will these be calculated?

7.1.2.
Questions: Q: A: Q:

Property

1) How Many Properties Do You Want To Manage With The System?

2) What number range do you want to create for the objects (documents)?

Explanation: The standard Customizing has default values for the object and document number ranges and you can usually copy these default values. You can define the number ranges for each company code for the master data objects, business entity, property, building, rental unit, and for contracts. A: Q: A: Q: 4) Which object fields are required, optional, display or hidden? 3) Do You Want Numbers To Be Internally Or Externally Assigned?

Explanation: Determine field status A: Q: 5) Do you want to substitute or validate values when you are editing the objects or processes? If yes, what do you want to substitute or validate and how? A: Q: 6) Do you want to assign one or more assets to the object (property/building)? 66 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP -

A:

[ ]Yes [ ]No

Q: 7) Do you want the system to (automatically) assign a functional location to this Real Estate object? Explanation: You have the following options: 0 System does not create a functional location but you can make a manual assignment. 1 Functional location is automatically created and assigned but retroactive changes in the master data or the Real Estate objects (such as business area) are not updated in the master data of the functional location. 2 Functional location is automatically created and assigned. Certain changes in the Real Estate objects are automatically updated in the master data of the functional location; Example: The Real Estate object hierarchy is taken into account when the functional location is automatically assigned; the functional location hierarchy is adjusted. If you change the assignment of a rental unit to another building, or you change the building hierarcy, the functional location hierarchy is automatically updated. hierarchy is automatically updated. hierarchy is automatically updated. A: Q: A: Q: 9) What area types do you want to use? 8) Do you plan to assign the object to a business area or profit center?

Explanation: Area types are defined for buildings, properties, rental units and rooms. They are usually used for the service charge settlement. A: Q: 10) Which area types are area totals?

Explanation: Example for an area total Example for an area total Area type Area descr. Area total 03 Usable area -- 11 Store area 03 30 Office area 03 30 Office area 03 The maintenance program for the areas for a rental unit, for a builing and for the property runs to check if the total of the store area is the same as the usage area. the same as the usage area. You can use the total area as a calculation basis (for example for conditions or service charge settlement). conditions or service charge settlement). conditions or service charge settlement). conditions or service charge settlement). A: Q: A: Q: A: 67 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc 12) Do you want to use a user status for this object and if yes, which ones? 11) Do you want to use the user-fields and if yes, how do you want to fill these objects?

ValueSAP -

Q:

13) Who edits the objects and processes?

Explanation: If necessary, consider the use of the authorization group field. If necessary, consider the use of the authorization group field. A: Q: 14) Do You Want To Use Main Usage Types And If So, Which Ones?

Explanation: If FI-AA is active and an asset is assigned, the main usage type is derived from the asset class and you can enter it manually. The main usage type is the account determination key. A: Q: 15) How Many Entries Do You Want To Use With Regard To Heritable Building Right, Usage Type Acc. To Area Or Development Plan? Explanation: Questions about building laws and regulations A: Q: 16) What Values Do You Want To Use For Property Types, Location Quality, Ground Type and Overall Condition? Explanation: Questions about quality and type of property A: Q: 17) Will Undeveloped Properties Also Be Rented (For Example, Parking Lots, Usage Rights And So On)? A: Q: A: Q: A: 19) Which partners have to be maintained for the object? 18) Do you plan to maintain land values for the property?

7.1.3.
Questions: Q:

Building

1) How Many Buildings Do You Want To Manage With The System? 68

Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP A: Q: 2) What number range do you want to create for the objects (documents)?

Explanation: The standard Customizing has default values for the object and document number ranges and you can usually copy these default values. You can define the number ranges for each company code for the master data objects, business entity, property, building, rental unit, and for contracts. A: Q: A: Q: 4) Which object fields are required, optional, display or hidden? 3) Do You Want Numbers To Be Internally Or Externally Assigned?

Explanation: Determine field status A: Q: 5) Do you want to substitute or validate values when you are editing the objects or processes? If yes, what do you want to substitute or validate and how? A: Q: A: 6) Do you want to assign one or more assets to the object (property/building)? [ ]Yes [ ]No 7) Do you plan to assign the object to a business area or profit center?

Q: A:

Q: 8) What Values Do You Want To Use For Building Type And Condition Of Building, Roof and Facade? A: Q: A: Q: A: 10) Which object characteristics do you intend to use? 9) Which fixtures and fittings characteristics do you intend to maintain for the object?

69 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP Q: 11) What area types do you want to use?

Explanation: Area types are defined for buildings, properties, rental units and rooms. They are usually used for the service charge settlement. A: Q: 12) Which area types are area totals?

Explanation: Example for an area total Example for an area total Area type Area descr. Area total 03 Usable area -- 11 Store area 03 30 Office area 03 30 Office area 03 The maintenance program for the areas for a rental unit, for a builing and for the property runs to check if the total of the store area is the same as the usage area. the same as the usage area. You can use the total area as a calculation basis (for example for conditions or service charge settlement). conditions or service charge settlement). conditions or service charge settlement). conditions or service charge settlement). A: Q: A: Q: 14) Do you want the system to (automatically) assign a functional location to this Real Estate object? Explanation: You have the following options: 0 System does not create a functional location but you can make a manual assignment. 1 Functional location is automatically created and assigned but retroactive changes in the master data or the Real Estate objects (such as business area) are not updated in the master data of the functional location. 2 Functional location is automatically created and assigned. Certain changes in the Real Estate objects are automatically updated in the master data of the functional location; Example: The Real Estate object hierarchy is taken into account when the functional location is automatically assigned; the functional location hierarchy is adjusted. If you change the assignment of a rental unit to another building, or you change the building hierarcy, the functional location hierarchy is automatically updated. hierarchy is automatically updated. hierarchy is automatically updated. A: Q: A: Q: 16) Who edits the objects and processes? 15) Do you want to use a user status for this object and if yes, which ones? 13) Do you want to use the user-fields and if yes, how do you want to fill these objects?

Explanation: If necessary, consider the use of the authorization group field. If necessary, consider the use of the authorization group field. A: 70 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP -

Q: 17) Which Values Do You Want To Use For The Additional Data About Buildings (Parish, Floor, Heritable Building Right)? A: Q: 18) Do you have other values to maintain for insurances, or assessed values and deadlines for new development or modernizations etc.? A: Q: A: Q: A: 20) Which partners have to be maintained for the object? 19) Do you plan to link the object to projects?

7.1.4.
Questions: Q: A:

Rental Unit

1) Are your rental units for residential, commercial or mixed usage?

Q: 2) How many rental units do you want to manage in the system (number of rental units for apartments, state-funded apartments, commercial units)? A: Q: 3) What number range do you want to create for the objects (documents)?

Explanation: The standard Customizing has default values for the object and document number ranges and you can usually copy these default values. You can define the number ranges for each company code for the master data objects, business entity, property, building, rental unit, and for contracts. A: Q: A: Q: 5) Do you want to substitute or validate values when you are editing the objects or processes? If yes, what do you want to substitute or validate and how? A: 4) Do You Want Numbers To Be Internally Or Externally Assigned?

71 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP Q: 6) What usage types do the rental units have? To which internal usage types do you want to assign these usage types? Explanation: Every external usage type has to be assigned to an internal usage type. The selection of internal usage types for a rental unit is predefined: (01 Privately financed accommodation; 02 Public authority supported accommodation, 03 Commercial tenancy law; 04 Commercial parking space; 05 Private parking space; 06 Rental unit mixed usage; 07 Advertising space; 08 Stand area; 09 General parking space) A: Q: 7) Will you assign rental units directly to a business entity?

Explanation: You can only directly assign rental units to business entities in the internal usage types 04 and 05 (parking spaces). A: Q: A: Q: A: 9) Do you intend to use a cost center for posting vacancy costs? [ ]Yes [ ]No 8) Do you plan to assign the object to a business area or profit center?

Q: 10) Which rental unit fields do you want to have as required, optional, display or hidden fields, depending on the usage type? Explanation: For the rental unit the field status is further differentiated by the usage type. A: Q: A: Q: 12) Do you want the system to (automatically) assign a functional location to this Real Estate object? Explanation: You have the following options: 0 System does not create a functional location but you can make a manual assignment. 1 Functional location is automatically created and assigned but retroactive changes in the master data or the Real Estate objects (such as business area) are not updated in the master data of the functional location. 2 Functional location is automatically created and assigned. Certain changes in the Real Estate objects are automatically updated in the master data of the functional location; Example: The Real Estate object hierarchy is taken into account when the functional location is automatically assigned; the functional location hierarchy is adjusted. If you change the assignment of a rental unit to another building, or you change the building hierarcy, the 72 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc 11) Do you want to use the user-fields and if yes, how do you want to fill these objects?

ValueSAP functional location hierarchy is automatically updated. hierarchy is automatically updated. A: Q: A: Q: 14) What rental unit location description data do you want to use? 13) Do you want to use a user status for this object and if yes, which ones? hierarchy is automatically updated.

Explanation: Location description data: Building part, floor, location in floor, lift up to floor A: Q: 15) Do you want to maintain a value for the account determination for the object (RU, RA, general contract)? Explanation: This value is the account determination key for the account determination. Use this account determination value to define an object- specific account determination. A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 21) Which apportionment units do you want to be able to define for these objects? 20) If you intend to maintain rooms for rental units, which room types will you use? 19) Which room types do you want to use? 18) Which fixtures and fittings characteristics do you intend to maintain for the object? 17) Do you want to have reasons for irregular rent increases? If yes, which ones? 16) Do you want to use occupancy obligations for the rental unit? And if yes, which ones?

Explanation: Apportionment units can be maintained for either the rental unit or the rental agreement (such as the number of aerial connections on a rental unit and the number of people on the rental agreement). 73 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP -

A: Q: 22) Do you want to make a consumption-dependent service charge settlement (using meter readings)? Explanation: In this case you have to define which meters are to be created for which rental units and the number range. A: Q: A: Q: 24) What area types do you want to use? 23) Which vacancy reasons do you want to use?

Explanation: Area types are defined for buildings, properties, rental units and rooms. They are usually used for the service charge settlement. A: Q: 25) Which area types are area totals?

Explanation: Example for an area total Example for an area total Area type Area descr. Area total 03 Usable area -- 11 Store area 03 30 Office area 03 30 Office area 03 The maintenance program for the areas for a rental unit, for a builing and for the property runs to check if the total of the store area is the same as the usage area. the same as the usage area. You can use the total area as a calculation basis (for example for conditions or service charge settlement). conditions or service charge settlement). conditions or service charge settlement). conditions or service charge settlement). A: Q: 26) Which area types are reference areas (divided into commercial, residential and mixed usage)? A: Q: A: Q: 28) Which area types should the user be able to enter (allowed)? Which should require an entry (required)? Which should be automatically superimposed when a rental unit is created? A: Q: 29) What is the selection of conditions you want for this object? 74 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc 27) Which area types should you be able to edit (depending on external usage type)?

ValueSAP -

Explanation: You can have different conditions for each condition group (rental unit, rental agreement, management contract, general contract). A: Q: 30) Do you intend to use different condition types for the basic rent (for instance office basic rent, store basic rent etc.)? A: Q: A: Q: 32) In which hierarchy level do you want a new condition category to be when you are adding new conditions to the selection? Explanation: Observe account determination for this special G/L transaction. Figures available for the hierarchy display when adding new conditions Figures available for the hierarchy display when adding new conditions When you are adding new conditions in the maintenance dialog for rental units, rental agreements, management contracts and offers (respective condition groups), the figure entered here specifies the hierarchy level on which the condition type appears. hierarchy level on which the condition type appears. When you activate the "Insert new condition types", the hierarchy level 0 displays all the conditions that have not yet been used. The additional condition types of level 1, level 2 and so on can be displayed by activating "Display +". displayed by activating "Display +". The figure 9 can be used to specify conditions that you do not want to be included in the selection available to the user. We recommend using the figure 9 when: using the figure 9 when: - Conditions still exist on the "old" contracts but will not be used in the new contracts - The condition type "cash deposit" has to be permissible for the rental agreement but cannot be entered in the condition screen (but in the "Rental collateral" dialog box) - Rent reductions are to be maintained in the dialog box "Rent reductions" and not directly in the rental agreement. A: Q: 33) Which conditions do you want to have as mandatory, hidden (when creating) and for which conditions is the zero value (preassignment field save) permissible? Explanation: Defects recording for the inspection lot. "Save Preassignment" Field: When, as is usually the case, the indicator is not set, condition items with values the same as in Customizing or for which no values (or, the zero value) have been entered are automatically deleted during saving. You can prevent this automatic deletion of condition items by setting the indicator "Save conditions identical with preassignment" for the corresponding condition type. corresponding condition type. We recommend a "zero condition" if no advance payments have been specified for the condition "Advance payment sales-based rent" or the conditions (even if they have a zero value) are the same as the sales agreements but you still want to save them. agreements but you still want to save them. A: 31) In which order should the condition types be displayed?

75 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP Q: 34) Which condition categories are used (for instance basic rent, advance payments, flat rates, surcharges)? A: Q: 35) Which condition types are mutually exclusive, and which conditions of one category are possible for each object (rental unit, contract) (min./max./exactly one, unlimited)? A: Q: 36) Should the conditions of the lease-out be transferred to the rental unit at rental end? If so, what amount? A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 40) Who edits the objects and processes? 39) Do you intend to rent rooms individually? 38) If you have garages to manage, are they always linked to another rental unit? 37) Should the conditions of the lease-out be used for the next lease-out at rental end?

Explanation: If necessary, consider the use of the authorization group field. If necessary, consider the use of the authorization group field. A: Q: 41) Do you plan to use Workflow to help you create or change the object or process? If yes, how? A: Q: A: 42) Which partners have to be maintained for the object?

7.1.5.
Questions: Q: A:

Rooms

1) Do you wand the system to map rooms? If yes, how many objects are involved?

76 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP -

Q:

2) What number range do you want to create for the objects (documents)?

Explanation: The standard Customizing has default values for the object and document number ranges and you can usually copy these default values. You can define the number ranges for each company code for the master data objects, business entity, property, building, rental unit, and for contracts. A: Q: A: Q: 4) What area types do you want to use? 3) Do You Want Numbers To Be Internally Or Externally Assigned?

Explanation: Area types are defined for buildings, properties, rental units and rooms. They are usually used for the service charge settlement. A: Q: 5) Which area types are area totals?

Explanation: Example for an area total Example for an area total Area type Area descr. Area total 03 Usable area -- 11 Store area 03 30 Office area 03 30 Office area 03 The maintenance program for the areas for a rental unit, for a builing and for the property runs to check if the total of the store area is the same as the usage area. the same as the usage area. You can use the total area as a calculation basis (for example for conditions or service charge settlement). conditions or service charge settlement). conditions or service charge settlement). conditions or service charge settlement). A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 8) Who edits the objects and processes? 7) Which object characteristics do you intend to use? 6) Which room types do you want to use?

Explanation: If necessary, consider the use of the authorization group field. If necessary, consider the use of the authorization group field. A:

77 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP Q: 9) Do you plan to use Workflow to help you create or change the object or process? If yes, how? A:

7.1.6.
Questions: Q: A: Q:

Land Register

1) Do you want the system to map land register information?

2) What number range do you want to create for the objects (documents)?

Explanation: The standard Customizing has default values for the object and document number ranges and you can usually copy these default values. You can define the number ranges for each company code for the master data objects, business entity, property, building, rental unit, and for contracts. A: Q: A: Q: 4) Which land register types do you intend to use, which types of charges in Section III, and which charges and restrictions in Section II? A: Q: 5) Are there any further rights and restrictions that are not documented in the land register? A: Q: A: Q: 7) Who edits the objects and processes? 6) Should the system manage all your parcels of land? 3) Do You Want Numbers To Be Internally Or Externally Assigned?

Explanation: If necessary, consider the use of the authorization group field. If necessary, consider the use of the authorization group field. A:

7.1.7.
Questions:

Correction Items (Germany)

78 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP Q: 1) Do you want to map correction items in the system?

Explanation: German law: The correction item groups together the acquisition and manufacture costs of an asset as well as the deductible or non-deductible input taxes of these costs. Correction items for assets are grouped together in Asset Accounting. In the correction items, the input tax amounts are updated according to German tax regulations based on the option, composite or base rates. German tax regulations based on the option, composite or base rates. A:

7.1.8.
Questions:

Participation ID

Q: 1) How do you want to designate the length and name (part of the key) of the participation ID? Explanation: The designation of the participant ID is character string with 10 characters. A: Q: 2) Which groups do you want to map for the service charge settlement?

Explanation: Groups can be made for all business entities and participant groups. Rental units are grouped together to form one group that participates in the service charge settlement costs. These groups can defined on a time-dependent basis. A: Q: 3) Who edits the objects and processes?

Explanation: If necessary, consider the use of the authorization group field. If necessary, consider the use of the authorization group field. A:

7.1.9.
Questions:

Settlement Unit

Q: 1) How do you want to designate the name (part of the key) and the length of the settlement unit? Explanation: The name of the participant ID is a 10 digit character string. The settlement unit is 5 digits in length. A: Q: 2) Do you plan to use cross-business entity settlement units? 79 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP A: Q: A: Q: 4) Should the system prevent the multiple assignment of rental units to settlement units with the same service charge key? A: [ ]Yes [ ]No 5) Do you want to allow more than one apportionment factor per settlement unit? 3) Which service charge keys will you use?

Q:

Explanation: For example, should the factor could be 40% area and 60% consumption. A: [ ]Yes [ ]No 6) Which settlement variants will you use (for instance yearly, twice-yearly,...)?

Q: A:

Q: 7) Which apportionment units or distribution keys (areas per rental unit and so on) do you want to use? Explanation: If you want to use consumption-dependent apportionment factors for the service charge settlement, you need to have the corresponding meter for the rental unit. A: Q: 8) Do you plan to use heating days (monthly temperature reference no. used in Switzerland)? A: [ ]Yes [ ]No 9) Who edits the objects and processes?

Q:

Explanation: If necessary, consider the use of the authorization group field. If necessary, consider the use of the authorization group field. A:

7.1.10.
Questions: Q:

Master Settlement Unit

1) Do you want to use master settlement units? 80

Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP -

Explanation: Use master settlement units if you want to group together the different service charges incurred by one supplier on one invoice. A: [ ]Yes [ ]No 2) Which settlement units will you assign to which master settlement units?

Q: A: Q:

3) Who edits the objects and processes?

Explanation: If necessary, consider the use of the authorization group field. If necessary, consider the use of the authorization group field. A:

7.1.11.
Questions: Q: A:

Heating System

1) With which external settlement company do you work?

Q: 2) If you intend to carry out external heating costs settlements, which heating systems will you create? A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 5) Do you plan to exchange service charge settlement data with external settlement companies using data medium exchange? A: 4) Which service charge keys will be settled by external companies? 3) Do you want to use the user-fields and if yes, how do you want to fill these objects?

7.2.
7.2.1.

Partner
Business Partner Real Estate

Questions: Q: 1) Do you plan to group business partners into business areas and applications? 81 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP -

A: Q: 2) If you intend to retain SAP's number range for business partners and addresses, will you use internal or external numbering? A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 6) Which legal forms do the organizations that you intend to manage in the system as partners have? A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 13) If you intend to map potential rental applicants in the system, would you like to maintain levels of credit standing and institutes providing credit standing information? Which ones? A: 12) If you intend to use partner-partner relationships, which types? 11) If you intend to use employee groups, which types? 10) Which employment status will you use for natural persons? 9) Which marital property regime will you use for natural persons? 8) Which marital status will you use for natural persons? 7) Which legal entity will you use for organizations? 5) Which address ID do you intend to use? 4) Which letter form of address do you intend to use? 3) Which forms of address do you intend to use?

82 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP Q: 14) Do you want to maintain memos for business partners? If yes, what type of memo?

Explanation: General, others or special memos as well as role-specific memos such as creditstanding, previous or present tenancy can be maintained. A: Q: 15) Do you want to use business partner additional data? If yes, which data do you want to use? Explanation: You can maintain 11 tables with values. The tables are designated as group keys. group keys. Example: In 'Group key 1' you want to maintain values for 'special hobby' A: Q: A: Q: 17) If you intend to subdivide a role into different role types, which role will you divide into which role type? A: Q: 18) The "master tenant with customer account" business partner should take priority over the customer. Does that correspond with the processes and responsibility rules in your organization? A: Q: 19) Do you want to preassign values to fields when customers are automatically created? If yes, which fields? Explanation: Typical fields are: reconciliation account, payment conditions and key for payment grouping, dunning processes and dunning group keys. A: Q: 20) In which components do you want to assign partner roles? 16) Which partner roles will you need (for instance tenant, owner, manager, clerk)?

Explanation: Example: Tenant to rental agreement, janitor to building A: Q: 21) Which role-specific fields do you want to define as required, optional, display or hidden fields? A:

83 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP Q: 22) When creating, changing or displaying business partner data, which fields do you want to have as required, optional, display or hidden fields? A: Q: 23) When creating a tenant or manager, should the system automatically copy the address of the object? A:

D. Business Processes
1. Financial Accounting
1.1.
1.1.1.
Questions: Q: A: 1) Do your posting periods correspond to the calendar months? [ ]Yes [ ]No 2) Is your fiscal year identical with the calendar year?

Basic Settings
Fiscal Year and Posting Periods

Q: A:

Q: 3) If your fiscal year is not identical with the calendar year, please provide a schedule of period closing for the past, current and next year. A: Q: 4) Do all your company codes have the same fiscal year/fiscal year variant? Provide details if this is not the case. A: Q: A: Q: 6) Who is responsible for opening and closing accounting periods (including for materials management)? A: 5) When do you close your fiscal year?

84 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP 1.1.2.
Questions: Q: A: Q: 2) For which types of documents are the document numbers assigned internally/externally? Explanation: Are there any legal requirements? A: Q: 3) What is the document numbering logic? 1) What criteria do you use to classify your documents?

Document

Explanation: Possible reconciliation with SD/MM A: Q: A: 4) Are the document numbers assigned on a yearly basis?

1.1.3.
Questions:

Posting Help

Q: 1) Which help for posting do you need (such as account assignment models, sample documents, control totals, user parameters)? A:

1.1.4.
Questions:

Tax on Sales/Purchases in SAP System

Q: 1) Value added tax: Which are the current tax rates in the countries of your company codes? A: Q: A: Q: A: 85 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc 3) How do you handle taxes on imports (tax rate, reporting requirements)? 2) Value added tax: Do you have non-deductible taxes?

ValueSAP Q: A: Q: 5) Do you have companies with plants in foreign countries? 4) How do you handle taxes on exports (tax rate, reporting requirements)?

Explanation: "Foreign plants" functions (SD/MM integration) A: Q: A: Q: 7) How do you calculate taxes if there are cash discounts? 6) What are the tax reporting requirements?

Explanation: Is tax calculated on the amount after cash discount? A: Q: A: Q: A: 9) Do you use a particular exchange rate for taxes? If so, please specify. 8) To which G/L accounts will taxes be posted?

1.1.5.
Questions: Q: A:

Tax on Sales/Purchases in Non-SAP System

1) Do you use an external system to calculate tax on sales/purchases? [ ]Yes [ ]No

1.1.6.
Questions: Q: A: Q: A:

Withholding Tax

1) What are the reporting requirements for contractors, self-employed etc. in your country?

2) How do you transmit this information to the tax authorities and your vendors?

1.1.7.
Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

Inflation
86

ValueSAP Questions: Q: A: 1) Are there legal requirements regarding inflation in your country? [ ]Yes [ ]No

Q: 2) If there are legal requirements for inflation, how do they impact financial accounting: Do you use hard currency or do you use periodic revaluation? A:

1.1.8.
Questions:

Schedule Manager

Q: 1) Are the processes that you run on a regular basis (such as period-end closing, payment run, dunning run) scheduled and monitored using a Scheduler? Explanation: The financial calendar and the consolidation monitor, earlier features of the SAP system, have been replaced by the Schedule Manager. The Schedule Manager supports you when defining, scheduling, executing, and controlling complex processes that have to be carried out on a regular basis, and often involve a large number of individual objects being proceessed in mass processing. Period-end closing is an example of this type of complex process. A: [ ]Yes [ ]No

1.2.
1.2.1.

General Ledger Accounting

Postings in G/L
Park G/L Account Document 1.2.1.1.

Questions: Q: 1) What is your procedure for parking and releasing documents?

Explanation: Are "Workflow" functions planned? A: 1.2.1.2. Questions: Q: 1) What types of general ledger transactions do you process? G/L Account Posting

Explanation: Check document types A: Q: 2) Which internal documents do you need to print? 87 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP A: 1.2.1.3. Questions: Q: 1) Do you have documents that occur on a regular basis (monthly or quarterly, for example)? A: 1.2.1.4. Questions: Q: 1) How should a document reversal update the balances of the relevant accounts? Document Reversal Recurring Entry

Explanation: Negative posting? A: Q: A: 1.2.1.5. Questions: Q: 1) How do you handle accruals? Accrual/Deferral Posting 2) Do you want do define a specific document type for reverse documents?

Explanation: Function "create accrual/deferral document" in the task level menu A:

1.2.2.
1.2.2.1. Questions:

General Ledger Account Analysis

General Ledger Line item Analysis

Q: 1) Is there certain information that you wish to be able to display when you view items online? Explanation: The function "Create accrural/deferral document" in task level menu A: 1.2.2.2. Questions: Q: A: 1.2.2.3. Blueprint_FICO_1.doc G/L Evaluations 88 1) Which online analysis options do you use? Balance Analysis

ValueSAP -

Questions: Q: A: 1) What daily, weekly, periodic, and ad hoc reports do you need for the general ledger?

1.2.3.
1.2.3.1. Questions: Q: A:

Account Clearing [GL]

Automatic Clearing

1) By what criteria do you clear open items?

1.2.4.
1.2.4.1. Questions: Q:

General Ledger Planning

General Ledger Planning

1) What planning (budgeting) do you carry out in your General Ledger?

Explanation: Pay heed to integrative planning with CO A: Q: A: Q: 3) How do you distribute planned amounts to individual planning periods (for example, equal distribution among periods, seasonal distribution)? A: Q: A: 4) Does your planning take into consideration non-financial (statistical) data? 2) Do you plan on a monthly, quarterly, or annual basis?

1.2.5.
1.2.5.1. Questions: Q: A:

Account Balance Interest Calculation (G/L)

Account Balance Interest Calculation for General Ledger

1) For which G/L accounts do you calculate interest on balances? Give a brief description.

1.2.6.
Questions: Q:

Closing Operations

1) Which internal and external evaluations belong to month-end closing? 89

Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP -

A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 4) How do you specifically handle reporting for taxes on sales and purchases and other statutory requirements? A: Q: 5) What are your reconciliation procedures? 3) Describe your current process and time frame for year-end closing. 2) Which processes do you use to prepare the month-end closing reports?

Explanation: Within Financial Accounting: (Does G/L accounting tally with subledger accounting? Does Financial Accounting tally with Materials Management, Assets Accounting, Controlling, and so on?) A: 1.2.6.1. Questions: Q: 1) Describe your foreign currency revaluation process and which valuation methods/exchange rate types you use. A: Q: 2) In which cases do you post foreign currency revaluations manually? Foreign Currency Valuation for Open Items

Explanation: F-05 A: 1.2.6.2. Questions: Q: 1) Describe your foreign currency revaluation process and which valuation methods/exchange rate types you use. A: Q: 2) In which cases do you post foreign currency revaluations manually? Foreign Currency Valuation for Balances

Explanation: F-05 90 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP -

A: 1.2.6.3. Questions: Q: 1) Do you classify open vendor/customer items in the financial statements according to short, medium, or long term receivables/payables? Describe your procedure. A: 1.2.6.4. Questions: Q: 1) Do you show goods receipts without an invoice and invoices without goods receipts separately in your balance sheet reporting? A: 1.2.6.5. Risk Questions: Q: 1) What procedure to you use to determine and post a flat-rate individual value adjustment? A: 1.2.6.6. Questions: Q: 1) Do you need to produce an internal balance sheet on business area or profit center level? Explanation: You may need to make subsequent adjustments, in other words, distribute cash discounts (for example) to the source business areas/profit centers. A: [ ]Yes [ ]No 1.2.6.7. Questions: Q: A: 1.2.6.8. Questions: Q: 1) Which periodic reports do you carry out in general ledger accounting? Periodic Reports 1) Do you create financial statements on a monthly, quarterly or yearly basis? Financial Statement Creation Profit and Loss Adjustment Flat-Rate Individual Value Adjustment due to Default or Credit GR/IR Clearing Account Maintenance Regroup Receivables/Payables

91 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP Explanation: see subsidiary ledgers too. A: Q: A: Q: 3) What are the critical monthly, quarterly and annual reports that you need for Asset Accounting? A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 8) By which organizational units (or combinations of units) are asset reporting functions structured (for example, company, cost center etc)? A: 1.2.6.9. Questions: Q: A: 1) How many retained earnings accounts do you have? Carry Forward G/L Balances 7) How do you create your inventory lists? Do you use barcodes? 6) Are there any particular reports you run for leased assets? 5) Are there any particular reports you would like for low value assets? 4) Which kind of reports do you use to reconcile asset accounting with the general ledger? 2) What type of information flow do you have for the results of periodic asset reporting?

1.2.7.
Questions:

Integration

Q: 1) How should the areas asset accounting, overhead cost controlling, materials management, payroll, and sales and distribution be integrated with general ledger accounting? Explanation: You should also give consideration to special account assignments and document summarizations. 92 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP A: Q: A: 2) Do you wish to allow postings to decentralized general ledgers? [ ]Yes [ ]No

1.3.
1.3.1.

Accounts Payable
Vendor Down Payments

Questions: Q: 1) In which cases do your vendors require you to make a payment prior to the processing of an order or shipment? Explanation: Comment for PS: Note that it is possible to schedule a down payment in the invoicing plan for an externally processed or general costs activity, or for an externally procured material component within the project. A: Q: 2) Please describe the complete process currently in place for down payments, including the postings that are generated. Explanation: Comment for PS: Note that it is possible to schedule a down payment in the invoicing plan for an externally processed or general costs activity, or for an externally procured material component within the project. A: Q: 3) Do you plan on paying down payments with the automatic payment program?

Explanation: Comment for PS: The transfer posting of cash items is a process that takes place at the end of the period. It must be carried out before you can see the current cash items in the project. A: [ ]Yes [ ]No

1.3.2.
Questions:

Invoices and Credit Memos

Q: 1) What are your internal procedures and controls from the point of invoice receipt to payment? Explanation: Course of action for invoice verification without MM A: 1.3.2.1. Blueprint_FICO_1.doc Vendor Document Parking 93

ValueSAP -

Questions: Q: A: 1.3.2.2. Questions: Q: A: Q: 2) Can you use templates for some of these invoices? 1) Which invoices, that are not related to a purchase order, do you typically post? Invoice Receipt 1) What is your procedure for parking and releasing invoices and or/credit memos?

Explanation: Reference documents, for example A: Q: 3) How do you handle transactions in foreign currencies?

Explanation: Handling of exchange rates - for example, manual entry of exchange rate in the document? A: Q: A: Q: 5) How do you handle cash discounts? 4) Describe any taxes that must be calculated on vendor transactions.

Explanation: Gross or net procedure? A: Q: 6) Is your cash discount base net or gross?

Explanation: Taxes on sales/purchases Taxes on sales/purchases A: 1.3.2.3. Questions: Q: 1) How do you process vendor credit memos? Vendor Credit Memo

94 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP Explanation: Clearing or disbursement? A: 1.3.2.4. Questions: Q: 1) How should a document reversal update the balances of the relevant accounts? Document Reversal

Explanation: Negative posting? A: Q: A: 1.3.2.5. Questions: Q: 1) Do you have documents that occur on a regular basis (monthly or quarterly, for example)? A: Recurring Entry 2) Do you want do define a specific document type for reverse documents?

1.3.3.
1.3.3.1. Questions:

Vendor Account Analysis

Vendor Line Item Analysis

Q: 1) Is there certain information that you wish to be able to display when you view vendor postings online? Explanation: ABAP List Viewer/Line layout variants A: 1.3.3.2. Questions: Q: A: 1.3.3.3. Questions: Q: A: 1) Which evaluations do you need for vendors? Vendor Account Evaluations 1) Which online analysis options do you use? Balance Analysis

95 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP 1.3.4.
Questions: Q: 1) Which payment methods do you use (check, bank transfers, bills of exchange, direct debit, etc.)? A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 4) How do you pay your employees (e.g. travel expenses)? 3) How do you pay your foreign vendors (by check, bank transfer, etc.) 2) How do you pay your domestic vendors (by check, bank transfer etc.)?

Vendor Payments

Explanation: Are you using the HR module? Are accounts managed for each employee? A: Q: A: Q: 6) Do you always issue a single payment for multiple invoices to the same vendor? If not please specify the exceptions. A: Q: 7) How do you handle payables to vendors that are also customers? 5) How do you handle partial payments to vendors?

Explanation: Separate payment? Clearing? A: Q: 8) How do you process credit memos from vendors?

Explanation: Clearing or payment? A: Q: 9) How do you handle cash discounts?

Explanation: Gross or net procedure? 96 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP A: Q: 10) How do you handle exchange rate differences in foreign currency payments?

Explanation: Time of update of exchange rate differences/account determination A: Q: 11) How do you create the payment media (payment forms, remittance advices or electronic files) for these payment methods? A: Q: A: 12) Do you use prenumbered checks? [ ]Yes [ ]No 13) How do you reconcile your check register (cleared checks)?

Q: A: Q: A:

14) How do you transfer your electronic payment file to the bank?

1.3.4.1. Questions:

Vendor Payment Request

Q: 1) In which cases do your vendors require you to make payment before the date of required payment on the invoice? Explanation: Observe account determination for this special G/L transaction. A: 1.3.4.2. Questions: Q: 1) How do you release invoices that have been blocked for payment? Release for Payment

Explanation: Observe possible blocking reasons / workflow A: 1.3.4.3. Questions: Q: 1) In what cases do you use manual payments to vendors? 97 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc Manual Outgoing Payments

ValueSAP -

A: Q: A: 1.3.4.4. Questions: Q: 1) How do you post payments? Which G/L accounts are used? Which additional account assignments (for example, cost centers) do you need for bank postings, bank charges ac counts, cash discount accounts, and exchange rate differences? A: Q: 2) Do you wish to clear vendor invoices at the time of payment or at the time the bank statement is posted? Explanation: Payment method indicator: Selecting payment order and not payment posting means that the payment program: does not post a payment document does not clear the paid items. does not clear the paid items. Instead, a payment order is created and saved. The information contained therein can be used to clear the item at a later date. contained therein can be used to clear the item at a later date. The posting of the payment occurs with the account statement of the bank and selection of the associated open items via entry of the payment order. payment order. The paid items are locked until the payment is posted. This means that they cannot be used in other clearing transactions or further payment runs. A: Q: 3) Do you enter payments automatically based on an electronic bank statement? Describe in detail how these payments are processed. Explanation: Observe collection procedure, for example A: Q: A: 4) USA: Do you use the lockbox procedure? [ ]Yes [ ]No 5) Switzerland: Do you use the POR procedure? [ ]Yes [ ]No 6) How often do you make automatic payments? Automatic Outgoing Payments 2) Do you print or hand-write the payment media (for example, debit memo forms)?

Q: A:

Q: A:

98 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP -

Q: 7) Which bank account(s) are used for payments? List the bank accounts by payment method, by foreign currency, or any other criteria relevant for bank selection. A: Q: 8) How does your actual cash position influence the way you assign funds to the different banks in the payment program? Explanation: Maintenance of available amounts A: Q: 9) How do you handle bank charges?

Explanation: Perhaps define account determination A: 1.3.4.5. Questions: Q: 1) For which incoming payments do you create payment medium forms (incoming bills of exchange, for example)? A: Q: A: Q: A: 3) Do you use your own number management for checks (check management)? [ ]Yes [ ]No 2) Which incoming payments are made electronically? Vendor Payment Medium Creation

1.3.5.
Questions: Q:

Account Clearing [AP]

1) In which cases are open items cleared other than through payment receipts?

Explanation: Note: With advance payments and offsetting, clearing has to be done afterwards. A: 1.3.5.1. Questions: Q: 1) By what criteria do you clear open items? 99 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc Automatic Clearing

ValueSAP -

A:

1.3.6.
Questions: Q: A: 1.3.6.1. Questions: Q: A: Q: A: 1.3.6.2. Questions: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A:

Interest Calculation [A/P]

1) For which vendors do you calculate interest?

Vendor Account Balance Interest Calculation

1) Which interest rates do you use?

2) How do you post interest charges?

Calculation of Interest on Arrears - Vendors

1) After how many days do you calculate interest on overdue amounts?

2) Which interest rates do you charge different vendor groups?

3) How do you handle credit memos?

4) How do you post interest charges?

1.3.7.
1.3.7.1. Questions:

Correspondence with Vendors

Correspondence with Vendors

Q: 1) What correspondence (such as balance confirmation) and internal evaluations (such as internal documents) do you create for your vendors? Explanation: Correspondence is the written communication that is sent by the company to vendors. Internal evaluations serve as the internal documentation of business transactions with vendors. 100 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP -

A:

1.4.
1.4.1.

Accounts Receivable
Customer Down Payments

Questions: Q: 1) In which cases do you require your customers to make a payment prior to the processing an invoice or delivery? Explanation: Comment for PS: It is possible to schedule customer down payments in the project billing plan in WBS elements that have the indicator "Billing element". A: Q: 2) What is the complete process for down payments, including the postings that are generated? Explanation: Comment for PS: Note that it is possible to configure the use of milestones such that a down payment request is automatically triggered. When the milestone is completed, the request is generated by the settlement run. A: Q: 3) Do you plan on paying down payments with the automatic payment program? (direct debit) Explanation: Comment for PS: The transfer posting of cash items is a process that takes place at the end of the period. It must be carried out before you can see the current cash items in the project. A: [ ]Yes [ ]No 4) Do you plan on dunning down payments request? [ ]Yes [ ]No 1.4.1.1. Questions: Q: 1) How do you process customer down payments? Customer Down Payment

Q: A:

Explanation: Identification for separate reconciliation accounts A: Q: 2) How are these down payments cleared with the customer account? 101 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP -

A: Q: A: 3) Are some customer down payments related to projects?

1.4.2.
1.4.2.1. Questions: Q: A: Q: A: 1.4.2.2. Questions: Q: A: Q:

Invoices and Credit Memos

Customer Document Parking

1) Do customer invoices require any type of approval before they are posted?

2) What is your procedure for parking and releasing invoices and or/credit memos?

Outgoing Invoice

1) Which document types and document number ranges do you use?

2) Can you use templates for some of these invoices?

Explanation: Reference documents, for example A: Q: 3) How do you handle transactions in foreign currencies?

Explanation: How are exchange rates handled? For example, manual entry of the exchange rate in the document? A: [ ]Yes [ ]No 1.4.2.3. Questions: Q: 1) How do you process customer credit memos? Customer Credit Memo

Explanation: Clearing or disbursement? A: 1.4.2.4. Blueprint_FICO_1.doc Document Reversal 102

ValueSAP -

Questions: Q: 1) How should a document reversal update the balances of the relevant accounts?

Explanation: Negative posting? A: Q: A: 1.4.2.5. Questions: Q: 1) Do you have documents that occur on a regular basis (monthly or quarterly, for example)? A: Recurring Entry 2) Do you want do define a specific document type for reverse documents?

1.4.3.
1.4.3.1. Questions:

Account Analysis [A/R]

Customer Line Item Analysis

Q: 1) Is there any particular information that you wish to represent when representing customer postings online? Explanation: Note on ALV/line layout variants A: [ ]Yes [ ]No 1.4.3.2. Questions: Q: A: 1.4.3.3. Questions: Q: 1) Which procedures do you have in place to control your customers' credit limits? Credit Management Analysis 1) Which online analysis options do you use? Balance Analysis

Explanation: Time of credit limit check; Relevant documents for the credit limit check; Consequences of credit limit check (Notification of person responsible, locking of documents and so on) A: 1.4.3.4. Blueprint_FICO_1.doc Customer Evaluations 103

ValueSAP -

Questions: Q: A: 1) Which evaluations do you need for customers?

1.4.4.
Questions:

Customer Payments

Q: 1) Which payment procedure do your customers use? (Check, bank transfer, bill of exchange, debit memo procedure) A: Q: 2) How do you handle payment differences?

Explanation: For example, charging off, creating residual items, partial payment A: Q: A: Q: A: 1.4.4.1. Questions: Q: A: 1) Do you receive payment advices from your customers? [ ]Yes [ ]No 2) Do you enter payment advices manually prior to applying the payments? [ ]Yes [ ]No 1.4.4.2. Questions: Q: 1) How do you release invoices that have been blocked for payment? Release for Payment Payment Advice Note Processing 4) Do your customers provide reason codes for discrepancies in payments? 3) Are payment differences posted automatically?

Q: A:

Explanation: Observe possible blocking reasons / workflow A: 104 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP 1.4.4.3. Questions: Q: 1) Which procedure do you use to enter customer payments? Manual Incoming Payments

Explanation: Time of customer payment, time of customer payment notice/account statement A: Q: 2) Which payment procedure do your customers use? (Check, bank transfer, bill of exchange, debit memo procedure) A: Q: A: 1.4.4.4. Questions: Q: 1) How do you post payments? Which G/L accounts are used? Which additional account assignments (for example, cost centers) do you need for bank postings, bank charges ac counts, cash discount accounts, and exchange rate differences? A: Q: 2) Do you process automatic payments for your customers, such as direct debits and bills of exchange? Please describe in detail how these payments are processed. A: Q: 3) Do you enter payments automatically based on an electronic bank statement? Describe in detail how these payments are processed. Explanation: Observe collection procedure, for example A: Q: A: 4) USA: Do you use the lockbox procedure? [ ]Yes [ ]No 5) Switzerland: Do you use the POR procedure? [ ]Yes [ ]No Automatic Incoming Payments 3) Do you print or hand-write the payment media (for example, debit memo forms)?

Q: A:

105 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP Q: A: Q: 7) Which bank account(s) are used for payments? List the bank accounts by payment method, by foreign currency, or any other criteria relevant for bank selection. A: Q: 8) How does your actual cash position influence the way you assign funds to the different banks in the payment program? Explanation: Maintenance of available amounts A: Q: 9) How do you handle bank charges? 6) How often do you make automatic payments?

Explanation: Perhaps define account determination A: 1.4.4.5. Questions: Q: 1) For which incoming payments do you create payment medium forms (incoming bills of exchange, for example)? A: Q: A: 1.4.4.6. Questions: Q: 1) Do your customers pay by credit card? Describe in detail how these payments are processed. Explanation: Consultation required with SD A: Payment Card Settlement 2) Which incoming payments are made electronically? Customer Payment Medium Creation

1.4.5.
Questions: Q: A:

Bill of Exchange Receivable

1) Do your customers use bills of exchange to pay? Describe this procedure in detail. 106

Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP -

1.4.5.1. Questions:

Manual Payment by Bill of Exchange

Q: 1) If you process manual payments, do you want the option of directly entering a check or a bill of exchange? A: 1.4.5.2. Questions: Q: A: 1) Do you intend to issue bills of exchange to customers? Bill of Exchange Usage

1.4.6.
Questions: Q:

Account Clearing [AR]

1) In which cases are open items cleared other than through payment receipts?

Explanation: Note: With advance payments and offsetting, clearing has to be done afterwards. A: 1.4.6.1. Questions: Q: A: 1) By what criteria do you clear open items? Automatic Clearing

1.4.7.
1.4.7.1. Questions: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q:

Dunning Notice
Automatic Dunning

1) After how many days do you intend to issue a dunning notice?

2) What is the dunning frequency?

3) Do you dun various customer groups at different intervals?

4) Which types of dunning do you use? 107

Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP A: Q: A: Q: 6) Which organizational units are responsible for dunning (for example, company code, division)? A: Q: A: Q: A: 8) In which cases do you dun a vendor? 7) Do you calculate dunning interest or charge a dunning fee? 5) How many dunning levels do you have?

1.4.8.
1.4.8.1. Questions: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: 1.4.8.2. Questions: Q: A: Q: A:

Interest Calculation [A/R]

Customer Account Balance Interest Calculation

1) For which customers do you calculate interest on balances?

2) Which interest rates do you use?

3) How do you post interest charges?

4) What types of notices do you send to your customers and how often?

Calculation of Interest on Arrears - Customers

1) After how many days do you calculate interest on overdue amounts?

2) Which interest rates do you apply to your different groups of customers?

108 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP -

Q: A: Q: A: Q: A:

3) How do you handle credit memos?

4) How do you post interest charges?

5) What types of notices do you send to your customers and how often?

1.4.9.
1.4.9.1. Questions:

Correspondence with Customers

Correspondence with Customers

Q: 1) What sort of correspondence (account statements, balance confirmations, for example) and internal evaluations (internal documents, account balances, open item lists, for example) do you create for your customers? Explanation: Correspondence is the written communication that is sent by the company to customers. Internal evaluations serve as the internal documentation of business transactions with customers. A:

1.5.
1.5.1.

Bank Accounting
Incomings
Cash Journal 1.5.1.1.

Questions: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: 1.5.1.2. Questions: Q: 1) For which house banks would it make sense to use electronic bank statements? Do these banks have the required technical capability? 109 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc Electronic Bank Statement 3) How are these business transactions posted? 2) For which business transactions are incoming cash journal postings made? 1) How do you manage incoming cash?

ValueSAP A: Q: A: Q: 3) What specific information do the bank statements contain (e.g. invoice numbers)? If you wish to use the information for the payee to allocate items, you need to select a suitable interpretation algorithm. Explanation: Suitable interpretation algorithm (this may require additional company-specific programming via a user exit - see note 24281). A: Q: 4) Does you house bank transfer business transaction codes with the bank statements to help you classify the postings? A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 8) Do you want to distinguish between posting documents for manual and electronic bank statements for accounting and reporting purposes? A: 1.5.1.3. Questions: Q: 1) What specific information do your bank statements contain (for example, invoice numbers)? A: Q: 2) Does you house bank transfer business transaction codes with the bank statements to help you classify the postings? A: 110 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc Manual Account Statement 7) Do you process these payment methods via separate clearing accounts? 6) Which payment methods do you process using the FI payment program? 5) Outline the posting steps for typical bank statement postings. 2) In which format is the electronic bank statement available?

ValueSAP -

Q: A: Q: A: Q: A:

3) Outline the posting steps for typical bank statement postings.

4) Which payment methods do you process using the FI payment program?

5) Do you process these payment methods via separate clearing accounts?

Q: 6) Do you want to distinguish between posting documents for manual and electronic bank statements for accounting and reporting purposes? A: 1.5.1.4. Questions: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 3) What information given by the check issuer can be used to allocate items (check number, invoice number)? A: Q: 4) Sketch the posting steps for check deposits (are checks posted directly to customer accounts or via clearing accounts)? A: Q: 5) Do you want to separate check postings for general ledger accounting and subledger accounting? A: 1.5.1.5. Questions: Q: A: 111 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc 1) Do you want to monitor the bills of exchange presented? Bill of Exchange Presentation (Debit) 2) Do you enter checks from customers manually or electronically? 1) How many checks do you present to your house banks per day? Check Deposit Transaction

ValueSAP 1.5.1.6. Questions: Q: 1) Do you wish to have an overview of the average period outstanding, quantity, and total amount of outstanding (cashed and open) checks? A: [ ]Yes [ ]No Cashed Checks

Q: 2) Do you wish to have an overview per vendor of the outstanding checks for the G/L accounts managed on an open item basis? A: [ ]Yes [ ]No 1.5.1.7. Questions: Q: 1) Do you use the lockbox procedure? Lockbox (USA)

Explanation: Used mainly in the USA, the lockbox procedure is a procedure for the rapid deposit of checks. Checks that you send to the bank are credited to the payee's account, and the information entered is forwarded to the payee by file transfer. A: [ ]Yes [ ]No 1.5.1.8. Questions: Q: 1) Do you use the POR procedure? POR Procedure (Switzerland)

Explanation: The POR procedure is used to enter incoming customer payments that are made with a data medium via the postal service or the bank using the Swiss POR procedure. A:

1.5.2.
1.5.2.1. Questions:

Outgoings
Payment with Payment Requests

Q: 1) In addition to payments to or from customers and vendors, should payments between G/L accounts also be dealt with using the payment program? Explanation: Documentation: Payment requests form the basis for payment here, not open items (FI documents). A: [ ]Yes [ ]No 1.5.2.2. Blueprint_FICO_1.doc Cash Journal 112

ValueSAP Questions: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: 3) How are these business transactions posted? 2) For which business transactions are incoming cash journal postings made? 1) How do you manage incoming cash?

1.5.3.
1.5.3.1. Questions:

Check Management
Manage Check Balance

Q: 1) Do you use prenumbered checks, or do you assign your checks numbers from selfdefined number ranges? A: [ ]Yes [ ]No

1.5.4.
1.5.4.1. Questions: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A:

Account Balance Interest Calculation

Account Balance Interest Calculation

1) For which G/L accounts do you calculate interest on balances? Give a brief description.

2) Which interest rates do you use?

3) How do you post interest charges?

Q: 4) Do you combine the debit and credit balances of different accounts for interest calculation? Explanation: Cash pooling involves the fictitious combination of debit and credit balances on accounts. Interest is calculated on the pooled overall balance. A:

1.6.

Special Purpose Ledger

113

Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP Questions: Q: 1) Do you want to use the cost of sales accounting method of reporting, and implement the Special Purpose Ledger for this purpose? A: [ ]Yes [ ]No

Q: 2) Is the coding block adequate for your reporting requirements, or do you plan to make changes to the coding block? A:

1.6.1.
1.6.1.1. Questions: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A:

Prepare Ledger
Set Up Ledger

1) For what purpose do you wish to implement a Special Purpose Ledger?

2) What reporting requirements should be met by this Special Purpose Ledger?

3) Are postings to be made in this ledger? [ ]Yes [ ]No 4) From what source is the data to be taken, and how will it be transferred?

Q: A: Q: A:

5) What criteria should be used to check/summarize data?

1.6.2.
Questions:

Planning

Q: 1) If planning is being entered in another application, do you want to have these planned values reflected in your special ledger? A: [ ]Yes [ ]No 2) Will you enter plan values directly into the special ledger? [ ]Yes [ ]No 114 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

Q: A:

ValueSAP -

Q: 3) Do you need to supplement plan values that are entered into the special ledger from other R/3 applications? A: [ ]Yes [ ]No

Q: 4) Do you require planning data to be matched to the reporting of actual data from the ledger? A: [ ]Yes [ ]No 5) Does the plan you want to report on already exist in another ledger? [ ]Yes [ ]No

Q: A:

Q: 6) Do you want to include actual data from previous periods as the part of the total plan values? A: [ ]Yes [ ]No

Q: 7) Are allocations being carried out within cost accounting that you wish to reflect in the special purpose ledger? A: Q: 8) Are there additional allocations that you want to carry out only in the Special Purpose Ledger? A:

1.6.3.
Questions:

Actual Posting

Q: 1) Do you need to maintain controls on the accounting periods for posting into your special ledger? A: [ ]Yes [ ]No 1.6.3.1. Questions: Q: 1) Will you have entries that have to be carried out in the special purpose ledger and not in the rest of the SAP System? A: [ ]Yes [ ]No 115 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc Direct Data Entry

ValueSAP 1.6.3.2. Questions: Q: 1) What will be the source of SAP transactions that you wish to have posted to your special purpose ledger? A: Q: 2) Are allocations being carried out within cost accounting that you wish to reflect in the special purpose ledger? A: 1.6.3.3. Questions: Q: 1) Does the new special ledger require data that was posted in the R/3 System prior to the ledger being created? (Customizing) A: [ ]Yes [ ]No 2) Do you wish to fill the special ledger with data when required? [ ]Yes [ ]No Data Transfer Integration Interface

Q: A:

1.6.4.
Questions:

Periodic Processing

Q: 1) Are there additional allocations that you want to carry out only in the Special Purpose Ledger? A: 1.6.4.1. Questions: Q: 1) Does the receiver of the allocated value want to identify the origin of the allocation, but does not need to identify the nature of the original value allocated? A: [ ]Yes [ ]No 1.6.4.2. Questions: Q: A: 1) Do the balances in the special ledger need to be summarized? [ ]Yes [ ]No 1.6.4.3. Blueprint_FICO_1.doc Currency Translation 116 Rollup Assessment

ValueSAP Questions: Q: 1) In which cases and for which accounts do you need to retranslate the amounts already posted? A: Q: A: Q: A: 1.6.4.4. Questions: Q: A: 1) Do the balance sheet accounts exist in the special purpose ledger? [ ]Yes [ ]No 2) Do you require initial values for your new P&L accounts? [ ]Yes [ ]No Balance Carried Forward [SL - Special Ledger] 3) To which accounts do you want the resulting exchange rates to be posted? 2) Which types of exchange rates do you need (for example, historical exchange rates)?

Q: A:

1.7.
1.7.1.

Valuation of Balances Relevant to Balance Sheet

Determination of lowest value
Lowest Value: Market Price Analysis 1.7.1.1.

Questions: Q: 1) Which movement types should have an influence on the market price? Specify the movement types you use over and above the standard ones. A: 1.7.1.2. Questions: Q: 1) Is every month#s consumption equally important for the range of coverage determination? If not, specify the weighting factors. A: Q: 2) Is every month#s stock quantity equally important for the range of coverage determination? If not, list the weighting factors. A: 117 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc Lowest Value: Range of Coverage Determination

ValueSAP Q: 3) Specify the percentage reductions (markdowns) for range-of-coverage determination. Are these to differ for the various material types? A: 1.7.1.3. Questions: Q: 1) Is every month's stock equally important for the movement rate determination? If not, list the weighting factors. A: Q: 2) Is every month's movements equally important for the movement rate determination? If not, list the weighting factors. A: Q: 3) Specify the percentage reductions (markdowns) for movement rate determination. Are different reductions to apply for different material types? A: 1.7.1.4. Questions: Q: 1) Do you want to change the price of the material according to the results of the lowest value determination process? If so, should this be done in every case or only for certain materials? A: 1.7.1.5. Questions: Q: 1) Should the costing run for products have an influence on the lowest-value determination process? A: Lowest value: Products Lowest Value: Price Variances Lowest Value: Determination of Mvt Rate

1.7.2.
1.7.2.1. Questions: Q: A: 1.7.2.2. Questions:

LIFO valuation
LIFO: Materials Identification

1) Which materials will be included in the LIFO valuation?

LIFO: Group Formation: Execute

Q: 1) Do you wish to group materials for LIFO valuation? Are the groups to be formed automatically? 118 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP -

A: 1.7.2.3. Questions: Q: 1) Do you want to include the results of the lowest value determination process in the LIFO valuation? A: LIFO: Lowest Value Comparison

1.7.3.
1.7.3.1. Questions: Q: A:

FIFO Valuation
FIFO: Material ID

1) Which materials do you wish to be included in the FIFO valuation?

1.8.
1.8.1.

Consolidation
Preparations for Consolidation

Questions: Q: 1) What types of validations need to be performed on the data at the original currency level? A: Q: 2) What types of validations need to be performed on the data at the translated currency level? A: 1.8.1.1. Questions: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 3) Do you plan an integrated elimination of intercompany payables and receivables? If so, should it be carried out automatically? A: 1.8.1.2. Setting Up Consolidation Rules 119 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc 2) Should the data be integrated into cost of sales accounting? 1) What integration has been planned? Describe your transfer methods. Integration

ValueSAP Questions: Q: A: Q: 2) What is the schedule for the reconciliation of receivables and payables, and the delivery of reporting data (changes in equity, equity holdings adjustments, changes in investments, and so on)? A: 1.8.1.3. Questions: Q: A: Q: A: 1.8.1.4. Questions: Q: 1) Internal receivables and payables must be matched and possibly reposted prior to forwarding data. How is this done in your business? A: 1.8.1.5. Questions: Q: 1) It is possible to post the standardizing entries for discrepancies between the individual statement and the consolidated statement in FI ? in your own company code). Do you want to use this option or should the standardizing entries be Explanation: It is possible to run standardizing entries in FI between individual financial statements and consolidated financial statements (possibly in own company code). Do you want to use this option or should the corporate valuation entries be posted centrally in the Consolidation component? A: 1.8.1.6. Questions: Q: 1) By choosing a parallel currency you can post the data for the consolidation at a later date directly in FI (entry in group currency). Do you want to use this function? A: 120 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc Decentralized Currency Translation Decentralized Corporate Valuation Postings Decentralized Balance Reconciliation 2) What are the responsibilities in your group in detail? 1) Which types of communication are used in your group? Applying Consolidation Rules 1) In which currencies are the transactions posted in the companies?

ValueSAP 1.8.2.
1.8.2.1. Questions: Q: A: Q: A: 1.8.2.2. Questions: Q: 1) Does the divestiture of a company entail a reclassification to another consolidation group, or is this a final consolidation? A: 1.8.2.3. Questions: Q: 1) How is business combination handled? Vertical, (meaning that a company is completely acquired by the other company), or horizontal ( meaning that a new company is formed)? A: 1.8.2.4. Questions: Q: A: 1.8.2.5. Questions: Q: A: 1) Do you want to structure the company into one or more separate legal entities? Company Split 1) Do you need an extra chart of accounts for consolidation? FS Chart of Accounts Change Company Merger Divestiture of a Company 2) What is the date of first consolidation? 1) Will your company make other acquisitions?

Master Data Maintenance

Acquisition of a Company

1.8.3.
Questions: Q: A:

Centralized Data Entry

1) Do you want real-time access to consolidation data?

Q: 2) Do you want drilldown capability in reports from the consolidation database to the original entry? 121 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP -

A: 1.8.3.1. Questions: Q: 1) If you have decided to load the consolidation database using a batch job, from which special purpose ledger will you be taking the data? A: Q: 2) Do you want to transfer entries from external systems to your special purpose ledger (similar to direct data entry, but as an interface.)? A: Data Transfer

1.8.4.
Questions:

Remote Data Entry

Q: 1) What will be the method to enter data directly into the consolidation database for companies which do not have direct access to SAP R/3? A: Q: 2) Must the accounting results for these companies be included in overall management reporting in CO? there let it flow to the consolidation database). A: Q: 3) Are the accounting results for these companies required only in the consolidation database? (If this is the case then manual data entry forms or MS Access data entry method could be used). A: 1.8.4.1. Questions: Q: 1) If the special purpose ledger is used , the consultant should identify fields included in reports then map the corresponding fields in the various R/3 modules to the fields in the special purpose ledger. A: Data Transfer

1.8.5.
Questions: Q: A:

Currency Translation

1) Are any of the companies denominated in a foreign currency?

122 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP -

Q: A:

2) Which currency translation method does this company uses?

1.8.5.1. Questions:

Central Currency Translation

Q: 1) Whenever FI data is delivered in group currency, it does not need to be translated again for Consolidation. Does this apply? A: [ ]Yes [ ]No

Q: 2) If consolidation data is to be translated, which translation method is to be used for which items (key date, average, historical exchange rate, other) ? A:

1.8.6.
1.8.6.1. Questions:

Postings
Standardizing Entries

Q: 1) Should standardizing entries be made to HB1 (special case: Entry in group currency, for example, high-inflationary currency)? A: [ ]Yes [ ]No

1.8.7.
Questions:

Intercompany Eliminations

Q: 1) Do you want different document types for eliminations in the income statement and balance sheet? A: [ ]Yes [ ]No 2) Do joint venture companies exist and do these need to eliminate investment income? [ ]Yes [ ]No

Q: A:

Q: 3) Should currency splitting be done for the elimination of payables/receivables (additional entry in transaction currency)? A: [ ]Yes [ ]No 1.8.7.1. Questions: 123 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc Intercompany Balance Verification

ValueSAP Q: A: 1) Are all companies managed in FI company codes, and is FI integration used? [ ]Yes [ ]No 1.8.7.2. Questions: Q: A: 1.8.7.3. Questions: Q: 1) Which items should be eliminated in the P&L: Clearing groups for IC sales, internal assessments, internal interest, and internal earnings? A: Q: A: 2) Should one-sided elimination be carried out, such as cost of sales accounting ? [ ]Yes [ ]No Elimination of IC Revenue and Expense 1) Should elimination differences be treated with or without affecting net income? Elimination of IC Payables & Receivables

1.8.8.
1.8.8.1. Questions: Q: A:

Elimination of IC Profit and Loss in Current Assets

Elimination of IU Profit/Loss in Transferred Inventory

1) Do you want distinctions by product groups, or by products themselves? [ ]Yes [ ]No 2) Which reporting procedure do you want to use: By percentage or by volume?

Q: A:

Q: 3) Should prior-year eliminations be cleared against appropriated retained earnings without affecting net income? A: [ ]Yes [ ]No

1.8.9.
1.8.9.1. Questions: Q: A:

Elimination of IC Profit and Loss in Fixed Assets

Elimination of IC Profit/Loss in Fixed Assets

1) Do you want to differentiate by asset groups, or by individual assets?

124 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP -

Q: A:

2) Should financial assets be eliminated as well as tangible fixed assets? [ ]Yes [ ]No

Q: 3) Should the transfer take into consideration capitalized internal activities/immaterial assets? A: [ ]Yes [ ]No

1.8.10.
1.8.10.1. Questions:

Consolidation of Investments
Consolidation Method

Q: 1) Which consolidation methods are use? Purchase method, proportional consolidation, or AT/equity? A: Q: A: Q: A: 1.8.10.2. Questions: Q: 1) How should the differential from first consolidation be treated? Keep goodwill (negative goodwill) separate or balance it as credit-side differential? A: Q: A: Q: 3) Should hidden reserves be assigned to goodwill (hidden additions to negative goodwill not yet realized)? A: [ ]Yes [ ]No 1.8.10.3. Questions: Q: 1) Should investment amortization/write-ups be automatic? 125 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc Investment Amortization/Write-Up 2) How should goodwill (negative goodwill) be treated? Amortizable life? First Consolidation 3) Should simultaneous or step consolidation be used? 2) Which method do you wish to use? Book value or revaluation?

ValueSAP A: [ ]Yes [ ]No 1.8.10.4. Questions: Q: A: 1.8.10.5. Questions: Q: 1) Where is the appropriation of retained earnings stated (profit and loss account or balance sheet)? A: Q: A: 1.8.10.6. Questions: Q: 1) Should the items be reclassified in their entirety or limited by partner relationship and/or transaction type? A: Q: A: 2) Do you wish to carry out reclassifications in local or group currency? Transfer Posting FI-LC 2) How should minority interests in annual net income be treated? Subsequent Consolidation 1) Should new differentials be treated together with existing differentials, or separately? Increase/Reduction in Capitalization

1.8.11.
Questions: Q: A:

Information System

1) Should your information system be consolidation-specific or cross-application?

1.8.12.
Questions: Q: A:

Reporting

1) Do you use the consolidation-related fields in the report? [ ]Yes [ ]No

1.8.13.
Questions:

Data Transfer to Other Systems (e.g. EIS)

126

Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP -

Q: A:

1) Should the consolidation-related fields be forwarded? [ ]Yes [ ]No

1.9.

Funds Management

Questions: Q: 1) At which level/for which organizational unit do financial statements have to be generated? A: Q: 2) At which level/for which organizational unit do you implement budget management/controls? A: Q: 3) At which level/for which organizational unit do you use cost accounting (Controlling). Where are the overlaps between Controlling, Funds Management, and Financial Accounting? A: Q: A: Q: 5) How is your budget structured? Where is budget assigned, are there any programs, expenditure/income types, funds? A: Q: A: Q: 7) Which accounting method do you use for your funds management (based on commitments, invoice receipt, other)? Explanation: Commitment basis, invoice receipt basis, others? A: Q: 8) Do you use different accounting approaches (US-GAAP, financial budgeting)? Provide a detailed description of the current situation (USA). A: 6) How do you think this budget structure will change in the future? 4) Describe the basic legal conditions for funds management within your organization.

127 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP Q: 9) How do you manage the documents arising from budget creation and change (logs, file rules, ...)? Is there any integration with the funds management system (such as direct access to the optical archive)? A: Q: 10) How long are the amount fields (number of places before and after decimal point) that you currently use for handling budget and assigned values? A: Q: 11) Do you use Internet applications within funds management? Describe the existing scenarios. A: Q: 12) Describe the current/future role of the Internet and how it affects your funds management. A: Q: 13) Provide an overview of the current IT landscape. Which applications are used in Funds Management? A: Q: 14) How is the budget generation process currently supported in your organization? Who uses the system(s) (budget department,...)? How is budget planning information consolidated in the budget? A: Q: 15) Will there be external systems feeding commitments or actual charges, if so, in which area? A: Q: 16) What procedures are triggered when a document is rejected that is transferred from an external system to the funds management system via an interface (such as when the budget is exceeded)? A: Q: 17) Describe the current procedure for internal checks and security relating to budget preparation, budget modification, and budget execution. A: Q: 18) Describe the existing approval procedure (workflow) at organizational level. Provide an overview of the participants and their roles. 128 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP A: Q: 19) Describe the existing approval procedure (workflow) at the level of the systems involved. Provide an overview of the participants and their roles. A: Q: 20) Describe the existing approval procedure (workflow) within the budgeting process. Provide an overview of the participants and their roles. A: Q: 21) Describe your existing/future requirements for access control and system security (smart cards, ...). A: Q: A: Q: 23) What applications are currently integrated into the funds management and need to be integrated in the future ? A: Q: 24) For integrated functions, what data resides in the budgetary part (is this limited to financial data or also information on quantities etc.) A: Q: 25) Do the sales system and funds management need to be integrated? Describe the current integration. What functions do you use for processing billing documents (functions for rendering accounts)? A: Q: 26) Do controlling and funds management need to be integrated? Describe the current integration. A: Q: 27) Do asset accounting and funds management need to be integrated? Describe the current integration. A: Q: 28) Do funds management and purchasing need to be integrated? Describe the current integration. 129 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc 22) Describe the confidentiality restrictions (if any) for funds, budgets, transactions etc.

ValueSAP A: Q: A: Q: 30) Integration between purchasing and warehouse funds center: Describe the impact on funds management (what impact will goods receipt and goods issue have?). A: Q: 31) Plant maintenance integration: Do plant maintenance and funds management need to be integrated? Describe the current integration. A: Q: 32) Do you wish to create personnel commitments in Funds and Position Management? 29) Purchasing integration: Do you use the functions of a warehouse funds center?

Explanation: Assuming that you answered "yes": More information on Funds and Position Management is available in the HR area: Master Data --> Position Management; Business Processes --> Position Management Business Processes --> Position Management A: Q: 33) Describe the logic currently used when posting tax on sales/purchases (accounts affected, posting examples). A: Q: 34) If a special handling of Sales Tax is currently applied in funds management # please describe the impact on the budget (availability check, budget consumption) A: Q: 35) Describe your current funds management environment: At which level is the budget data entered, the assigned funds entered, and the availability check carried out? Are changes planned? If so, what are the changes, and where will they be made? t A: Q: 36) What legacy data do you need to implement the SAP System live? Current year budget, funds balances,....? A: Q: 37) Describe how legacy data should be included in your new system (which data, degree of detail, time period, ...). A: 130 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP 1.9.1.
1.9.1.1. Questions: Q: A: 1) Do you use status management for budget accounting? [ ]Yes [ ]No

Edit Basic Settings

Status Management

Q: 2) Have you defined special rules for restraints on disposal for budget execution? If so, what are the restraints on disposal? and describe the specialties/limitations i Explanation: Not every transaction can be used for every FM account assignment or every fund. every fund. A: 1.9.1.2. Questions: Q: A: 1) Is there a relationship between accounts in Accounting (expense, revenue,...) and FM? [ ]Yes [ ]No Assigning Cost Element

Q: 2) Are FM expenditure categories the same as G/L accounts in Accounting? If not, how are GL accounts mapped to the budget categories? A: Q: 3) Describe in detail the relationship between expenditure categories in the budget and the FI accounts. A: 1.9.1.3. Questions: Q: A: 1) Integration PS: Is integration between a project system and FM necessary? [ ]Yes [ ]No 2) Integration PS: Describe the current integration between your project system and FM. Assigning WBS Element

Q: A:

1.9.1.4. Questions:

Assigning Cost Center

131 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP Q: A: 1) Is it possible to establish a direct link between cost centers and the budget? [ ]Yes [ ]No 2) Describe in detail the relationship/link between cost centers and the budget (FM).

Q: A:

Q: 3) At which level of your organization is budget data implemented? Is this the same level as cost center cost planning, or is it a higher level? A: 1.9.1.5. Questions: Q: A: 1) Is it possible to establish a direct link between an order in Controlling and the budget? [ ]Yes [ ]No 2) Describe in detail the relationship/link between the order and the budget (FM). Assigning Order

Q: A:

1.9.1.6. Questions: Q: A:

Assigning Profit Center

1) Can a direct link be made between the profit center and the budget? [ ]Yes [ ]No

Q: 2) Which legal requirements must be complied with for budget creation and budget approval? A: [ ]Yes [ ]No 1.9.1.7. Questions: Q: 1) Purchasing, warehouse funds center integration: Describe the impact on FM (what are the effects of goods receipt, goods issue, ...?). A: Q: A: 2) Purchasing integration: Do you use a particular funds center only for the warehouse? [ ]Yes [ ]No 132 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc Warehouse Funds Center Assignment

ValueSAP -

1.9.2.
Questions:

Budget Planning

Q: 1) Which legal requirements must be complied with for budget creation and budget approval? A: Q: A: Q: 3) Do you have special budget structures for the interim period/special periods (e.g. if a budget has not been authorized on time: temporary budgets)? A: Q: 4) Are there different types of budget? (commitment/payment). What is the difference between those types? A: Q: 5) Describe in detail how the budget is processed within a year and over a period of years (supplements, returns, transfers, ...). A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 8) Describe the budget creation process: Dates, process? Describe the hierarchy (hierarchy of the system within the organization; sequence of the different steps in budget preparation, revisions, approvals, ...). Explanation: Describe the budget creation process: Key dates, process, ... Describe the hierarchy (for example: System hierarchy within the company, budget creation sequence, budget reading sequence, audit, approval,...). Who is involved in the process of the budget preparation? is involved in the process of the budget preparation? A: Q: 9) Describe the approval procedure required when creating and changing the budget. Describe the participants and their roles for the budget process. 133 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc 7) List the existing types of revenue. 6) List the existing types of expenditure. 2) Please describe the budget timeframe and the relation to the fiscal / budgetary year.

ValueSAP A: Q: 10) Describe the different types of changes/adjustments to the budget if the approved budget is changed. A: Q: 11) Please describe the methodology/budget approach used within budgeting (top-down, bottom-up). How do you check correct budget distribution - is there a storage of the distributed values at database level? A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 14) Are there any special/other budget requests such as special funds, subsidies, asset accounting, investment planning,... ? inventory, fixed asset accounting, capital outlay, long-term debt, ... . A: Q: A: Q: 16) If several budget estimates exist, provide a comparison of the fund and the budget estimate used. A: Q: 17) How many budget currencies do you have? Do you use several currencies in parallel in the budget? Are there any funds that use other currencies? A: Q: 18) Are there any special budget/restraints on disposal in addition to the normal budget changes, which are triggered centrally or by specific agents (ministries,...), s uch as budget blocks or availability blocks? A: Q: 19) Describe the level at which: - a budget is entered - assigned funds are entered budget assignments are updated - the availability check is carried out. 134 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc 15) Describe the general approach to budgeting in your organization. (USA) 13) Do you use a top-down budget method? 12) Do you use a bottom-up budget method?

ValueSAP A: Q: 20) Describe the information (field, field contents) that is contained in the budget document. A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 23) Beside the above stated "normal" budgeting transactions, are there any special long term requirements for forecasting in the budget area? A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 26) Describe the procedure followed when a posting is rejected based on the results of the availability check. A: Q: 27) Are there any differences/special features in terms of calculating available budget and availability check for the various funds (grants, third-party funds, etc.)? A: Q: A: Q: 29) Describe the relationship between the budget and the warehouse (warehouse funds center/GR, GI -> impact on budget: Debit and credit). A: Q: 30) Historic data/data conversion: Which historic data needs to be copied from funds management (budget data, for example) (which detail level, how many years, ...)? 135 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc 28) Can expenditure draw from other budget lines (coverage)? 25) Describe the current availability control procedure. 24) Describe the rules applied to calculate the budget that is available for execution. 22) Describe the budgeting process for personnel planning (HR). 21) Describe the headcount planning process (HR).

ValueSAP -

A: Q: A: Q: 32) Specify the volume of master data (number of funds centers, funds, expenditure categories, ...). A: 1.9.2.1. Questions: Q: 1) Is there a link between the controlling planning data and funds management budget data? Explanation: You are using planning in the project system: Describe the current integration of project system planning data and Funds Management budget values. A: 1.9.2.2. Questions: Q: 1) For budget generation/management: Which combinations of areas of responsibility and expense category can receive budget or permit assigned funds ? Do such definitions exist for funds? A: 1.9.2.3. Questions: Q: 1) Is there a sample that can be used for the generation of the budget structure plan (budget elements,account assignment elements)? Does this sample apply equally for all funds? Describe the sample. A: Q: 2) Describe the sample (budget structure) in detail: Year-dependency: One year, several years/across years, number of samples, special features, ...... A: 1.9.2.4. Questions: Q: A: 1) Are there different budget versions (values) for the existing FM master data structure? [ ]Yes 136 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc Budget Version Processing Editing Commitment Item Group Budget Structure Processing Copy CO Plan for FM Budget 31) Archiving: Which objects have to remain online in the system for how long?

ValueSAP [ ]No Q: 2) Describe the information to be stored at the budget version level (list of fields, short description, properties of fields). A: Q: 3) For budget generation/management: Which combinations of areas of responsibility and expense category can receive budget or permit assigned funds ? Do such definitions exist for funds? A: Q: 4) If you use different budget versions (amount versions): Do you need to block a version for certain transactions? A: [ ]Yes [ ]No 1.9.2.5. Questions: Q: 1) Describe in detail the information to be stored on the "original budget" document (list of fields, short description, fields attributes, ....). A: 1.9.2.6. Questions: Q: 1) Describe in detail the information to be stored on the "original budget" document (list of fields, short description, fields attributes, ....). A: 1.9.2.7. Questions: Q: 1) Describe in detail which information should be stored in the "budget release" document (list of fields, short description, field attributes and so on). A: Q: 2) Is the budget directly available, or is there a "release of funds" before the budget is available? A: [ ]Yes [ ]No 1.9.2.8. Questions: 137 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc Budget Release (Bottom Up Using Rollup) Budget Release (Top Down/Bottom Up) Original Budget Processing (Top Down/Bottom Up) Original Budget Processing (Bottom Up through Rollup)

ValueSAP Q: 1) Describe in detail which information should be stored in the "budget release" document (list of fields, short description, field attributes and so on). A: Q: 2) Is the budget directly available, or is there a "release of funds" before the budget is available? A: [ ]Yes [ ]No 1.9.2.9. Questions: Q: 1) Describe in detail which information is to be stored on the "budget supplement" document (list of fields, short description, and field attributes). A: 1.9.2.10. Questions: Q: 1) Describe in detail which information is to be stored on the "budget supplement" document (list of fields, short description, and field attributes). A: 1.9.2.11. Questions: Q: 1) Describe in detail which information is to be stored on the budget transfer document (field lists, short descriptions, field attributes, ...). A: 1.9.2.12. Questions: Q: 1) Describe in detail which information is to be stored on the budget return document (field lists, short descriptions, field attributes, ...). A: 1.9.2.13. Questions: Q: 1) Budget document change: Which fields/information can be changed in a budget document that already exists? A: Edit Budget Document Budget Return (Outward by Rollup) Budget Transfer Budget Supplement (Bottom Up through Rollup) Budget Supplement (Top Down/Bottom Up)

1.9.3.
Questions:

Budget Execution
138

Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP -

Q: A:

1) Give a detailed list of legal requirements existing for the execution of the budget.

Q: 2) Provide an overview of the budget assignment process: Funds reservations, payments; Revenue collection and posting. What procedures do you use for expenditure and revenue? How is budgetary control exercised? Explanation: Please present an overview on the current process of budget execution: encumbrances, payment (expenses); revenue collection (income).What are the main factors of expenditure? Where do you need strict control ? A: Q: 3) Do you use a multi-level funds reservation chain? (Such as: earmarked funds to consume budget directly, reference and reduce funds reservation or earmarked funds). .) Explanation: Describe the process chain. A: Q: 4) Are there are any "funds assignment chains" for expenditure and revenue? Describe these chains in detail. A: Q: 5) Describe the current/foreseen budget structure. At which level does the budget assignment take place? A: Q: 6) Describe the special requirements concerning currency/currency handling in relation to expenditure and revenue. Which limitations/relationships exist for the currencies used? A: Q: 7) Is it possible to execute now for any future-/past years (budgets?). If so, please give a detailed description of the processing currently in place. A: Q: 8) Describe how down payments (such as trip advances) are posted, and how they affect Funds Management. A: Q: 9) Create a list of all sources of revenue. 139 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP A: Q: A: Q: 11) How do you handle revenue/expenditure that cannot be assigned to a specific budget address? A: Q: A: Q: 13) Describe the processes for calculating interest on arrears and dunning, and how they affect the budget/Funds Management. A: Q: 14) Provide an overview of the purchasing process. Which part of the process is linked to the budget and what sort of link is it (budget approval, at the time of open item posting, at the time of actual costs creation, etc.)? A: Q: 15) Do you have to follow certain rules in Purchasing as required by law? Describe the rules. A: Q: 16) Is there an integration needed between material management and budget management? A: [ ]Yes [ ]No 12) Describe in detail the impact that tax on sales/purchases posting has on the budget. 10) Describe the process for distributing expenditures/revenues within the organization.

Q: 17) Do you sell services/products (internal/external)? Describe the existing procedures and their impact on the budget/budget assignment. A: Q: 18) You use an integrated sales system. Is it necessary to estimate sales revenue on the income side, or is this expected income not recognized in FM until the incoming cash is posted (or an invoice is sent)? A: Q: 19) Is there an integration needed between sales and budget management? 140 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP A: [ ]Yes [ ]No

Q: 20) If there is a controlling system existing to determine and cross-charge #internal costs#. Please describe the current logic applied and the relation / impact to the budget / budget execution. A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: 23) Is there an integration needed between controlling and budget management? [ ]Yes [ ]No 22) Is there also an availability control for postings to balance sheet accounts? 21) How is overhead cost (if any) treated for budget to actual comparison.

Q: 24) Describe how payroll is integrated with financial accounting and funds management. How are other benefits handled? A: Q: 25) Is there an integration needed between human ressource/payroll and budget management? A: [ ]Yes [ ]No

Q: 26) Describe in detail how the inventory process is carried out, and which postings are made in this context (represented in Funds Management). Are there any local, state, or national requirements? (USA) A: Q: 27) Do you use asset accounting? Describe how assets are posted (capitalization, depreciation, retirement, ...) and their impact on funds management. Are there any differences for special funds? A: Q: 28) If there are different treatments with funds in the context of asset handling: in which funds do you book your assets, how are those depreciated (e.g. for enterprise and governmental funds). A: 141 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP -

Q: A:

29) Describe the effects of asset maintenance on the budget/funds management.

Q: 30) Is there an integration needed between human asset accounting and budget management? A: [ ]Yes [ ]No 31) Describe your accounts receivable accounting system.

Q: A: Q: A:

32) Describe your accounts payable accounting system.

Q: 33) Integration with Purchasing: Which documents/transactions exist and at what point are budget assignments made (for example, purchase requisitions, purchase orders, contract release,....)? A: Q: A: 34) Is there any integration between your travel management and funds management? [ ]Yes [ ]No 35) Provide an overview of volume of data per document type.

Q: A:

Q: 36) Archiving: Which objects (transaction data) have to remain in the system, and for how long? A: Q: 37) Interfaces: Are budget assignments (purchase orders, invoices, ...) entered in external systems and transferred to the funds management system via an interface? Are any confirmations returned to the sending system? Which interfaces are used? Explanation: Are there any interfaces to other applications at execution time? Please provide a detailed interface description and present the data to be handed over. A: Q: 38) Describe which information that is currently available in your system also needs to be present in the future. 142 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP -

A: 1.9.3.1. Questions: Q: 1) Describe in detail which information is to be stored on the funds blocking document (field lists, short descriptions, field attributes, ...). A: Q: 2) Which information may possibly be changed for the funds blocking document? Provide a list of all fields/field contents. A: 1.9.3.2. Questions: Q: 1) Describe in detail the information to be stored on the funds reservation document (list of fields, short description, properties of fields, ....). A: Q: 2) Which information may possibly be changed for the funds reservation document? Generate a list of all fields/field contents. A: 1.9.3.3. Questions: Q: 1) Describe in detail the information to be included on the "funds precommitment" document (field list, short description, field attributes, ...). A: Q: 2) Which information could be changed for the "Funds precommitment" document? Make a list of all fields/field contents. A: 1.9.3.4. Questions: Q: 1) Describe in detail which information is to be stored on the funds commitment document (field lists, short descriptions, field attributes, ...). A: Q: 2) Which information may possibly be changed for the funds commitment document? Provide a list of all fields/field contents. 143 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc Funds Commitment Funds Precommitment Funds Reservation Funds Blocking

ValueSAP -

A: 1.9.3.5. Questions: Q: 1) Is it necessary to automatically flag the FM commitments documents (such as funds reservation, funds precommitment, funds commitment, ...) as "completed"? A: 1.9.3.6. Questions: Q: 1) Describe in detail which information is to be stored on the "Payment transfer" document (field list, short description, field attributes, ...). A: 1.9.3.7. Questions: Q: 1) Describe in detail which information is to be stored on the "Forecast of revenue" document (field list, short description, field attributes, ...). A: Q: 2) Do you use forecast of revenues (mirror image of funds commitment on expenditure side)? A: [ ]Yes [ ]No Forecast of Revenue Payment Transfer Manual Commitment Mass Maintenance/Closing in FM

Q: 3) Which information could be changed for the "Forecast of revenues" document? Make a list of all fields/field contents. A: 1.9.3.8. Questions: Q: 1) Is funds management updated on invoice or payment basis? Payment Selection

Explanation: Describe in detail the process chain and the way in which it is processed. A: 1.9.3.9. Questions: Q: 1) Financial and budget accounting reconciliation: Describe the current reconciliation procedure between FI and FM. 144 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc Payment Matching

ValueSAP -

A: 1.9.3.10. Questions: Q: 1) Revenues increasing the budget: Describe the relationship between income budget and expense budget Explanation: Do revenues exist (unplanned revenues, for example) that would result in an increase to (a particular address of) the expenditure budget (automatic or manual) when posting is made/the revenue is realized? Describe the logic used to represent these transactions. A: Q: A: 2) Do you have re-usable revenue/revenues that increase the budget? [ ]Yes [ ]No Budget Increase

Q: 3) Are there any revenues (such as unforeseen revenues) that lead to an increase in the expenditure budget (of a particular address) at the time of posting/realizing the revenue? Is this increase made manually or automatically? Explanation: Describe the logic according to which these transactions are mapped. A:

1.9.4.
1.9.4.1. Questions:

Information System [Funds Management]

Reports

Q: 1) What statutory requirements must be considered (financial regulations, guidelines) for reporting? A: Q: A: Q: 3) Describe in detail how your financial statements are structured. Provide a copy (only if you have not answered these questions for the ASAP area Financial Accounting). A: Q: A: 145 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc 4) Do you create financial statements per fund? Provide examples. 2) Create a list of all reports for the budget/budget execution. Provide examples.

ValueSAP -

Q: 5) Apart from the above reports, are there any special requirements that only apply to specific funds? (Example reports/printouts)? A: Q: 6) Are there any forms/form templates for documents or reports that have to be produced by the FM system (print of earmarked funds or invoices,....)? Attach these forms. A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 9) Are there other reporting requirements within your organization that have not been described yet? Is there one basis of information (budget), or are there other approaches (US GAAP,...)? A: Q: 10) Provide more details for the above reports: Reporting period (daily, monthly, yearly, on request), detail of report (totals records, line items), .... A: Q: 11) Do you use simulations or special comparison calculations in reporting? Describe these special reports and the calculations they are based on. t expenditure ) A: Q: 12) What special requirements exist for the preparation of report data?: Views (alternative hierarchies), special sorting, aggregation level,... A: Q: 13) Provide information on classification and summarization in reporting which is needed for funds, funds centers, and accounts/account groups. A: Q: 14) Describe particular reporting requirements for the year-end closing. Are there any special reports for data from the previous year? A: 146 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc 8) Describe the reporting requirements for budget execution (examples). 7) Describe the reporting requirements for budgeting (examples).

ValueSAP -

Q: 15) Do you have reports that have to be created in accordance with the rules of GASB (General Accounting Standards Board)? (USA) A: [ ]Yes [ ]No 1.9.4.2. Questions: Q: 1) Do you reconcile individual documents with totals records? For example, a reconciliation between Financial Accounting and FM. A: [ ]Yes [ ]No Matching Line Item Totals

Q: 2) Describe in detail the comparison that is made based on line items, and which line items are involved. A:

1.9.5.
Questions: Q: A:

Fiscal Year Change Operations [Funds Management]

1) Do you carry out year-end/closing operations in accounting (funds management)? [ ]Yes [ ]No

Q: 2) Describe in detail the relationship between financial accounting, logistics, and funds management regarding year-end closing operations. A: Q: 3) Provide an overview of the year-end closing procedure in funds management (dates, timing, sequence). A: Q: 4) Provide an overview of the procedure for year-end processing of open commitment items (partial delivery, funds reservation that not yet been paid,....). A: Q: 5) Describe the period-end closing operations (month, year) in budgeting: Carry forward residual budget: Calculate residual budget, carryforward rules, possible FM account assignment changes). Explanation: Describe the year-end procedure: open documents (encumbrances, calculation, carry-forward, handling of changes of nomenclature, ...). A: 147 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP -

Q: 6) Please describe the specialties / special treatments currently existing within the budgetary area to be applied for carry-over budget! changes, limitation in changes of commitments, final validity dates, special approvals, ...). A: Q: 7) What special postings are made in financial accounting as a result of the year-end operations in funds management? Is an adjustment posting made in the subsequent year? Explain the background of these postings. he next year, ... . Explanation: Create a "T" account example. A: Q: 8) Please describe the general ledger postings that need to be done within the yearend closing / change of year and the link to budget carried over and open items carried forward to the next year. A: Q: 9) Is your funds management year closed formally, so that budgets and budget assignments that affect the previous year cannot be created or changed after closing has been carried out? Describe the closing procedure. A: 1.9.5.1. Questions: Q: 1) Do different rules exist for processing the commitment and payment budget at the year end? Do you carry forward only commitment and/or payment budget? A: Q: 2) Provide an overview of the existing rules to be heeded when processing different documents in year end processing. Explanation: Give an overview of the rules that exist that are used in the year-end processing for the following documents: Purchase requisition, purchase order, funds reservation, funds precommitment, funds commitment, revenue request, invoice, ... . Is the budget address changed during the budget/ commitment transfer? the budget/ commitment transfer? A: 1.9.5.2. Questions: Q: 1) Describe the budget area processes that exist in connection with the transfer of open commitment items: Calculation of open items, rules for commitment transfer, order of individual steps, approval procedures,.... 148 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc Open Commitment Document Selection Preparing Fiscal Year Change Operations

ValueSAP -

A: Q: 2) What happens to open commitment items that are not carried forward to the new year? Do these documents need to be blocked against changes/reduction? Are there special rules which need to be taken into account? A: Q: 3) Are there special rules/restrictions that have to be considered for the change/reduction of commitment transfer documents in the new year? Is it necessary to reduce these open items automatically? A: Q: 4) A commitment item was carried forward to the following year. Amount changes (increase, reduction) are to be carried out in the new year. Describe the influence on the available budget. A: Q: 5) You work with different funds. Are there special rules that must be followed for special funds or funds groups (procedures, constraints, processes in the new year)? A: 1.9.5.3. Questions: Q: 1) Carryforward rules exist. Sender and receiver addresses are defined here. You are changing an existing rule: Which changes are allowed, and how is the change history currently stored in the system? A: Q: 2) Describe the relationship between the sender (old year) and the receiver address (new year) required by the transfer rules. What information do the transfer rules portray? A: Q: 3) Is it possible, as part of the budget carryforward, to split the remaining budget of different sender addresses or to combine them? Describe the existing rules. A: Q: 4) Is it possible, as part of the carry forward of open commitment items, to split documents of different sender addresses or to combine them? Describe the existing rules. A: Define Transfer Rules

149 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP Q: 5) You work with different funds. Are there special rules that must be followed for special funds or funds groups (procedures, constraints, processes in the new year)? A: Q: 6) Are the sender/receiver rules for year-end processing subject to changes each year, or are the same rules used each year? A: 1.9.5.4. Questions: Q: 1) Do you produce your own transfer documents as part of the yearend processing for the budget carry forward or the carry forward of open commitment items? A: Q: A: 1.9.5.5. Questions: Q: 1) Do you ever partially or completely reverse the carryforward of open commitment items (from a document point of view)? Explanation: What is the procedure for and the effect on the budget (available budget) in the old year and the new year? A: 1.9.5.6. Questions: Q: 1) Balance is carried forward per fund/for certain funds. Describe in detail which documents (value types) are taken into account when the balance is carried forward (open items, actual, CO postings, ...). Explanation: Describe in detail the relationship between the "sender address" in the old financial year and the "target address" in the new financial year. A: Q: 2) Please describe the specialties / special treatments currently existing within the budgetary area to be applied for carry-over budget! changes, limitation in changes of commitments, final validity dates, special approvals, ...). A: 1.9.5.7. Blueprint_FICO_1.doc Determining Budget Carryforward 150 Fund Balance Carryforward Reset Commitments Carried Forward 2) Describe in detail the information that is stored in the carryforward documents. Commitments Documents Carryforward

ValueSAP -

Questions: Q: 1) What are the requirements of the budget carryforward with regard to: Calculation of remaining budget, rules for the budget carry forward, cross-year changes of budget addresses, .... Explanation: Describe the requirements of the budget transfer with regard to: Calculating the residual budget, rules for the budget transfer, changes to the budget address for a period of years, last possible date for the budget carry forward, approval process for the transfer,... budget carry forward, approval process for the transfer,... A: Q: 2) What happens to remaining budget that was not carried forward to the following year? Should the remaining budget be blocked or are there special rules/constraints that affect the availability of the remaining budget in the previous year? A: Q: 3) The remaining budget was carried forward to the new year. Now there are budget changes or transfers. Are there special rules/constraints that should be considered in connection with the budget carryforward? A: Q: 4) You work with different funds. Are there special rules that must be followed for special funds or funds groups (procedures, constraints, processes in the new year)? A: Q: 5) What happens when FM expense addresses are in debit at the year-end? Is negative budget carried forward? Under what conditions? A: 1.9.5.8. Questions: Q: 1) How is the budget carryforward carried out (one-time activity)? Budget Carryforward

Explanation: Is the budget carryforward carried out in "one action" or does splitting occur (differing key dates)? A:

151 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP -

2. Treasury
2.1.
2.1.1.
Questions: Q: 1) Provide an overview of the structure and condition characteristics for the individual classes. A: Q: 2) Describe the procedure leading up to the conclusion of a transaction. Describe the organizational units a transaction passes through (front office, back office, trading, settlement, accounting). A: Q: A: Q: A: 2.1.1.1. Questions: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 3) Do you need to create additional transaction flows for certain transactions or business partners (such as a fixed percentage charge, taxes)? A: Q: A: 2.1.1.2. Questions: Q: 1) For what reasons can a transaction be reversed? 152 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc Reversal 4) Can rules be defined for these additional flows? If so, what would these rules be? 2) Which fields do you need for entering transactions? 1) Which additional flows can arise upon purchase or sale (taxes, commission etc.)? Process Stock Transactions 4) How should the corresponding authorization concept be structured? 3) Should there be default values for the conditions?

Stocks [TR-SE]
Transaction Processing

ValueSAP A: 2.1.1.3. Questions: Q: A: Q: A: 2) Describe your release procedure. 1) Describe how transaction processing is organized in your company. Release

2.1.2.
2.1.2.1. Questions: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A:

Correspondence
Process Outgoing Confirmations

1) For which counterparties and instruments do you require confirmation letters?

2) In what languages do you require these dealing slips?

3) What medium do you use to send confirmation letters to your business partners?

Q: 4) At what stage is external correspondence generated (when transactions are entered in the front office or after processing in the back office)? A: 2.1.2.2. Questions: Q: A: 1) Do you want to manage counterconfirmations in the system? Monitor

2.1.3.
2.1.3.1. Questions: Q: A: 2.1.3.2.

Position Management
Disposition Block

1) For what reasons can positions be blocked?

Deadline Monitoring 153

Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP Questions: Q: A: Q: 2) How do you currently monitor deadlines (such as the subscription period for subscription rights)? A: 2.1.3.3. Questions: Q: A: 2.1.3.4. Questions: Q: A: 2.1.3.5. Questions: Q: A: 2.1.3.6. Questions: Q: A: Q: A: 2.1.3.7. Questions: Q: A: 1) How do you process corporate actions (organization, posting)? Issue Currency Changeover 2) How do you process corporate actions (organization, posting)? 1) What is your procedure for exercising special rights (such as subscription rights)? Post Subscription Rights 1) How do you process corporate actions (organization, posting)? Post New Stock 1) How do you process corporate actions (organization, posting)? Stock Swap 1) How do you process corporate actions (organization, posting)? Stock Split 1) How do you currently monitor deadlines?

2.1.4.
Questions:

Accounting
154

Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP -

Q: 1) Develop a posting system for the transactions you conclude, making sure you cover all the special cases which may arise. A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 4) Compile an overview of the possible payment details per business partner and financial transaction type. A: Q: 5) Do you have to generate payment orders? What form do they take (data medium, bank transfer)? A: Q: A: 2.1.4.1. Questions: Q: 1) Can flows be posted immediately once the transaction has been checked, or do they need to be released explicitly? A: Q: A: 2.1.4.2. Questions: Q: A: Q: 2) In which cases do you prefer to generate debit items manually rather than automatically? A: 155 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc 1) Develop a posting system for the incoming payments in the Securities area. Manual Posting 2) Do flows have to be explicitly released before they can be posted? Posting Release 6) Which formats should be used for generating the payment media? 3) Do you generate balance sheets for business areas? 2) To which CO objects do you need to make account assignments?

ValueSAP -

Q: A:

3) Which flows do you want to be able to post manually?

2.1.4.3. Questions: Q: A:

Automatic Posting

1) Develop a posting system for the incoming payments in the Securities area.

Q: 2) In which cases do you prefer to generate debit items manually rather than automatically? A: 2.1.4.4. Questions: Q: 1) Can postings for individual flows be made to the bank clearing account, or must flows be grouped? A: Q: A: 2) Do you have netting agreements with your house banks? Process Payment Request

2.1.5.
Questions: Q: A: 2.1.5.1. Questions: Q: A: 2.1.5.2. Questions:

Closing Operations

1) How often you carry out period-end closing activities?

Period-End Closing

1) How often do you post price/rate gains and losses?

Key Date Valuation

Q: 1) Which valuation procedures do you apply (US GAAP, securities account, portfolio, valuation units)? A: 156 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 6) If you use composite prices, do you calculate them per securities account or across several securities accounts (securities account, portfolio) A: 5) Do you calculate composite prices or value individual transactions? 4) In which order do you want to value positions? (value the security or the currency first?) 3) Do you value currency gains and losses and price gains and losses separately? 2) Which valuation rules do you apply (e.g. lowest-value principle, value at market prices)?

2.2.

Subscription Rights [TR-SE]

Questions: Q: 1) Provide an overview of the structure and condition characteristics for the individual classes. A:

2.2.1.
Questions:

Transaction Processing

Q: 1) Describe the procedure leading up to the conclusion of a transaction. Describe the organizational units a transaction passes through (front office, back office, trading, settlement, accounting). A: Q: A: Q: A: 2.2.1.1. Questions: 157 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc Process Subscription Rights 3) How should the corresponding authorization concept be structured? 2) Should there be default values for the conditions?

ValueSAP Q: A: Q: A: Q: 3) Do you need to create additional transaction flows for certain transactions or business partners (such as a fixed percentage charge, taxes)? A: Q: A: 2.2.1.2. Questions: Q: A: 2.2.1.3. Questions: Q: A: Q: A: 2) Describe your release procedure. 1) Describe how transaction processing is organized in your company. Release 1) For what reasons can a transaction be reversed? Reversal 4) Can rules be defined for these additional flows? If so, what would these rules be? 2) Which fields do you need for entering transactions? 1) Which additional flows can arise upon purchase or sale (taxes, commission etc.)?

2.2.2.
2.2.2.1. Questions: Q: A:

Correspondence
Monitor

1) Do you want to manage counterconfirmations in the system?

2.2.3.
2.2.3.1. Questions:

Position Management
Exercise Security Rights

Q: 1) What is your procedure for exercising special rights (such as warrants)? Describe the posting procedure. A: 158 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP -

Q: A:

2) What is your procedure for exercising special rights?

2.2.3.2. Questions: Q: A:

Deadline Monitoring

1) How do you currently monitor deadlines?

Q: 2) How do you currently monitor deadlines (such as the subscription period for subscription rights)? A: 2.2.3.3. Questions: Q: A: 1) How do you process corporate actions (organization, posting)? Issue Currency Changeover

2.2.4.
Questions:

Accounting

Q: 1) Develop a posting system for the transactions you conclude, making sure you cover all the special cases which may arise. A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 4) Compile an overview of the possible payment details per business partner and financial transaction type. A: Q: 5) Do you have to generate payment orders? What form do they take (data medium, bank transfer)? A: 159 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc 3) Do you generate balance sheets for business areas? 2) To which CO objects do you need to make account assignments?

ValueSAP Q: A: 2.2.4.1. Questions: Q: 1) Can flows be posted immediately once the transaction has been checked, or do they need to be released explicitly? A: Q: A: 2.2.4.2. Questions: Q: 1) Can postings for individual flows be made to the bank clearing account, or must flows be grouped? A: Q: A: 2) Do you have netting agreements with your house banks? Process Payment Request 2) Do flows have to be explicitly released before they can be posted? Posting Release 6) Which formats should be used for generating the payment media?

2.2.5.
Questions: Q: A: 2.2.5.1. Questions: Q: A: 2.2.5.2. Questions: Q: A: Q: A:

Closing Operations

1) How often you carry out period-end closing activities?

Period-End Closing

1) How often do you post price/rate gains and losses?

Key Date Valuation

1) Which valuation rules do you apply (e.g. lowest-value principle, value at market prices)?

2) Do you value currency gains and losses and price gains and losses separately? 160

Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP -

Q: A: Q: A:

3) In which order do you want to value positions? (value the security or the currency first?)

4) Do you calculate composite prices or value individual transactions?

Q: 5) If you use composite prices, do you calculate them per securities account or across several securities accounts (securities account, portfolio) A:

2.3.
2.3.1.

Bonds [TR-SE]
Transaction Processing

Questions: Q: 1) Provide an overview of the structure and condition characteristics for the individual classes. A: Q: 2) Describe the procedure leading up to the conclusion of a transaction. Describe the organizational units a transaction passes through (front office, back office, trading, settlement, accounting). A: Q: A: Q: A: 2.3.1.1. Questions: Q: A: Q: A: 2) Which fields do you need for entering transactions? 1) Which additional flows can arise upon purchase or sale (taxes, commission etc.)? Process Bonds 4) How should the corresponding authorization concept be structured? 3) Should there be default values for the conditions?

161 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP Q: 3) Do you need to create additional transaction flows for certain transactions or business partners (such as a fixed percentage charge, taxes)? A: Q: A: 2.3.1.2. Questions: Q: A: 2.3.1.3. Questions: Q: A: Q: A: 2) Describe your release procedure. 1) Describe how transaction processing is organized in your company. Release 1) For what reasons can a transaction be reversed? Reversal 4) Can rules be defined for these additional flows? If so, what would these rules be?

2.3.2.
2.3.2.1. Questions: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A:

Correspondence
Process Outgoing Confirmations

1) For which counterparties and instruments do you require confirmation letters?

2) In what languages do you require these dealing slips?

3) What medium do you use to send confirmation letters to your business partners?

Q: 4) At what stage is external correspondence generated (when transactions are entered in the front office or after processing in the back office)? A: 2.3.2.2. Questions: 162 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc Monitor

ValueSAP Q: A: 1) Do you want to manage counterconfirmations in the system?

2.3.3.
2.3.3.1. Questions:

Position Management
Exercise Security Rights

Q: 1) What is your procedure for exercising special rights (such as warrants)? Describe the posting procedure. A: Q: A: 2.3.3.2. Questions: Q: A: 2.3.3.3. Questions: Q: A: Q: 2) How do you currently monitor deadlines (such as the subscription period for subscription rights)? A: 2.3.3.4. Questions: Q: 1) For what period of time do you require planned data to be available on the database for reporting and cash management? A: 2.3.3.5. Questions: Q: A: 1) How do you process corporate actions (organization, posting)? Issue Currency Changeover Planned Record Update 1) How do you currently monitor deadlines? Deadline Monitoring 1) For what reasons can positions be blocked? Disposition Block 2) What is your procedure for exercising special rights?

163 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP 2.3.4.
Questions: Q: 1) Develop a posting system for the transactions you conclude, making sure you cover all the special cases which may arise. A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 4) Compile an overview of the possible payment details per business partner and financial transaction type. A: Q: 5) Do you have to generate payment orders? What form do they take (data medium, bank transfer)? A: Q: A: 2.3.4.1. Questions: Q: 1) Can flows be posted immediately once the transaction has been checked, or do they need to be released explicitly? A: Q: A: 2.3.4.2. Questions: Q: A: 1) Develop a posting system for the incoming payments in the Securities area. Manual Posting 2) Do flows have to be explicitly released before they can be posted? Posting Release 6) Which formats should be used for generating the payment media? 3) Do you generate balance sheets for business areas? 2) To which CO objects do you need to make account assignments?

Accounting

164 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP Q: 2) In which cases do you prefer to generate debit items manually rather than automatically? A: Q: A: 2.3.4.3. Questions: Q: A: Q: 2) In which cases do you prefer to generate debit items manually rather than automatically? A: 2.3.4.4. Questions: Q: 1) Can postings for individual flows be made to the bank clearing account, or must flows be grouped? A: Q: A: 2) Do you have netting agreements with your house banks? Process Payment Request 1) Develop a posting system for the incoming payments in the Securities area. Automatic Posting 3) Which flows do you want to be able to post manually?

2.3.5.
Questions: Q: A: 2.3.5.1. Questions: Q: A: 2.3.5.2. Questions: Q:

Closing Operations

1) How often you carry out period-end closing activities?

Period-End Closing

1) How often do you post price/rate gains and losses?

Interest Accrual/Deferral

1) When do you perform interest accruals/deferrals? 165

Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP A: Q: 2) Which accrual/deferral procedures (reset procedure, difference procedure) and methods (accrual, deferral) do you use? A: Q: A: 2.3.5.3. Questions: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 5) If you use composite prices, do you calculate them per securities account or across several securities accounts (securities account, portfolio) A: 4) Do you calculate composite prices or value individual transactions? 3) In which order do you want to value positions? (value the security or the currency first?) 2) Do you value currency gains and losses and price gains and losses separately? 1) Which valuation rules do you apply (e.g. lowest-value principle, value at market prices)? Key Date Valuation 3) When do you reset interest accruals/deferrals?

2.4.
2.4.1.

Warrants [TR-SE]
Transaction Processing

Questions: Q: 1) Provide an overview of the structure and condition characteristics for the individual classes. A: Q: 2) Describe the procedure leading up to the conclusion of a transaction. Describe the organizational units a transaction passes through (front office, back office, trading, settlement, accounting). A: 166 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP -

Q: A: Q: A:

3) Should there be default values for the conditions?

4) How should the corresponding authorization concept be structured?

2.4.1.1. Questions: Q: A: Q: A:

Process Warrants

1) Which additional flows can arise upon purchase or sale (taxes, commission etc.)?

2) Which fields do you need for entering transactions?

Q: 3) Do you need to create additional transaction flows for certain transactions or business partners (such as a fixed percentage charge, taxes)? A: Q: A: 2.4.1.2. Questions: Q: A: 2.4.1.3. Questions: Q: A: Q: A: 2) Describe your release procedure. 1) Describe how transaction processing is organized in your company. Release 1) For what reasons can a transaction be reversed? Reversal 4) Can rules be defined for these additional flows? If so, what would these rules be?

2.4.2.
Questions:

Correspondence

167 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP Q: 1) How do you manage transaction confirmations and correspondence (internal dealing slips, external confirmations, counterconfirmations)? A: 2.4.2.1. Questions: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 4) At what stage is external correspondence generated (when transactions are entered in the front office or after processing in the back office)? A: 2.4.2.2. Questions: Q: A: 1) Do you want to manage counterconfirmations in the system? Monitor 3) What medium do you use to send confirmation letters to your business partners? 2) In what languages do you require these dealing slips? 1) For which counterparties and instruments do you require confirmation letters? Process Outgoing Confirmations

2.4.3.
2.4.3.1. Questions:

Position Management
Exercise Security Rights

Q: 1) What is your procedure for exercising special rights (such as warrants)? Describe the posting procedure. A: Q: A: 2.4.3.2. Questions: Q: A: 168 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc 1) For what reasons can positions be blocked? Disposition Block 2) What is your procedure for exercising special rights?

ValueSAP 2.4.3.3. Questions: Q: A: Q: 2) How do you currently monitor deadlines (such as the subscription period for subscription rights)? A: 2.4.3.4. Questions: Q: A: 1) How do you process corporate actions (organization, posting)? Issue Currency Changeover 1) How do you currently monitor deadlines? Deadline Monitoring

2.4.4.
Questions:

Accounting

Q: 1) Develop a posting system for the transactions you conclude, making sure you cover all the special cases which may arise. A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 4) Compile an overview of the possible payment details per business partner and financial transaction type. A: Q: 5) Do you have to generate payment orders? What form do they take (data medium, bank transfer)? A: Q: A: 2.4.4.1. Blueprint_FICO_1.doc Posting Release 169 6) Which formats should be used for generating the payment media? 3) Do you generate balance sheets for business areas? 2) To which CO objects do you need to make account assignments?

ValueSAP Questions: Q: 1) Can flows be posted immediately once the transaction has been checked, or do they need to be released explicitly? A: Q: A: 2.4.4.2. Questions: Q: 1) Can postings for individual flows be made to the bank clearing account, or must flows be grouped? A: Q: A: 2) Do you have netting agreements with your house banks? Process Payment Request 2) Do flows have to be explicitly released before they can be posted?

2.4.5.
Questions: Q: A: 2.4.5.1. Questions: Q: A: 2.4.5.2. Questions: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A:

Closing Operations

1) How often you carry out period-end closing activities?

Period-End Closing

1) How often do you post price/rate gains and losses?

Key Date Valuation

1) Which valuation rules do you apply (e.g. lowest-value principle, value at market prices)?

2) Do you value currency gains and losses and price gains and losses separately?

3) In which order do you want to value positions? (value the security or the currency first?)

170 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP -

Q: A:

4) Do you calculate composite prices or value individual transactions?

Q: 5) If you use composite prices, do you calculate them per securities account or across several securities accounts (securities account, portfolio) A:

2.5.

Warrant Bond [TR-SE]

Questions: Q: 1) Provide an overview of the structure and condition characteristics for the individual classes. A: Q: A: 2) Should there be default values for the conditions?

2.5.1.
Questions:

Transaction Processing

Q: 1) Describe the procedure leading up to the conclusion of a transaction. Describe the organizational units a transaction passes through (front office, back office, trading, settlement, accounting). A: Q: A: Q: A: 2.5.1.1. Questions: Q: A: Q: A: 171 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc 2) Which fields do you need for entering transactions? 1) Which additional flows can arise upon purchase or sale (taxes, commission etc.)? Process Warrant Bonds 3) How should the corresponding authorization concept be structured? 2) Should there be default values for the conditions?

ValueSAP Q: 3) Do you need to create additional transaction flows for certain transactions or business partners (such as a fixed percentage charge, taxes)? A: Q: A: 2.5.1.2. Questions: Q: A: 2.5.1.3. Questions: Q: A: Q: A: 2) Describe your release procedure. 1) Describe how transaction processing is organized in your company. Release 1) For what reasons can a transaction be reversed? Reversal 4) Can rules be defined for these additional flows? If so, what would these rules be?

2.5.2.
Questions:

Correspondence

Q: 1) How do you manage transaction confirmations and correspondence (internal dealing slips, external confirmations, counterconfirmations)? A: 2.5.2.1. Questions: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: 3) What medium do you use to send confirmation letters to your business partners? 2) In what languages do you require these dealing slips? 1) For which counterparties and instruments do you require confirmation letters? Process Outgoing Confirmations

172 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP Q: 4) At what stage is external correspondence generated (when transactions are entered in the front office or after processing in the back office)? A: 2.5.2.2. Questions: Q: A: 1) Do you want to manage counterconfirmations in the system? Monitor

2.5.3.
2.5.3.1. Questions:

Position Management
Exercise Security Rights

Q: 1) What is your procedure for exercising special rights (such as warrants)? Describe the posting procedure. A: Q: A: 2.5.3.2. Questions: Q: A: 2.5.3.3. Questions: Q: A: Q: 2) How do you currently monitor deadlines (such as the subscription period for subscription rights)? A: 2.5.3.4. Questions: Q: A: 1) How do you process corporate actions (organization, posting)? Issue Currency Changeover 1) How do you currently monitor deadlines? Deadline Monitoring 1) For what reasons can positions be blocked? Disposition Block 2) What is your procedure for exercising special rights?

173 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP 2.5.4.
Questions: Q: 1) Develop a posting system for the transactions you conclude, making sure you cover all the special cases which may arise. A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 4) Compile an overview of the possible payment details per business partner and financial transaction type. A: Q: 5) Do you have to generate payment orders? What form do they take (data medium, bank transfer)? A: Q: A: 2.5.4.1. Questions: Q: 1) Can flows be posted immediately once the transaction has been checked, or do they need to be released explicitly? A: Q: A: 2.5.4.2. Questions: Q: A: 1) Develop a posting system for the incoming payments in the Securities area. Manual Posting 2) Do flows have to be explicitly released before they can be posted? Posting Release 6) Which formats should be used for generating the payment media? 3) Do you generate balance sheets for business areas? 2) To which CO objects do you need to make account assignments?

Accounting

174 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP Q: 2) In which cases do you prefer to generate debit items manually rather than automatically? A: Q: A: 2.5.4.3. Questions: Q: A: Q: 2) In which cases do you prefer to generate debit items manually rather than automatically? A: 2.5.4.4. Questions: Q: 1) Can postings for individual flows be made to the bank clearing account, or must flows be grouped? A: Q: A: 2) Do you have netting agreements with your house banks? Process Payment Request 1) Develop a posting system for the incoming payments in the Securities area. Automatic Posting 3) Which flows do you want to be able to post manually?

2.5.5.
Questions: Q: A: 2.5.5.1. Questions: Q: A: 2.5.5.2. Questions: Q:

Closing Operations

1) How often you carry out period-end closing activities?

Period-End Closing

1) How often do you post price/rate gains and losses?

Interest Accrual/Deferral

1) When do you perform interest accruals/deferrals? 175

Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP A: Q: 2) Which accrual/deferral procedures (reset procedure, difference procedure) and methods (accrual, deferral) do you use? A: Q: A: 2.5.5.3. Questions: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 5) If you use composite prices, do you calculate them per securities account or across several securities accounts (securities account, portfolio) A: 4) Do you calculate composite prices or value individual transactions? 3) In which order do you want to value positions? (value the security or the currency first?) 2) Do you value currency gains and losses and price gains and losses separately? 1) Which valuation rules do you apply (e.g. lowest-value principle, value at market prices)? Key Date Valuation 3) When do you reset interest accruals/deferrals?

2.6.
2.6.1.

Convertible Bond [TR-SE]

Transaction Processing

Questions: Q: 1) Provide an overview of the structure and condition characteristics for the individual classes. A: Q: 2) Describe the procedure leading up to the conclusion of a transaction. Describe the organizational units a transaction passes through (front office, back office, trading, settlement, accounting). A: 176 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP -

Q: A: Q: A:

3) Should there be default values for the conditions?

4) How should the corresponding authorization concept be structured?

2.6.1.1. Questions: Q: A: Q: A:

Process Convertible Bonds

1) Which additional flows can arise upon purchase or sale (taxes, commission etc.)?

2) Which fields do you need for entering transactions?

Q: 3) Do you need to create additional transaction flows for certain transactions or business partners (such as a fixed percentage charge, taxes)? A: Q: A: 2.6.1.2. Questions: Q: A: 2.6.1.3. Questions: Q: A: Q: A: 2) Describe your release procedure. 1) Describe how transaction processing is organized in your company. Release 1) For what reasons can a transaction be reversed? Reversal 4) Can rules be defined for these additional flows? If so, what would these rules be?

2.6.2.
Questions:

Correspondence

177 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP Q: 1) How do you manage transaction confirmations and correspondence (internal dealing slips, external confirmations, counterconfirmations)? A: 2.6.2.1. Questions: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 4) At what stage is external correspondence generated (when transactions are entered in the front office or after processing in the back office)? A: 2.6.2.2. Questions: Q: A: 1) Do you want to manage counterconfirmations in the system? Monitor 3) What medium do you use to send confirmation letters to your business partners? 2) In what languages do you require these dealing slips? 1) For which counterparties and instruments do you require confirmation letters? Process Outgoing Confirmations

2.6.3.
2.6.3.1. Questions:

Position Management
Exercise Security Rights

Q: 1) What is your procedure for exercising special rights (such as warrants)? Describe the posting procedure. A: Q: A: 2.6.3.2. Questions: Q: A: 178 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc 1) For what reasons can positions be blocked? Disposition Block 2) What is your procedure for exercising special rights?

ValueSAP 2.6.3.3. Questions: Q: 1) How do you currently monitor deadlines (such as the subscription period for subscription rights)? A: 2.6.3.4. Questions: Q: A: 1) How do you process corporate actions (organization, posting)? Issue Currency Changeover Deadline monitoring

2.6.4.
Questions:

Accounting

Q: 1) Develop a posting system for the transactions you conclude, making sure you cover all the special cases which may arise. A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 4) Compile an overview of the possible payment details per business partner and financial transaction type. A: Q: 5) Do you have to generate payment orders? What form do they take (data medium, bank transfer)? A: Q: A: 2.6.4.1. Questions: Q: 1) Can flows be posted immediately once the transaction has been checked, or do they need to be released explicitly? 179 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc Posting Release 6) Which formats should be used for generating the payment media? 3) Do you generate balance sheets for business areas? 2) To which CO objects do you need to make account assignments?

ValueSAP A: Q: A: 2.6.4.2. Questions: Q: A: Q: 2) In which cases do you prefer to generate debit items manually rather than automatically? A: Q: A: 2.6.4.3. Questions: Q: A: Q: 2) In which cases do you prefer to generate debit items manually rather than automatically? A: 2.6.4.4. Questions: Q: 1) Can postings for individual flows be made to the bank clearing account, or must flows be grouped? A: Q: A: 2) Do you have netting agreements with your house banks? Process Payment Request 1) Develop a posting system for the incoming payments in the Securities area. Automatic Posting 3) Which flows do you want to be able to post manually? 1) Develop a posting system for the incoming payments in the Securities area. Manual Posting 2) Do flows have to be explicitly released before they can be posted?

2.6.5.
Questions: Q:

Closing Operations

1) How often you carry out period-end closing activities? 180

Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP A: 2.6.5.1. Questions: Q: A: 2.6.5.2. Questions: Q: A: Q: 2) Which accrual/deferral procedures (reset procedure, difference procedure) and methods (accrual, deferral) do you use? A: Q: A: 2.6.5.3. Questions: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 5) If you use composite prices, do you calculate them per securities account or across several securities accounts (securities account, portfolio) A: 4) Do you calculate composite prices or value individual transactions? 3) In which order do you want to value positions? (value the security or the currency first?) 2) Do you value currency gains and losses and price gains and losses separately? 1) Which valuation rules do you apply (e.g. lowest-value principle, value at market prices)? Key Date Valuation 3) When do you reset interest accruals/deferrals? 1) When do you perform interest accruals/deferrals? Interest Accrual/Deferral 1) How often do you post price/rate gains and losses? Period-End Closing

181 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP -

2.7.
2.7.1.

Process Deposit at Notice [TR-MM]

Transaction Processing
Process Deposit at Notice 2.7.1.1.

Questions: Q: A: Q: 2) Do you need to create additional transaction flows for certain transactions or business partners (such as a fixed percentage charge, taxes)? A: 2.7.1.2. Questions: Q: A: 2.7.1.3. Questions: Q: A: Q: A: 2) Describe your release procedure. 1) Describe how transaction processing is organized in your company. Release 1) For what reasons can a transaction be reversed? Reversal 1) Can rules be defined for these additional flows? If so, what would these rules be?

2.7.2.
2.7.2.1. Questions: Q: A:

Correspondence
Process Outgoing Confirmations

1) For which counterparties and instruments do you require confirmation letters?

Q: 2) Do you need to generate additional flows for certain transactions / business partners (such as a fixed rate for a fee, taxes)? A: Q: A: 3) In what languages do you require these dealing slips?

182 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP Q: A: Q: 5) At what stage is external correspondence generated (when transactions are entered in the front office or after processing in the back office)? A: 2.7.2.2. Questions: Q: A: 1) Do you want to manage counterconfirmations in the system? Process Incoming Confirmations 4) What medium do you use to send confirmation letters to your business partners?

2.7.3.
2.7.3.1. Questions:

Accounting
Posting Release

Q: 1) Can flows be posted immediately once the transaction has been checked, or do they need to be released explicitly? A: Q: A: 2.7.3.2. Questions: Q: A: Q: 2) Develop a posting system for the transactions you conclude, making sure you cover all the special cases which may arise. A: Q: 3) Compile an overview of the possible payment details per business partner and financial transaction type. A: Q: 4) For transactions within the group, do you merely clear the cash flows or is money actually exchanged via a bank? A: 183 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc 1) To which CO account assignment objects do you need to make assignments? Perform Posting 2) Do flows have to be explicitly released before they can be posted?

ValueSAP Q: 5) Do you have to generate payment orders? What form do they take (data medium, bank transfer)? A: Q: A: 2.7.3.3. Questions: Q: 1) Can postings for individual flows be made to the bank clearing account, or must flows be grouped? A: Q: A: 2.7.3.4. Questions: Q: A: 1) For what reasons can a posting be reversed? Reverse Posting Documents 2) Do you have netting agreements with your house banks? Process Payment Request 6) Which formats should be used for generating the payment media?

2.7.4.
2.7.4.1. Questions: Q: A: 2.7.4.2. Questions: Q: A:

Closing Operations
Accrual/Deferral

1) Which method do you use for interest accrual/deferral?

Key Date Valuation

1) Which price/rate types are used for valuation?

Q: 2) Do you post the valuation results individually for each financial transaction, or are transactions grouped? A: 2.7.4.3. Questions: 184 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc Realized Gains/Losses

ValueSAP Q: 1) Do you post the valuation results individually for each financial transaction, or are transactions grouped? A: Q: A: 2) Which price/rate types are used for valuation?

2.8.
2.8.1.

Commercial Paper [TR-MM]

Transaction Processing
Process Commercial Paper 2.8.1.1.

Questions: Q: 1) Do you need to create additional transaction flows for certain transactions or business partners (such as a fixed percentage charge, taxes)? A: Q: A: 2.8.1.2. Questions: Q: A: 2.8.1.3. Questions: Q: A: Q: A: 2) Describe your release procedure. 1) Describe how transaction processing is organized in your company. Release 1) For what reasons can a transaction be reversed? Reversal 2) Can rules be defined for these additional flows? If so, what would these rules be?

2.8.2.
2.8.2.1. Questions: Q: A:

Correspondence
Process Outgoing Confirmations

1) For which counterparties and instruments do you require confirmation letters?

185 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP Q: 2) Do you need to generate additional flows for certain transactions / business partners (such as a fixed rate for a fee, taxes)? A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 5) At what stage is external correspondence generated (when transactions are entered in the front office or after processing in the back office)? A: 2.8.2.2. Questions: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 4) At what stage is external correspondence generated (when transactions are entered in the front office or after processing in the back office)? A: Q: A: 5) Do you want to manage counterconfirmations in the system? 3) What medium do you use to send confirmation letters to your business partners? 2) In what languages do you require these dealing slips? 1) For which counterparties and instruments do you require confirmation letters? Process Incoming Confirmations 4) What medium do you use to send confirmation letters to your business partners? 3) In what languages do you require these dealing slips?

2.8.3.
2.8.3.1. Questions:

Accounting
Posting Release

Q: 1) Can flows be posted immediately once the transaction has been checked, or do they need to be released explicitly? A: 186 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP -

Q: A:

2) Do flows have to be explicitly released before they can be posted?

2.8.3.2. Questions:

Perform Posting

Q: 1) Do you post Commercial Paper at the nominal value or the net present value in the balance sheet? A: Q: A: Q: 3) Develop a posting system for the transactions you conclude, making sure you cover all the special cases which may arise. A: Q: 4) Compile an overview of the possible payment details per business partner and financial transaction type. A: Q: 5) For transactions within the group, do you merely clear the cash flows or is money actually exchanged via a bank? A: Q: 6) Do you have to generate payment orders? What form do they take (data medium, bank transfer)? A: Q: A: 2.8.3.3. Questions: Q: 1) Can postings for individual flows be made to the bank clearing account, or must flows be grouped? A: Q: 2) Do you have netting agreements with your house banks? 187 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc Process Payment Request 7) Which formats should be used for generating the payment media? 2) To which CO account assignment objects do you need to make assignments?

ValueSAP A: 2.8.3.4. Questions: Q: A: 1) For what reasons can a posting be reversed? Reverse Posting Documents

2.8.4.
2.8.4.1. Questions: Q: A: 2.8.4.2. Questions: Q: A:

Closing Operations
Accrual/Deferral

1) Which method do you use for interest accrual/deferral?

Key Date Valuation

1) Which price/rate types are used for valuation?

Q: 2) Do you post the valuation results individually for each financial transaction, or are transactions grouped? A: 2.8.4.3. Questions: Q: 1) Do you post the valuation results individually for each financial transaction, or are transactions grouped? A: Q: A: 2) Which price/rate types are used for valuation? Realized Gains/Losses

2.9.
2.9.1.

Process Fixed-Term Deposit [TR-MM]

Transaction Processing
Process Fixed-Term Deposit 2.9.1.1.

Questions: Q: A: 1) Can rules be defined for these additional flows? If so, what would these rules be?

188 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP Q: 2) Do you need to create additional transaction flows for certain transactions or business partners (such as a fixed percentage charge, taxes)? A: 2.9.1.2. Questions: Q: A: 2.9.1.3. Questions: Q: A: Q: A: 2) Describe your release procedure. 1) Describe how transaction processing is organized in your company. Release 1) For what reasons can a transaction be reversed? Reversal

2.9.2.
2.9.2.1. Questions: Q: A:

Correspondence
Process Outgoing Confirmations

1) For which counterparties and instruments do you require confirmation letters?

Q: 2) Do you need to generate additional flows for certain transactions / business partners (such as a fixed rate for a fee, taxes)? A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 5) At what stage is external correspondence generated (when transactions are entered in the front office or after processing in the back office)? A: 2.9.2.2. Questions: 189 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc Process Incoming Confirmations 4) What medium do you use to send confirmation letters to your business partners? 3) In what languages do you require these dealing slips?

ValueSAP -

Q: A:

1) Do you want to manage counterconfirmations in the system?

2.9.3.
2.9.3.1. Questions:

Accounting
Posting Release

Q: 1) Can flows be posted immediately once the transaction has been checked, or do they need to be released explicitly? A: Q: A: 2.9.3.2. Questions: Q: A: Q: 2) Develop a posting system for the transactions you conclude, making sure you cover all the special cases which may arise. A: Q: 3) Compile an overview of the possible payment details per business partner and financial transaction type. A: Q: 4) For transactions within the group, do you merely clear the cash flows or is money actually exchanged via a bank? A: Q: 5) Do you have to generate payment orders? What form do they take (data medium, bank transfer)? A: Q: A: 2.9.3.3. Questions: 190 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc Process Payment Request 6) Which formats should be used for generating the payment media? 1) To which CO account assignment objects do you need to make assignments? Perform Posting 2) Do flows have to be explicitly released before they can be posted?

ValueSAP -

Q: 1) Can postings for individual flows be made to the bank clearing account, or must flows be grouped? A: Q: A: 2.9.3.4. Questions: Q: A: 1) For what reasons can a posting be reversed? Reverse Posting Documents 2) Do you have netting agreements with your house banks?

2.9.4.
2.9.4.1. Questions: Q: A: 2.9.4.2. Questions: Q: A:

Closing Operations
Accrual/Deferral

1) Which method do you use for interest accrual/deferral?

Key Date Valuation

1) Which price/rate types are used for valuation?

Q: 2) Do you post the valuation results individually for each financial transaction, or are transactions grouped? A: 2.9.4.3. Questions: Q: 1) Do you post the valuation results individually for each financial transaction, or are transactions grouped? A: Q: A: 2) Which price/rate types are used for valuation? Realized Gains/Losses

191 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP -

2.10.

Cash Flow Transactions [TR-MM]

Transaction Processing
Process Cash Flow 2.10.1.1.

2.10.1.
Questions: Q: A:

1) Can rules be defined for these additional flows? If so, what would these rules be?

Q: 2) Do you need to create additional transaction flows for certain transactions or business partners (such as a fixed percentage charge, taxes)? A: 2.10.1.2. Questions: Q: A: 2.10.1.3. Questions: Q: A: Q: A: 2) Describe your release procedure. 1) Describe how transaction processing is organized in your company. Release 1) For what reasons can a transaction be reversed? Reversal

2.10.2.
2.10.2.1. Questions: Q: A:

Correspondence
Process Outgoing Confirmations

1) For which counterparties and instruments do you require confirmation letters?

Q: 2) Do you need to generate additional flows for certain transactions / business partners (such as a fixed rate for a fee, taxes)? A: Q: A: 3) In what languages do you require these dealing slips?

192 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP Q: A: Q: 5) At what stage is external correspondence generated (when transactions are entered in the front office or after processing in the back office)? A: 2.10.2.2. Questions: Q: A: 1) Do you want to manage counterconfirmations in the system? Process Incoming Confirmations 4) What medium do you use to send confirmation letters to your business partners?

2.10.3.
2.10.3.1. Questions:

Accounting
Posting Release

Q: 1) Can flows be posted immediately once the transaction has been checked, or do they need to be released explicitly? A: Q: A: 2.10.3.2. Questions: Q: A: Q: 2) Develop a posting system for the transactions you conclude, making sure you cover all the special cases which may arise. A: Q: 3) Compile an overview of the possible payment details per business partner and financial transaction type. A: Q: 4) For transactions within the group, do you merely clear the cash flows or is money actually exchanged via a bank? A: 193 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc 1) To which CO account assignment objects do you need to make assignments? Perform Posting 2) Do flows have to be explicitly released before they can be posted?

ValueSAP Q: 5) Do you have to generate payment orders? What form do they take (data medium, bank transfer)? A: Q: A: 2.10.3.3. Questions: Q: 1) Can postings for individual flows be made to the bank clearing account, or must flows be grouped? A: Q: A: 2.10.3.4. Questions: Q: A: 1) For what reasons can a posting be reversed? Reverse Posting Documents 2) Do you have netting agreements with your house banks? Process Payment Request 6) Which formats should be used for generating the payment media?

2.10.4.
2.10.4.1. Questions: Q: A: 2.10.4.2. Questions: Q: A:

Closing Operations
Accrual/Deferral

1) Which method do you use for interest accrual/deferral?

Key Date Valuation

1) Which price/rate types are used for valuation?

Q: 2) Do you post the valuation results individually for each financial transaction, or are transactions grouped? A: 2.10.4.3. Questions: 194 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc Realized Gains/Losses

ValueSAP Q: 1) Do you post the valuation results individually for each financial transaction, or are transactions grouped? A: Q: A: 2) Which price/rate types are used for valuation?

2.11.

Currency Options [TR-FX]

Transaction Processing for Standard Currency Options
Reversal 2.11.1.1.

2.11.1.
Questions: Q: A: 2.11.1.2. Questions: Q: A: Q: A:

1) For what reasons can a transaction be reversed?

Release

1) Describe how transaction processing is organized in your company.

2) Describe your release procedure.

2.11.2.
2.11.2.1. Questions: Q: A: 2.11.2.2. Questions: Q: A: Q: A:

Transaction Processing for Exotic Currency Options

Reversal

1) For what reasons can a transaction be reversed?

Release

1) Describe how transaction processing is organized in your company.

2) Describe your release procedure.

2.11.3.
2.11.3.1.

Correspondence
Process Outgoing Confirmations 195

Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP Questions: Q: A: Q: 2) Do you need to generate additional flows for certain transactions / business partners (such as a fixed rate for a fee, taxes)? A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 5) At what stage is external correspondence generated (when transactions are entered in the front office or after processing in the back office)? A: 4) What medium do you use to send confirmation letters to your business partners? 3) In what languages do you require these dealing slips? 1) For which counterparties and instruments do you require confirmation letters?

2.11.4.
2.11.4.1. Questions:

Accounting
Posting Release

Q: 1) Can flows be posted immediately once the transaction has been checked, or do they need to be released explicitly? A: Q: A: 2.11.4.2. Questions: Q: A: Q: 2) Develop a posting system for the transactions you conclude, making sure you cover all the special cases which may arise. A: Q: 3) Compile an overview of the possible payment details per business partner and financial transaction type. 196 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc 1) To which CO account assignment objects do you need to make assignments? Perform Posting 2) Do flows have to be explicitly released before they can be posted?

ValueSAP -

A: Q: 4) For transactions within the group, do you merely clear the cash flows or is money actually exchanged via a bank? A: Q: 5) Do you have to generate payment orders? What form do they take (data medium, bank transfer)? A: Q: A: 2.11.4.3. Questions: Q: 1) Can postings for individual flows be made to the bank clearing account, or must flows be grouped? A: Q: A: 2.11.4.4. Questions: Q: A: 1) For what reasons can a posting be reversed? Reverse Posting Documents 2) Do you have netting agreements with your house banks? Process Payment Request 6) Which formats should be used for generating the payment media?

2.11.5.
2.11.5.1. Questions: Q: A:

Closing Operations
Key Date Valuation

1) Which price/rate types are used for valuation?

Q: 2) Do you post the valuation results individually for each financial transaction, or are transactions grouped? A: 2.11.5.2. Questions: 197 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc Realized Gains/Losses

ValueSAP -

Q: 1) Do you post the valuation results individually for each financial transaction, or are transactions grouped? A: Q: A: 2) Which price/rate types are used for valuation?

2.12.

Forex Spot, Forward and Swap Transactions [TR-FX]

Transaction Processing
Spot/Forward Exchange Transaction 2.12.1.1.

2.12.1.
Questions:

Q: 1) Do you need to create additional transaction flows for certain transactions or business partners (such as a fixed percentage charge, taxes)? A: 2.12.1.2. Questions: Q: A: Q: A: 2) Describe your release procedure. 1) Describe how transaction processing is organized in your company. Release

2.12.2.
2.12.2.1. Questions: Q: A:

Correspondence
Process Outgoing Confirmations

1) For which counterparties and instruments do you require confirmation letters?

Q: 2) Do you need to generate additional flows for certain transactions / business partners (such as a fixed rate for a fee, taxes)? A: Q: A: Q: 4) What medium do you use to send confirmation letters to your business partners? 198 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc 3) In what languages do you require these dealing slips?

ValueSAP A: Q: 5) At what stage is external correspondence generated (when transactions are entered in the front office or after processing in the back office)? A: 2.12.2.2. Questions: Q: A: 1) Do you want to manage counterconfirmations in the system? Process Incoming Confirmations

2.12.3.
2.12.3.1. Questions:

Accounting
Posting Release

Q: 1) Can flows be posted immediately once the transaction has been checked, or do they need to be released explicitly? A: Q: A: 2.12.3.2. Questions: Q: A: Q: 2) Develop a posting system for the transactions you conclude, making sure you cover all the special cases which may arise. A: Q: 3) Compile an overview of the possible payment details per business partner and financial transaction type. A: Q: 4) For transactions within the group, do you merely clear the cash flows or is money actually exchanged via a bank? A: Q: 5) Do you have to generate payment orders? What form do they take (data medium, bank transfer)? 199 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc 1) To which CO account assignment objects do you need to make assignments? Perform Posting 2) Do flows have to be explicitly released before they can be posted?

ValueSAP -

A: Q: A: 2.12.3.3. Questions: Q: 1) Can postings for individual flows be made to the bank clearing account, or must flows be grouped? A: Q: A: 2.12.3.4. Questions: Q: A: 1) For what reasons can a posting be reversed? Reverse Posting Documents 2) Do you have netting agreements with your house banks? Process Payment Request 6) Which formats should be used for generating the payment media?

2.12.4.
2.12.4.1. Questions: Q: A:

Closing Operations
Key Date Valuation

1) Which price/rate types are used for valuation?

Q: 2) Do you post the valuation results individually for each financial transaction, or are transactions grouped? A: 2.12.4.2. Questions: Q: 1) Do you post the valuation results individually for each financial transaction, or are transactions grouped? A: Q: A: 200 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc 2) Which price/rate types are used for valuation? Realized Gains/Losses

ValueSAP -

2.13.

Listed Derivative Transactions [TR-DE]

Transaction Processing
Reversal 2.13.1.1.

2.13.1.
Questions: Q: A: 2.13.1.2. Questions: Q: A: Q: A:

1) For what reasons can a transaction be reversed?

Release

1) Describe how transaction processing is organized in your company.

2) Describe your release procedure.

2.13.2.
2.13.2.1. Questions:

Accounting
Posting Release

Q: 1) Can flows be posted immediately once the transaction has been checked, or do they need to be released explicitly? A: Q: A: 2.13.2.2. Questions: Q: A: Q: 2) Develop a posting system for the transactions you conclude, making sure you cover all the special cases which may arise. A: Q: 3) Compile an overview of the possible payment details per business partner and financial transaction type. A: 201 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc 1) To which CO account assignment objects do you need to make assignments? Perform Posting 2) Do flows have to be explicitly released before they can be posted?

ValueSAP 2.13.2.3. Questions: Q: 1) Can postings for individual flows be made to the bank clearing account, or must flows be grouped? A: Q: A: 2.13.2.4. Questions: Q: A: 1) For what reasons can a posting be reversed? Reverse Posting Documents 2) Do you have netting agreements with your house banks? Process Payment Request

2.14.

Process OTC Derivative Transactions [TR-DE]

Transaction Processing
Reversal 2.14.1.1.

2.14.1.
Questions: Q: A: 2.14.1.2. Questions: Q: A: Q: A:

1) For what reasons can a transaction be reversed?

Release

1) Describe how transaction processing is organized in your company.

2) Describe your release procedure.

2.14.2.
2.14.2.1. Questions: Q: A:

Correspondence
Process Outgoing Confirmations

1) For which counterparties and instruments do you require confirmation letters?

Q: 2) Do you need to generate additional flows for certain transactions / business partners (such as a fixed rate for a fee, taxes)? 202 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 5) At what stage is external correspondence generated (when transactions are entered in the front office or after processing in the back office)? A: 4) What medium do you use to send confirmation letters to your business partners? 3) In what languages do you require these dealing slips?

2.14.3.
2.14.3.1. Questions:

Accounting
Posting Release

Q: 1) Can flows be posted immediately once the transaction has been checked, or do they need to be released explicitly? A: Q: A: 2.14.3.2. Questions: Q: A: Q: 2) Develop a posting system for the transactions you conclude, making sure you cover all the special cases which may arise. A: Q: 3) Compile an overview of the possible payment details per business partner and financial transaction type. A: Q: 4) For transactions within the group, do you merely clear the cash flows or is money actually exchanged via a bank? A: 203 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc 1) To which CO account assignment objects do you need to make assignments? Perform Posting 2) Do flows have to be explicitly released before they can be posted?

ValueSAP Q: 5) Do you have to generate payment orders? What form do they take (data medium, bank transfer)? A: Q: A: 2.14.3.3. Questions: Q: 1) Can postings for individual flows be made to the bank clearing account, or must flows be grouped? A: Q: A: 2.14.3.4. Questions: Q: A: 1) For what reasons can a posting be reversed? Reverse Posting Documents 2) Do you have netting agreements with your house banks? Process Payment Request 6) Which formats should be used for generating the payment media?

2.15. Options on Interest Rate Instruments and Securities [TR-DE]

2.15.1.
2.15.1.1. Questions: Q: A: 2.15.1.2. Questions: Q: A: Q: A: 2) Describe your release procedure. 1) Describe how transaction processing is organized in your company. Release 1) For what reasons can a transaction be reversed?

Transaction Processing
Reversal

2.15.2.
2.15.2.1. Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

Correspondence
Process Outgoing Confirmations 204

ValueSAP -

Questions: Q: A: Q: 2) Do you need to generate additional flows for certain transactions / business partners (such as a fixed rate for a fee, taxes)? A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 5) At what stage is external correspondence generated (when transactions are entered in the front office or after processing in the back office)? A: 4) What medium do you use to send confirmation letters to your business partners? 3) In what languages do you require these dealing slips? 1) For which counterparties and instruments do you require confirmation letters?

2.15.3.
2.15.3.1. Questions:

Accounting
Posting Release

Q: 1) Can flows be posted immediately once the transaction has been checked, or do they need to be released explicitly? A: Q: A: 2.15.3.2. Questions: Q: A: Q: 2) Develop a posting system for the transactions you conclude, making sure you cover all the special cases which may arise. A: 1) To which CO account assignment objects do you need to make assignments? Perform Posting 2) Do flows have to be explicitly released before they can be posted?

205 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP Q: 3) Compile an overview of the possible payment details per business partner and financial transaction type. A: Q: 4) For transactions within the group, do you merely clear the cash flows or is money actually exchanged via a bank? A: Q: 5) Do you have to generate payment orders? What form do they take (data medium, bank transfer)? A: Q: A: 2.15.3.3. Questions: Q: A: 1) For what reasons can a posting be reversed? Reverse Posting Documents 6) Which formats should be used for generating the payment media?

2.15.4.
2.15.4.1. Questions: Q: A:

Closing Operations
Key Date Valuation

1) Which price/rate types are used for valuation?

Q: 2) Do you post the valuation results individually for each financial transaction, or are transactions grouped? A: 2.15.4.2. Questions: Q: 1) Do you post the valuation results individually for each financial transaction, or are transactions grouped? A: Q: A: 206 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc 2) Which price/rate types are used for valuation? Realized Gains/Losses

ValueSAP -

2.16.

Mortgage Loans Given [TR-LO]

New Transactions

2.16.1.
Questions:

Q: 1) What procedure do you follow from acceptance of an application through to contract disbursement? A: Q: 2) Do you have a separate decision stage when processing mortgage loans? On which basis do you make the decision to finance? A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 6) Do you enter clerk information for the loan? What information is recorded and for what purpose? A: Q: 7) What other information should be entered in relation to the loan? What information should be entered at which steps in the loan process? A: Q: A: 2.16.1.1. Questions: Q: A: 2.16.1.2. Questions: 207 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc Process Application 1) Which information do you want to record about a potential borrower? Process Inquiry 8) Do you want to save regulatory reporting information? 5) How should the contracts be numbered? 4) How do you treat loan applications that have been withdrawn? 3) How do you treat unsuccessful loan applications?

ValueSAP -

Q: A:

1) How do you treat applications that have not progressed to the contract stage?

2.16.1.3. Questions: Q: A:

Collateral Value Calculation

1) Do you manage encumbrances (own rights, third-party rights)?

Q: 2) How do you determine collateral values? Who produces expert reports (technical department, external expert)? A: 2.16.1.4. Questions: Q: A: Q: 2) Which credit standing information do you want to record in the system (credit standing calculation / voluntary disclosure)? A: 2.16.1.5. Questions: Q: A: Q: A: 2.16.1.6. Questions: Q: A: Q: A: 2) How do you treat offers that are rejected or offers that are only accepted in part? 1) Describe the process you use for making offers. Process Offer 2) How do you make your credit decisions? 1) Do you have a special loan decision-making process? Loan Approval 1) Do you carry out a credit standing check? Check Credit Standing

208 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP Q: A: 2.16.1.7. Questions: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 3) How do you treat contracts which have fallen through or which have only been concluded in part? A: 2.16.1.8. Questions: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 3) What "payment methods" (check, bank transfer, telegraphic transfer, and so on) are used for disbursement? A: Q: A: 2.16.1.9. Questions: Q: 1) Do you want to incorporate security checks when you process new transactions (release procedure)? A: Q: A: 209 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc 2) Which checks do you require, and in which phases? Release 4) To whom are the outgoing payments usually made? 2) Do you withhold incidental costs / overdue items? 1) Which incidental costs are incurred upon disbursement? Process Disbursement 2) Who makes the incoming payments? Is it always the issuer? 1) Which other business partners are involved in the contract? Process Contract 3) Do you record the reasons for rejection?

ValueSAP -

2.16.2.
Questions: Q: A:

Create Correspondence

1) What types of outgoing correspondence do you use?

Q: 2) How do you send correspondence to your customers in the phase leading up to conclusion of a new contract? A: 2.16.2.1. Questions: Q: A: 2.16.2.2. Questions: Q: A: 1) Which mass correspondence do you send (account statement, interest certificate)? Generate Correspondence on a Regular Basis 1) For which business activities in the loan process do you require correspondence? Generate Correspondence for Specific Business Operation

2.16.3.
2.16.3.1. Questions:

Business Operations for Contract

Change Loan Contract

Q: 1) What types of changes to you make to contracts as part of the general loan procedure (such as changes to conditions, contract split)? A: Q: A: 2.16.3.2. Questions: Q: 1) Which circumstances can result in changes to the balance sheet position of current contracts? A: 2.16.3.3. Questions: 210 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc Capital Transfer Balance Sheet Transfer 2) Do you change the borrower during the term of the loan?

ValueSAP Q: 1) What types of changes to you make to contracts as part of the general loan procedure (such as changes to conditions, contract split)? A: 2.16.3.4. Questions: Q: A: 2.16.3.5. Questions: Q: 1) How do you treat unscheduled repayments? Do you split the gains into ordinary and extraordinary gains (write-back of deferral)? A: 2.16.3.6. Questions: Q: 1) Do you want to incorporate security checks when you process new transactions (release procedure)? A: Q: A: 2) Which checks do you require, and in which phases? Release Enter Unscheduled Repayments 1) Which postings are entered manually (agent commission, processing charges)? Enter Charges and Commission

2.16.4.
Questions:

Rollover

Q: 1) How do you adjust the conditions for loans due to expire (rollover)? Describe the phases/steps. A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: 211 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc 4) Who is responsible for processing rollovers in your company? Which employees? 3) Do you carry out mass rollover runs? Do you also have unscheduled rollovers? 2) Do you accept unscheduled repayments during the rollover phase?

ValueSAP 2.16.4.1. Questions: Q: A: 2.16.4.2. Questions: Q: 1) How do you divide up the loans due to be rolled over in order to process them and assign the appropriate conditions? A: 2.16.4.3. Questions: Q: A: 1) Which information should be included in the rollover offer? Generate Rollover Offer Select and Assign Rollover Position 1) How do you fix the conditions for rollover offers/contracts? Determine Rollover Conditions

2.16.5.
2.16.5.1. Questions:

Contract Currency Changeover

Contract Currency Changeover to the Euro

Q: 1) Are contracts converted to the euro individually, or are they converted in a mass processing run? A:

2.16.6.
Questions:

Accounting

Q: 1) How many position accounts do you use? According to which criteria are they managed? A: Q: 2) Which circumstances can result in changes to the balance sheet position of current contracts? A: Q: A: Q: 4) Do you apply certain posting specifications? Where appropriate, document the posting records using T-accounts. 212 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc 3) Which steps can be automated?

ValueSAP A: Q: A: Q: 6) Develop a posting system for the transactions you conclude, making sure you cover all the special cases which may arise. A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 10) How do you treat the various incoming payments (underpayments, advance payments, overpayments)? A: Q: A: 2.16.6.1. Questions: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 4) Which forms of payment do you support (check, bank transfer, direct debit, ...)? 213 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc 3) Which formats should be used for generating the payment media? 2) Which media do you use for this? 1) Do you have to generate payment orders? Payment Transactions Triggered by R/3 System 11) According to which criteria and in what sequence do you assign incoming payments 9) How do you treat incoming and outgoing payments? 8) Do you have specific cost accounting information? 7) To which CO account assignment objects do you need to make assignments? 5) Do you require functions for managing receivables?

ValueSAP A: Q: A: 2.16.6.2. Questions: Q: A: Q: 2) How do you enter information from external bank statements (manually and/or electronically)? A: Q: 3) What information does the bank statement contain about the purpose of the payments (for example, customer number)? A: Q: A: Q: 5) For which house banks would it make sense to use electronic bank statements? Do these banks have the required technical capability? A: Q: A: Q: 7) Do the bank statements transferred by the house bank contain business transaction codes for posting the statements (do you need to assign a posting activity to each business transaction code)? A: Q: 8) Which business transaction codes are used by the house banks for which types of payment (e.g. credit memos from transfers by customers, debited checks)? A: Q: 9) Do you want to distinguish between posting documents for manual and electronic bank statements for accounting and reporting purposes? 214 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc 6) In which format is the electronic bank statement available? 4) Sketch the posting steps for typical bank statement postings (algorithm). 1) How do you receive your bank statement information at present? Payment Transactions Triggered by External Partner 5) Which accounts do you use to process payments?

ValueSAP A: 2.16.6.3. Questions: Q: 1) As a rule, do you want to process payments which deviate from those expected manually or automatically? A: Q: A: Q: A: 2.16.6.4. Questions: Q: 1) For what period of time do you require planned data to be available on the database for reporting and cash management? A: Q: A: Q: A: 2.16.6.5. Questions: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 4) Do you have foreign currency loans? 215 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc 3) According to which criteria do you select the data to be posted? 2) How frequently do want to perform an automatic debit position run? 1) How many contracts do you want to manage? Automatic Posting 3) Do you work with reference interest rates (such as EURIBOR)? 2) Do you have foreign currency loans? Preparations for Posting 3) How do you process overpayments/residual amounts? 2) How do you process minor differences? Payment Postprocessing

ValueSAP -

A: Q: A: 2.16.6.6. Questions: Q: A: 2.16.6.7. Questions: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: 2.16.6.8. Questions: Q: A: Q: 2) Do you send reminders to all customers? If not, which criteria do you use for dunning processing? A: Q: 3) Do you apply the dunning procedure to individual contracts or to all the contracts for a customer? A: Q: 4) Do you charge dunning fees / dunning interest? If so, how much do you charge and when? A: 216 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc 1) Describe your dunning procedure. Dunning 3) Do you charge the customer for this (internal charges, own bank charges)? 2) How do you process incoming payments that cannot be honored? 1) For what reasons can postings be reversed? Reverse Postings 1) Which postings do you make manually (charges, unscheduled repayments)? Manual Posting 5) Do you work with reference interest rates (such as EURIBOR)?

ValueSAP -

Q: A: Q: A:

5) Do you grant a grace period?

6) Do you have a legal dunning procedure?

2.16.6.9. Questions: Q: A: 2.16.6.10. Questions: Q: A: Q: A: 2.16.6.11. Questions: Q: A: Q: A: 2.16.6.12. Questions: Q: A: 2.16.6.13. Questions: Q: A:

Calculate Interest on Arrears

1) Do you charge interest on arrears? If so, what calculation base do you use?

Default on Receivables

1) How do you process waivers/write-offs for receivables?

2) How do you treat subsequent payments for receivables that have been written off?

Perform Accrual/Deferral

1) Which accrual/deferral procedures do you use?

2) Which accrual/deferral methods do you apply?

Value Foreign Currency Loans

1) Describe the relevant valuation principles.

Create Accounting Reports

1) Provide an overview of the accounting reports required in your company.

217 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP 2.16.6.14. Questions: Q: 1) Do you want to incorporate security checks when you process new transactions (release procedure)? A: Q: A: 2) Which checks do you require, and in which phases? Release

2.16.7.
Questions:

Periodic Processing

Q: 1) Specify the period-end closing activities you carry out and describe the related processes. A: 2.16.7.1. Questions: Q: 1) For what period of time do you require planned data to be available on the database for reporting and cash management? A: Q: A: Q: A: 2.16.7.2. Questions: Q: A: 2.16.7.3. Questions: Q: 1) Do you want to incorporate security checks when you process new transactions (release procedure)? A: 218 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc Release 1) How often do you want to summarize accounting documents (regular intervals)? Summarize Documents 3) Do you work with reference interest rates (such as EURIBOR)? 2) Do you have foreign currency loans? Planned Record Update

ValueSAP Q: A: 2) Which checks do you require, and in which phases?

2.17.

Mortgage Loans Taken [TR-LO]

New Transactions

2.17.1.
Questions: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A:

1) Describe the procedure through to contract disbursement.

2) What happens to the unsuccessful loan applications?

3) How do you treat loan applications that have been withdrawn?

4) How should the contracts be numbered?

Q: 5) Do you enter clerk information for the loan? What information is recorded and for what purpose? A: Q: 6) What other information should be entered in relation to the loan? What information should be entered at which steps in the loan process? A: Q: A: 2.17.1.1. Questions: Q: A: 2.17.1.2. Questions: Q: 1) Describe the process you use for making offers. 219 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc Process Offer 1) How do you treat applications that have not progressed to the contract stage? Process Application 7) Do you want to save regulatory reporting information?

ValueSAP A: Q: A: Q: A: 2.17.1.3. Questions: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 3) How do you treat contracts which have fallen through or which have only been concluded in part? A: Q: 4) What "payment methods" (check, bank transfer, telegraphic transfer, and so on) are used for disbursement? A: 2.17.1.4. Questions: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 3) What "payment methods" (check, bank transfer, telegraphic transfer, and so on) are used for disbursement? A: Q: A: 220 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc 4) To whom are the outgoing payments usually made? 2) Do you withhold incidental costs / overdue items? 1) Which incidental costs are incurred upon disbursement? Process Disbursement 2) Who makes the loan payments? 1) Which other business partners are involved in the contract? Process Contract 3) Do you record the reasons for rejection? 2) How do you treat offers that are rejected or offers that are only accepted in part?

ValueSAP -

2.17.1.5. Questions:

Release

Q: 1) Do you want to incorporate security checks when you process new transactions (release procedure)? A: Q: A: 2) Which checks do you require, and in which phases?

2.17.2.
Questions: Q: A: Q: A:

Create Correspondence

1) What types of correspondence do you generate during the course of the loan process?

2) What types of outgoing correspondence do you use?

Q: 3) How do you send correspondence to your customers in the phase leading up to conclusion of a new contract? A: Q: A: 2.17.2.1. Questions: Q: A: 1) For which business activities in the loan process do you require correspondence? Generate Correspondence for Specific Business Operation 4) Do you want to store correspondence in an optical archive?

2.17.3.
2.17.3.1. Questions:

Business Operations for Contract

Change Loan Contract

Q: 1) What types of changes to you make to contracts as part of the general loan procedure (such as changes to conditions, contract split)? A: Q: 2) Do you change the borrower during the term of the loan? 221 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP -

A: 2.17.3.2. Questions: Q: 1) Which circumstances can result in changes to the balance sheet position of current contracts? A: 2.17.3.3. Questions: Q: 1) What types of changes to you make to contracts as part of the general loan procedure (such as changes to conditions, contract split)? A: 2.17.3.4. Questions: Q: A: 2.17.3.5. Questions: Q: 1) How do you treat unscheduled repayments? Do you split the gains into ordinary and extraordinary gains (write-back of deferral)? A: 2.17.3.6. Questions: Q: 1) Do you want to incorporate security checks when you process new transactions (release procedure)? A: Q: A: 2) Which checks do you require, and in which phases? Release Enter Unscheduled Repayments 1) Which postings are entered manually (agent commission, processing charges)? Enter Charges and Commission Capital Transfer Balance Sheet Transfer

2.17.4.
Questions:

Rollover

Q: 1) How do you adjust the conditions for loans due to expire (rollover)? Describe the phases/steps. A: 222 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP -

Q: A: Q: A:

2) Do you accept unscheduled repayments during the rollover phase?

3) Who is responsible for processing rollovers in your company? Which employees?

2.17.5.
2.17.5.1. Questions:

Contract Currency Changeover

Contract Currency Changeover to the Euro

Q: 1) Are contracts converted to the euro individually, or are they converted in a mass processing run? A:

2.17.6.
Questions:

Accounting

Q: 1) How many position accounts do you use? According to which criteria are they managed? A: Q: 2) Which circumstances can result in changes to the balance sheet position of current contracts? A: Q: A: Q: 4) Do you apply certain posting specifications? Where appropriate, document the posting records using T-accounts. A: Q: 5) Develop a posting system for the transactions you conclude, making sure you cover all the special cases which may arise. A: Q: A: 6) To which CO account assignment objects do you need to make assignments? 3) Which steps can be automated?

223 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP Q: A: Q: 8) How do you treat the various incoming payments (underpayments, advance payments, overpayments)? A: Q: A: 2.17.6.1. Questions: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: 2.17.6.2. Questions: Q: A: Q: 2) How do you enter information from external bank statements (manually and/or electronically)? A: Q: 3) What information does the bank statement contain about the purpose of the payments (for example, customer number)? 224 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc 1) How do you receive your bank statement information at present? Payment Transactions Triggered by External Partner 5) Which accounts do you use to process payments? 4) Which forms of payment do you support (check, bank transfer, direct debit, ...)? 3) Which formats should be used for generating the payment media? 2) Which media do you use for this? 1) Do you have to generate payment orders? Payment Transactions Triggered by R/3 System 9) According to which criteria and in what sequence do you assign incoming payments 7) How do you treat incoming and outgoing payments?

ValueSAP -

A: Q: A: Q: 5) For which house banks would it make sense to use electronic bank statements? Do these banks have the required technical capability? A: Q: A: Q: 7) Do the bank statements transferred by the house bank contain business transaction codes for posting the statements (do you need to assign a posting activity to each business transaction code)? A: Q: 8) Which business transaction codes are used by the house banks for which types of payment (e.g. credit memos from transfers by customers, debited checks)? A: Q: 9) Do you want to distinguish between posting documents for manual and electronic bank statements for accounting and reporting purposes? A: 2.17.6.3. Questions: Q: 1) For what period of time do you require planned data to be available on the database for reporting and cash management? A: Q: A: Q: A: 2.17.6.4. Questions: 225 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc Automatic Postings 3) Do you work with reference interest rates (such as EURIBOR)? 2) Do you have foreign currency loans? Preparations for Posting 6) In which format is the electronic bank statement available? 4) Sketch the posting steps for typical bank statement postings (algorithm).

ValueSAP -

Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A:

1) How many contracts do you want to manage?

2) How frequently do want to perform an automatic debit position run?

3) According to which criteria do you select the data to be posted?

4) Do you have foreign currency loans?

5) Do you work with reference interest rates (such as EURIBOR)?

2.17.6.5. Questions: Q: A: 2.17.6.6. Questions: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: 2.17.6.7. Questions: Q: A:

Manual Posting

1) Which postings do you make manually (charges, unscheduled repayments)?

Reverse Postings

1) For what reasons can postings be reversed?

2) How do you process incoming payments that cannot be honored?

3) Do you charge the customer for this (internal charges, own bank charges)?

Perform Accrual/Deferral

1) Which accrual/deferral procedures do you use?

226 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP Q: A: 2.17.6.8. Questions: Q: A: 2.17.6.9. Questions: Q: A: 2.17.6.10. Questions: Q: 1) Do you want to incorporate security checks when you process new transactions (release procedure)? A: Q: A: 2) Which checks do you require, and in which phases? Release 1) Provide an overview of the accounting reports required in your company. Create Accounting Reports 1) Describe the relevant valuation principles. Value Foreign Currency Loans 2) Which accrual/deferral methods do you apply?

2.17.7.
Questions:

Periodic Processing

Q: 1) Specify the period-end closing activities you carry out and describe the related processes. A: 2.17.7.1. Questions: Q: 1) For what period of time do you require planned data to be available on the database for reporting and cash management? A: Q: A: Q: 3) Do you work with reference interest rates (such as EURIBOR)? 227 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc 2) Do you have foreign currency loans? Planned Record Update

ValueSAP A: 2.17.7.2. Questions: Q: A: 2.17.7.3. Questions: Q: 1) Do you want to incorporate security checks when you process new transactions (release procedure)? A: Q: A: 2) Which checks do you require, and in which phases? Release 1) How often do you want to summarize accounting documents (regular intervals)? Summarize Documents

2.18.

Refinancing Loans [TR-LO]

New Transactions

2.18.1.
Questions: Q: A: Q: A:

1) Describe the procedure through to contract disbursement.

2) How should the contracts be numbered?

Q: 3) Do you enter clerk information for the loan? What information is recorded and for what purpose? A: Q: 4) What other information should be entered in relation to the loan? What information should be entered at which steps in the loan process? A: Q: A: 2.18.1.1. Questions: 228 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc Process Contract 5) Do you want to save regulatory reporting information?

ValueSAP Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 4) How do you treat contracts which have fallen through or which have only been concluded in part? A: Q: 5) What "payment methods" (check, bank transfer, telegraphic transfer, and so on) are used for disbursement? A: 2.18.1.2. Questions: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: 2.18.1.3. Questions: Q: 1) Do you want to incorporate security checks when you process new transactions (release procedure)? A: Q: A: 2) Which checks do you require, and in which phases? Release 3) To whom are the outgoing payments usually made? 2) Do you withhold incidental costs / overdue items? 1) Which incidental costs are incurred upon disbursement? Process Disbursement 3) Who makes the loan payments? 2) Who makes the incoming payments? Is it always the issuer? 1) Which other business partners are involved in the contract?

2.18.2.
Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

Create Correspondence
229

ValueSAP Questions: Q: A: Q: A: 2.18.2.1. Questions: Q: A: 1) For which business activities in the loan process do you require correspondence? Generate Correspondence for Specific Business Operation 2) Do you want to store correspondence in an optical archive? 1) What types of correspondence do you generate during the course of the loan process?

2.18.3.
2.18.3.1. Questions:

Business Operations for Contract

Change Loan Contract

Q: 1) What types of changes to you make to contracts as part of the general loan procedure (such as changes to conditions, contract split)? A: 2.18.3.2. Questions: Q: 1) Which circumstances can result in changes to the balance sheet position of current contracts? A: 2.18.3.3. Questions: Q: 1) What types of changes to you make to contracts as part of the general loan procedure (such as changes to conditions, contract split)? A: 2.18.3.4. Questions: Q: A: 2.18.3.5. Questions: 230 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc Enter Unscheduled Repayments 1) Which postings are entered manually (agent commission, processing charges)? Enter Charges and Commission Capital Transfer Balance Sheet Transfer

ValueSAP Q: 1) How do you treat unscheduled repayments? Do you split the gains into ordinary and extraordinary gains (write-back of deferral)? A:

2.18.4.
2.18.4.1. Questions:

Contract Currency Changeover

Contract Currency Changeover to the Euro

Q: 1) Are contracts converted to the euro individually, or are they converted in a mass processing run? A:

2.18.5.
Questions:

Accounting

Q: 1) How many position accounts do you use? According to which criteria are they managed? A: Q: 2) Which circumstances can result in changes to the balance sheet position of current contracts? A: Q: A: Q: 4) Do you apply certain posting specifications? Where appropriate, document the posting records using T-accounts. A: Q: 5) Develop a posting system for the transactions you conclude, making sure you cover all the special cases which may arise. A: Q: A: Q: A: 7) How do you treat incoming and outgoing payments? 6) To which CO account assignment objects do you need to make assignments? 3) Which steps can be automated?

231 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP Q: 8) How do you treat the various incoming payments (underpayments, advance payments, overpayments)? A: Q: A: 2.18.5.1. Questions: Q: 1) Do you have to generate payment orders? What form do they take (data medium, bank transfer)? A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: 2.18.5.2. Questions: Q: A: Q: 2) How do you enter information from external bank statements (manually and/or electronically)? A: 1) How do you receive your bank statement information at present? Payment Transactions Triggered by External Partner 6) Which accounts do you use to process payments? 5) Which forms of payment do you support (check, bank transfer, direct debit, ...)? 4) Which formats should be used for generating the payment media? 3) Which media do you use for this? 2) Do you have to generate payment orders? Payment Transactions Triggered by R/3 System 9) According to which criteria and in what sequence do you assign incoming payments

232 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP Q: 3) What information does the bank statement contain about the purpose of the payments (for example, customer number)? A: Q: A: Q: 5) For which house banks would it make sense to use electronic bank statements? Do these banks have the required technical capability? A: Q: A: Q: 7) Do the bank statements transferred by the house bank contain business transaction codes for posting the statements (do you need to assign a posting activity to each business transaction code)? A: Q: 8) Which business transaction codes are used by the house banks for which types of payment (e.g. credit memos from transfers by customers, debited checks)? A: Q: 9) Do you want to distinguish between posting documents for manual and electronic bank statements for accounting and reporting purposes? A: 2.18.5.3. Questions: Q: 1) As a rule, do you want to process payments which deviate from those expected manually or automatically? A: Q: A: Q: A: 3) How do you process overpayments/residual amounts? 2) How do you process minor differences? Payment Postprocessing 6) In which format is the electronic bank statement available? 4) Sketch the posting steps for typical bank statement postings (algorithm).

233 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP Q: 4) How do you handle the various forms of incoming payment (underpayments, advance payments, overpayments)? A: 2.18.5.4. Questions: Q: 1) For what period of time do you require planned data to be available on the database for reporting and cash management? A: Q: A: Q: A: 2.18.5.5. Questions: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: 2.18.5.6. Questions: Q: A: 234 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc 1) Which postings do you make manually (charges, unscheduled repayments)? Manual Posting 5) Do you work with reference interest rates (such as EURIBOR)? 4) Do you have foreign currency loans? 3) According to which criteria do you select the data to be posted? 2) How frequently do want to perform an automatic debit position run? 1) How many contracts do you want to manage? Automatic Postings 3) Do you work with reference interest rates (such as EURIBOR)? 2) Do you have foreign currency loans? Preparations for Posting

ValueSAP 2.18.5.7. Questions: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: 2.18.5.8. Questions: Q: A: Q: A: 2.18.5.9. Questions: Q: A: 2.18.5.10. Questions: Q: A: 2.18.5.11. Questions: Q: 1) Do you want to incorporate security checks when you process new transactions (release procedure)? A: Q: A: 235 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc 2) Which checks do you require, and in which phases? Release 1) Provide an overview of the accounting reports required in your company. Create Accounting Reports 1) Describe the relevant valuation principles. Value Foreign Currency Loans 2) Which accrual/deferral methods do you apply? 1) Which accrual/deferral procedures do you use? Perform Accrual/Deferral 3) Do you charge the customer for this (internal charges, own bank charges)? 2) How do you process incoming payments that cannot be honored? 1) For what reasons can postings be reversed? Reverse Postings

ValueSAP -

2.18.6.
Questions:

Periodic Processing

Q: 1) Specify the period-end closing activities you carry out and describe the related processes. A: 2.18.6.1. Questions: Q: 1) For what period of time do you require planned data to be available on the database for reporting and cash management? A: Q: A: Q: A: 2.18.6.2. Questions: Q: A: 2.18.6.3. Questions: Q: 1) Do you want to incorporate security checks when you process new transactions (release procedure)? A: Q: A: 2) Which checks do you require, and in which phases? Release 1) How often do you want to summarize accounting documents (regular intervals)? Summarize Documents 3) Do you work with reference interest rates (such as EURIBOR)? 2) Do you have foreign currency loans? Planned Record Update

2.19.

Policy Loans [TR-LO]

New Transactions

2.19.1.
Questions: Q:

1) What procedure do you follow from the offer stage through to contract disbursement? 236

Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 5) Do you enter clerk information for the loan? What information is recorded and for what purpose? A: Q: 6) What other information should be entered in relation to the loan? What information should be entered at which steps in the loan process? A: Q: A: 2.19.1.1. Questions: Q: A: Q: 2) Which credit standing information do you want to record in the system (credit standing calculation / voluntary disclosure)? A: 2.19.1.2. Questions: Q: A: Q: A: 237 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc 2) How do you treat offers that are rejected or offers that are only accepted in part? 1) Describe the process you use for making offers. Process Offer 1) Do you carry out a credit standing check? Check Credit Standing 7) Do you want to save regulatory reporting information? 4) How should the contracts be numbered? 3) How do you treat loan applications that have been withdrawn? 2) How do you treat unsuccessful loan applications?

ValueSAP -

Q: A:

3) Do you record the reasons for rejection?

2.19.1.3. Questions: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A:

Process Contract

1) Which other business partners are involved in the contract?

2) Who makes the incoming payments? Is it always the issuer?

3) Who makes the loan payments?

Q: 4) How do you treat contracts which have fallen through or which have only been concluded in part? A: Q: 5) What "payment methods" (check, bank transfer, telegraphic transfer, and so on) are used for disbursement? A: 2.19.1.4. Questions: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 3) What "payment methods" (check, bank transfer, telegraphic transfer, and so on) are used for disbursement? A: Q: A: 238 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc 4) To whom are the outgoing payments usually made? 2) Do you withhold incidental costs / overdue items? 1) Which incidental costs are incurred upon disbursement? Process Disbursement

ValueSAP 2.19.1.5. Questions: Q: 1) Do you want to incorporate security checks when you process new transactions (release procedure)? A: Q: A: 2) Which checks do you require, and in which phases? Release

2.19.2.
Questions: Q: A: Q: A:

Create Correspondence

1) What types of correspondence do you generate during the course of the loan process?

2) What types of outgoing correspondence do you use?

Q: 3) How do you send correspondence to your customers in the phase leading up to conclusion of a new contract? A: Q: A: 2.19.2.1. Questions: Q: A: 2.19.2.2. Questions: Q: A: 1) Which mass correspondence do you send (account statement, interest certificate)? Generate Correspondence on a Regular Basis 1) For which business activities in the loan process do you require correspondence? Generate Correspondence for Specific Business Operation 4) Do you want to store correspondence in an optical archive?

2.19.3.
2.19.3.1. Questions:

Business Operations for Contract

Change Loan Contract

239 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP Q: 1) What types of changes to you make to contracts as part of the general loan procedure (such as changes to conditions, contract split)? A: Q: A: 2.19.3.2. Questions: Q: 1) Which circumstances can result in changes to the balance sheet position of current contracts? A: 2.19.3.3. Questions: Q: 1) What types of changes to you make to contracts as part of the general loan procedure (such as changes to conditions, contract split)? A: 2.19.3.4. Questions: Q: A: 2.19.3.5. Questions: Q: 1) How do you treat unscheduled repayments? Do you split the gains into ordinary and extraordinary gains (write-back of deferral)? A: Enter Unscheduled Repayments 1) Which postings are entered manually (agent commission, processing charges)? Enter Charges and Commission Capital Transfer Balance Sheet Transfer 2) Do you change the borrower during the term of the loan?

2.19.4.
Questions:

Rollover

Q: 1) How do you adjust the conditions for due to expire (rollover)? Describe the phases/steps. Which correspondence do you require? Do you send out contract offers and/or contracts to the customer? A: Q: A: 240 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc 2) Do you accept unscheduled repayments during the rollover phase?

ValueSAP -

Q: A: Q: A:

3) Do you carry out mass rollover runs? Do you also have unscheduled rollovers?

4) Who is responsible for processing rollovers in your company? Which employees?

2.19.4.1. Questions: Q: A: 2.19.4.2. Questions:

Determine Rollover Conditions

1) How do you fix the conditions for rollover offers/contracts?

Select and Assign Rollover Position

Q: 1) How do you divide up the loans due to be rolled over in order to process them and assign the appropriate conditions? A: 2.19.4.3. Questions: Q: A: 1) Which information should be included in the rollover offer? Generate Rollover Offer

2.19.5.
2.19.5.1. Questions:

Contract Currency Changeover

Contract Currency Changeover to the Euro

Q: 1) Are contracts converted to the euro individually, or are they converted in a mass processing run? A:

2.19.6.
Questions:

Accounting

Q: 1) How many position accounts do you use? According to which criteria are they managed? A: Q: 2) Which circumstances can result in changes to the balance sheet position of current contracts? A: 241 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP -

Q: A:

3) Which steps can be automated?

Q: 4) Do you apply certain posting specifications? Where appropriate, document the posting records using T-accounts. A: Q: 5) Develop a posting system for the transactions you conclude, making sure you cover all the special cases which may arise. A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 8) How do you treat the various incoming payments (underpayments, advance payments, overpayments)? A: Q: A: 2.19.6.1. Questions: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 4) Which forms of payment do you support (check, bank transfer, direct debit, ...)? 242 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc 3) Which formats should be used for generating the payment media? 2) Which media do you use for this? 1) Do you have to generate payment orders? Payment Transactions Triggered by R/3 System 9) According to which criteria and in what sequence do you assign incoming payments 7) How do you treat incoming and outgoing payments? 6) To which CO account assignment objects do you need to make assignments?

ValueSAP A: Q: A: 2.19.6.2. Questions: Q: A: Q: 2) How do you enter information from external bank statements (manually and/or electronically)? A: Q: 3) What information does the bank statement contain about the purpose of the payments (for example, customer number)? A: Q: A: Q: 5) For which house banks would it make sense to use electronic bank statements? Do these banks have the required technical capability? A: Q: A: Q: 7) Do the bank statements transferred by the house bank contain business transaction codes for posting the statements (do you need to assign a posting activity to each business transaction code)? A: Q: 8) Which business transaction codes are used by the house banks for which types of payment (e.g. credit memos from transfers by customers, debited checks)? A: Q: 9) Do you want to distinguish between posting documents for manual and electronic bank statements for accounting and reporting purposes? 243 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc 6) In which format is the electronic bank statement available? 4) Sketch the posting steps for typical bank statement postings (algorithm). 1) How do you receive your bank statement information at present? Payment Transactions Triggered by External Partner 5) Which accounts do you use to process payments?

ValueSAP A: 2.19.6.3. Questions: Q: 1) As a rule, do you want to process payments which deviate from those expected manually or automatically? A: Q: A: Q: A: 2.19.6.4. Questions: Q: 1) For what period of time do you require planned data to be available on the database for reporting and cash management? A: Q: A: Q: A: 2.19.6.5. Questions: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 4) Do you have foreign currency loans? 244 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc 3) According to which criteria do you select the data to be posted? 2) How frequently do want to perform an automatic debit position run? 1) How many contracts do you want to manage? Automatic Postings 3) Do you work with reference interest rates (such as EURIBOR)? 2) Do you have foreign currency loans? Preparations for Posting 3) How do you process overpayments/residual amounts? 2) How do you process minor differences? Payment Postprocessing

ValueSAP -

A: Q: A: 2.19.6.6. Questions: Q: A: 2.19.6.7. Questions: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: 2.19.6.8. Questions: Q: A: Q: 2) Do you send reminders to all customers? If not, which criteria do you use for dunning processing? A: Q: 3) Do you apply the dunning procedure to individual contracts or to all the contracts for a customer? A: Q: 4) Do you charge dunning fees / dunning interest? If so, how much do you charge and when? A: 245 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc 1) Describe your dunning procedure. Dunning 3) Do you charge the customer for this (internal charges, own bank charges)? 2) How do you process incoming payments that cannot be honored? 1) For what reasons can postings be reversed? Reverse Postings 1) Which postings do you make manually (charges, unscheduled repayments)? Manual Posting 5) Do you work with reference interest rates (such as EURIBOR)?

ValueSAP -

Q: A: Q: A:

5) Do you grant a grace period?

6) Do you have a legal dunning procedure?

2.19.6.9. Questions: Q: A: 2.19.6.10. Questions: Q: A: Q: A: 2.19.6.11. Questions: Q: A: Q: A: 2.19.6.12. Questions: Q: A: 2.19.6.13. Questions: Q: A:

Calculate Interest on Arrears

1) Do you charge interest on arrears? If so, what calculation base do you use?

Default on Receivables

1) How do you process waivers/write-offs for receivables?

2) How do you treat subsequent payments for receivables that have been written off?

Perform Accrual/Deferral

1) Which accrual/deferral procedures do you use?

2) Which accrual/deferral methods do you apply?

Value Foreign Currency Loans

1) Describe the relevant valuation principles.

Create Accounting Reports

1) Provide an overview of the accounting reports required in your company.

246 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP 2.19.6.14. Questions: Q: 1) Do you want to incorporate security checks when you process new transactions (release procedure)? A: Q: A: 2) Which checks do you require, and in which phases? Release

2.19.7.
Questions:

Periodic Processing

Q: 1) Specify the period-end closing activities you carry out and describe the related processes. A: 2.19.7.1. Questions: Q: 1) For what period of time do you require planned data to be available on the database for reporting and cash management? A: Q: A: Q: A: 2.19.7.2. Questions: Q: A: 2.19.7.3. Questions: Q: 1) Do you want to incorporate security checks when you process new transactions (release procedure)? A: 247 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc Release 1) How often do you want to summarize accounting documents (regular intervals)? Summarize Documents 3) Do you work with reference interest rates (such as EURIBOR)? 2) Do you have foreign currency loans? Planned Record Update

ValueSAP Q: A: 2) Which checks do you require, and in which phases?

2.20.

General Loans Given [TR-LO]

New Transactions

2.20.1.
Questions:

Q: 1) What procedure do you follow from acceptance of an application through to contract disbursement? A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 6) Do you enter clerk information for the loan? What information is recorded and for what purpose? A: Q: 7) What other information should be entered in relation to the loan? What information should be entered at which steps in the loan process? A: Q: A: 2.20.1.1. Questions: Q: A: 248 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc 1) How do you treat applications that have not progressed to the contract stage? Process Application 8) Do you want to save regulatory reporting information? 5) How should the contracts be numbered? 4) How do you treat loan applications that have been withdrawn? 3) How do you treat unsuccessful loan applications? 2) What happens to the unsuccessful loan applications?

ValueSAP 2.20.1.2. Questions: Q: A: Q: 2) Which credit standing information do you want to record in the system (credit standing calculation / voluntary disclosure)? A: 2.20.1.3. Questions: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: 2.20.1.4. Questions: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 4) How do you treat contracts which have fallen through or which have only been concluded in part? A: Q: 5) What "payment methods" (check, bank transfer, telegraphic transfer, and so on) are used for disbursement? 249 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc 3) Who makes the loan payments? 2) Who makes the incoming payments? Is it always the issuer? 1) Which other business partners are involved in the contract? Process Contract 3) Do you record the reasons for rejection? 2) How do you treat offers that are rejected or offers that are only accepted in part? 1) Describe the process you use for making offers. Process Offer 1) Do you carry out a credit standing check? Check Credit Standing

ValueSAP A: 2.20.1.5. Questions: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 3) What "payment methods" (check, bank transfer, telegraphic transfer, and so on) are used for disbursement? A: Q: A: 2.20.1.6. Questions: Q: 1) Do you want to incorporate security checks when you process new transactions (release procedure)? A: Q: A: 2) Which checks do you require, and in which phases? Release 4) To whom are the outgoing payments usually made? 2) Do you withhold incidental costs / overdue items? 1) Which incidental costs are incurred upon disbursement? Process Disbursement

2.20.2.
Questions: Q: A: Q: A:

Create Correspondence

1) What types of correspondence do you generate during the course of the loan process?

2) What types of outgoing correspondence do you use?

Q: 3) How do you send correspondence to your customers in the phase leading up to conclusion of a new contract? A: 250 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP Q: A: 2.20.2.1. Questions: Q: A: 2.20.2.2. Questions: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: 3) How do you control the output of mass correspondence? 2) How do you currently carry out mass correspondence runs? 1) Which mass correspondence do you send (account statement, interest certificate)? Generate Correspondence on a Regular Basis 1) For which business activities in the loan process do you require correspondence? Generate Correspondence for Specific Business Operation 4) Do you want to store correspondence in an optical archive?

2.20.3.
2.20.3.1. Questions:

Business Operations for Contract

Change Loan Contract

Q: 1) What types of changes to you make to contracts as part of the general loan procedure (such as changes to conditions, contract split)? A: Q: A: 2.20.3.2. Questions: Q: 1) Which circumstances can result in changes to the balance sheet position of current contracts? A: 2.20.3.3. Questions: Q: 1) What types of changes to you make to contracts as part of the general loan procedure (such as changes to conditions, contract split)? 251 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc Capital Transfer Balance Sheet Transfer 2) Do you change the borrower during the term of the loan?

ValueSAP -

A: 2.20.3.4. Questions: Q: A: 2.20.3.5. Questions: Q: 1) How do you treat unscheduled repayments? Do you split the gains into ordinary and extraordinary gains (write-back of deferral)? A: Enter Unscheduled Repayments 1) Which postings are entered manually (agent commission, processing charges)? Enter Charges and Commission

2.20.4.
Questions:

Rollover

Q: 1) How do you adjust the conditions for loans due to expire (rollover)? Describe the phases/steps. A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: 2.20.4.1. Questions: Q: A: 2.20.4.2. Questions: Q: 1) How do you divide up the loans due to be rolled over in order to process them and assign the appropriate conditions? A: 252 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc Select and Assign Rollover Position 1) How do you fix the conditions for rollover offers/contracts? Determine Rollover Conditions 4) Who is responsible for processing rollovers in your company? Which employees? 3) Do you carry out mass rollover runs? Do you also have unscheduled rollovers? 2) Do you accept unscheduled repayments during the rollover phase?

ValueSAP -

2.20.4.3. Questions: Q: A:

Generate Rollover Offer

1) Which information should be included in the rollover offer?

2.20.5.
2.20.5.1. Questions:

Contract Currency Changeover

Contract Currency Changeover to the Euro

Q: 1) Are contracts converted to the euro individually, or are they converted in a mass processing run? A:

2.20.6.
Questions:

Accounting

Q: 1) How many position accounts do you use? According to which criteria are they managed? A: Q: 2) Which circumstances can result in changes to the balance sheet position of current contracts? A: Q: A: Q: 4) Do you apply certain posting specifications? Where appropriate, document the posting records using T-accounts. A: Q: 5) Develop a posting system for the transactions you conclude, making sure you cover all the special cases which may arise. A: Q: A: Q: 7) How do you treat incoming and outgoing payments? 253 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc 6) To which CO account assignment objects do you need to make assignments? 3) Which steps can be automated?

ValueSAP A: Q: 8) How do you treat the various incoming payments (underpayments, advance payments, overpayments)? A: Q: A: 2.20.6.1. Questions: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: 2.20.6.2. Questions: Q: 1) How do you enter information from external bank statements (manually and/or electronically)? A: Q: 2) What information does the bank statement contain about the purpose of the payments (for example, customer number)? A: Q: A: 254 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc 3) Sketch the posting steps for typical bank statement postings (algorithm). Payment Transactions Triggered by External Partner 5) Which accounts do you use to process payments? 4) Which forms of payment do you support (check, bank transfer, direct debit, ...)? 3) Which formats should be used for generating the payment media? 2) Which media do you use for this? 1) Do you have to generate payment orders? Payment Transactions Triggered by R/3 System 9) According to which criteria and in what sequence do you assign incoming payments

ValueSAP -

Q: 4) For which house banks would it make sense to use electronic bank statements? Do these banks have the required technical capability? A: Q: A: Q: 6) Do the bank statements transferred by the house bank contain business transaction codes for posting the statements (do you need to assign a posting activity to each business transaction code)? A: Q: 7) Which business transaction codes are used by the house banks for which types of payment (e.g. credit memos from transfers by customers, debited checks)? A: Q: 8) Do you want to distinguish between posting documents for manual and electronic bank statements for accounting and reporting purposes? A: 2.20.6.3. Questions: Q: 1) As a rule, do you want to process payments which deviate from those expected manually or automatically? A: Q: A: Q: A: 2.20.6.4. Questions: Q: 1) For what period of time do you require planned data to be available on the database for reporting and cash management? A: Preparations for Posting 3) How do you process overpayments/residual amounts? 2) How do you process minor differences? Payment Postprocessing 5) In which format is the electronic bank statement available?

255 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP Q: A: Q: A: 2.20.6.5. Questions: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: 2.20.6.6. Questions: Q: A: 2.20.6.7. Questions: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 3) Do you charge the customer for this (internal charges, own bank charges)? 256 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc 2) How do you process incoming payments that cannot be honored? 1) For what reasons can postings be reversed? Reverse Postings 1) Which postings do you make manually (charges, unscheduled repayments)? Manual Posting 5) Do you work with reference interest rates (such as EURIBOR)? 4) Do you have foreign currency loans? 3) According to which criteria do you select the data to be posted? 2) How frequently do want to perform an automatic debit position run? 1) How many contracts do you want to manage? Automatic Postings 3) Do you work with reference interest rates (such as EURIBOR)? 2) Do you have foreign currency loans?

ValueSAP -

A: 2.20.6.8. Questions: Q: A: Q: 2) Do you send reminders to all customers? If not, which criteria do you use for dunning processing? A: Q: 3) Do you apply the dunning procedure to individual contracts or to all the contracts for a customer? A: Q: 4) Do you charge dunning fees / dunning interest? If so, how much do you charge and when? A: Q: A: Q: A: 2.20.6.9. Questions: Q: A: 2.20.6.10. Questions: Q: A: Q: A: 257 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc 2) How do you treat subsequent payments for receivables that have been written off? 1) How do you process waivers/write-offs for receivables? Default on Receivables 1) Do you charge interest on arrears? If so, what calculation base do you use? Calculate Interest on Arrears 6) Do you have a legal dunning procedure? 5) Do you grant a grace period? 1) Describe your dunning procedure. Dunning

ValueSAP 2.20.6.11. Questions: Q: A: Q: A: 2.20.6.12. Questions: Q: A: 2.20.6.13. Questions: Q: A: 2.20.6.14. Questions: Q: 1) Do you want to incorporate security checks when you process new transactions (release procedure)? A: Q: A: 2) Which checks do you require, and in which phases? Release 1) Provide an overview of the accounting reports required in your company. Create Accounting Reports 1) Describe the relevant valuation principles. Value Foreign Currency Loans 2) Which accrual/deferral methods do you apply? 1) Which accrual/deferral procedures do you use? Perform Accrual/Deferral

2.20.7.
Questions:

Periodic Processing

Q: 1) Specify the period-end closing activities you carry out and describe the related processes. A: 2.20.7.1. Questions: Q: 1) For what period of time do you require planned data to be available on the database for reporting and cash management? A: 258 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc Planned Record Update

ValueSAP -

Q: A: Q: A:

2) Do you have foreign currency loans?

3) Do you work with reference interest rates (such as EURIBOR)?

2.20.7.2. Questions: Q: A:

Summarize Documents

1) How often do you want to summarize accounting documents (regular intervals)?

2.21.

General Loans Taken [TR-LO]

New Transactions

2.21.1.
Questions: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A:

1) Describe the procedure through to contract disbursement.

2) Should unsuccessful loan applications be saved?

3) How should the contracts be numbered?

Q: 4) Do you enter clerk information for the loan? What information is recorded and for what purpose? A: Q: 5) What other information should be entered in relation to the loan? What information should be entered at which steps in the loan process? A: Q: A: 2.21.1.1. Questions: 259 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc Process Application 6) Do you want to save regulatory reporting information?

ValueSAP Q: A: 2.21.1.2. Questions: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: 2.21.1.3. Questions: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 4) How do you treat contracts which have fallen through or which have only been concluded in part? A: Q: 5) What "payment methods" (check, bank transfer, telegraphic transfer, and so on) are used for disbursement? A: 2.21.1.4. Questions: Q: A: 260 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc 1) Which incidental costs are incurred upon disbursement? Process Disbursement 3) Who makes the loan payments? 2) Who makes the incoming payments? Is it always the issuer? 1) Which other business partners are involved in the contract? Process Contract 3) Do you record the reasons for rejection? 2) How do you treat offers that are rejected or offers that are only accepted in part? 1) Describe the process you use for making offers. Process Offer 1) How do you treat applications that have not progressed to the contract stage?

ValueSAP -

Q: A:

2) Do you withhold incidental costs / overdue items?

Q: 3) What "payment methods" (check, bank transfer, telegraphic transfer, and so on) are used for disbursement? A: Q: A: 2.21.1.5. Questions: Q: 1) Do you want to incorporate security checks when you process new transactions (release procedure)? A: Q: A: 2) Which checks do you require, and in which phases? Release 4) To whom are the outgoing payments usually made?

2.21.2.
Questions: Q: A: Q: A: 2.21.2.1. Questions: Q: A:

Create Correspondence

1) What types of correspondence do you generate during the course of the loan process?

2) Do you want to store correspondence in an optical archive?

Generate Correspondence for Specific Business Operation

1) For which business activities in the loan process do you require correspondence?

2.21.3.
2.21.3.1. Questions:

Business Operations for Contract

Change Loan Contract

Q: 1) What types of changes to you make to contracts as part of the general loan procedure (such as changes to conditions, contract split)? 261 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP A: Q: A: 2.21.3.2. Questions: Q: 1) Which circumstances can result in changes to the balance sheet position of current contracts? A: 2.21.3.3. Questions: Q: 1) What types of changes to you make to contracts as part of the general loan procedure (such as changes to conditions, contract split)? A: 2.21.3.4. Questions: Q: A: 2.21.3.5. Questions: Q: 1) How do you treat unscheduled repayments? Do you split the gains into ordinary and extraordinary gains (write-back of deferral)? A: 2.21.3.6. Questions: Q: 1) Do you want to incorporate security checks when you process new transactions (release procedure)? A: Q: A: 2) Which checks do you require, and in which phases? Release Enter Unscheduled Repayments 1) Which postings are entered manually (agent commission, processing charges)? Enter Charges and Commission Capital Transfer Balance Sheet Transfer 2) Do you change the borrower during the term of the loan?

2.21.4.
Questions:

Rollover

262 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP Q: 1) How do you adjust the conditions for loans due to expire (rollover)? Describe the phases/steps. A: Q: A: Q: A: 3) Who is responsible for processing rollovers in your company? Which employees? 2) Do you accept unscheduled repayments during the rollover phase?

2.21.5.
2.21.5.1. Questions:

Contract Currency Changeover

Contract Currency Changeover to the Euro

Q: 1) Are contracts converted to the euro individually, or are they converted in a mass processing run? A:

2.21.6.
Questions:

Accounting

Q: 1) How many position accounts do you use? According to which criteria are they managed? A: Q: 2) Which circumstances can result in changes to the balance sheet position of current contracts? A: Q: A: Q: 4) Do you apply certain posting specifications? Where appropriate, document the posting records using T-accounts. A: Q: 5) Develop a posting system for the transactions you conclude, making sure you cover all the special cases which may arise. A: Q: 6) To which CO account assignment objects do you need to make assignments? 263 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc 3) Which steps can be automated?

ValueSAP -

A: Q: A: Q: 8) How do you treat the various incoming payments (underpayments, advance payments, overpayments)? A: Q: A: 2.21.6.1. Questions: Q: A: 2.21.6.2. Questions: Q: 1) How do you enter information from external bank statements (manually and/or electronically)? A: Q: 2) What information does the bank statement contain about the purpose of the payments (for example, customer number)? A: Q: A: Q: 4) For which house banks would it make sense to use electronic bank statements? Do these banks have the required technical capability? A: Q: A: 5) In which format is the electronic bank statement available? 3) Sketch the posting steps for typical bank statement postings (algorithm). Payment Transactions Triggered by External Partner 1) Which accounts do you use to process payments? Payment Transactions Triggered by R/3 System 9) According to which criteria and in what sequence do you assign incoming payments 7) How do you treat incoming and outgoing payments?

264 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP Q: 6) Do the bank statements transferred by the house bank contain business transaction codes for posting the statements (do you need to assign a posting activity to each business transaction code)? A: Q: 7) Which business transaction codes are used by the house banks for which types of payment (e.g. credit memos from transfers by customers, debited checks)? A: Q: 8) Do you want to distinguish between posting documents for manual and electronic bank statements for accounting and reporting purposes? A: 2.21.6.3. Questions: Q: 1) For what period of time do you require planned data to be available on the database for reporting and cash management? A: Q: A: Q: A: 2.21.6.4. Questions: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: 265 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc 4) Do you have foreign currency loans? 3) According to which criteria do you select the data to be posted? 2) How frequently do want to perform an automatic debit position run? 1) How many contracts do you want to manage? Automatic Postings 3) Do you work with reference interest rates (such as EURIBOR)? 2) Do you have foreign currency loans? Preparations for Posting

ValueSAP -

Q: A:

5) Do you work with reference interest rates (such as EURIBOR)?

2.21.6.5. Questions: Q: A: 2.21.6.6. Questions: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: 2.21.6.7. Questions: Q: A: Q: A: 2.21.6.8. Questions: Q: A: 2.21.6.9. Questions: Q: A:

Manual Posting

1) Which postings do you make manually (charges, unscheduled repayments)?

Reverse Postings

1) For what reasons can postings be reversed?

2) How do you process incoming payments that cannot be honored?

3) Do you charge the customer for this (internal charges, own bank charges)?

Perform Accrual/Deferral

1) Which accrual/deferral procedures do you use?

2) Which accrual/deferral methods do you apply?

Value Foreign Currency Loans

1) Describe the relevant valuation principles.

Create Accounting Reports

1) Provide an overview of the accounting reports required in your company.

266 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP 2.21.6.10. Questions: Q: 1) Do you want to incorporate security checks when you process new transactions (release procedure)? A: Q: A: 2) Which checks do you require, and in which phases? Release

2.21.7.
Questions:

Periodic Processing

Q: 1) Specify the period-end closing activities you carry out and describe the related processes. A: 2.21.7.1. Questions: Q: 1) For what period of time do you require planned data to be available on the database for reporting and cash management? A: Q: A: Q: A: 2.21.7.2. Questions: Q: A: 2.21.7.3. Questions: Q: 1) Do you want to incorporate security checks when you process new transactions (release procedure)? A: 267 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc Release 1) How often do you want to summarize accounting documents (regular intervals)? Summarize Documents 3) Do you work with reference interest rates (such as EURIBOR)? 2) Do you have foreign currency loans? Planned Record Update

ValueSAP Q: A: 2) Which checks do you require, and in which phases?

2.22.

Trading with Borrower's Notes [TR-LO]

Questions: Q: 1) Describe the process from acceptance of an application through to contract disbursement. Do you enter prospective borrower's note orders on a preliminary basis (reservation + activation)? A: Q: A: Q: 3) Do you enter clerk information for the loan? What information is recorded and for what purpose? A: Q: 4) What other information should be entered in relation to the loan? What information should be entered at which steps in the loan process? A: Q: A: 5) Do you record information for regulatory reporting purposes? 2) How should the contracts be numbered?

2.22.1.
2.22.1.1. Questions:

Borrower's Note Loan Order

Process BNL Order [Standard]

Q: 1) Do you want to generate contracts with the order? Should they be managed on the basis of a customer account or without a customer account (i.e. using payment requests) A: Q: 2) Should the order be created as a settlement, or should there be an execution step in between? A: Q: 3) Provide an overview of the possible payment details for transactions and business partners. A: 268 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP Q: 4) To whom do you usually make the outgoing payment/who receives the purchase amount? A: Q: A: Q: A: 6) Do you record preemption in the system? 5) Who makes the incoming payments? Is it always the main borrower/issuer?

2.22.2.
2.22.2.1. Questions: Q: A:

Borrower's Note Loan Contract

Process BNL Contract [Standard]

1) Which other persons are involved in the contract?

Q: 2) How do you treat contracts which have fallen through or which have only been concluded in part? A: Q: A: Q: 4) Do you enter assignment information? If so, how do you treat assignments for accounting purposes? A: 2.22.2.2. Questions: Q: 1) How do you treat contracts which have fallen through or which have only been concluded in part? A: 2.22.2.3. Questions: Q: 1) Do you want to incorporate security checks when you process new transactions (release procedure)? A: 269 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc Release Waiver BNL Contract [Standard] 3) Who makes the incoming payments? Is it always the main borrower/issuer?

ValueSAP Q: A: 2) Which checks do you require, and in which phases?

2.22.3.
Questions: Q: A: Q: A: 2.22.3.1. Questions: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: 2.22.3.2. Questions: Q: A:

Correspondence

1) What types of correspondence do you generate during the course of the loan process?

2) Do you want to store correspondence in an optical archive?

Generate Correspondence on a Regular Basis

1) Which mass correspondence do you send (account statement, interest certificate)?

2) How do you currently carry out mass correspondence runs?

3) How do you control the output of mass correspondence?

Generate Correspondence for Specific Business Operation

1) For which business activities in the loan process do you require correspondence?

2.22.4.
2.22.4.1. Questions:

Business Operations for Contract

Change Loan Contract

Q: 1) What types of changes to you make to contracts as part of the general loan procedure (such as changes to conditions, contract split)? A: Q: A: 2.22.4.2. Blueprint_FICO_1.doc Capital Transfer 270 2) Do you change the borrower during the term of the loan?

ValueSAP -

Questions: Q: 1) What types of changes to you make to contracts as part of the general loan procedure (such as changes to conditions, contract split)? A: 2.22.4.3. Questions: Q: 1) How do you treat unscheduled repayments? Do you split the gains into ordinary and extraordinary gains (write-back of deferral)? A: 2.22.4.4. Questions: Q: 1) Are contracts converted to the euro individually, or are they converted in a mass processing run? A: Contract Currency Changeover to the Euro Enter Unscheduled Repayments

2.22.5.
Questions:

Accounting

Q: 1) How many position accounts do you use? According to which criteria are they managed? A: Q: 2) Which circumstances can result in changes to the balance sheet position of current contracts? A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 5) Develop a posting system for the transactions you conclude, making sure you cover all the special cases which may arise. A: Q: 6) To which CO account assignment objects do you need to make assignments? 271 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc 4) How do you treat incoming and outgoing payments? 3) Which steps can be automated?

ValueSAP A: Q: A: Q: 8) How do you treat the various incoming payments (underpayments, advance payments, overpayments)? A: Q: A: 2.22.5.1. Questions: Q: 1) Do you have to generate payment orders? What form do they take (data medium, bank transfer)? A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: 2.22.5.2. Questions: Q: A: Q: 2) How do you enter information from external bank statements (manually and/or electronically)? A: Q: 3) What information does the bank statement contain about the purpose of the payments (for example, customer number)? 272 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc 1) How do you receive your bank statement information at present? Payment Transactions Triggered by External Partner 4) Which accounts do you use to process payments? 3) Which forms of payment do you support (check, bank transfer, direct debit, ...)? 2) Which formats should be used for generating the payment media? Payment Transactions Triggered by R/3 System 9) According to which criteria and in what sequence do you assign incoming payments 7) How do you treat incoming and outgoing payments?

ValueSAP A: Q: A: Q: 5) For which house banks would it make sense to use electronic bank statements? Do these banks have the required technical capability? A: Q: A: Q: 7) Do the bank statements transferred by the house bank contain business transaction codes for posting the statements (do you need to assign a posting activity to each business transaction code)? A: Q: 8) Which business transaction codes are used by the house banks for which types of payment (e.g. credit memos from transfers by customers, debited checks)? A: Q: 9) Do you want to distinguish between posting documents for manual and electronic bank statements for accounting and reporting purposes? A: 2.22.5.3. Questions: Q: 1) For what period of time do you require planned data to be available on the database for reporting and cash management? A: Q: A: Q: A: 2.22.5.4. Questions: 273 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc Automatic Postings 3) Do you work with reference interest rates (such as EURIBOR)? 2) Do you have foreign currency loans? Preparations for Posting 6) In which format is the electronic bank statement available? 4) Sketch the posting steps for typical bank statement postings (algorithm).

ValueSAP Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: 2.22.5.5. Questions: Q: A: 2.22.5.6. Questions: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: 2.22.5.7. Questions: Q: A: Q: A: 2.22.5.8. Value Foreign Currency Loans 274 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc 2) Which accrual/deferral methods do you apply? 1) Which accrual/deferral procedures do you use? Perform Accrual/Deferral 3) Do you charge the customer for this (internal charges, own bank charges)? 2) How do you process incoming payments that cannot be honored? 1) For what reasons can postings be reversed? Reverse Postings 1) Which postings do you make manually (charges, unscheduled repayments)? Manual Posting 4) According to which criteria do you select the data to be posted? 3) How do you trigger the posting run (manually or using a program)? 2) How frequently do want to perform an automatic debit position run? 1) How many contracts do you want to manage?

ValueSAP Questions: Q: A: 2.22.5.9. Questions: Q: 1) Do you want to incorporate security checks when you process new transactions (release procedure)? A: Q: A: 2) Which checks do you require, and in which phases? Release 1) Describe the relevant valuation principles.

2.23.

Cash Position [TR-CM]

Questions: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 3) Describe the daily routine in your cash management group. Which time restrictions are you subject to? A: Q: 4) At what organizational level do you look at liquidity and risk positions? (currency exposure centralized/decentralized, external/internal; netting effects; currency-specific clearing across one or several company codes) A: Q: 5) At what organizational level do you make financial investment and borrowing decisions (centralized/decentralized)? A: 2) Which tools do you use? 1) Who is responsible for (short/medium/long-term) cash management?

2.23.1.
2.23.1.1. Questions:

Incoming Data
Electronic Bank Statement

Q: 1) For which house banks would it make sense to use electronic bank statements? Do these banks have the required technical capability? 275 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP -

A: Q: A: Q: 3) What specific information do the bank statements contain (e.g. invoice numbers)? If you wish to use the information for the payee to allocate items, you need to select a suitable interpretation algorithm. Explanation: Suitable interpretation algorithm (this may require additional company-specific programming via a user exit - see note 24281). A: Q: 4) Does you house bank transfer business transaction codes with the bank statements to help you classify the postings? A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 8) Do you want to distinguish between posting documents for manual and electronic bank statements for accounting and reporting purposes? A: 2.23.1.2. Questions: Q: 1) What specific information do your bank statements contain (for example, invoice numbers)? A: Q: 2) Does you house bank transfer business transaction codes with the bank statements to help you classify the postings? A: 276 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc Manual Bank Statement 7) Do you process these payment methods via separate clearing accounts? 6) Which payment methods do you process using the FI payment program? 5) Outline the posting steps for typical bank statement postings. 2) In which format is the electronic bank statement available?

ValueSAP -

Q: A: Q: A: Q: A:

3) Outline the posting steps for typical bank statement postings.

4) Which payment methods do you process using the FI payment program?

5) Do you process these payment methods via separate clearing accounts?

Q: 6) Do you want to distinguish between posting documents for manual and electronic bank statements for accounting and reporting purposes? A: 2.23.1.3. Questions: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 3) What information given by the check issuer can be used to allocate items (check number, invoice number)? A: Q: 4) Sketch the posting steps for check deposits (are checks posted directly to customer accounts or via clearing accounts)? A: Q: 5) Do you want to separate check postings for general ledger accounting and subledger accounting? A: 2.23.1.4. Questions: Q: A: 277 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc 1) Do you want to monitor the bills of exchange presented? Bill of Exchange Presentation (Debit) 2) Do you enter checks from customers manually or electronically? 1) How many checks do you present to your house banks per day? Check Deposit Transaction

ValueSAP -

2.23.1.5. Questions: Q:

Lockbox (USA)

1) Do you use the lockbox procedure?

Explanation: Used mainly in the USA, the lockbox procedure is a procedure for the rapid deposit of checks. Checks that you send to the bank are credited to the payee's account, and the information entered is forwarded to the payee by file transfer. A: [ ]Yes [ ]No 2.23.1.6. Questions: Q: 1) What liquidity-related information needs to be entered manually in the form of planned items or payment advice notes (internal/external information)? A: Q: A: 2.23.1.7. Questions: Q: 1) Which information that affects the liquidity has to be processed manually in the form of planned items or advice notes (internal/external information)? A: Q: A: 2) Which types of information or advice note do you want to process? Payment Advice Processing 2) What kind of information or payment advice notes do you want to distinguish? Create Payment Advice

2.23.2.
2.23.2.1. Questions:

Check
Compare Payment Advices

Q: 1) If you use the manual or electronic bank statement and payment advice processing, how do you match the payment advices and the bank statements? A: 2.23.2.2. Questions: Q: A: 278 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc 1) Do you monitor interest accruals/deferrals made by your banks? Interest Scale

ValueSAP -

Q: 2) If you make postings across all company codes: Do you charge your subsidiaries with interest for clearing activities? A: 2.23.2.3. Questions: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: 2.23.2.4. Questions: Q: 1) Do want to compare when payments are value-dated by your banks (using clearing accounts)? A: 2.23.2.5. Questions: Q: A: Q: A: 2) Do you take the check cashing time into account for planning? 1) Do you want to monitor how promptly paid debit items are cleared? Clear Customer Account Compare Value Dates 3) Does the FI payment program take the check cashing time into account? 2) Do you take the check cashing time into consideration for planning? 1) Do you want to monitor the time it takes for the checks you issue to clear? Check Cashed Checks

2.23.3.
2.23.3.1. Questions:

Status Analysis
Status Analysis Cash Position

Q: 1) Which payment flows do you want to be visible as part of the status analyses (banks, customers, vendors)? A: Q: 2) What views of the payment flows would you like to have (individual banks, critical customers)? 279 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP -

A:

2.23.4.
Questions:

Planning

Q: 1) Do you let your banks perform cash pooling, or do you want to concentrate cash internally and send payment orders to the banks? A: 2.23.4.1. Questions: Q: A: Q: A: 2.23.4.2. Questions: Q: A: Q: 2) Do you want to distinguish between your customers according to their payment behavior? A: Q: 3) Do you distinguish between your creditors according to their importance (their behavior)? A: Q: A: 4) Do you want to integrate orders in your liquidity forecast? 1) Do you want to monitor when your payables and receivables are due? Integration of Subledgers 2) Do you charge interest on the clearing balances of your subsidiaries? 1) Do you clear accounts at company code level or across all company codes? Cash Concentration

2.24.

Liquidity Forecast [TR-CM]

Questions: Q: 1) How is your liquidity forecast organized and structured (outgoing and incoming payments) A: 280 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP 2.24.1.
2.24.1.1. Questions: Q: 1) What liquidity-related information needs to be entered manually in the form of planned items or payment advice notes (internal/external information)? A: Q: A: Q: 3) Do you want to group the different payment types (for example, according to due date, or when payments are likely to be made)? A: 2.24.1.2. Questions: Q: 1) Which information that affects the liquidity has to be processed manually in the form of planned items or advice notes (internal/external information)? A: Process Planned Items 2) What kind of information or payment advice notes do you want to distinguish?

Process Planned Items

Create Planned Items

2.24.2.
2.24.2.1. Questions:

Status Analysis
Status Analysis Liquidity Forecast

Q: 1) Which payment flows do you want to be visible as part of the status analyses (banks, customers, vendors)? A: Q: 2) What views of the payment flows would you like to have (individual banks, critical customers)? A: Q: 3) How do you want to group customers and vendors (e.g. vendors by note to payee, customers by payment history)? A:

2.25.

Financial Budgeting [TR-CBM]

Planned Commitment Items
Create Objects 2.25.1.1.

2.25.1.
Questions:

281 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP Q: 1) Which commitment items do you want to map for incoming and outgoing payments? For which commitment items do you receive detailed information from the specialist departments? A: Q: A: 2.25.1.2. Questions: Q: 1) Do you want to group the various commitment items under general headings for evaluation purposes? A: Assign to Hierarchy 2) At what level of detail do you want to calculate actual values?

2.25.2.
2.25.2.1. Questions: Q: A: Q: A:

Planned Settings
Define Plan Profiles

1) Specify your general planning parameters (time horizon, scaling).

2) Assign the plan profiles to financial management (FM) areas.

2.26.

Evaluation of Actual Values [TR-CBM]

General Commitment Item
Create Balance Sheet Commitment Items 2.26.1.1.

2.26.1.
Questions:

Q: 1) How do you want to display your liquidity positions (single or grouped positions)? Do you want to create hierarchies? A: 2.26.1.2. Questions: Q: 1) In which two commitment items do you want to display actual values for which automatic assignment is unsuccessful? A: 2.26.1.3. Questions: Create Clearing Commitment Items Create Unassigned Revenues/Expenditures

282 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP Q: 1) Create the commitment items for clearing accounts managed on the basis of open items. A: 2.26.1.4. Questions: Q: 1) Create one or two commitment items that are designated for G/L accounts and not relevant for monetary flows. A: Create Dummy Commitment Items

2.26.2.
2.26.2.1. Questions:

Assign Commitment Items to G/L Accounts

Assign Planned Commitment Items

Q: 1) Define planned commitment items in the master record for the matching revenue and expenditure accounts and comparable clearing accounts. A: 2.26.2.2. Questions: Q: 1) Define the balance sheet commitment items in the master record for your liquid accounts. A: 2.26.2.3. Questions: Q: 1) Define the clearing commitment items in the remaining bank subaccounts, in the reconciliation accounts for payables and receivables, and in the corresponding clearing accounts. A: 2.26.2.4. Questions: Q: 1) Define a dummy commitment item in the master records of the remaining accounts that are not relevant for cash budget management. A: Check and Assign Dummy Commitment Items Assign Clearing Commitment Items Assign Accounts for Balance Sheet Commitment Items

2.26.3.
2.26.3.1. Questions:

Actual Transfer Postings

Actual Transfer Posting

Q: 1) Which document type and number range do you want to use for the transfer posting documents? 283 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP -

A:

2.27.

Market Risk Management [TR-MRM]

Questions: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 4) Which payment flows resulting from financial transactions are relevant to your risk position? A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: 8) Which simulations do you want to carry out (market data, transactions)? 7) Do you want to value your financial transactions? 6) How do you express your risk position? 5) Which planned items from Cash Management are relevant to your risk position? 3) Which operative payment flows are relevant to your risk position? 2) Which account balances are relevant to your risk position? 1) How do you define your risk position?

2.27.1.
2.27.1.1. Questions:

Mark to Market
Effective Rate/NPV Underlyings

Q: 1) Produce a structure to group bank accounts and subledger accounts that contain items from underlying transactions. Explanation: To distinguish between underlying transactions and hedge transactions the evaluations in Market Risk Management use the groupings from Cash Management. These groupings only cover bank accounts and subledger accounts that contain items from underlying 284 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP transactions. Accounts to which hedge transactions are posted are not allowed to be included in these groupings. A: 2.27.1.2. Questions: Q: 1) Produce a structure to group bank accounts and subledger accounts that contain items from underlying transactions. Explanation: To distinguish between underlying transactions and hedge transactions the evaluations in Market Risk Management use the groupings from Cash Management. These groupings only cover bank accounts and subledger accounts that contain items from underlying transactions. Accounts to which hedge transactions are posted are not allowed to be included in these groupings. A: 2.27.1.3. Questions: Q: 1) Produce a structure to group bank accounts and subledger accounts that contain items from underlying transactions. Explanation: To distinguish between underlying transactions and hedge transactions the evaluations in Market Risk Management use the groupings from Cash Management. These groupings only cover bank accounts and subledger accounts that contain items from underlying transactions. Accounts to which hedge transactions are posted are not allowed to be included in these groupings. A: 2.27.1.4. Questions: Q: 1) Produce a structure to group bank accounts and subledger accounts that contain items from underlying transactions. Explanation: To distinguish between underlying transactions and hedge transactions the evaluations in Market Risk Management use the groupings from Cash Management. These groupings only cover bank accounts and subledger accounts that contain items from underlying transactions. Accounts to which hedge transactions are posted are not allowed to be included in these groupings. A: Global Evaluation of Cash Flow Interest Exposure Currency Exposure

2.27.2.
2.27.2.1. Questions:

Value at Risk
Variance/Covariance

Q: 1) Produce a structure to group bank accounts and subledger accounts that contain items from underlying transactions. 285 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP -

Explanation: To distinguish between underlying transactions and hedge transactions the evaluations in Market Risk Management use the groupings from Cash Management. These groupings only cover bank accounts and subledger accounts that contain items from underlying transactions. Accounts to which hedge transactions are posted are not allowed to be included in these groupings. A: 2.27.2.2. Questions: Q: 1) Produce a structure to group bank accounts and subledger accounts that contain items from underlying transactions. Explanation: To distinguish between underlying transactions and hedge transactions the evaluations in Market Risk Management use the groupings from Cash Management. These groupings only cover bank accounts and subledger accounts that contain items from underlying transactions. Accounts to which hedge transactions are posted are not allowed to be included in these groupings. A: Historical Simulation

3. Revenue and Cost Controlling

3.1.
3.1.1.
3.1.1.1. Questions: Q: 1) Which planning levels (characteristics), maturities, and versions do you want to use in planning? A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 4) Do you want to structure your sales and profit planning based on reference data? If so, what is the source of this data, and in what form is it? Explanation: Possible sources: - Actual data - Other plan data - Data from LIS A: 286 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc 3) Should sales quantities and/or values be transferred? 2) Which maturity do you plan in (monthly, quarterly, or yearly)?

Profit and Cost Planning

Sales Planning
Create Planning Proposal (with Sales Planning)

ValueSAP -

Q:

5) How do you want to adapt the reference dates to be used as a planning proposal?

Explanation: Possible methods: - Revaluate, change period distribution - Rate planning, Valuation, and so on. A: Q: 6) If your reference data is located at a higher level than the most detailed planning level, how do you want the data to be resolved onto the levels below it? A: Q: A: Q: A: 3.1.1.2. Questions: Q: 1) Do you modify the automatically generated planning data manually and/or add new planning data? A: Q: 2) Do you want to plan your manual planning data with Excel? Manual Sales Planning 8) Are you using the planning method "anticipated actual" (rolling planning)? 7) Do you use forecasting techniques in your planning process? If so, describe them.

Explanation: This is an Excel file linked to the R/3 System. A: 3.1.1.3. Questions: Q: 1) Do you want to transfer plan sales quantities from CO-PA to LIS? Transfer of Planned Sales Quantities

Explanation: Or do you want to plan sales quantities in CO-PA and transfer this data ot LIS? ot LIS? Note that if you want to valuate the sales quantities with planned revenues, standard costs of goods manufactured, and so on in order to calculate planned contribution margins, these planned sales quantities must exist in CO-PA. A: Q: 2) Do you want to transfer planned sales quantities from CO-PA to Production Planning? 287 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP A:

3.1.2.
3.1.2.1. Questions: Q: A:

Cost and Activity Planning

Copy Plan from Previous Year to Cost Center Planning

1) Describe your planning process. How do you plan cost centers?

Q: 2) Do you want to create your cost center/activity plan based on the planned values of the previous year? (If so, what is the source of this data and in what form is it stored? A: 3.1.2.2. Questions: Q: A: Q: 2) Do you want to create your cost center/activity plan based on the actual values of the previous year? (If so, what is the source of this data and in what form is it stored? A: 3.1.2.3. Questions: Q: A: Q: A: 3.1.2.4. Questions: Q: 1) Do you carry out revaluation (increases or decreases for certain cost elements in certain cost centers)? A: 3.1.2.5. Questions: Q: 1) Does your organization use the type of budgeting described in the documentation field? 288 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc Budget Planning Planning Revaluation 2) Do you want to represent different planning scenarios in parallel? 1) Describe your planning process. How do you plan cost centers? Redefinition of Plan Version 1) Describe your planning process. How do you plan cost centers? Copy Actual Data to Cost Center Plan

ValueSAP Explanation: Cost center budgeting allows an organization to enter a summarized budgeted value for a specific cost center/cost centers. Additionally, this budget can then be subjected to availability control which takes into account both actual expenditure plus commitments (subtracted from the budget). Do you perform this kind of budget control within your organization ? A: 3.1.2.6. Questions: Q: 1) Do you want to plan and control the budget of the order using availability checks? Order Budgeting

Explanation: Budgeting for orders makes it possible to create a total budget value for a given order or given orders. In addition, you can carry out an availability control for this budget that includes both actual expenses and commitments (deducted from the budget). Do you use this type of budget control in your enterprise? A: 3.1.2.7. Questions: Q: 1) Comment on activity type planning Activity Type Planning

Explanation: Note that when you plan activity types (define the allocation base per activity type for the cost center), you define important control parameters, such as price determination (manual or iterative), plan and actual allocation (direct activity allocation, target=actual allocation, and so on), and how actual fixed costs are handled (proportionally or using predistribution). The default values taken from the activity type can be overwritten in planning. A: 3.1.2.8. Questions: Q: 1) Comment on defining activity types by cost center Definition of Activity Type for Cost Center

Explanation: This process variant is only relevant if you perform actual costing. This controlling strategy also requires you to plan by activity types (define allocation bases/activity type in each cost center). You can specify <1> as the activity quantity. You need to plan the activity type in order for the cost center (and the subsequent activity price calculation) can recognize it. This entails defining some important control indicators, such as price determination (iterative) and actual allocation (direct or indirect activity allocation). The default values taken from the activity type can be overwritten in planning. A: 3.1.2.9. Questions: Q: 1) Are statistical key figures kept in the logistics modules, which you want to use as a basis for allocations and reporting purposes? 289 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc Transfer of Statistical Key Figures from LIS (Plan)

ValueSAP -

A: 3.1.2.10. Questions: Q: 1) If you are also implementing SAP R/3 Asset Management (FI-AA), do you wish to transfer the results of the Asset Management depreciation simulation calculation as part of your planning in Controlling (CO) for depreciation expenses? Explanation: Ensure that the corresponding assets are assigned to the appropriate cost centers. A: 3.1.2.11. Questions: Q: 1) If you are also implementing SAP R/3 Asset Management (FI-AA), do you wish to transfer the results of the Asset Management depreciation simulation calculation as part of your planning in Controlling (CO) for depreciation expenses? Explanation: Ensure that the corresponding assets are assigned to the appropriate cost centers. A: 3.1.2.12. Questions: Q: 1) If you are also implementing SAP R/3 Human Resources, do you want to transfer the results of personnel cost planning to Controlling (CO) as part of your planning for personnel expenses? A: 3.1.2.13. Questions: Q: 1) If you are implementing SAP R/3 manufacturing modules, do you want to transfer activity requirements from sales & operations planning (SOP), long-term planning, or MRP to Controlling (CO-ABC) as scheduled activities? Explanation: (and update the relevant business process with the corresponding scheduled activity) A: 3.1.2.14. Questions: Transfer of Scheduled Activity from PP to CO-OM-CCA Transfer of Scheduled Activity PP -> CO-ABC Transfer of Personnel Costs Transfer of Depreciation/Interest (Activity-Dependent) Transfer of Depreciation/Interest (Activity-Independent)

290 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP Q: 1) If you implementing the SAP R/3 production modules, do you want to transfer the activity requirements from sales and operations planning (SOP), long-term planning, or MRP to Controlling (CO-CCA) as the scheduled production activities? A: 3.1.2.15. Questions: Q: 1) Which procedure do you use for manual planning of primary costs, when you have costs that are not transferred from other modules, such as HR or FI-AA? Explanation: Examples are energy costs, maintenance costs, and so on. A: 3.1.2.16. Questions: Q: 1) Which procedure do you use for manual planning of primary costs, when you have costs that are not transferred from other modules, such as HR or FI-AA? Explanation: Examples are energy costs, maintenance costs, and so on. A: 3.1.2.17. Questions: Q: A: 3.1.2.18. Questions: Q: A: 3.1.2.19. Questions: Q: 1) Do you want to use integrated internal orders in cost center planning (such as repair orders, marketing orders) and settle them to cost centers after planning at the cost element level? A: 3.1.2.20. Questions: 291 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc Cost Element Planning (Order) Cost Element Planning (Order with Integrated Planning) 1) Do you want to represent activity relationships between cost centers in your planning? Secondary Cost Planning (Prop./Fixed) 1) Do you want to represent activity relationships between cost centers in your planning? Secondary Cost Planning (Full Costs) Primary Cost Planning (Prop./Fixed) Primary Cost Planning (Full Costs)

ValueSAP Q: A: 3.1.2.21. Questions: Q: 1) Do you want to plan overall costs (values only, independent of cost elements) on overhead cost orders? A: 3.1.2.22. Questions: Q: 1) Do you want to enter planning data in your planning for overhead cost orders, as well as the cost element information? Explanation: Example is the entry of planning data for the use of materials, and so on. A: 3.1.2.23. Questions: Q: 1) Are you using internal orders for temporary job cost controlling and want to plan costs? If so, you can plan the costs with the Easy Cost Planning function. A: Q: 2) Do you want to trigger subsequent processes based on the planned resources? If so, you can use the Execution Services function from the cost estimate in Easy Cost Planning. Explanation: Possible subsequent processes: Purchase requisition, purchase order, material reservation, material withdrawal, activity and process allocation. A: 3.1.2.24. Questions: Q: 1) Do you periodically move costs from a project/cost center (such as telephone costs) to other projects/cost centers? A: Q: 2) Did you define the basis for these allocations (such as, percentage, statistical key figures, for example telephone units consumed, and so on)? A: 3.1.2.25. Blueprint_FICO_1.doc Cost Accrual - Plan 292 Periodic Reposting of Plan Data Easy Cost Planning and Execution Services (CO) Unit Costing (Order) Overall Planning (Order) 1) Do you want to plan costs at the cost element level on overhead cost orders?

ValueSAP -

Questions: Q: 1) Describe how accruals are planned for actual data.

Explanation: Define the cost elements that should be accrued using the target=actual method (cost element category 04). Define the cost elements that you want to accrue with imputed tack-on costs (cost element category 03). For the latter, identify the basis (cost elements) to be used as the basis for accrual calculation. A: 3.1.2.26. Questions: Q: 1) State how you want to transfer the plan values from Cost Center Accounting to your business processes. A: 3.1.2.27. Questions: Q: 1) Do you plan to allocate a certain type of costs/expenses to cost centers automatically using overhead rates? A: 3.1.2.28. Questions: Q: 1) What costs is the cost estimate based on when you compute overhead for internal orders? A: Q: A: Q: A: 3) Will you perform automatic recovery of overheads on specific types of costs/expenses? [ ]Yes [ ]No 2) Specify the overhead rates. Overhead Calculation (Business Process) Overhead Calculation (Cost Center) Process Cost Planning

Q: 4) List the different groups of costs/expenses (for example, applying a fixed percentage rate for recovery of overhead to material issues). A: Q: 5) For each assignment type, do you distribute overhead as a fixed percentage or based on the actual total costs? 293 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP -

A: Q: 6) Describe in detail how each of these assignments is performed today in your organization. A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 10) For each allocation category, do you distribute overhead as a fixed percentage or based on the actual total costs? A: Q: 11) If you use fixed percentages for assignments, how do you handle remaining variances? A: Q: 12) For each of these assignments, what causes the overhead (for example, direct labor expense, labor hours, total WBS expense, others)? A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 15) Will you perform automatic recovery of overheads on specific types of costs/expenses? A: [ ]Yes [ ]No 14) Define overhead rates. 13) What postings do the assignments create? 9) Do you assign overhead expenses to projects? 8) Describe in detail how each of these allocations is performed today in your organization. 7) What postings do the assignments create?

294 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP Q: A: Q: 17) Do you want to define automatic allocation using overhead rates for a certain type of costs/expenses on orders? A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 21) Do you want to define automatic allocation using overhead rates for a certain type of costs/expenses on orders? A: Q: 22) List the different groups of costs/expenses (for example, applying a fixed percentage rate for recovery of overhead to material issues). Explanation: Caution: When you calculate overhead for cost objects that are credited with the standard cost of goods manufactured times the quantity received in stock, this overhead should also be contained in the calculated standard cost of goods manufactured (according to the adjusted standard cost estimate). A: Q: 23) Do you plan to allocate a certain type of costs/expenses to cost centers automatically using overhead rates? A: Q: A: Q: 25) Are there any overhead expenses that are not calculated with reference to the production order but are to be assigned directly to the sales order? Explanation: Example: Overhead costs for sales and administration. 295 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc 24) What costs are the overhead rates based on? 20) Do you perform automatic overhead allocation for specific types of costs/expenses? 19) Define overhead rates. 18) Do you want to add a percentage for overhead to the production cost collector? 16) Do you want to define a percentage for the overhead rate in the cost object?

ValueSAP -

A: Q: 26) How often do you calculate your planned overhead?

Explanation: The Schedule Manager is well suited to performing periodic allocations. The program selects project objects, permits error correction, and continues the process. A: Q: 27) Who is responsible for reconciling the run? (This person will be responsible for running/monitoring planned overhead.) A: Q: 28) Do you calculate overhead for all objects at once or individually for each object. (Detailed calculation can affect system performance.) A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 32) Describe how you calculate overhead for (1) direct costs (2) indirect costs (3) fixed costs (4) variable costs). A: Q: 33) Do you include sales and marketing and general and administrative costs in your overhead calculation? A: Q: A: Q: A: 296 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc 35) Do you process actual overhead on a project by project basis or overall? 34) Do you reconcile planned and actual overhead? 31) Is the planned overhead the same as the actual overhead? 30) Is overhead calculated for your projects? 29) Do you have a specific plan version when you calculate overhead?

ValueSAP -

Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A:

36) Do you have project-type-specific overhead calculations?

37) Do you have different overhead costs for each business unit?

38) Do you calculate overhead on materials/labor?

39) At what level of detail do you plan for overhead?

40) Do you calculate percentage overhead?

41) Is the calculation dependent on time periods?

42) What is the basis for the overhead costs?

Q: 43) Is the basis for overhead planned costs the same as the basis for actual overhead costs? A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 47) Does the basis for the overhead costs change during the lifecycle of the project? 297 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc 46) To which accounts/cost elements are the overhead costs posted? 45) How often do you calculate overhead costs? 44) What is the formula/schema for applying overhead costs?

ValueSAP A: Q: 48) Who is responsible for overhead costs? (This person is responsible for running the overhead calculation.) A: Q: A: 3.1.2.29. Questions: Q: 1) Do you want to define automatic allocation using overhead rates for a certain type of costs/expenses on orders? A: Q: 2) List the different groups of costs/expenses (for example, applying a fixed percentage rate for recovery of overhead to material issues). Explanation: Caution: When you calculate overhead for cost objects that are credited with the standard cost of goods manufactured times the quantity received in stock, this overhead should also be contained in the calculated standard cost of goods manufactured (according to the adjusted standard cost estimate). A: Q: A: 3.1.2.30. Questions: Q: 1) Do you want to distribute costs from a cost center or a cost center group to CO objects (cost center, orders, WBS element), and keep the original cost element from thesender in the receiver object? A: Q: 2) Did you define the basis for these allocations (such as, percentage, statistical key figures, for example telephone units consumed, and so on)? A: 3.1.2.31. Questions: Settlement of Overhead Cost Orders (Planning Data) Plan Cost Distribution 3) What costs are the overhead rates based on? Overhead Calculation (Overhead Cost Order) 49) Do you evaluate interest charges throughout the project hierarchy?

298 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP Q: 1) Do you collect costs/expenses on an internal order that you want represented on a cost center? Explanation: Example: The "Vehicles" department can plan an internal order for each truck to monitor the maintenance costs of each vehicle. The planned order costs are allocated to the appropriate cost center. This lets the cost center managers analyze their vehicle costs together with other costs, such as electricity, water, and so on. A: Q: 2) If so, do you want to be able to see the costs of the cost center (settlement under the original cost element)? A: Q: 3) Or do you want to summarize/aggregate the costs on the cost center (using one or more secondary settlement cost elements)? A: Q: A: 3.1.2.32. Questions: Q: 1) Do you allocation costs from one cost center / group from cost centers to other CO objects (cost centers, orders, WBS elements) by summarizing the original cost elements from the sender cost center(s) into one secondary assessment cost element? A: Q: 2) Did you define the basis for these allocations (such as, percentage, statistical key figures, for example telephone units consumed, and so on)? A: 3.1.2.33. Questions: Q: 1) Do you need to reconcile the demand for scheduled labor hours (activity types) with the available capacity? A: 3.1.2.34. Questions: Q: 1) Do you have cases/situations where a cost element in cost center planning is related to more than one activity (activity type)? If so, see to it that the activity-independent planned costs are split to the activity types before you calculate the prices. 299 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc Splitting Plan Reconciliation Plan Cost Assessment 4) At which level of detail should the costs be transferred?

ValueSAP -

A: Q: A: 3.1.2.35. Questions: Q: 1) Do you want to calculate the planned price automatically or iteratively by dividing the planned costs for a cost center/activity type by the planned activity quantities (or capacities)? Explanation: Internal activities are allocated using a secondary cost element. If you want to keep detailed information about the origin of costs such as electricity, depreciation, or maintenance per activity type, you can use a primary cost component split. A: Q: 2) Do you want to calculate planned prices automatically/iteratively for Activity-Based Costing by dividing the costs planned for the business process by the planned process quantity? Explanation: Process costs are allocated using a secondary cost element. If you want to keep detailed information on the origin of the costs, you can use a primary cost component split. A: Q: 3) Do you want to display partial cost rates (primary cost split) for the planned prices that were calculated automatically/iteratively? A: Planned Price Calculation 2) Define rules for the split.

3.1.3.
Questions:

Product Cost Planning

Q: 1) What types of costing do you want to use (adjusted standard, monthly, inventory, and so on)? A: Q: 2) Note: The following processes are located in the Logistics modules: preliminary costing (production order, product cost collector) and sales order costing A: 3.1.3.1. Questions: Q: 1) Did you check if all the source data from other modules is available for calculating the production costs? 300 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc Preparation for Costing

ValueSAP -

Explanation: Example Bills of material, routings, and work centers from PP (Production Planning) or raw material prices and purchasing information records from MM (Materials Management). A: Q: 2) Which valuation approach are you going to use for externally procured materials, internal activities, external operations, or subcontracting (quotation or purchase order prices, including delivery costs and cash discounts)? Explanation: Externally procured materials -> for example, moving average price, raw materials costing and so on. Internal activities -> periodic price, average price. A: Q: 3) How do you want to allocate overhead in costing: using overhead rates or activity-based costing, or both? Explanation: There are overheads in the production costs (allocation in actual data also), which debit more than one cost center or order. This means that you need to define allocation cost centers, or orders in Overhead Cost Controlling. A: 3.1.3.2. Questions: Q: 1) Do you plan your product costs using bills of material (BOM), routings, or dependencies? If not, how do you plan? A: [ ]Yes [ ]No Standard Cost Estimate with Quantity Structure

Q: 2) Do you want the single components (gross price, delivery costs and so on) of the acquisition costs of the externally procured materials in the calculation cost splitting to be displayed separately? A: Q: 3) Do you subcontract any of your manufacturing activities?

Explanation: Do you also provide bills of material for this purpose? Should overhead also be applied to these? A: Q: 4) Do your cost estimates contain costs that cannot be captured through BOMs, routings, overhead rates, or process cost allocation? A: 301 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP -

Q: 5) Do you plan products that use materials belonging to another plant? If so, do these plants belong to the same company code? A: Q: 6) Do you want to analyze the cost of goods manufactured, split by organizational units involved in the value added process (plant, profit center, company code)? Explanation: Example: Cost of goods manufactured are displayed separately by plant. A: Q: 7) Have different currencies been assigned to the organizational units involved in the costing? A: Q: 8) Do you want to break down your cost of goods manufactured into primary costs? If so, are you doing this for production, or simply to display the cost of sales in the profitability analysis? Explanation: An example is breaking down production costs into cost-accounting depreciation, wages, and energy, and so on. A: Q: 9) If you are using mixed costing, what proportions of the individual procurement alternatives/manufacturing processes should be used as a basis for costing? A: 3.1.3.3. Questions: Q: 1) Since you are calculating your product costs without access to SAP quantity structure data, where are you getting the quantity information required for costing? Explanation: Example: External PPS System A: Q: 2) Do you subcontract any of your manufacturing activities? Standard Cost Estimate Without Quantity Structure

Explanation: Do you also provide bills of material for this purpose? Should overhead also be applied to these? A: 302 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP Q: 3) Do you plan products that use materials belonging to another plant? If so, do these plants belong to the same company code? A: Q: 4) Do you want to analyze the cost of goods manufactured, split by organizational units involved in the value added process (plant, profit center, company code)? Explanation: Example: Cost of goods manufactured are displayed separately by plant. A: Q: 5) Have different currencies been assigned to the organizational units involved in the costing? A: Q: 6) Do you want to break down your cost of goods manufactured into primary costs? If so, are you doing this for production, or simply to display the cost of sales in the profitability analysis? Explanation: An example is breaking down production costs into cost-accounting depreciation, wages, and energy, and so on. A: 3.1.3.4. Questions: Q: A: Q: A: 3.1.3.5. Questions: Q: 1) Define your reporting requirements for product costing, and reconcile them with the standard SAP reports. Do you need customer-specific costing reports? A: 3.1.3.6. Questions: Q: 1) Do you want to update your product costs (determined using standard costing) as standard prices in MM? 303 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc Price Release with Standard Cost Estimate Costing Analysis 2) Which rules are used to distribute the costs of goods manufactured to the co-products? 1) Do you have production processes that ever yield multiple products? Standard Cost Estimate for Co-Products

ValueSAP -

Explanation: This leads to revaluation of the material stock to the new standard price, if the material is valuated with the standard price. A: Q: 2) Do you want to update your product costs (determined using other costings), such as inventory costing, as plan prices, or valuation prices based on tax law, and so on in MM (without stock revaluation)? A: 3.1.3.7. Questions: Q: 1) Do you want to cost material for which there is no material master in Materials Management (prototypes, research and development)? A: Q: 2) Do you require templates for the planned costs of sales orders, such as for selling services? A: 3.1.3.8. Questions: Q: 1) Are you using internal orders for temporary job cost controlling and want to plan costs? If so, you can plan the costs with the Easy Cost Planning function. A: Q: 2) Do you want to trigger subsequent processes based on the planned resources? If so, you can use the Execution Services function from the cost estimate in Easy Cost Planning. Explanation: Possible subsequent processes: Purchase requisition, purchase order, material reservation, material withdrawal, activity and process allocation. A: Easy Cost Planning and Execution Services (CO) Reference and Simulation Costing

3.1.4.
Questions: Q: A: 3.1.4.1. Questions:

Profit Center Planning

1) Describe your planning processor. How do you plan the Profit Center?

Copy Plan from Previous Year -> Profit Center Planning

304 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP Q: 1) Do you want to base your Profit Center Planning on the previous year's plan values? If yes, what is the source of this data and in what form is it available? Explanation: The plan data of the previous year can be copied into the current year and be simultaneously revaluated via a percentage rate. A: 3.1.4.2. Questions: Q: 1) Do you want to base your Profit Center Planning on the previous year's actual values? If yes, what is the source of this data and in what form is it available? Explanation: The actual data of the previous year can be copied into the current year and be simultaneously revaluated via a percentage rate. A: 3.1.4.3. Questions: Q: A: 3.1.4.4. Questions: Q: 1) Are you planning in MS-Excel and planning to transfer this data to SAP Profit Center Accounting? A: 3.1.4.5. Questions: Q: 1) Do you want to transfer plan data to PCA from other applications? From which application(s)? Explanation: The plan version from which data is transferred in the Profit Center Accounting, must also be defined in Profit Center Accounting. A: 3.1.4.6. Questions: Q: A: 1) Describe your process for manual profit center planning. Manual Profit Center Planning Plan Integration of Profit Centers Excel Upload -> Profit Center Planning 1) Do you want to represent different planning scenarios in parallel? Redefinition of Plan Version (Profit Center Planning) Copy Actual Costs -> Profit Center Planning

305 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP Q: 2) Do you intend to use formula planning within the context of manual Profit Center Planning? la Planning How many of your quotations become orders If few become orders consider not using the A: 3.1.4.7. Questions: Q: 1) Do you carry out distributions from one profit center to another profit center within the same controlling area? Explanation: Allocation means that you want to copy the original cost element(s) from the sender PCTR to the receiver PCTR. A: 3.1.4.8. Questions: Q: 1) Do you assess values from one profit center to another within the same controlling area? code? Explanation: Assessment means that you want to allocate the original cost elements using one or more assessment cost elements (secondary cost elements) instead of retaining the original cost element. A: 3.1.4.9. Questions: Q: 1) Define your report requirements within the context of Profit Center Planning and compare this with the SAP standard reports. Do you require customer-specific Profit Center Reports? A: Profit Center Analysis Plan: Profit Center Assessment Profit Center Distribution: Plan

3.1.5.
3.1.5.1. Questions:

Profit Planning
Valuation of Sales Planning

Q: 1) Which planning levels (characteristics), maturities, and versions do you want to use in planning? A: Q: A: 3.1.5.2. Blueprint_FICO_1.doc Creation of Proposal for Sales and Profit Planning 306 2) Which maturity do you plan in (monthly, quarterly, or yearly)?

ValueSAP Questions: Q: 1) Do you want to structure your sales and profit planning based on reference data? If so, what is the source of this data, and in what form is it? Explanation: Possible sources: - Actual data - Other plan data - Data from LIS A: Q: 2) Do you want to valuate your sales planning with revenues, sales deductions, and costs (on an average basis as well)? A: Q: 3) How do you want to adapt the reference dates to be used as a planning proposal?

Explanation: Possible methods: - Revaluate, change period distribution - Rate planning, Valuation, and so on. A: Q: 4) If your reference data is located at a higher level than the most detailed planning level, how do you want the data to be resolved onto the levels below it? A: Q: A: 3.1.5.3. Questions: Q: 1) Do you modify the automatically generated planning data manually and/or add new planning data? A: Q: 2) Do you want to plan your manual planning data with Excel? Manual Profit Planning 5) Do you use forecasting techniques in your planning process? If so, describe them.

Explanation: This is an Excel file linked to the R/3 System. A: 3.1.5.4. Questions: Q: 1) Do you want to transfer the plan process costs to profitability analysis? ales, and development costs)? 307 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc Planned Allocation of Process Costs to Profitability Analysis

ValueSAP A: Q: 2) Which level do you want to assign these costs (using the step-by-step principles of analysis of fixed-cost allocation)? (for example, company code, country, enterprise area, sales organization) A: Q: 3) Which allocation methods do you require for transferring the planned process costs to profitability analysis? Explanation: Options: - Assessment - Indirect activity allocation - Allocation using process template A: 3.1.5.5. Questions: Q: 1) Do you want to transfer the planned cost center costs to profitability analysis? Planned Allocation Cost Center Costs to Profitability Analysis

Explanation: Note: Allocate the plan costs from the production cost centers using costing (planned cost of goods manufactured) to the cost-of-sales in profitability analysis. A: Q: 2) Which level do you want to assign these costs (using the step-by-step principles of analysis of fixed-cost allocation)? (for example, company code, country, enterprise area, sales organization) A: Q: 3) Which allocation methods are to be used for transferring the posted cost center costs to profitability analysis? Explanation: Options: - Assessment - Indirect activity allocation - Indirect activity allocation A: 3.1.5.6. Questions: Q: A: Q: A: 308 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc 2) At which level of detail should the costs be transferred? 1) Do you want to transfer the order planning to profitability analysis? Settlement of Overhead Cost Orders (Planning Data)

ValueSAP 3.1.5.7. Questions: Q: 1) Do you want to settle costs and/or revenues from projects (such as customer projects) directly to profitability analysis? A: Q: 2) In what degree of detail (WBS or higher levels) do you want to adopt the project structures? A: Q: A: 3.1.5.8. Questions: Q: 1) Do you want to transfer any planning values to EC-PCA planning? Plan Data Transfer to EC-PCA 3) At which level of detail should the costs be transferred? Project Settlement

Explanation: If this is the case, then you need to maintain the profit center as the plan criterium. A:

3.2.
3.2.1.

Actual Cost/Revenue Allocation

Overhead Allocation
Direct Activity Assignment Using Time Sheet Processing 3.2.1.1.

Questions: Q: A: Q: A: 3.2.1.2. Questions: Q: 1) Explain the permit procedure for working time or recording of activity allocation for your employees. A: Q: 2) How many employees does the person responsible for approval manage? 309 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc Time Sheet Permit 2) How do employees record their working time (time, detail, medium/system)? 1) Do you base direct activity allocation to CO objects on this data?

ValueSAP -

Explanation: Consider using the CATS workflow to automate the approval process. A: 3.2.1.3. Questions: Q: A: 1) Do you want to transfer recorded activity allocations to Controlling using the time sheet? [ ]Yes [ ]No 2) How often does this transfer take place (daily, weekly and so on)? Transfer Time Sheet Data to CO

Q: A:

Q: 3) Which time sheet-based reports do you require (for example, employee utilization, employee hours by cost center)? A: 3.2.1.4. Questions: Q: 1) Do you need to see days that have not timesheet entries? Time Sheet Report

Explanation: There is a standard report for missing days. A: Q: 2) Do you need an evaluation, do see the days on which personnel enter more than a defined number of hours? Explanation: There is a standard report for overtime. A: Q: 3) Do you have to see the employee name in the documents for the receiving component?

Explanation: Consider using a User Exit. A: Q: 4) Do different roles need to see different timesheet information? (If yes, create report variants.) A: 310 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP 3.2.1.5. Questions: Q: 1) Do you want to allocate costs manually from a sender cost center to a receiver (internal order, cost center, and so on) by valuating the added quantity with a price? Explanation: Example You settle 2 electrician hours from the electrician cost center to a receiving cost center, and 1 hour costs USD 50. A: [ ]Yes [ ]No 2) Describe your direct activity allocation processes. Direct Activity Allocation (Controlling)

Q: A:

3.2.1.6. Questions:

Transfer of Primary Costs to Cost Center/Order

Q: 1) Create a matrix that contains the primary cost elements derived from the chart of accounts in the rows, and assign these to the possible account assignment objects (cost center, order). Explanation: (Information on defining the field selection in FI/MM) (Information on defining the field selection in FI/MM) Assign these for cost elements that are always assigned to the same object number (cost center, order number, cost object). (Information on automatic account assignments to CO). A: 3.2.1.7. Questions: Q: 1) For your organization, do you want to display manual funds reservation (manual commitments) for expected expenses, where you cannot yet foresee how they are incurred? Explanation: This appears in the reports as commitments for the budget. A: 3.2.1.8. Questions: Q: 1) When you use manual funds reservation, describe the reduction process for the manual commitment. Explanation: Note: Unlike the commitments for purchase requisitions and purchase orders, the commitment created by the manual funds reservation is not automatically reduced by actual incurrence of costs. Therefore you need to clarify by whom, at which time, and in which form (single or collective processing) the commitment is to be reduced. 311 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc Manual Funds Reduction Manual Funds Reservation

ValueSAP A: 3.2.1.9. Questions: Q: 1) Do you want to allocate certain (primary and/or secondary) cost elements manually, without using the usual tools for distribution, assessment, or activity allocation? A: Manual Cost Allocation

3.2.2.
Questions:

Product Cost Allocation

Q: 1) Note: Contained as a process in the respective Logistics modules (production orders/product cost collectors/sales orders). A: Q: 2) Are you using Product-Cost by Sales Order?

Explanation: If so, actual costs are updated directly to the sales order item. If so, actual costs are updated directly to the sales order item. For comprehensive information on this, see the R/3 Library under Financials -> Controlling -> Product Cost Controlling -> Cost Object Controlling -> Product Cost by Sales Order. A: 3.2.2.1. Questions: Q: 1) Comment on simultaneous costing Simultaneous Costing

Explanation: The simultaneous cost estimate consists of actual account assignments to cost objects that result from goods movements for raw materials and semifinished goods, confirmation of internal activities, external bills, and so on. Consequently, you should work closely with colleagues working with Logistics and Financial Accounting when drawing up the concept for simultaneous costing. This is especially relevant for automatic account determination. A:

3.2.3.
3.2.3.1. Questions:

Profit Center Allocation

Actual Data Transfers on Profit Center

Q: 1) Do you want to transfer plan data to PCA from other applications? From which application(s)? Explanation: The plan version from which data is transferred in the Profit Center Accounting, must also be defined in Profit Center Accounting. 312 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP A: 3.2.3.2. Questions: Q: 1) In Profit Center Accounting, do you want to enter other data which is not transferred by the integration of EC-PCA? A: 3.2.3.3. Questions: Q: 1) Besides the balance sheet items transferred at period end, (see period end closing Profit Center Accounting) do you wish to transfer other B/S items transaction-based? If yes, which ones? A: 3.2.3.4. Questions: Q: 1) In Profit Center Accounting, do you want to enter other statistical key figures which are not transferred by the integration of EC-PCA? A: Manual Entry of Statistical Key Figures Actual Transfer of Additional Balance Sheet Items to EC-PCA Document Entry in Profit Center Accounting

3.2.4.
3.2.4.1. Questions:

Cost and Revenue Allocation to Profitability Analysis

Transfer and Valuation of Incoming Sales Orders

Q: 1) Do you want to transfer the sales order receipt to profitability analysis? Which period do you want to show the sales order result in? Explanation: Options: - Period in which the order was entered - Period for the expected delivery / billing plan A: Q: 2) Which sales order values do you want to track in reporting? Examples: Gross revenue, net revenue, or cost-of-sales. A: 3.2.4.2. Questions: Q: 1) To which report rows (value fields) are the true conditions in the billing document to be assigned? In addition, you do want to transfer statistical conditions? A: Q: 2) Which values are to be used in valuation in addition to the conditions in SD? 313 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc Transfer and Valuation of Billing Documents (Direct Sale)

ValueSAP -

Explanation: Example Sales deductions, such as commission, allowances, shipping costs, warranties, and so on. A: Q: 3) Do you want to update the cost component split for cost of goods manufactured from product costing in profitability analysis by transaction? Explanation: If you want to reconcile the cost of sales with FI, you need to transfer the VPRS condition to CO-PA also. A: 3.2.4.3. Questions: Q: 1) Do you perform third-party transactions in the SAP sense? This means that sold products are delivered to customers directly from the supplier; no goods receipt or goods issue is posted in your company. Explanation: To execute third party business transactions, you need to post the incoming invoices for the vendor to the customer before the invoices are sent out. In this case, you are urgently required to transfer the VPRS condition from SD. A: 3.2.4.4. Questions: Q: 1) Do you perform intercompany business in the SAP sense? This means that sold goods are delivered from a plant in a company code that is not the same as the invoicing company code. A: Q: 2) Do you want to compare the external revenues with the cost of goods manufactured of the company code of production? A: [ ]Yes [ ]No 3.2.4.5. Questions: Q: 1) How should credit memos, returns, and free deliveries be shown in Profitability Analysis? Transfer and Valuation of Billing Documents (Complaints Processing) Transfer and Valuation of Billing Documents (Intercompany Processing) Transfer and Valuation of Billing Documents (Third-Party Transaction)

314 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP Explanation: Example: You need to ensure that the value field for freight is reset for returns. A: 3.2.4.6. Questions: Q: 1) Do you want to transfer customer arrangements to Profitability Analysis as passive budget checks? A: 3.2.4.7. Questions: Q: 1) Do all your revenue and sales deduction postings come in from the Sales and Distribution component, or are there additional postings to those categories that originate in the General Ledger? A: Q: 2) Which additional expenses and revenues that were not carried in Overhead Cost Controlling nor in Product Cost Controlling do you want to transfer to Profitability Analysis? Explanation: These can also be expenses/revenues that have previously been posted in COPA for accrual purposes only, and which you want to compare with the actual values. A: Q: 3) At which level (characteristics) do you want to post this data to profitability analysis? Which cost elements should be transferred to which value fields? A: 3.2.4.8. Questions: Q: 1) Do all your revenue and sales deduction postings come in from the Sales and Distribution component, or are there additional postings to those categories that originate in the General Ledger? A: Q: 2) At which level (characteristics) do you want to post this data to profitability analysis? Which cost elements should be transferred to which value fields? A: Q: 3) Create a matrix that contains the primary cost and revenue elements derived from the chart of accounts in the rows, and assign these to the possible account assignment objects (combinations of characteristics in CO-PA). 315 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc Automatic Additional Transfer into Profitability Analysis Direct Posting of Costs and Revenues From FI Transfer of Customer Agreements to Profitability Analysis

ValueSAP -

Explanation: (As information for defining the field selection in FI/MM, and for defining the characteristic groups) defining the characteristic groups) Assign these to the cost elements that are always assigned to this object number (profitability segment). What value fields do you want to post the values for which cost elements to? A: Q: 4) Decide which automatic postings from FI or MM should be transferred into Profitability Analysis automatically. Explanation: Examples: Expenses and revenue from the revaluation or transfer of stock between plants. A:

3.3.
3.3.1.

Period-End Closing (Controlling)

Period-End Closing in Overhead Cost Controlling
Actual Periodic Reposting 3.3.1.1.

Questions: Q: 1) Do you periodically move costs from a project/cost center (such as telephone costs) to other projects/cost centers? A: Q: 2) Did you define the basis for these allocations (such as, percentage, statistical key figures, for example telephone units consumed, and so on)? A: 3.3.1.2. Method) Questions: Q: 1) Describe how accruals are planned for actual data. Accrual Calculation in Cost Center Accounting (Target = Actual

Explanation: Define the cost elements that should be accrued using the target=actual method (cost element category 04). Define the cost elements that you want to accrue with imputed tack-on costs (cost element category 03). For the latter, identify the basis (cost elements) to be used as the basis for accrual calculation. A: 3.3.1.3. Method) Questions: Q: 1) Describe how accruals are planned for actual data. Accrual Calculation in Cost Center Accounting (Percentage

316 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP Explanation: Define the cost elements that should be accrued using the target=actual method (cost element category 04). Define the cost elements that you want to accrue with imputed tack-on costs (cost element category 03). For the latter, identify the basis (cost elements) to be used as the basis for accrual calculation. A: 3.3.1.4. Questions: Q: 1) Do you want to distribute costs from a cost center or a cost center group to CO objects (cost center, orders, WBS element), and keep the original cost element from thesender in the receiver object? A: Q: 2) Did you define the basis for these allocations (such as, percentage, statistical key figures, for example telephone units consumed, and so on)? A: 3.3.1.5. Questions: Q: 1) When you use indirect activity allocation (manual entry), are you able to measure and post the activities on the sender cost center that are to be allocated? A: [ ]Yes [ ]No 3.3.1.6. Questions: Q: 1) Application example: Actual Indirect Activity Allocation (Manual Entry) Entry of Sender Activities Actual Cost Distribution

Explanation: The "Quality control" cost center provides 1,000 hours of the "Checking" activity type. It provides activity to the "Goods receipt" and "Finished product" cost centers. The allocation is made using the allocation base "Number of checked items" (PP). On the "Goods receipt" cost center, there are 4,000 of these items, and on the "Finished product" cost center, there are 6,000. This corresponds to an activity input of 400 hours by the "Goods receipt" cost center, and 600 hours by the "Finished product" cost center. The price for each activity unit on the "Quality control" cost center" is 50 USD/h. This activity output creates costs of 50,000 USD on the "Quality control" cost center. The receiver cost centers are debited according to their allocation base "Checked items" with the following costs: Goods receipt: (50,000 USD x 4,000 PP) / 10,000 PP = 20,000 USD Finished products: (50.000 USD x 6,000 PP) / 10,000 PP = 30,000 USD A: 3.3.1.7. Questions: Q: 1) Example: 317 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc Actual Indirect Activity Allocation (Indirect Entry)

ValueSAP -

Explanation: In the application example, the activity is determined using weighting factors on the sender, with tracing factors from the receiver. You need to define these tracing factors for the sender. The sender rule in this case is for quantities determined invertedly. You can use any receiver rule. The receiver tracing factors are as follows: "Goods receipt": 4,000 items for checking. "Finished products": 6,000 items for checking. 0,4 hours are required by the "Quality control" cost center for checking. To do this, a weighting factor of 0,4 is defined on the sender for the "Check" activity type. This results in 1,600 hours activity input for the "Goods receipt" cost center, and 2,400 hours for the "Finished products" cost center. The "Check" activity is valuated at 5 USD/h. This means that the sender is credited with 20,000 USD, the "Goods receipt" cost center is debited with 8,000 USD, and the "Finished products" cost center is debited with 12,000 USD. A: 3.3.1.8. Questions: Q: 1) Do you want to have the system automatically calculate the actual activity input of primary cost centers (receivers) from secondary cost centers (senders) on the basis of the operating level and the planned activity input of the receiver cost center? Explanation: This also determines the actual quantity of the sender cost center using the target quantity of the receiver. This technique is useful when you can determine a direct proportional relationship between the activity input and the activity output of the primary cost center (such as between energy hours and machine hours). A: 3.3.1.9. Questions: Q: A: Q: A: 3.3.1.10. Questions: Q: 1) Do you want to define automatic allocation using overhead rates for a certain type of costs/expenses on orders? A: Q: 2) List the different groups of costs/expenses (for example, applying a fixed percentage rate for recovery of overhead to material issues). Explanation: Caution: When you calculate overhead for cost objects that are credited with the standard cost of goods manufactured times the quantity received in stock, this overhead should 318 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc Overhead Calculation (Overhead Cost Order) 2) Which factors influence the amount of costs to be allocated? 1) Do you have process costs that you want to allocate to overhead cost orders? Template Allocation (Overhead Cost Order) Target=Actual Activity Allocation

ValueSAP also be contained in the calculated standard cost of goods manufactured (according to the adjusted standard cost estimate). A: Q: A: 3.3.1.11. Questions: Q: A: Q: 2) To which receivers, at which rates (percentage, amount, or equivalence number) and under which cost elements (original cost element or settlement cost element) should settlement be made? A: 3.3.1.12. Questions: Q: A: Q: 2) To which receivers, at which rates (percentage, amount, or equivalence number) and under which cost elements (original cost element or settlement cost element) should settlement be made? A: 3.3.1.13. Questions: Q: 1) Do you allocation costs from one cost center / group from cost centers to other CO objects (cost centers, orders, WBS elements) by summarizing the original cost elements from the sender cost center(s) into one secondary assessment cost element? A: Q: 2) Did you define the basis for these allocations (such as, percentage, statistical key figures, for example telephone units consumed, and so on)? A: 3.3.1.14. Questions: 319 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc Overhead Calculation (Business Process) Actual Cost Assessment 1) Which order types should be settled? Settlement of Accrual Orders 1) Which order types should be settled? Settlement of Overhead Orders (Actual Data) 3) What costs are the overhead rates based on?

ValueSAP Q: 1) What costs is the cost estimate based on when you compute overhead for internal orders? A: Q: A: Q: A: 3) Will you perform automatic recovery of overheads on specific types of costs/expenses? [ ]Yes [ ]No 2) Specify the overhead rates.

Q: 4) List the different groups of costs/expenses (for example, applying a fixed percentage rate for recovery of overhead to material issues). A: Q: 5) For each assignment type, do you distribute overhead as a fixed percentage or based on the actual total costs? A: Q: 6) Describe in detail how each of these assignments is performed today in your organization. A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 10) For each allocation category, do you distribute overhead as a fixed percentage or based on the actual total costs? A: Q: 11) If you use fixed percentages for assignments, how do you handle remaining variances? A: 320 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc 9) Do you assign overhead expenses to projects? 8) Describe in detail how each of these allocations is performed today in your organization. 7) What postings do the assignments create?

ValueSAP -

Q: 12) For each of these assignments, what causes the overhead (for example, direct labor expense, labor hours, total WBS expense, others)? A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 15) Will you perform automatic recovery of overheads on specific types of costs/expenses? A: [ ]Yes [ ]No 16) Do you want to define a percentage for the overhead rate in the cost object? 14) Define overhead rates. 13) What postings do the assignments create?

Q: A:

Q: 17) Do you want to define automatic allocation using overhead rates for a certain type of costs/expenses on orders? A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 21) Do you want to define automatic allocation using overhead rates for a certain type of costs/expenses on orders? A: Q: 22) List the different groups of costs/expenses (for example, applying a fixed percentage rate for recovery of overhead to material issues). 321 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc 20) Do you perform automatic overhead allocation for specific types of costs/expenses? 19) Define overhead rates. 18) Do you want to add a percentage for overhead to the production cost collector?

ValueSAP -

Explanation: Caution: When you calculate overhead for cost objects that are credited with the standard cost of goods manufactured times the quantity received in stock, this overhead should also be contained in the calculated standard cost of goods manufactured (according to the adjusted standard cost estimate). A: Q: 23) Do you plan to allocate a certain type of costs/expenses to cost centers automatically using overhead rates? A: Q: A: Q: 25) Are there any overhead expenses that are not calculated with reference to the production order but are to be assigned directly to the sales order? Explanation: Example: Overhead costs for sales and administration. A: Q: 26) How often do you calculate your planned overhead? 24) What costs are the overhead rates based on?

Explanation: The Schedule Manager is well suited to performing periodic allocations. The program selects project objects, permits error correction, and continues the process. A: Q: 27) Who is responsible for reconciling the run? (This person will be responsible for running/monitoring planned overhead.) A: Q: 28) Do you calculate overhead for all objects at once or individually for each object. (Detailed calculation can affect system performance.) A: Q: A: Q: A: 30) Is overhead calculated for your projects? 29) Do you have a specific plan version when you calculate overhead?

322 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP Q: A: Q: 32) Describe how you calculate overhead for (1) direct costs (2) indirect costs (3) fixed costs (4) variable costs). A: Q: 33) Do you include sales and marketing and general and administrative costs in your overhead calculation? A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: 323 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc 42) What is the basis for the overhead costs? 41) Is the calculation dependent on time periods? 40) Do you calculate percentage overhead? 39) At what level of detail do you plan for overhead? 38) Do you calculate overhead on materials/labor? 37) Do you have different overhead costs for each business unit? 36) Do you have project-type-specific overhead calculations? 35) Do you process actual overhead on a project by project basis or overall? 34) Do you reconcile planned and actual overhead? 31) Is the planned overhead the same as the actual overhead?

ValueSAP -

Q: 43) Is the basis for overhead planned costs the same as the basis for actual overhead costs? A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 48) Who is responsible for overhead costs? (This person is responsible for running the overhead calculation.) A: Q: A: 3.3.1.15. Questions: Q: A: Q: 2) Do you want to allocate cost center variances subsequently to other cost centers/cost objects (using subsequent valuation with actual prices) or post them to Profitability Analysis? A: 3.3.1.16. Questions: Q: 1) Do you want to predistribute fixed costs independent of the receiving cost center#s actual usage of resources? Predistribution of Fixed Costs 1) Do you want to display cost center variances by variance category? Variance Calculation for Overhead 49) Do you evaluate interest charges throughout the project hierarchy? 47) Does the basis for the overhead costs change during the lifecycle of the project? 46) To which accounts/cost elements are the overhead costs posted? 45) How often do you calculate overhead costs? 44) What is the formula/schema for applying overhead costs?

324 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP Explanation: Do you want to debit a receiver cost center with the fixed cost of the sender according to the plan? A: 3.3.1.17. Questions: Q: 1) Comment on splitting Splitting

Explanation: Normally, cost elements in Cost Center Accounting are not assigned to activity types for actual postings. Be sure to split the costs posted independent of activities to the individual activity types before you calculate the actual price. A: Q: 2) Did you define the basis for these allocations (such as, percentage, statistical key figures, for example telephone units consumed, and so on)? A: 3.3.1.18. Questions: Q: 1) Do you want to calculate actual prices for Cost Center Accounting and / or ActivityBased Costing on an automatic or iterative basis? A: Q: A: Q: A: 3.3.1.19. Questions: Q: 1) How do you want to organize subsequent valuation? (see documentation) Revaluation at Actual Prices 3) Do you want to set actual prices manually? 2) Do you want to represent actual prices as periodic, average, or aggregated prices? Actual Price Calculation

Explanation: You can valuate subsequently using actual prices without changing the original allocations made using planned prices. Instead, the system posts the difference to the allocation made using the planned price with a separate business transaction. with a separate business transaction. When you valuate subsequently using the original business transaction, the system changes the original allocation so that you can no longer distinguish the difference between the two valuations. distinguish the difference between the two valuations. In subsequent valuation using actual prices, you want to reallocate cost center variances to other cost centers or cost objects. The other strategy would be to post the variances to Profitability Analysis. 325 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP A: 3.3.1.20. Questions: Q: 1) Do you intend to allocate costs from one cost center/order of a company code to another cost center/order of another company code and represent this as an intercompany transaction in FI? A: 3.3.1.21. Questions: Q: A: 3.3.1.22. Questions: Q: A: 3.3.1.23. Questions: Q: 1) Describe the critical factors for order analysis, such as plan/budget vs. actual analysis, order group analysis, or detailed line item analysis. A: Analysis of Overhead Orders 1) Provide the consultant with your most critical cost center reports. Cost Center Analysis 1) Provide the consultant with your most critical business process reports. Business Process Analysis Reconciliation Financial Accounting/Controlling

3.3.2.
3.3.2.1. Questions: Q: A:

Period-End Closing: Periodic Product Cost Controlling

Template Allocation (Cost Object)

1) Do you have process costs that you want to allocate to a cost object? [ ]Yes [ ]No 2) Which factors influence the amount of costs to be allocated?

Q: A:

3.3.2.2. Questions: Q:

Revaluation at Actual Prices

1) How do you want to organize subsequent valuation? (see documentation)

326 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP Explanation: You can valuate subsequently using actual prices without changing the original allocations made using planned prices. Instead, the system posts the difference to the allocation made using the planned price with a separate business transaction. with a separate business transaction. When you valuate subsequently using the original business transaction, the system changes the original allocation so that you can no longer distinguish the difference between the two valuations. distinguish the difference between the two valuations. In subsequent valuation using actual prices, you want to reallocate cost center variances to other cost centers or cost objects. The other strategy would be to post the variances to Profitability Analysis. A: 3.3.2.3. Questions: Q: 1) Do you want to use the calculated target costs on the orders for the distribution within the cost object hierarchy to the product cost collector? Explanation: Note: Required if you want to create a periodic unit price or periodic allocation price, and if the total costs are to be displayed on the orders. A: 3.3.2.4. Questions: Q: A: Q: A: 3.3.2.5. Questions: Q: A: Q: A: 3.3.2.6. Questions: Q: 1) Do you want to define automatic allocation using overhead rates for a certain type of costs/expenses on orders? A: 327 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc Overhead Calculation (Product Cost Collector) 2) Which factors influence the amount of costs to be allocated? 1) Do you have process costs that you want to allocate to a product cost collector? Template Allocation (Product Cost Collector) 2) What costs are the overhead rates based on? 1) Do you want to define a percentage for the overhead rate in the cost object? Overhead Calculation (Cost Object) Actual Cost Distribution - Product Costs

ValueSAP -

Q: 2) List the different groups of costs/expenses (for example, applying a fixed percentage rate for recovery of overhead to material issues). Explanation: Caution: When you calculate overhead for cost objects that are credited with the standard cost of goods manufactured times the quantity received in stock, this overhead should also be contained in the calculated standard cost of goods manufactured (according to the adjusted standard cost estimate). A: Q: A: 3.3.2.7. Questions: Q: 1) Note: WIP for target costs is determined by valuating the actual postings with the target costs of the product costing. A: Q: 2) Describe the level of detail and the cost breakdown that you want for your WIP. Define the WIP components that do not require activation (no transfer to FI) A: 3.3.2.8. Questions: Q: 1) Which production variance categories do you want to calculate in Cost Object Controlling, and which of these should be transferred to CO-PA (operating profit) in consultation with Profitability Analysis? A: Q: A: Q: A: 3.3.2.9. Questions: Q: 1) Define a settlement rule for the cost object in the cost object hierarchy. Settlement of Cost Object Hierarchy 3) Do you want to report scrap separately within the production variances? 2) Do you want to valuate the scrap? If so, specify how. Periodic Variance Calculation WIP Calculation Based on Target Costs 3) What costs are the overhead rates based on?

328 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP Explanation: Note: If there is no distribution of actual cost for the cost object hierarchy, then this needs to be maintained. A: 3.3.2.10. Questions: Q: 1) Do you want to see your production variances in Profitability Analysis? Settlement of Product Cost Collector

Explanation: Define the value fields for profitability analysis (for materials where the material price control indicator is set to S) for transferring the variances. A: Q: 2) Note on transferring the price differences to FI or updating the factory activity to production orders: Explanation: To debit the cost object, define a cost element (category 22), which is assigned to the GBB-AUA business transaction in MM Account determination. A: 3.3.2.11. Questions: Q: 1) How do you want to summarize product costs? Data Collection for Product Drilldown

Explanation: Product drilldown provides you with a fixed hierarchy that displays the product costs per plant, product group, product group, cost element, and if necessary, the period. If you want to summarize your product costs using other criteria, such as, sold-to-party, profit center, business area, then you need to use order summarization. This enables you to create hierarchies that include all of the fields in the order master record. If you require more summmarization criteria, you can use classification to define criteria for summarization as needed. A: Q: A: Q: 3) Is this grouping and its requirements regarding product groups and material groups identical in Logistics? A: 3.3.2.12. Questions: Product Cost Analysis in Product Cost by Period 2) How do you want to group your materials for the summarized analysis?

329 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP Q: 1) Define your reporting requirements in Cost Object Controlling, and compare them to the SAP standard reports. Do you require customer-specific cost object reports? A:

3.3.3.

Period-End Closing: Order-Related Product Cost Controlling

Template Allocation (Manufacturing Order)

3.3.3.1. Questions: Q: A:

1) Do you have process costs that you want to allocate to a production order? [ ]Yes [ ]No 2) Which factors influence the amount of costs to be allocated?

Q: A:

3.3.3.2. Questions: Q:

Revaluation at Actual Prices

1) How do you want to organize subsequent valuation? (see documentation)

Explanation: You can valuate subsequently using actual prices without changing the original allocations made using planned prices. Instead, the system posts the difference to the allocation made using the planned price with a separate business transaction. with a separate business transaction. When you valuate subsequently using the original business transaction, the system changes the original allocation so that you can no longer distinguish the difference between the two valuations. distinguish the difference between the two valuations. In subsequent valuation using actual prices, you want to reallocate cost center variances to other cost centers or cost objects. The other strategy would be to post the variances to Profitability Analysis. A: 3.3.3.3. Questions: Q: 1) Do you want to define automatic allocation using overhead rates for a certain type of costs/expenses on orders? A: Q: 2) List the different groups of costs/expenses (for example, applying a fixed percentage rate for recovery of overhead to material issues). Explanation: Caution: When you calculate overhead for cost objects that are credited with the standard cost of goods manufactured times the quantity received in stock, this overhead should also be contained in the calculated standard cost of goods manufactured (according to the adjusted standard cost estimate). 330 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc Overhead Calculation (Manufacturing Order)

ValueSAP A: Q: A: 3.3.3.4. Questions: Q: 1) Do you have production processes that ever yield multiple products? Preliminary Settlement for Co-Products, Rework 3) What costs are the overhead rates based on?

Explanation: Which rules are to be used for distributing the costs to the co-products? A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: 3.3.3.5. Questions: Q: 1) WIP for actual costs is determined independently of status: WIP Calculation Based On Actual Costs 4) Are you working with collective orders or without goods movement (old processing)? 3) Are there any postprocessing orders that you want to settle? 2) Which rules are used to distribute the costs of goods manufactured to the co-products?

Explanation: WIP (period) = Actual costs from the period - Credit by delivery to warehouse WIP (cumulated) = Balance of all credits and debits WIP (cumulated) = Balance of all credits and debits The WIP is broken down at the final delivery. Negative WIP is regarded as accrual for missing costs. A: Q: 2) Describe the level of detail and the cost breakdown that you want for your WIP. Define the WIP components that do not require activation (no transfer to FI) A: 3.3.3.6. Questions: Q: 1) Which production variance categories do you want to calculate in Cost Object Controlling, and which of these should be transferred to CO-PA (operating profit) in consultation with Profitability Analysis? 331 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc Variance Calculation Cumulated

ValueSAP A: Q: A: Q: A: 3.3.3.7. Questions: Q: 1) Do you want to see your production variances in Profitability Analysis? Settlement of Manufacturing Order to Inventory 3) Do you want to report scrap separately within the production variances? 2) Do you want to valuate the scrap? If so, specify how.

Explanation: Define the value fields for profitability analysis (for materials where the material price control indicator is set to S) for transferring the variances. A: Q: 2) Note on transferring the price differences to FI or updating the factory activity to production orders: Explanation: To debit the cost object, define a cost element (category 22), which is assigned to the GBB-AUA business transaction in MM Account determination. A: 3.3.3.8. Questions: Q: 1) How do you want to summarize product costs? Data Collection for Product Drilldown

Explanation: Product drilldown provides you with a fixed hierarchy that displays the product costs per plant, product group, product group, cost element, and if necessary, the period. If you want to summarize your product costs using other criteria, such as, sold-to-party, profit center, business area, then you need to use order summarization. This enables you to create hierarchies that include all of the fields in the order master record. If you require more summmarization criteria, you can use classification to define criteria for summarization as needed. A: Q: A: Q: 3) Is this grouping and its requirements regarding product groups and material groups identical in Logistics? 332 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc 2) How do you want to group your materials for the summarized analysis?

ValueSAP A: 3.3.3.9. Questions: Q: 1) Define your reporting requirements in Cost Object Controlling, and compare them to the SAP standard reports. Do you require customer-specific cost object reports? A: Product Cost Analysis in Product Cost by Order

3.3.4.
3.3.4.1. Questions: Q: A: Q: A: 3.3.4.2. Questions: Q:

Period-End Closing: Sales Order Controlling

Template Allocation (Sales Order)

1) Do you have process costs that you want to allocate to a sales order?

2) Which factors influence the amount of costs to be allocated?

Revaluation at Actual Prices

1) How do you want to organize subsequent valuation? (see documentation)

Explanation: You can valuate subsequently using actual prices without changing the original allocations made using planned prices. Instead, the system posts the difference to the allocation made using the planned price with a separate business transaction. with a separate business transaction. When you valuate subsequently using the original business transaction, the system changes the original allocation so that you can no longer distinguish the difference between the two valuations. distinguish the difference between the two valuations. In subsequent valuation using actual prices, you want to reallocate cost center variances to other cost centers or cost objects. The other strategy would be to post the variances to Profitability Analysis. A: 3.3.4.3. Questions: Q: 1) Are there any overhead expenses that are not calculated with reference to the production order but are to be assigned directly to the sales order? Explanation: Example: Overhead costs for sales and administration. A: 3.3.4.4. Questions: 333 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc Settlement of Manufacturing Order to Sales Order (Unval. Inventory Only) Overhead Calculation (Sales Order)

ValueSAP -

Q: A:

1) Are you working with the unvaluated sales order stock?

Q: 2) Do you want all of the original cost elements for the production order to be transferred to the sales order? A: Q: A: 3) Do you want to summarize the costs using a secondary settlement cost element? [ ]Yes [ ]No 3.3.4.5. Questions: Q: 1) Results analysis calculates costs of goods sold, work in process (WIP), goods in transit and reserves. How do you want to calculate these values? A: Q: 2) Define the level of detail and cost breakdown that you require for your cost of goods sold, work in process (WIP), goods in transit and reserves. A: 3.3.4.6. Questions: Q: 1) If you are using results analysis, how detailed should the information on cost-of-sales and revenues be in profitability analysis? A: Q: 2) If you are working with results analysis, what accounts would you like to post WIP and reserves to? A: 3.3.4.7. Questions: Q: 1) Do you want to define automatic allocation using overhead rates for a certain type of costs/expenses on orders? A: Q: 2) List the different groups of costs/expenses (for example, applying a fixed percentage rate for recovery of overhead to material issues). Overhead Calculation (Manufacturing Order) Sales Order Settlement Results Analysis for Sales Orders

334 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP Explanation: Caution: When you calculate overhead for cost objects that are credited with the standard cost of goods manufactured times the quantity received in stock, this overhead should also be contained in the calculated standard cost of goods manufactured (according to the adjusted standard cost estimate). A: Q: A: 3.3.4.8. Questions: Q: 1) Define your reporting requirements within sales order controlling, and adapt them to the SAP standard reports. Do you require sales order reports that are customer-specific? A: Q: A: 2) Do you want to check or postprocess the objects processed in period-end closing? Product Cost Analysis in Product Cost by Sales Order 3) What costs are the overhead rates based on?

3.3.5.
3.3.5.1. Questions:

Period-End Closing: Material Ledger

Price Update in Actual Costing

Q: 1) Do you want to transfer the period price to the material master and use it to revaluate inventory for the closed period? A: [ ]Yes [ ]No 3.3.5.2. Questions: Q: A: 1) Do you want to create actual cost component split for the material? [ ]Yes [ ]No Actual Cost Component Split

3.3.6.
3.3.6.1. Questions:

Period-End Closing for Profit Center Accounting

Profit Center Distribution: Actual

Q: 1) Do you need to distribute revenues, gains and balance sheet accounts from the profit centers to other profit centers for the end of period, and simultaneously pass on the sender cost center or the balance sheet account to the receiver profit center? A: Q: 2) What is the basis for allocating these values? 335 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP -

A: 3.3.6.2. Questions: Q: 1) For period-end closing, do you need to assess revenues, costs, and balance sheet accounts from the profit centers to other profit centers, and transfer the sender cost element or balance sheet account to the profit center receiver? A: Q: A: 3.3.6.3. Questions: Q: 1) Define your report requirements within the context of Profit Center Planning and compare this with the SAP standard reports. Do you require customer-specific Profit Center Reports? A: Profit Center Analysis 2) What is the basis for allocating these values? Actual Profit Center Assessment

3.3.7.
3.3.7.1. Questions:

Period-End Closing for Profitability Analysis

Settlement of Sales Orders

Q: 1) If you enterprise has make-to-order production with sales order controlling, but you do not use results analysis, assign the cost elements that were posted on sales orders to the relevant value fields in the profitability analysis. A: Q: 2) If you are using results analysis, how detailed should the information on cost-of-sales and revenues be in profitability analysis? A: 3.3.7.2. Questions: Q: A: Q: A: 3.3.7.3. Questions: 336 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc Settlement of Internal Orders (Actual Data) 2) In which value fields is each variance category to be updated? 1) Do you want to transfer production variances to profitability analysis? Settlement of Production Variances

ValueSAP Q: 1) Do you want to settle costs and/or revenues from internal orders directly to profitability analysis? A: Q: 2) Assign the appropriate value fields (report rows) of Profitability Analysis to the costs and revenues posted to the projects. A: 3.3.7.4. Questions: Q: 1) Do you want to settle costs and/or revenues from projects (such as customer projects) directly to profitability analysis? A: Q: 2) Assign the appropriate value fields (report rows) of Profitability Analysis to the costs and revenues posted to the internal orders. A: 3.3.7.5. Questions: Q: A: Q: 2) Which level do you want to assign these costs (using the step-by-step principles of analysis of fixed-cost allocation)? (for example, company code, country, enterprise area, sales organization) A: Q: 3) Which allocation methods do you require for transferring the planned process costs to profitability analysis? Explanation: Options: - Assessment - Indirect activity allocation - Allocation using process template A: 3.3.7.6. Questions: Q: A: 1) Do you want to transfer the posted cost center costs to profitability analysis? Actual Allocation of Cost Center Costs to Profitability Analysis 1) Do you want to transfer the posted process costs to profitability analysis? Actual Allocation of Process Costs to Profitability Analysis Project Settlement

337 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP Q: 2) Which level do you want to assign these costs (using the step-by-step principles of analysis of fixed-cost allocation)? (for example, company code, country, enterprise area, sales organization) A: Q: 3) Which allocation methods are to be used for transferring the posted cost center costs to profitability analysis? Explanation: Options: - Assessment - Indirect activity allocation - Indirect activity allocation A: 3.3.7.7. Questions: Q: 1) Do you want to assign posted actual costs for period-end closing to a more detailed level than when the original posting was made? (For example, distribution of automatic postings from the company code level to enterprise areas) A: Q: A: 3.3.7.8. Questions: Q: 1) Determine the structure of the contribution margin scheme you want to report on in COPA. A: Q: A: Q: 3) Which characteristic groups do you need for navigating in a report? 2) What are the calculated ratios? Analysis of Results and Contribution Margins 2) Which values (revenues, etc.) do you want to distribute? Actual Top-Down Distribution

Explanation: You should define summarization levels for this groups if data volumes are large. A:

4. Enterprise Controlling
4.1.
4.1.1.
4.1.1.1. Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

Operational Business Planning

Sales Planning
Create Planning Proposal (with Sales Planning) 338

ValueSAP -

Questions: Q: 1) Which planning levels (characteristics), maturities, and versions do you want to use in planning? A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 4) Do you want to structure your sales and profit planning based on reference data? If so, what is the source of this data, and in what form is it? Explanation: Possible sources: - Actual data - Other plan data - Data from LIS A: Q: 5) How do you want to adapt the reference dates to be used as a planning proposal? 3) Should sales quantities and/or values be transferred? 2) Which maturity do you plan in (monthly, quarterly, or yearly)?

Explanation: Possible methods: - Revaluate, change period distribution - Rate planning, Valuation, and so on. A: Q: 6) If your reference data is located at a higher level than the most detailed planning level, how do you want the data to be resolved onto the levels below it? A: Q: A: Q: A: 4.1.1.2. Questions: Q: 1) Do you modify the automatically generated planning data manually and/or add new planning data? A: 339 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc Manual Sales Planning 8) Are you using the planning method "anticipated actual" (rolling planning)? 7) Do you use forecasting techniques in your planning process? If so, describe them.

ValueSAP -

Q:

2) Do you want to plan your manual planning data with Excel?

Explanation: This is an Excel file linked to the R/3 System. A: Q: 3) If you follow a top-down planning approach, what is the lowest level at which you want to see your profitability/plan data? A: Q: A: 4.1.1.3. Questions: Q: 1) Do you want to transfer plan sales quantities from CO-PA to LIS? Transfer of Planned Sales Quantities 4) Which values (such as the quantity sold) do you want to distribute?

Explanation: Or do you want to plan sales quantities in CO-PA and transfer this data ot LIS? ot LIS? Note that if you want to valuate the sales quantities with planned revenues, standard costs of goods manufactured, and so on in order to calculate planned contribution margins, these planned sales quantities must exist in CO-PA. A: Q: A: 2) Do you want to transfer planned sales quantities from CO-PA to Production Planning?

4.1.2.
4.1.2.1. Questions: Q:

Production Planning
Forecast

1) Which articles should be included in the forecast?

Explanation: Article master entries for non-forecast articles (for example, create various forecast profiles for non-forecast articles and forecast articles). A: Q: A: 2) Do you stock seasonal merchandise? [ ]Yes [ ]No 3) How do you handle promotion consumption in the forecast? 340 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

Q:

ValueSAP -

Explanation: If yes, you should consider smoothing the action consumption. If you want smoothing to take place, set the 'Smooth action consumption' indicator in the article master. A: Q: A: Q: 5) How do you want to execute the forecast? 4) On which level do you maintain historical data (day/week/month)?

Explanation: For this there is the individual forecast and the total forecast. A: Q: 6) What do you want to determine from the forecast?

Explanation: Material/article master entries such as service level and Customizing settings must be available. A: Q: 7) How do you forecast new articles?

Explanation: Appropriate article master maintenance necessary. Appropriate article master maintenance necessary. A: Q: 8) Will you establish material forecasts (for example, weekly, monthly, yearly) for your stock materials? Explanation: Analyze whether it is feasible and necessary. Often is does not have to be daily; weekly is sufficient. A: Q: 9) Who processes the error messages for the forecast at your company?

Explanation: This person has to be trained appropriately: he/she must know the possibilities for the forecast results check as well as possible corrections. A: 4.1.2.2. Questions: Q: 1) Do you want to carry out medium to long-term planning of sales and production quantities for your finished products? 341 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc Standard SOP

ValueSAP A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: 4.1.2.3. Questions: Q: 1) How often are the results of Sales and Operations Planning transferred to Demand Management, and how is this defined? A: Q: 2) Which strategies are used in the transfer of SOP results to Demand Management? Transfer of Results to Demand Management 5) Is capacity availability checked at this planning level? 4) Which sources are used in determining sales quantities? 3) At what intervals do you want to carry out sales and operations planning? 2) At what level do you want to carry out sales and operations planning?

Explanation: - Direct transfer of sales plan material - Transfer sales plan material as a proportion of a product group - Direct transfer master production schedule - Transfer master production schedule as a proportion of a product group A: 4.1.2.4. Questions: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: 4) Do you want to administer planned independent requirements in different versions? 3) How do you create your planned independent requirements? 2) At which level do you want to maintain planned independent requirements? 1) Which planning strategies do you use to plan production quantities and dates? Demand Management

342 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP Q: 5) Do you also want to create customer requirements in demand management transactions (in case, for example, the SD module is not used)? A: 4.1.2.5. Questions: Q: 1) Do you specify scenario description, time frame, and plant for long term lot size production? A: Q: 2) Will you carry out scenario comparisons with other scenarios including the active version? A: Q: A: 4.1.2.6. Questions: Q: 1) What requirements do you have for the evaluations? Long-Term Planning: Evaluation 3) What business process will you use to update the operative version? Planning Scenario Processing

Explanation: Note: You can evaluate the stock/requirements list on the level of the material requirements planning (MRP) area: MRP areas are plants or storage locations for example. A: 4.1.2.7. Questions: Q: 1) Should materials that affect the value added, or that use up critical resources, be planned separately and not include planning of the dependent components? A: Q: 2) Should enterprise areas/organizational units (storage location, for example) within a plant be planned separately (MRP area)? A: Q: A: Q: 4) Should planning runs be carried out online or as background jobs? 343 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc 3) In which time intervals are planning runs carried out? Master Production Scheduling - Total Planning

ValueSAP -

Explanation: Which batch jobs have to be planned A: Q: 5) Is a trace on all receipts/withdrawals and stocks for sales orders required, that is, is only the finished product made-to-order or the dependent components as well? A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 8) Should a planning time fence be used with material requirements planning? How should purchase requisitions be treated in this case? Explanation: New order proposals can be moved, for example, to the end of the planning time fence. Within the planning time fence, only manual planning is allowed; this means the planning run does not create any new order proposals. A: Q: 9) Which scope should the planning run have, that is, which type of planning run is required? A: Q: A: Q: 11) Should only the basic dates be determined for the newly created planned orders or should an additional lead time scheduling be carried out, which also determines the capacity requirements. A: Q: A: Q: 13) Is it necessary to represent planned orders as collective orders for the purpose of common scheduling? A: Q: A: 344 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc 14) Are MRP lists required? 12) Which procedure are you using for lot-size calculation? 10) How is the demand for externally procured materials met? 7) Which MRP procedure is used to plan the material requirements (MRP type)? 6) Should planning be excluded from automatic changes in a specified period of time?

ValueSAP -

4.1.2.8. Questions: Q:

Master Production Scheduling - Evaluation

1) Who is responsible for checking the results of requirements planning at your company?

Explanation: The person must be made familiar with the various options for controlling and correcting MRP. controlling and correcting MRP. A: Q: 2) What requirements do you have for the evaluations?

Explanation: Note: You can evaluate the stock/requirements list on the level of the material requirements planning (MRP) area: MRP areas are plants or storage locations for example. A: 4.1.2.9. Questions: Q: 1) Should enterprise areas/organizational units (storage location, for example) within a plant be planned separately (MRP area)? A: Q: A: Q: 3) Should planning runs be carried out online or as background jobs? 2) In which time intervals are planning runs carried out? Overall Material Requirements Planning

Explanation: Which batch jobs have to be planned A: Q: 4) Is a trace on all receipts/withdrawals and stocks for sales orders required, that is, is only the finished product made-to-order or the dependent components as well? A: Q: A: Q: A: 345 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc 6) Which MRP procedure is used to plan the material requirements (MRP type)? 5) Should planning be excluded from automatic changes in a specified period of time?

ValueSAP Q: 7) Should a planning time fence be used with material requirements planning? How should purchase requisitions be treated in this case? Explanation: New order proposals can be moved, for example, to the end of the planning time fence. Within the planning time fence, only manual planning is allowed; this means the planning run does not create any new order proposals. A: Q: 8) Which scope should the planning run have, that is, which type of planning run is required? A: Q: A: Q: 10) Should only the basic dates be determined for the newly created planned orders or should an additional lead time scheduling be carried out, which also determines the capacity requirements. A: Q: A: Q: 12) Is it necessary to represent planned orders as collective orders for the purpose of common scheduling? A: Q: A: 4.1.2.10. Questions: Q: 1) Who is responsible for checking the results of requirements planning at your company? Material Requirements Planning - Evaluation 13) Are MRP lists required? 11) Which procedure are you using for lot-size calculation? 9) How is the demand for externally procured materials met?

Explanation: The person must be made familiar with the various options for controlling and correcting MRP. controlling and correcting MRP. A: Q: 2) What requirements do you have for the evaluations?

Explanation: Note: You can evaluate the stock/requirements list on the level of the material requirements planning (MRP) area: MRP areas are plants or storage locations for example. A: 346 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP -

4.1.3.
4.1.3.1. Questions: Q: A:

Cost and Activity Planning

Copy Plan from Previous Year to Cost Center Planning

1) Describe your planning process. How do you plan cost centers?

Q: 2) Do you want to create your cost center/activity plan based on the planned values of the previous year? (If so, what is the source of this data and in what form is it stored? A: 4.1.3.2. Questions: Q: A: Q: 2) Do you want to create your cost center/activity plan based on the actual values of the previous year? (If so, what is the source of this data and in what form is it stored? A: 4.1.3.3. Questions: Q: A: Q: A: 4.1.3.4. Questions: Q: 1) Do you carry out revaluation (increases or decreases for certain cost elements in certain cost centers)? A: 4.1.3.5. Questions: Q: 1) Does your organization use the type of budgeting described in the documentation field? Budget Planning Planning Revaluation 2) Do you want to represent different planning scenarios in parallel? 1) Describe your planning process. How do you plan cost centers? Redefinition of Plan Version 1) Describe your planning process. How do you plan cost centers? Copy Actual Data to Cost Center Plan

347 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP Explanation: Cost center budgeting allows an organization to enter a summarized budgeted value for a specific cost center/cost centers. Additionally, this budget can then be subjected to availability control which takes into account both actual expenditure plus commitments (subtracted from the budget). Do you perform this kind of budget control within your organization ? A: 4.1.3.6. Questions: Q: 1) Do you want to plan and control the budget of the order using availability checks? Order Budgeting

Explanation: Budgeting for orders makes it possible to create a total budget value for a given order or given orders. In addition, you can carry out an availability control for this budget that includes both actual expenses and commitments (deducted from the budget). Do you use this type of budget control in your enterprise? A: 4.1.3.7. Questions: Q: 1) Comment on activity type planning Activity Type Planning

Explanation: Note that when you plan activity types (define the allocation base per activity type for the cost center), you define important control parameters, such as price determination (manual or iterative), plan and actual allocation (direct activity allocation, target=actual allocation, and so on), and how actual fixed costs are handled (proportionally or using predistribution). The default values taken from the activity type can be overwritten in planning. A: 4.1.3.8. Questions: Q: 1) Comment on defining activity types by cost center Definition of Activity Type for Cost Center

Explanation: This process variant is only relevant if you perform actual costing. This controlling strategy also requires you to plan by activity types (define allocation bases/activity type in each cost center). You can specify <1> as the activity quantity. You need to plan the activity type in order for the cost center (and the subsequent activity price calculation) can recognize it. This entails defining some important control indicators, such as price determination (iterative) and actual allocation (direct or indirect activity allocation). The default values taken from the activity type can be overwritten in planning. A: 4.1.3.9. Questions: Q: 1) Are statistical key figures kept in the logistics modules, which you want to use as a basis for allocations and reporting purposes? 348 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc Transfer of Statistical Key Figures from LIS (Plan)

ValueSAP -

A: 4.1.3.10. Questions: Q: 1) If you are also implementing SAP R/3 Asset Management (FI-AA), do you wish to transfer the results of the Asset Management depreciation simulation calculation as part of your planning in Controlling (CO) for depreciation expenses? Explanation: Ensure that the corresponding assets are assigned to the appropriate cost centers. A: 4.1.3.11. Questions: Q: 1) If you are also implementing SAP R/3 Asset Management (FI-AA), do you wish to transfer the results of the Asset Management depreciation simulation calculation as part of your planning in Controlling (CO) for depreciation expenses? Explanation: Ensure that the corresponding assets are assigned to the appropriate cost centers. A: 4.1.3.12. Questions: Q: 1) If you are also implementing SAP R/3 Human Resources, do you want to transfer the results of personnel cost planning to Controlling (CO) as part of your planning for personnel expenses? A: 4.1.3.13. Questions: Q: 1) If you are implementing SAP R/3 manufacturing modules, do you want to transfer activity requirements from sales & operations planning (SOP), long-term planning, or MRP to Controlling (CO-ABC) as scheduled activities? Explanation: (and update the relevant business process with the corresponding scheduled activity) A: 4.1.3.14. Questions: Transfer of Scheduled Activity from PP to CO-OM-CCA Transfer of Scheduled Activity PP -> CO-ABC Transfer of Personnel Costs Transfer of Depreciation/Interest (Activity-Dependent) Transfer of Depreciation/Interest (Activity-Independent)

349 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP Q: 1) If you implementing the SAP R/3 production modules, do you want to transfer the activity requirements from sales and operations planning (SOP), long-term planning, or MRP to Controlling (CO-CCA) as the scheduled production activities? A: 4.1.3.15. Questions: Q: 1) Which procedure do you use for manual planning of primary costs, when you have costs that are not transferred from other modules, such as HR or FI-AA? Explanation: Examples are energy costs, maintenance costs, and so on. A: 4.1.3.16. Questions: Q: 1) Which procedure do you use for manual planning of primary costs, when you have costs that are not transferred from other modules, such as HR or FI-AA? Explanation: Examples are energy costs, maintenance costs, and so on. A: 4.1.3.17. Questions: Q: A: 4.1.3.18. Questions: Q: A: 4.1.3.19. Questions: Q: 1) Do you want to use integrated internal orders in cost center planning (such as repair orders, marketing orders) and settle them to cost centers after planning at the cost element level? A: 4.1.3.20. Questions: 350 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc Cost Element Planning (Order) Cost Element Planning (Order with Integrated Planning) 1) Do you want to represent activity relationships between cost centers in your planning? Secondary Cost Planning (Prop./Fixed) 1) Do you want to represent activity relationships between cost centers in your planning? Secondary Cost Planning (Full Costs) Primary Cost Planning (Prop./Fixed) Primary Cost Planning (Full Costs)

ValueSAP Q: A: 4.1.3.21. Questions: Q: 1) Do you want to plan overall costs (values only, independent of cost elements) on overhead cost orders? A: 4.1.3.22. Questions: Q: 1) Do you want to enter planning data in your planning for overhead cost orders, as well as the cost element information? Explanation: Example is the entry of planning data for the use of materials, and so on. A: 4.1.3.23. Questions: Q: 1) Do you periodically move costs from a project/cost center (such as telephone costs) to other projects/cost centers? A: Q: 2) Did you define the basis for these allocations (such as, percentage, statistical key figures, for example telephone units consumed, and so on)? A: 4.1.3.24. Questions: Q: 1) Describe how accruals are planned for actual data. Imputed Costs - Plan Periodic Reposting of Plan Data Unit Costing (Order) Overall Planning (Order) 1) Do you want to plan costs at the cost element level on overhead cost orders?

Explanation: Define the cost elements that should be accrued using the target=actual method (cost element category 04). Define the cost elements that you want to accrue with imputed tack-on costs (cost element category 03). For the latter, identify the basis (cost elements) to be used as the basis for accrual calculation. A: 4.1.3.25. Questions: Q: 1) State how you want to transfer the plan values from Cost Center Accounting to your business processes. 351 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc Process Cost Planning

ValueSAP -

A: 4.1.3.26. Questions: Q: 1) Do you plan to allocate a certain type of costs/expenses to cost centers automatically using overhead rates? A: 4.1.3.27. Questions: Q: 1) What costs is the cost estimate based on when you compute overhead for internal orders? A: Q: A: Q: A: 3) Will you perform automatic recovery of overheads on specific types of costs/expenses? [ ]Yes [ ]No 2) Specify the overhead rates. Overhead Calculation (Business Process) Overhead Calculation (Cost Center)

Q: 4) List the different groups of costs/expenses (for example, applying a fixed percentage rate for recovery of overhead to material issues). A: Q: 5) For each assignment type, do you distribute overhead as a fixed percentage or based on the actual total costs? A: Q: 6) Describe in detail how each of these assignments is performed today in your organization. A: Q: A: Q: A: 352 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc 8) Describe in detail how each of these allocations is performed today in your organization. 7) What postings do the assignments create?

ValueSAP -

Q: A:

9) Do you assign overhead expenses to projects?

Q: 10) For each allocation category, do you distribute overhead as a fixed percentage or based on the actual total costs? A: Q: 11) If you use fixed percentages for assignments, how do you handle remaining variances? A: Q: 12) For each of these assignments, what causes the overhead (for example, direct labor expense, labor hours, total WBS expense, others)? A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 15) Will you perform automatic recovery of overheads on specific types of costs/expenses? A: [ ]Yes [ ]No 16) Do you want to define a percentage for the overhead rate in the cost object? 14) Define overhead rates. 13) What postings do the assignments create?

Q: A:

Q: 17) Do you want to define automatic allocation using overhead rates for a certain type of costs/expenses on orders? A: Q: A: Q: A: 353 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc 19) Define overhead rates. 18) Do you want to add a percentage for overhead to the production cost collector?

ValueSAP -

Q: A:

20) Do you perform automatic overhead allocation for specific types of costs/expenses?

Q: 21) Do you want to define automatic allocation using overhead rates for a certain type of costs/expenses on orders? A: Q: 22) List the different groups of costs/expenses (for example, applying a fixed percentage rate for recovery of overhead to material issues). Explanation: Caution: When you calculate overhead for cost objects that are credited with the standard cost of goods manufactured times the quantity received in stock, this overhead should also be contained in the calculated standard cost of goods manufactured (according to the adjusted standard cost estimate). A: Q: 23) Do you plan to allocate a certain type of costs/expenses to cost centers automatically using overhead rates? A: Q: A: Q: 25) Are there any overhead expenses that are not calculated with reference to the production order but are to be assigned directly to the sales order? Explanation: Example: Overhead costs for sales and administration. A: Q: 26) How often do you calculate your planned overhead? 24) What costs are the overhead rates based on?

Explanation: The Schedule Manager is well suited to performing periodic allocations. The program selects project objects, permits error correction, and continues the process. A: Q: 27) Who is responsible for reconciling the run? (This person will be responsible for running/monitoring planned overhead.) A:

354 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP Q: 28) Do you calculate overhead for all objects at once or individually for each object. (Detailed calculation can affect system performance.) A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 32) Describe how you calculate overhead for (1) direct costs (2) indirect costs (3) fixed costs (4) variable costs). A: Q: 33) Do you include sales and marketing and general and administrative costs in your overhead calculation? A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 39) At what level of detail do you plan for overhead? 355 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc 38) Do you calculate overhead on materials/labor? 37) Do you have different overhead costs for each business unit? 36) Do you have project-type-specific overhead calculations? 35) Do you process actual overhead on a project by project basis or overall? 34) Do you reconcile planned and actual overhead? 31) Is the planned overhead the same as the actual overhead? 30) Is overhead calculated for your projects? 29) Do you have a specific plan version when you calculate overhead?

ValueSAP A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 43) Is the basis for overhead planned costs the same as the basis for actual overhead costs? A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 48) Who is responsible for overhead costs? (This person is responsible for running the overhead calculation.) A: Q: A: 4.1.3.28. Questions: Q: 1) Do you want to define automatic allocation using overhead rates for a certain type of costs/expenses on orders? 356 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc Overhead Calculation (Overhead Order) 49) Do you evaluate interest charges throughout the project hierarchy? 47) Does the basis for the overhead costs change during the lifecycle of the project? 46) To which accounts/cost elements are the overhead costs posted? 45) How often do you calculate overhead costs? 44) What is the formula/schema for applying overhead costs? 42) What is the basis for the overhead costs? 41) Is the calculation dependent on time periods? 40) Do you calculate percentage overhead?

ValueSAP -

A: Q: 2) List the different groups of costs/expenses (for example, applying a fixed percentage rate for recovery of overhead to material issues). Explanation: Caution: When you calculate overhead for cost objects that are credited with the standard cost of goods manufactured times the quantity received in stock, this overhead should also be contained in the calculated standard cost of goods manufactured (according to the adjusted standard cost estimate). A: Q: A: 4.1.3.29. Questions: Q: 1) Do you want to distribute costs from a cost center or a cost center group to CO objects (cost center, orders, WBS element), and keep the original cost element from thesender in the receiver object? A: Q: 2) Did you define the basis for these allocations (such as, percentage, statistical key figures, for example telephone units consumed, and so on)? A: 4.1.3.30. Questions: Q: 1) Do you collect costs/expenses on an internal order that you want represented on a cost center? Explanation: Example: The "Vehicles" department can plan an internal order for each truck to monitor the maintenance costs of each vehicle. The planned order costs are allocated to the appropriate cost center. This lets the cost center managers analyze their vehicle costs together with other costs, such as electricity, water, and so on. A: Q: 2) If so, do you want to be able to see the costs of the cost center (settlement under the original cost element)? A: Q: 3) Or do you want to summarize/aggregate the costs on the cost center (using one or more secondary settlement cost elements)? 357 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc Settlement of Overhead Cost Orders (Planning Data) Plan Cost Distribution 3) What costs are the overhead rates based on?

ValueSAP -

A: Q: A: Q: A: 4.1.3.31. Questions: Q: 1) Do you allocation costs from one cost center / group from cost centers to other CO objects (cost centers, orders, WBS elements) by summarizing the original cost elements from the sender cost center(s) into one secondary assessment cost element? A: Q: 2) Did you define the basis for these allocations (such as, percentage, statistical key figures, for example telephone units consumed, and so on)? A: 4.1.3.32. Questions: Q: 1) Do you need to reconcile the demand for scheduled labor hours (activity types) with the available capacity? A: 4.1.3.33. Questions: Q: 1) Do you have cases/situations where a cost element in cost center planning is related to more than one activity (activity type)? If so, see to it that the activity-independent planned costs are split to the activity types before you calculate the prices. A: Q: A: Q: 3) Comment on splitting 2) Define rules for the split. Splitting Plan Reconciliation Plan Cost Assessment 5) At which level of detail should the costs be transferred? 4) Do you want to transfer the order planning to profitability analysis?

Explanation: Normally, cost elements in Cost Center Accounting are not assigned to activity types for actual postings. Be sure to split the costs posted independent of activities to the individual activity types before you calculate the actual price. 358 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP -

A: Q: 4) Did you define the basis for these allocations (such as, percentage, statistical key figures, for example telephone units consumed, and so on)? A: 4.1.3.34. Questions: Q: 1) Do you want to calculate the planned price automatically or iteratively by dividing the planned costs for a cost center/activity type by the planned activity quantities (or capacities)? Explanation: Internal activities are allocated using a secondary cost element. If you want to keep detailed information about the origin of costs such as electricity, depreciation, or maintenance per activity type, you can use a primary cost component split. A: Q: 2) Do you want to calculate planned prices automatically/iteratively for Activity-Based Costing by dividing the costs planned for the business process by the planned process quantity? Explanation: Process costs are allocated using a secondary cost element. If you want to keep detailed information on the origin of the costs, you can use a primary cost component split. A: Q: 3) Do you want to display partial cost rates (primary cost split) for the planned prices that were calculated automatically/iteratively? A: Planned Price Calculation

4.1.4.
Questions:

Product Cost Planning

Q: 1) What types of costing do you want to use (adjusted standard, monthly, inventory, and so on)? A: 4.1.4.1. Questions: Q: 1) Did you check if all the source data from other modules is available for calculating the production costs? Explanation: Example Bills of material, routings, and work centers from PP (Production Planning) or raw material prices and purchasing information records from MM (Materials Management). 359 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc Preparation for Costing

ValueSAP -

A: Q: 2) Which valuation approach are you going to use for externally procured materials, internal activities, external operations, or subcontracting (quotation or purchase order prices, including delivery costs and cash discounts)? Explanation: Externally procured materials -> for example, moving average price, raw materials costing and so on. Internal activities -> periodic price, average price. A: Q: 3) How do you want to allocate overhead in costing: using overhead rates or activity-based costing, or both? Explanation: There are overheads in the production costs (allocation in actual data also), which debit more than one cost center or order. This means that you need to define allocation cost centers, or orders in Overhead Cost Controlling. A: 4.1.4.2. Questions: Q: 1) Do you plan your product costs using bills of material (BOM), routings, or dependencies? If not, how do you plan? A: [ ]Yes [ ]No Standard Cost Estimate with Quantity Structure

Q: 2) Do you want the single components (gross price, delivery costs and so on) of the acquisition costs of the externally procured materials in the calculation cost splitting to be displayed separately? A: Q: 3) Do you subcontract any of your manufacturing activities?

Explanation: Do you also provide bills of material for this purpose? Should overhead also be applied to these? A: Q: 4) Do your cost estimates contain costs that cannot be captured through BOMs, routings, overhead rates, or process cost allocation? A: Q: 5) Do you plan products that use materials belonging to another plant? If so, do these plants belong to the same company code? 360 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP A: Q: 6) Do you want to analyze the cost of goods manufactured, split by organizational units involved in the value added process (plant, profit center, company code)? Explanation: Example: Cost of goods manufactured are displayed separately by plant. A: Q: 7) Have different currencies been assigned to the organizational units involved in the costing? A: Q: 8) Do you want to break down your cost of goods manufactured into primary costs? If so, are you doing this for production, or simply to display the cost of sales in the profitability analysis? Explanation: An example is breaking down production costs into cost-accounting depreciation, wages, and energy, and so on. A: Q: 9) If you are using mixed costing, what proportions of the individual procurement alternatives/manufacturing processes should be used as a basis for costing? A: 4.1.4.3. Questions: Q: 1) Do you plan your product costs using bills of material (BOM), routings, or dependencies? If not, how do you plan? A: [ ]Yes [ ]No Standard Cost Estimate Without Quantity Structure

Q: 2) Since you are calculating your product costs without access to SAP quantity structure data, where are you getting the quantity information required for costing? Explanation: Example: External PPS System A: Q: 3) Do you subcontract any of your manufacturing activities?

Explanation: Do you also provide bills of material for this purpose? Should overhead also be applied to these? 361 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP A: Q: 4) Do you plan products that use materials belonging to another plant? If so, do these plants belong to the same company code? A: Q: 5) Do you want to analyze the cost of goods manufactured, split by organizational units involved in the value added process (plant, profit center, company code)? Explanation: Example: Cost of goods manufactured are displayed separately by plant. A: Q: 6) Have different currencies been assigned to the organizational units involved in the costing? A: Q: 7) Do you want to break down your cost of goods manufactured into primary costs? If so, are you doing this for production, or simply to display the cost of sales in the profitability analysis? Explanation: An example is breaking down production costs into cost-accounting depreciation, wages, and energy, and so on. A: 4.1.4.4. Questions: Q: A: Q: A: 4.1.4.5. Questions: Q: 1) Define your reporting requirements for product costing, and reconcile them with the standard SAP reports. Do you need customer-specific costing reports? A: 4.1.4.6. Questions: Price Release with Standard Cost Estimate Costing Analysis 2) Which rules are used to distribute the costs of goods manufactured to the co-products? 1) Do you have production processes that ever yield multiple products? Standard Cost Estimate for Co-Products

362 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP Q: 1) Do you want to update your product costs (determined using standard costing) as standard prices in MM? Explanation: This leads to revaluation of the material stock to the new standard price, if the material is valuated with the standard price. A: Q: 2) Do you want to update your product costs (determined using other costings), such as inventory costing, as plan prices, or valuation prices based on tax law, and so on in MM (without stock revaluation)? A: 4.1.4.7. Questions: Q: 1) Do you want to cost material for which there is no material master in Materials Management (prototypes, research and development)? A: Q: 2) Do you require templates for the planned costs of sales orders, such as for selling services? A: Reference and Simulation Costing

4.1.5.
Questions: Q: A: 4.1.5.1. Questions:

Profit Center Planning

1) Describe your planning processor. How do you plan the Profit Center?

Copy Plan from Previous Year -> Profit Center Planning

Q: 1) Do you want to base your Profit Center Planning on the previous year's plan values? If yes, what is the source of this data and in what form is it available? Explanation: The plan data of the previous year can be copied into the current year and be simultaneously revaluated via a percentage rate. A: 4.1.5.2. Questions: Q: 1) Do you want to base your Profit Center Planning on the previous year's actual values? If yes, what is the source of this data and in what form is it available? 363 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc Copy Actual Costs -> Profit Center Planning

ValueSAP Explanation: The actual data of the previous year can be copied into the current year and be simultaneously revaluated via a percentage rate. A: 4.1.5.3. Questions: Q: 1) Are you planning in MS-Excel and planning to transfer this data to SAP Profit Center Accounting? A: 4.1.5.4. Questions: Q: A: 4.1.5.5. Questions: Q: 1) Do you want to transfer plan data to PCA from other applications? From which application(s)? Explanation: The plan version from which data is transferred in the Profit Center Accounting, must also be defined in Profit Center Accounting. A: 4.1.5.6. Questions: Q: A: Q: 2) Do you intend to use formula planning within the context of manual Profit Center Planning? la Planning How many of your quotations become orders If few become orders consider not using the A: 4.1.5.7. Questions: Q: 1) Do you carry out distributions from one profit center to another profit center within the same controlling area? Explanation: Allocation means that you want to copy the original cost element(s) from the sender PCTR to the receiver PCTR. 364 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc Profit Center Distribution: Plan 1) Describe your process for manual profit center planning. Manual Profit Center Planning Profit Center Planning Integration 1) Do you want to represent different planning scenarios in parallel? Redefinition of Plan Version (Profit Center Planning) Excel Upload -> Profit Center Planning

ValueSAP A: 4.1.5.8. Questions: Q: 1) Do you assess values from one profit center to another within the same controlling area? code? Explanation: Assessment means that you want to allocate the original cost elements using one or more assessment cost elements (secondary cost elements) instead of retaining the original cost element. A: 4.1.5.9. Questions: Q: 1) Define your report requirements within the context of Profit Center Planning and compare this with the SAP standard reports. Do you require customer-specific Profit Center Reports? A: Profit Center Analysis Profit Center Assessment: Plan

4.1.6.
4.1.6.1. Questions:

Profit Planning
Valuation of Sales Planning

Q: 1) Which planning levels (characteristics), maturities, and versions do you want to use in planning? A: Q: A: 4.1.6.2. Questions: Q: 1) Do you want to structure your sales and profit planning based on reference data? If so, what is the source of this data, and in what form is it? Explanation: Possible sources: - Actual data - Other plan data - Data from LIS A: Q: 2) Do you want to valuate your sales planning with revenues, sales deductions, and costs (on an average basis as well)? A: 365 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc Creation of Proposal for Profit Planning 2) Which maturity do you plan in (monthly, quarterly, or yearly)?

ValueSAP Q: 3) How do you want to adapt the reference dates to be used as a planning proposal?

Explanation: Possible methods: - Revaluate, change period distribution - Rate planning, Valuation, and so on. A: Q: 4) If your reference data is located at a higher level than the most detailed planning level, how do you want the data to be resolved onto the levels below it? A: Q: A: 4.1.6.3. Questions: Q: 1) Do you modify the automatically generated planning data manually and/or add new planning data? A: Q: 2) Do you want to plan your manual planning data with Excel? Manual Profit Planning 5) Do you use forecasting techniques in your planning process? If so, describe them.

Explanation: This is an Excel file linked to the R/3 System. A: 4.1.6.4. Questions: Q: 1) Do you want to transfer the plan process costs to profitability analysis? ales, and development costs)? A: Q: 2) Which level do you want to assign these costs (using the step-by-step principles of analysis of fixed-cost allocation)? (for example, company code, country, enterprise area, sales organization) A: Q: 3) Which allocation methods do you require for transferring the planned process costs to profitability analysis? Explanation: Options: - Assessment - Indirect activity allocation - Allocation using process template 366 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc Planned Allocation of Process Costs to Profitability Analysis

ValueSAP A: 4.1.6.5. Questions: Q: 1) Do you want to transfer the planned cost center costs to profitability analysis? Planned Allocation Cost Center Costs to Profitability Analysis

Explanation: Note: Allocate the plan costs from the production cost centers using costing (planned cost of goods manufactured) to the cost-of-sales in profitability analysis. A: Q: 2) Which level do you want to assign these costs (using the step-by-step principles of analysis of fixed-cost allocation)? (for example, company code, country, enterprise area, sales organization) A: Q: 3) Which allocation methods are to be used for transferring the posted cost center costs to profitability analysis? Explanation: Options: - Assessment - Indirect activity allocation - Indirect activity allocation A: 4.1.6.6. Questions: Q: 1) Do you collect costs/expenses on an internal order that you want represented on a cost center? Explanation: Example: The "Vehicles" department can plan an internal order for each truck to monitor the maintenance costs of each vehicle. The planned order costs are allocated to the appropriate cost center. This lets the cost center managers analyze their vehicle costs together with other costs, such as electricity, water, and so on. A: Q: 2) If so, do you want to be able to see the costs of the cost center (settlement under the original cost element)? A: Q: 3) Or do you want to summarize/aggregate the costs on the cost center (using one or more secondary settlement cost elements)? A: Q: 4) Do you want to transfer the order planning to profitability analysis? 367 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc Settlement of Overhead Cost Orders (Planning Data)

ValueSAP A: Q: A: 4.1.6.7. Questions: Q: 1) Do you want to settle costs and/or revenues from projects (such as customer projects) directly to profitability analysis? A: Q: 2) In what degree of detail (WBS or higher levels) do you want to adopt the project structures? A: Q: A: 4.1.6.8. Questions: Q: 1) Determine the structure of the contribution margin scheme you want to report on in COPA. A: Q: A: Q: 3) Which characteristic groups do you need for navigating in a report? 2) What are the calculated ratios? Analysis of Results And Contribution Margins 3) At which level of detail should the costs be transferred? Project Settlement 5) At which level of detail should the costs be transferred?

Explanation: You should define summarization levels for this groups if data volumes are large. A: 4.1.6.9. Questions: Q: 1) Do you want to transfer any planning values to EC-PCA planning? Plan Data Transfer to EC-PCA

Explanation: If this is the case, then you need to maintain the profit center as the plan criterium. A: 368 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP -

4.2.

Strategic Business Planning

Questions: Q: 1) What is the system landscape like: which SAP systems and non-SAP systems are in use? A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 6) Which SAP system components and non-SAP system components are used for which business purposes? A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 9) Is it possible to subdivide the scope in more than one evaluation area (with reference to their business context)? If yes, make a list of these evaluation areas. A: Q: A: 10) Is it possible to prioritize these individual evaluation areas? 8) What level of detail do you want to display with Business Planning 7) At what stage is the reporting system for Business Planning? 5) Is there a multi-client concept? 4) Do you work with distributed systems? If yes, which ones are they? 3) For R/3 systems: Which Releases are used? 2) Describe your hardware structure.

369 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP Q: A: Q: 12) How large is the expected data volume to be (per evaluation area)? 11) What are the target groups for the evaluation areas to be mapped in the system?

Explanation: Should a satellite system be taken into consideration? Should a satellite system be taken into consideration? A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 18) What level of knowledge do the available employees have? 17) How many employees are available during the project? 16) How much consultation is required? At which stage? 15) What schedule are you working towards for completion of the sub-project(s)? 14) Which subprojects are planned? 13) Is it possible to use an interface tool - such as inSight?

Explanation: In-house training courses for project members or training courses at SAP training centers? SAP training centers? A: Q: 19) How intensely could the available employees work on the project/subprojects?

Explanation: TIP: It is advantageous to have employees with a technical background (database) in combination with employees from the corresponding specialist area. specialist area. A:

4.2.1.
Questions:

Data Modeling
370

Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP -

Q:

1) Analysis: What information is required in the previously identified evaluation areas?

Explanation: See question: Can the range be divided into a number of evaluation areas (according to their business context)? If yes, list them, A: Q: 2) Which data sources (systems from the system landscape) function as plan data providers for the evaluation areas? A: Q: 3) Which characteristics (evaluation criteria) and basic key figures can be added to a data model for each evaluation area? Explanation: Note that the data record has a maximum length. This length depends on the DBMS used. the DBMS used. the DBMS used. A: Q: A: Q: 5) Which basic key figures are filled in with reference to which characteristics from which plan data sources? A: Q: 6) Which characteristic values should be allowed for the identified characteristics (master data)? A: 4) What relationship exists between the basic key figures and the characteristics?

4.2.2.
4.2.2.1. Questions:

Basic Settings
Foreign Currencies

Q: 1) Do you intend to display several currencies in reporting and translate amounts into different target currencies? A: 4.2.2.2. Questions: Q: 1) If files are one of the sources of data transfers, these can be defined here with logical file names. A: 371 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc File Names

ValueSAP -

4.2.3.
4.2.3.1. Questions:

Data Basis
Characteristics

Q: 1) Which characteristics (evaluation criteria) and basic key figures can be added to a data model for each evaluation area? Explanation: Note that the data record has a maximum length. This length depends on the DBMS used. the DBMS used. the DBMS used. A: Q: 2) Name all characteristics from the data model which you would like to report on in the individual business evaluation areas. Explanation: An evaluation area is represented by an aspect, where characteristics have the function of key fields. have the function of key fields. A: Q: 3) Which characteristics do you want to use attributes for? Which characteristics should already be understood as attributes for other characteristics? A: Q: 4) For those objects that are dependent on each other. List them in a hierarchical structure. A: Q: 5) Which attributes do you want to use to navigate to the reports? Which attributes are specified for display only? A: Q: A: Q: 7) Can you/do you want to form groups of characteristic values? If yes, make a list of them. Explanation: Groups and characteristics values which have been organized in this way can be stored as master data hierarchies, provided that the corresponding characteristic has a check table. A: 372 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc 6) Should currency/unit fields be used as display attributes?

ValueSAP Q: A: 4.2.3.2. Questions: Q: 1) List all basic key figures from the data model which you have identified in the individual business evaluation areas for calculation of your plan figures. A: Q: 2) Can these basic key figures be transferred directly from the operational system and data sources, or is it necessary to calculate them? Explanation: These calculations can either be performed while the data is being transferred or by using derived/calculated key figures. A: 4.2.3.3. Questions: Q: 1) Which of the characteristics, which were identified under "characteristics" for each valuation area, are highly selective? Explanation: Characteristics which are frequently selected in Reporting should be positioned as high as possible when the aspect is created. This will help to improve performance. help to improve performance. A: Q: 2) List the characteristics of an evaluation area in the order in which they were calculated and transfer them to the aspect in this order. Transfer the basic key figures for the evaluation area to the same aspect. A: 4.2.3.4. Questions: Q: 1) List all the key figures to be calculated from basic key figures, as well as their calculation formula. (If possible, list them hierarchically). A: Q: 2) Specify the aggregation with regard to structurally oriented characteristics and timebased characteristics (where appropriate with reference field, the number of decimal places and the scaling of the key figures) A: 373 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc Calculated Key Figures Aspect Basic Key Figures 8) List the characteristics for which no master data exists.

ValueSAP -

Q: A:

3) Do you want to group your key figures? If yes, how?

4.2.3.5. Questions: Q: A:

Comment Tables

1) Do you want to run comments for plan data?

Q: 2) Which combinations of characteristics should the comments be created with (also cross-aspect)? A: 4.2.3.6. Questions: Q: A: Q: A: 4.2.3.7. Questions: Q: 1) Is it likely that in some reports, aggregated sections of the aspect dataset may have to be accessed? Explanation: It makes sense to create a summarization level if detailed characteristics cannot be accessed. A: [ ]Yes [ ]No 4.2.3.8. Layouts Questions: Q: 1) Should/must currency translations be carried out for data acquisition and data conversion using aspect summarization/in the planning layout? A: Q: 2) When you carry out currency translations, how are these specified? Currency Translation Types for Data Transfer and Planning Summarization Levels 2) How many data versions (for different plan variants) are required for each aspect? 1) Which fiscal year variant(s) is/are valid for your aspects? Fixed Characteristics

374 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP Explanation: - Source currency/target currency (fixed/variable -> referenced inspection characteristic) - Exchange rate type - Time of currency translation A: 4.2.3.9. Questions: Q: 1) Does a set of rules exist to describe a constant valid relation between characteristics? Derivation

Explanation: That is, can the values for a characteristic necessarily be used to deduce the values of a different characteristic? deduce the values of a different characteristic? A: 4.2.3.10. Questions: Q: A: 4.2.3.11. Questions: Q: 1) Should plan data which is to be transferred to an aspect - or which has already been posted - be made inaccessible for certain users? A: Data Slices 1) Should plan data to be transferred to an aspect be subjected to a plausibility check? Validation

4.2.4.
Questions:

Data Transfer

Q: 1) From which source systems and/or SAP R/3 applications do you want to transfer plan data to the aspects? Explanation: Such as transaction data, master data, master data hierarchies, master data commentaries. - from R/3: CO-PA, FI-GL and so on / ABAP query - from R/2 - using EXCEL upload - using file upload* A: 4.2.4.1. Questions: Q: A: Q: 2) For data transfers from external systems (R/2, R/3 systems): Are the technical network connections set up at the hardware and operating system level? 375 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc 1) Which transfer methods should be used for the data transfer? External Systems

ValueSAP A: 4.2.4.2. Questions: Q: 1) Are EC-EIS-Standard data-collection programs (from R/3 or R/2) applicable? Transaction Data

Explanation: Where standard data-collection programs can be used, sender structures and data transfer programs will partly be generated automatically and data transfer programs will partly be generated automatically A: Q: 2) Specify the data exactly which should be transferred, with regard to the named examples under the documentation. Explanation: Make specifications with regard to the following: - Origin (transfer method) - (Data record) structure (sender structure) - Transfer logic (transfer rules) - Conversion of characteristics, - Aggregation, - Formulas for calculating key figures - Formulas for calculating key figures A: 4.2.4.3. Questions: Q: 1) Specify the master data which should be transferred. Master Data

Explanation: Make specifications with regard to: - Origin (system/table) - Characteristic name (data element/domain) in the sender - Characteristic name in the receiver A: 4.2.4.4. Questions: Q: 1) Specify the comments which should be transferred. Comments

Explanation: Make specifications with regard to: - Origin - Target object (reports, fixed characteristics, characteristics, basic key figures, key figures, master data, report portfolio reports) A: 4.2.4.5. Questions: Q: 1) Have you filed master data hierarchies for specific characteristics in the form of files, the contents of which you want to transfer for these characteristics? Master Data Hierarchy

376 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP Explanation: Specify the characteristics, for which you want to transfer hierarchies as well as the hierarchies themselves and their sources. A: 4.2.4.6. Questions: Q: 1) In which order should the data transfer runs (for master data, master data hierarchies, planning data, comments) be started? Explanation: If you use background jobs, it is possible to define the order of data transfer programs and to automate the entire data transfer process. A: 4.2.4.7. Questions: Q: A: 4.2.4.8. Questions: Q: 1) Indicate whether or not you want to update report portfolio reports in the background. If so, indicate when you want to do this, and whether exceptions defined in the reports should be checked. A: Control Report Portfolio 1) Specify the files that you want to import to EC-EIS by structure and transfer logic. File Transfer Procedure

4.2.5.
Questions: Q: A: 4.2.5.1. Questions:

Business Planning

1) Do you want to plan the aspect manually or automatically?

Create Planning Layout

Q: 1) Specify which characteristics and key figures you want to have displayed in an entry form and which key figures you want to plan in the same layout. A: 4.2.5.2. Questions: Q: A: 377 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc 1) Can you distinguish special groups of planners and if yes, which ones are they? Maintain Planner Profiles

ValueSAP -

4.2.5.3. Questions:

Create Distribution Key

Q: 1) Do you have certain keys, according to which plan data within your company is distributed according to periods? Explanation: Such as seasonal distribution: 50 % of plan data assigned to business during the Christmas period. A: 4.2.5.4. Questions: Q: 1) Are there certain aspect basic key figures for which percentage changes must automatically be considered in planning runs? A: 4.2.5.5. Questions: Q: 1) Is there a combination of factors (in the form of a planning strategy) in your enterprise which must automatically be considered in certain planning runs? A: 4.2.5.6. Questions: Q: 1) When using the forecast to determine future values, do you want to weight previous periods with certain factors? A: 4.2.5.7. Questions: Q: 1) In planning sessions, do you want to use certain revaluation factors, distribution keys or forecast profiles dependent on specific characteristic combinations? A: 4.2.5.8. Questions: Q: 1) When generating plan data, are there basic key figures whose plan values result from formulas using other basic key figures and constants? A: Maintain Calculation Formulas for Basic Key Figures Object-Dependent Parameters Maintain Weighting Group Maintain Forecast Profiles Change Revaluation Factor

378 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP 4.2.6.
4.2.6.1. Questions: Q: 1) Should a report tree be created in EC-EIS? If so, which reports (EC-EIS, other applications, transactions, ABAPs) should be included in the tree? Explanation: Specify the structure of the report tree. A: 4.2.6.2. Questions: Q: A: 1) Do you want to use MS-Winword to print your reports (from the report portfolio)? Print in MS Word for Windows

Information System
Maintain Report Selection

4.2.7.
4.2.7.1. Questions: Q: A: 4.2.7.2. Questions:

Tools
Conversion to Release 4.0

1) Do you have to convert your system from a Release < 4.0 to a Release 4.x?

Authorization Management

Q: 1) For which aspect objects do you wish to allocate authorizations (aspects, characteristic values, key figures)? A: Q: 2) For which reports/forms/layouts/programs etc. in Business Planning do you wish to allocate authorizations? A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 5) Which activities with reference to which objects should the authorizations (Profiles) of the user groups enable? 379 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc 4) Is it possible to classify different user groups in Business Planning, and if so, which? 3) Which employees work with the business planning a) as a user b) as an administrator?

ValueSAP A: 4.2.7.3. Questions: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 3) Is there possibly an inconsistency between the ABAP Dictionary and the Field Catalog? 2) Are objects of the aspect environment to be generated subsequently if necessary? 1) Which aspects should be visible in which clients? Data Basis

Explanation: In this case the field catalog should be reorganised. A: Q: 4) Are all modules and routines for handling master data functional?

Explanation: If not, this program can not be regenerated here. A: 4.2.7.4. Questions: Q: 1) Should data be transferable from aspect to aspect (with summarization where required)? A: 4.2.7.5. Questions: Q: A: 4.2.7.6. Questions: Q: A: 1) In EC-EIS do you want to transport used objects in a target system? Transport 1) Do comments or documents need to be reorganized? Data Data Transfer

4.2.8.
4.2.8.1. Questions:

Task Functions on Information System

Reports 380

Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP -

Q:

1) Which key figures should be analyzed by which characteristics.

Explanation: Specify the reports to be prepared on the data basis of the aspects. A: 4.2.8.2. Questions: Q: 1) Are complex layouts required (descriptions of content and form of reports, possibly using formula columns/rows/cells)? Explanation: Specify these layouts using forms. A: 4.2.8.3. Questions: Q: 1) Specify the global variables for characteristic values, hierarchies, hierarchy nodes, formulas and texts which you want to use in various forms and reports. A: 4.2.8.4. Questions: Q: 1) Do you want to work with saved (frozen) report data (for performance reasons)? Report Data Variables Forms

Explanation: The definition and use of variant groups enables automatic updating of the report data of the respective reports in the background. A: 4.2.8.5. Questions: Q: 1) Do you want to use user group specific report portfolios as the interface for end users? Report Portfolio

Explanation: Users from a user group can then execute the reports from the report portfolio. portfolio. A: Q: 2) Outline a hierarchical structure for this portfolio by specifying report classes where the reports can be stored. Explanation: Do you want to export the reports into the planned classes? 381 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP A:

4.2.9.
4.2.9.1. Questions: Q: A: Q: A: 4.2.9.2. Questions: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A:

Task Functions on Tools

Data (Tools)

1) Do you want to reduce the amount of data in your aspects by archiving?

2) Do you want to delete data which has been transferred to the wrong aspect(s)?

Information System

1) Are forms, reports, saved report data or variant groups to be deleted?

2) Do you use your reporting multilingually?

3) Is your master data also maintained in several languages?

4.3.

Consolidation

Questions: Q: A: Q: 2) How is your group accounting organized? 1) Which tools were consolidated with up to now?

Explanation: central vs. decentral organisation? Possibilities of influence of the head office on the subsidiary Possibilities of influence of the head office on the subsidiary A: Q: 3) Which languages must supported on the part of the system?

Explanation: Should be checked in particular for: - items/reassignments - consolidation units and groups, - entry layouts - messages (for example with validations) - reports - reports A: 382 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP -

Q:

4) Which consolidation types do you want to set?

Explanation: On the basis of which organizational units should consolidation be carried out? A: Q: 5) How many consolidated financial statements do you want to create during a year?

Explanation: Set the required consolidation frequencies (monthly, quarterly, half-yearly, annually) and assign these to the consolidation groups. A: Q: 6) Do you intend to consolidate different data categories? If yes, which ones?

Explanation: IST, PLAN or other versions IST, PLAN or other versions A: Q: 7) How many consolidation units and consolidation groups are included?

Explanation: - Number of CUs - Number of CGs - Number of CGs A: Q: 8) How often do these hierarchies of consolidation groups change within your reporting timeframe? A: Q: A: Q: 10) Should income statements be created using cost-of-sales accounting or period accounting? Explanation: ATTENTION: then further settings in FI or in CO are necessary! ATTENTION: then further settings in FI or in CO are necessary! A: Q: A: 11) Have you implemented SAP legacy systems - if yes, which ones, and where? 9) Which accounting principles do you adhere to when creating consolidated statements?

383 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP Q: 12) In which form and at which dates do you collect the reported financial data from the individual companies? A: Q: A: Q: 14) Does the reported financial data have to be standardized for group-wide valuation rules? A: [ ]Yes [ ]No 15) Do you have foreign companies? [ ]Yes [ ]No 16) What is the extent of the consistency checks of your data at this time? 13) Are there differences with regard to the scope of reported data?

Q: A:

Q: A:

Q: 17) Do you have to create financial statements for subgroups in different reporting currencies? A: Q: 18) Are there subsidiaries/subgroups in high inflation countries, which have to report in hard currency? Explanation: For example in Brazil, Turkey etc. For example in Brazil, Turkey etc. A: Q: A: Q: 20) Which accounting techniques do you use? 19) Which consolidation functions do you use?

Explanation: Purchase method, proportional consolidation, equity method A: Q: A: 384 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc 21) How is your corporate reporting presently designed?

ValueSAP -

Q:

22) Which tools do you use at the moment to create your reports?

Explanation: Excel, Access. Insight, Hyperion, Oracle A: Q: A: Q: 24) How is your current organizational flow for creating consolidated statements? 23) How is your authorization concept currently designed?

Explanation: Areas of responsibility, paths, Responsibilities etc.: WHO does WHAT, WHEN, HOW LONG FOR??? WHO does WHAT, WHEN, HOW LONG FOR??? A: Q: 25) How many employees are involved in the creation of the consolidated financial statements? Explanation: Number of employees: indirect: direct: direct: A: Q: 26) How should the organization of training measures take place?

Explanation: central/decentral, train the trainer A: Q: 27) Which demands are you making on the documentation and what are its aims?

Explanation: - Project documentation (Customizing) - Process documentation (System description) - User documentation - Training manual - Training manual A: Q: 28) What kind of an implementation strategy do you want to implement?

Explanation: - Big Bang (consolidated group on the key date) - step by step (beginning with one or more consolidation groups until up to the consolidated group) - "soft migration" (old system in the background) - "soft migration" (old system in the background) A: Q: 29) Possible test scenarios? 385 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP -

Explanation: Funktionstest - parallele Abschluerstellung - Prototyping (verwerfbar, verwendbar) Performance-Tests Integrationstests Testzeitpunkte Testzeitpunkte A: Q: 30) What does your technical infra-structure / system availability look like?

Explanation: Is ther a development system, quality assurance system? Production system? Organisation of the transport system? A: Q: 31) Which resources can be available in terms of time frame and quantity?

Explanation: Resource availability particularly with regard to: - Personnel - Tools and machinery - Space A:

4.3.1.
4.3.1.1. Questions: Q:

Preparatory Work: General

Creating Dimensions

1) Which consolidation types do you want to set?

Explanation: On the basis of which organizational units should consolidation be carried out? A: 4.3.1.2. Questions: Q: 1) Do you intend to consolidate different data categories? If yes, which ones? Creating Versions

Explanation: IST, PLAN or other versions IST, PLAN or other versions A: 4.3.1.3. Questions: Q: A: 4.3.1.4. Questions: Q: 1) In which currencies do you want to the reports generated.? 386 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc Definition of Ledgers 1) Do you receive reported data in currencies, which are not delivered in the standard? Check Currencies

ValueSAP -

Explanation: If you want to report in different currencies, you need one ledger per report currency. report currency. A: 4.3.1.5. Questions: Q: 1) Determine the smallest units of your corporate structure which are to be used as the basis for a complete consolidation run. Explanation: For example a consolidation unit can be: - a company - a combination of a company and a consolidation business area - a combination of a company and a Profit Center customer-specific organizational unit - customer-specific organizational unit A: Q: 2) In case the consolidation units are transferred from a file by flexible upload, see the documentation. Explanation: Instead of manually maintaining consolidation units, you can also transfer this information from a data file. To do this, you need to define an upload method, which shows the data format of the file. A: Q: 3) Define suitable, logical file names. Definition of Consolidation Units

Explanation: If the financial data is delivered in the form of a data file, you can define a logical file name in the master record of the consolidation unit. This logical file name points to a physical file name that is dependent on the operating system used. A: Q: 4) Do you require additional attributes for your consolidation units?

Explanation: Along with numerous predefined characteristics, which are delivered in the standard, it is possible to create custom attributes: For example: industry sector, number of shares A: Q: 5) In which form and at which dates do you collect the reported financial data from the individual companies? A: 4.3.1.6. Definition of Consolidation Groups 387 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP Questions: Q: A: Q: 2) Create suitable hierarchies. 1) Define the consolidation group according to your requirements.

Explanation: When creating the hierarchies, note which evaluations you will require later on. later on. In a view, it is possible to maintain parallel alternative hierarchies for valuations required for different reasons. For example, hierachies can represent legal requirements and/or regional aspects. A: Q: 3) How many consolidated financial statements do you want to create during a year?

Explanation: Set the required consolidation frequencies (monthly, quarterly, half-yearly, annually) and assign these to the consolidation groups. A: Q: 4) Comments to integrated consolidation types

Explanation: When you work in an integrated system, please note the executions under the unit integration. A: Q: 5) Comments for the transfer of consolidation groups by flexible upload from file

Explanation: Instead of manually defining the consolidation groups and/or the hierarchies thereof, this information can also be collected from a data file. To do this, you define an upload method, which shows the format of the file. A: 4.3.1.7. Hierarchy Questions: Q: 1) Which requirements do you have for the creation and/or structure of your cons chart of accounts (US GAAP, IAS, HGB)? Explanation: Several FS items can be used within one dimension. Therefore financial statements can be created parallel according to different requirements. A: Definition of Cons Chart of Accounts / Cons Chart of Accounts

388 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP Q: A: Q: 3) Should income statements be created using cost-of-sales accounting or period accounting? Explanation: ATTENTION: then further settings in FI or in CO are necessary! ATTENTION: then further settings in FI or in CO are necessary! A: Q: 4) Do you summarize your operational accounts to group accounts (financial statement items)? A: Q: 5) If yes, do you summarize at the subsidiary level or at the corporate group level? 2) Should retained earnings be disclosed in the balance sheet or in the income statement?

Explanation: How is the data reported - on account level or item level? How is the data reported - on account level or item level? A: Q: 6) Do you require further freely definable classifications for your FS items?

Explanation: The illustration of such classifications takes place via the field "item category". Characteristic values would be for example "balance sheet item", "cash flow" or "key figure". sheet item", "cash flow" or "key figure". A: Q: 7) Do you use an integration scenario? If so, you can transfer the FS items from a G/L chart of accounts or a financial statement version. Explanation: When you work in an integrated system, please note the executions under the unit integration. the unit integration. A: Q: 8) Define your selected items for posting financial statement imbalances and for posting deferred taxes, for both retained earnings carried forward as well as the balancing adjustment. Explanation: ANI Balance sheet ANI Income statement Deferred income task balance sheet Deferred income task income statement FS balancing adjustment item Unappropriated retained earnings Unappropriated retained earnings Unappropriated retained earnings A: 4.3.1.8. Questions: 389 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc Definition of Breakdown Categories

ValueSAP -

Q: 1) How many breakdown categories can be derived from your reporting system? Which different details would you like to see within a consolidation chart of accounts? Explanation: The requested detail of FS items is controlled via the breakdown category. The details are delivered in standard by: - Partner - Transaction currency - Year of acquisition Subitem - if necessary up to 5 further custom characteristics - if necessary up to 5 further custom characteristics A: Q: 2) Do you want to differentiate elimination differences between currency-related and other differences? Explanation: The split differences requires the detail of a FS item by transaction currency. currency. A: [ ]Yes [ ]No 4.3.1.9. Questions: Q: 1) Do you need further custom characteristics, in addition to the standard subassignments? Explanation: Note: - cross-client setting - as the data base is to be extended, these settings should occur at beginning of the project (empty data base required) - subsequent changes are extremely problematic A: [ ]Yes [ ]No 2) If yes how many and which characteristics? Definition of Custom Characteristics

Q:

Explanation: Number of characteristics: Which characteristic values: A: 4.3.1.10. Questions: Q: 1) Which standard subassignments would you like to use? What requirements do you have for group reporting later on, for example, asset history sheets, equity aging reports, segment reports, etc. ? Explanation: For example to choose from: - Asset transaction type - Functional area - Region Year of acquisition - Period - Equity transaction type - Equity transaction type A: 390 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc Definition of Subitem Categories

ValueSAP 4.3.1.11. Questions: Q: 1) How do you want to define the subitems? Definition of Subitems

Explanation: Do you want to use the standard? For example: - Subitem category asset transaction type numerical characteristic value 100 - 999 Or do you want to use your own characteristic values? Or do you want to use your own characteristic values? A: Q: A: 2) Which default values do you want to define for the characteristic value of subitems?

4.3.2.
Questions: Q: A:

Preparatory Work: Integration

1) Have you implemented SAP legacy systems - if yes, which ones, and where?

4.3.3.
4.3.3.1. Questions: Q: A: 4.3.3.2. Questions: Q: A:

Preparatory Work: Production

Administration of Authorizations

1) How is your authorization concept currently designed?

Setting up Translation

1) Do you have foreign employees, who do not log onto the R/3-System in German? [ ]Yes [ ]No 2) Have you translated your reports into the required languages? [ ]Yes [ ]No

Q: A:

Q: 3) Have you checked which language versions you need for: - FS items/subassignments consolidation units and groups - data entry layouts - messages (e.g. for validations) - reports A: [ ]Yes [ ]No

4.3.4.
Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

Processes of the Data Monitor

391

ValueSAP Questions: Q: A: 4.3.4.1. Questions: Q: 1) In which form and at which dates do you collect the reported financial data from the individual companies? A: Q: A: 2) Are there differences with regard to the scope of reported data? Non-integrated Financial Data Transfer by Online Entry 1) Have you assigned all data monitor tasks you need to the data monitor?

4.3.5.
Questions: Q: A: 4.3.5.1. Questions:

Processes of the Consolidation Monitor

1) Which consolidation functions do you use? Preparation of Consolidation Group Changes

Q: 1) Have you activated the maintenance of acquisition and divestiture subitems in the subitem categories for transaction types? A: [ ]Yes [ ]No 2) Have you maintained the acquisition and divestiture subitems in the relevant subitems?

Q: A:

Q: 3) Do you use the standard document types or do you define your own document types for the posting of consolidation group changes? Explanation: In the standard the document types 95-98 are delivered. A: 4.3.5.2. Questions: Q: 1) Do you want to differentiate elimination differences between currency-related and other differences? 392 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc Interunit Elimination by Elimination of IU Payables and Receivables

ValueSAP Explanation: The split differences requires the detail of a FS item by transaction currency. currency. A: [ ]Yes [ ]No 4.3.5.3. Questions: Q: 1) Do you want to differentiate elimination differences between currency-related and other differences? Explanation: The split differences requires the detail of a FS item by transaction currency. currency. A: [ ]Yes [ ]No 4.3.5.4. Questions: Q: 1) Which accounting techniques do you use? Consolidation of investments Interunit Elimination by Elimination of IC Revenue and Expense

Explanation: Purchase method, proportional consolidation, equity method A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 4) Do you clear differentials resulting from consolidation of investments against fair value adjustments? A: [ ]Yes [ ]No 5) How do you treat goodwill/negative goodwill? 3) Reported items equity? 2) What is your calculation base?

Q: A:

4.3.6.
Questions: Q: A:

Information System

1) How is your corporate reporting presently designed?

393 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP -

4.4.

Executive Information System (EIS)

Questions: Q: 1) What is the system landscape like: which SAP systems and non-SAP systems are in use? A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 6) Which SAP system components and non-SAP system components are used for which business purposes? A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 9) Is it possible to subdivide the scope in more than one evaluation area (with reference to their business context)? If yes, make a list of these evaluation areas. A: Q: A: Q: 11) What are the target groups for the evaluation areas to be mapped in the system? 394 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc 10) Is it possible to prioritize these individual evaluation areas? 8) What level of detail should be represented with EIS? 7) What is the status of Management Reporting? 5) Is there a multi-client concept? 4) Do you work with distributed systems? If yes, which ones are they? 3) For R/3 systems: Which Releases are used? 2) Describe your hardware structure.

ValueSAP A: Q: 12) How large is the expected data volume to be (per evaluation area)?

Explanation: Should a satellite system be taken into consideration? Should a satellite system be taken into consideration? A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 18) What level of knowledge do the available employees have? 17) How many employees are available during the project? 16) How much consultation is required? At which stage? 15) What schedule are you working towards for completion of the sub-project(s)? 14) Which subprojects are planned? 13) Is it possible to use an interface tool - such as inSight?

Explanation: In-house training courses for project members or training courses at SAP training centers? SAP training centers? A: Q: 19) How intensely could the available employees work on the project/subprojects?

Explanation: TIP: It is advantageous to have employees with a technical background (database) in combination with employees from the corresponding specialist area. specialist area. A:

4.4.1.
Questions: Q:

Data Modeling

1) Analysis: What information is required in the previously identified evaluation areas? 395

Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP -

Explanation: See question: Can the range be divided into a number of evaluation areas (according to their business context)? If yes, list them, A: Q: 2) Which data sources (systems from the system landscape) function as data providers for the evaluation areas? A: Q: 3) Which characteristics (evaluation criteria) and basic key figures can be added to a data model for each evaluation area? Explanation: Note that the data record has a maximum length. This length depends on the DBMS used. the DBMS used. the DBMS used. A: Q: A: Q: 5) Which basic key figures are filled in? Which characteristics do they refer to? Which data sources do these characteristics come from? A: Q: 6) Which characteristic values should be allowed for the identified characteristics (master data)? A: 4) What relationship exists between the basic key figures and the characteristics?

4.4.2.
4.4.2.1. Questions:

Basic Settings
Foreign Currencies

Q: 1) Do you intend to display several currencies in reporting and translate amounts into different target currencies? A: 4.4.2.2. Questions: Q: 1) If files are one of the sources of data transfers, these can be defined here with logical file names. A: 396 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc File Names

ValueSAP 4.4.3.
4.4.3.1. Questions: Q: 1) Which characteristics and basic key figures can be added to a data model for each evaluation area? A: Q: 2) Name all characteristics from the data model which you would like to report on in the individual business evaluation areas. Explanation: An evaluation area is represented by an aspect, where characteristics have the function of key fields. have the function of key fields. A: Q: 3) Which characteristics do you want to use attributes for? Which characteristics should already be understood as attributes for other characteristics? A: Q: 4) For those objects that are dependent on each other. List them in a hierarchical structure. A: Q: 5) Which attributes do you want to use to navigate to the reports? Which attributes are specified for display only? A: Q: A: Q: 7) Can you/do you want to form groups of characteristic values? If yes, make a list of them. Explanation: Groups and characteristics values which have been organized in this way can be stored as master data hierarchies, provided that the corresponding characteristic has a check table. A: Q: A: 4.4.3.2. Blueprint_FICO_1.doc Basic Key Figures 397 8) List the characteristics for which no master data exists. 6) Should currency/unit fields be used as display attributes?

Data Basis
Characteristics

ValueSAP -

Questions: Q: 1) Name all the basic key figures from the data model which you have identified in the individual business evaluation areas for calculation of your critical success factors or KPIs. A: Q: 2) Can these basic key figures be transferred directly from the operational system and data sources, or is it necessary to calculate them? Explanation: These calculations can either be performed while the data is being transferred or by using derived/calculated key figures. A: 4.4.3.3. Questions: Q: 1) Which of the characteristics, which were identified under "characteristics" for each valuation area, are highly selective? Explanation: Characteristics which are frequently selected in Reporting should be positioned as high as possible when the aspect is created. This will help to improve performance. help to improve performance. A: Q: 2) List the characteristics of an evaluation area in the order in which they were calculated and transfer them to the aspect in this order. Transfer the basic key figures for the evaluation area to the same aspect. A: 4.4.3.4. Questions: Q: 1) List all the key figures to be calculated from basic key figures, as well as their calculation formula. (If possible, list them hierarchically). A: Q: 2) Specify the aggregation with regard to structurally oriented characteristics and timebased characteristics (where appropriate with reference field, the number of decimal places and the scaling of the key figures) A: Q: A: 398 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc 3) Do you want to group your key figures? If yes, how? Calculated Key Figures Aspect

ValueSAP 4.4.3.5. Questions: Q: A: Q: 2) Which combinations of characteristics should the comments be created with (also cross-aspect)? A: 4.4.3.6. Questions: Q: A: Q: A: 4.4.3.7. Questions: Q: 1) Is it likely that in some reports, aggregated sections of the aspect dataset may have to be accessed? Explanation: It makes sense to create a summarization level if detailed characteristics cannot be accessed. A: [ ]Yes [ ]No 4.4.3.8. Layouts Questions: Q: 1) Should or must currency translations be carried out for data collection, data conversion through aspect summarization, or in entry layouts? A: Q: 2) When you carry out currency translations, how are these specified? Currency Translation Types for Data Transfer and Planning Summarization levels 2) How many data versions (for different plan variants) are required for each aspect? 1) Which fiscal year variant(s) is/are valid for your aspects? Fixed Characteristics 1) Do you want to include comments for transaction data? Comment Tables

Explanation: - Source currency/target currency (fixed/variable -> referenced inspection characteristic) - Exchange rate type - Time of currency translation A: 399 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP 4.4.3.9. Questions: Q: 1) Is actual data entered manually? If so, is single record maintenance sufficient? If not, which characteristics or key figures should a data entry layout contain? A: 4.4.3.10. Questions: Q: 1) Does a set of rules exist to describe a constant valid relation between characteristics? Derivation Data Entry Layout

Explanation: That is, can the values for a characteristic necessarily be used to deduce the values of a different characteristic? deduce the values of a different characteristic? A: 4.4.3.11. Questions: Q: A: 4.4.3.12. Questions: Q: 1) Should the transaction data that is to be transferred to an aspect, or is already posted, be protected (time-dependent) from access by certain users? A: Data Slices 1) Should the transaction data to be transferred to an aspect undergo a plausibility check? Validation

4.4.4.
Questions:

Data Transfer

Q: 1) From which source systems and/or SAP R/3 applications do you want to transfer which data to EIS (e.g. transaction data, master data, master data hierarchies, master data comments)? Explanation: - from R/3: CO-PA, FI-GL and so on, for example ABAP-Query - from R/2 - by means of an EXCEL upload - by means of a file upload A: 4.4.4.1. Questions: Q: A: 400 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc 1) Which transfer methods should be used for the data transfer? External Systems

ValueSAP -

Q: 2) For data transfers from external systems (R/2, R/3 systems): Are the technical network connections set up at the hardware and operating system level? A: 4.4.4.2. Questions: Q: 1) Are EC-EIS-Standard data-collection programs (from R/3 or R/2) applicable? Transaction Data

Explanation: Where standard data-collection programs can be used, sender structures and data transfer programs will partly be generated automatically and data transfer programs will partly be generated automatically A: Q: 2) Specify the data exactly which should be transferred, with regard to the named examples under the documentation. Explanation: Make specifications with regard to the following: - Origin (transfer method) - (Data record) structure (sender structure) - Transfer logic (transfer rules) - Conversion of characteristics, - Aggregation, - Formulas for calculating key figures - Formulas for calculating key figures A: 4.4.4.3. Questions: Q: 1) Specify the master data which should be transferred. Master Data

Explanation: Make specifications with regard to: - Origin (system/table) - Characteristic name (data element/domain) in the sender - Characteristic name in the receiver A: 4.4.4.4. Questions: Q: 1) Specify the comments which should be transferred. Comments

Explanation: Make specifications with regard to: - Origin - Target object (reports, fixed characteristics, characteristics, basic key figures, key figures, master data, report portfolio reports) A: 4.4.4.5. Questions: 401 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc Master Data Hierarchy

ValueSAP Q: 1) Have you filed master data hierarchies for specific characteristics in the form of files, the contents of which you want to transfer for these characteristics? Explanation: Specify the characteristics, for which you want to transfer hierarchies as well as the hierarchies themselves and their sources. A: 4.4.4.6. Questions: Q: 1) In which order should the data transfer runs (for master data, master data hierarchies, planning data, comments) be started? Explanation: If you use background jobs, it is possible to define the order of data transfer programs and to automate the entire data transfer process. A: 4.4.4.7. Questions: Q: A: 4.4.4.8. Questions: Q: 1) Indicate whether or not you want to update report portfolio reports in the background. If so, indicate when you want to do this, and whether exceptions defined in the reports should be checked. A: Control Report Portfolio 1) Specify the files that you want to import to EC-EIS by structure and transfer logic. File Transfer Procedure

4.4.5.
4.4.5.1. Questions:

Information System (EC-EIS)

Maintain Report Selection

Q: 1) Should a report tree be created in EC-EIS? If so, which reports (EC-EIS, other applications, transactions, ABAPs) should be included in the tree? Explanation: Specify the structure of the report tree. A: 4.4.5.2. Questions: Q: A: 402 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc 1) Do you want to use MS-Winword to print your reports (from the report portfolio)? Print in MS Word for Windows

ValueSAP -

4.4.6.
4.4.6.1. Questions: Q: A: 4.4.6.2. Questions:

Tools
Conversion to Release 4.0

1) Do you have to convert your system from a Release < 4.0 to a Release 4.x?

Authorization Management (EIS)

Q: 1) To which objects in the EC-EIS database do you wish to assign authorizations (aspects, characteristic values, key figures)? A: Q: 2) To which EIS reports/forms/layouts/programs or other objects do you wish to assign authorizations? A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 5) Which activities with reference to which objects should the authorizations (Profiles) of the user groups enable? A: 4.4.6.3. Questions: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 3) Is there possibly an inconsistency between the ABAP Dictionary and the Field Catalog? 2) Are objects of the aspect environment to be generated subsequently if necessary? 1) Which aspects should be visible in which clients? Data Basis 4) Can different EC-EIS user groups be classified, and if so, which? 3) Which employees work with EIS a) as a user b) as an administrator?

Explanation: In this case the field catalog should be reorganised. 403 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP A: Q: 4) Are all modules and routines for handling master data functional?

Explanation: If not, this program can not be regenerated here. A: 4.4.6.4. Questions: Q: 1) Should data be transferable from aspect to aspect (with summarization where required)? A: 4.4.6.5. Questions: Q: A: 4.4.6.6. Questions: Q: A: 1) In EC-EIS do you want to transport used objects in a target system? Transport 1) Do comments or documents need to be reorganized? Data Data Transfer

4.4.7.
4.4.7.1. Questions: Q:

Task Functions on Information System

Reports (EIS)

1) Which key figures should be analyzed by which characteristics.

Explanation: Specify the reports to be prepared on the data basis of the aspects. A: 4.4.7.2. Questions: Q: 1) Are complex layouts required (descriptions of content and form of reports, possibly using formula columns/rows/cells)? Explanation: Specify these layouts using forms. A: 4.4.7.3. Blueprint_FICO_1.doc Variables (EIS) 404 Forms (EIS)

ValueSAP -

Questions: Q: 1) Specify the global variables for characteristic values, hierarchies, hierarchy nodes, formulas and texts which you want to use in various forms and reports. A: 4.4.7.4. Questions: Q: 1) Do you want to work with saved (frozen) report data (for performance reasons)? Report Data (EIS)

Explanation: The definition and use of variant groups enables automatic updating of the report data of the respective reports in the background. A: 4.4.7.5. Questions: Q: 1) Do you want to use user group specific report portfolios as the interface for end users? Report Portfolio (EIS)

Explanation: Users from a user group can then execute the reports from the report portfolio. portfolio. A: Q: 2) Outline a hierarchical structure for this portfolio by specifying report classes where the reports can be stored. Explanation: Do you want to export the reports into the planned classes? A:

4.4.8.
4.4.8.1. Questions: Q: A: Q: A: 4.4.8.2. Questions: Q:

Task Functions on Tools

Data (Tools)

1) Do you want to reduce the amount of data in your aspects by archiving?

2) Do you want to delete data which has been transferred to the wrong aspect(s)?

Information System

1) Are forms, reports, saved report data or variant groups to be deleted? 405

Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP -

A: Q: A: Q: A: 3) Is your master data also maintained in several languages? 2) Do you use your reporting multilingually?

5. Asset Accounting
Questions: Q: 1) Are any of your asset values managed in a foreign currency? If so, specify the relevant countries and currencies. A: Q: 2) Does the fiscal year for asset accounting correspond to the calendar year? If not, specify the start and end dates of your fiscal year. A: Q: 3) Is your enterprise currently using a shortened fiscal year, or you have used a shortened fiscal year in the past, for which you want the R/3 System to recalculate depreciation as part of the asset data transfer? A: [ ]Yes [ ]No 4) Is your enterprise required to calculate mid-month or mid-year depreciation? [ ]Yes [ ]No

Q: A:

5.1.
5.1.1.

Handling Fixed Assets

Asset Maintenance
Creation of Master Record for Tangible Assets 5.1.1.1.

Questions: Q: 1) Do you need to manage and depreciate certain parts of your asset portfolio in the form of group assets? A: Q: 2) Who is responsible for creating asset maser records? Who provides which information? 406 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP A: Q: 3) Which organizational units and/or which functional areas have authorization for creating or displaying asset master records? A: Q: 4) The asset master record can be divided up into tab pages. How should the asset master record field groups be ordered for your organization? Explanation: Customizing layout of screen layout and assignment to asset class. A: 5.1.1.2. Questions: Q: 1) Do you need to manage and depreciate certain parts of your asset portfolio in the form of group assets? A: 5.1.1.3. Questions: Q: 1) In your enterprise, who has authorization to change asset master records? For which areas? Are these authorized individuals different from those who create the master records? A: Q: 2) How often is it necessary to change your asset master records? Which parts of the asset master record are most often affected? A: Q: 3) Are there certain asset master record fields that need to be protected against changes? If so, which fields? Explanation: It is possible to define non-changeable display fields in the asset master record screen layout. A: 5.1.1.4. Questions: Q: 1) In your enterprise, who has authorization to change a large number of assets simultaneously? A: 407 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc Mass Change Asset Master Record Change Creation of Group Asset

ValueSAP -

Q: A:

2) Do you need to make changes to a large number of assets simultaneously? [ ]Yes [ ]No 3) If so, under what circumstances? Please describe.

Q: A:

5.1.2.
Questions:

Receipts

Q: 1) Does your organization have a specific amount, above which purchases are to be capitalized as fixed assets? If so, what is this amount? Explanation: Amount limit for low-value assets A: 5.1.2.1. Questions: Q: 1) Are some services (or internal activities) capitalized (such as legal costs or consultancy charges)? A: Q: 2) Do you activate costs for internal activity using: - Production order - Investment measure - Asset under construction - Direct capitalization - Other? A: Q: 3) For reporting, would you like separate capitalized internal activities using different transaction types? A: 5.1.2.2. Questions: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 3) What types of acquisition occur in your enterprise? 408 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc 2) Describe your capital procurement requirements. 1) Describe the information flow for asset acquisitions in your enterprise. Processing of Asset Acquisition Direct Acquisition of Internal Activity

ValueSAP -

Explanation: Acquisition integrated via invoice receipt/goods receipt (Logistics - Materials Management) Acquisition via goods receipt - accounts payable accounting Acquisition with automatic clearing account offsetting entry A: Q: 4) Are asset acquisitions posted on a net basis (deducting any discounts) or as a gross amount (discounts are deducted only on payment)? Explanation: Document type settings: Net document type indicator A: Q: 5) Do you want to show acquisitions to certain depreciation areas differently than you do in the book depreciation area (for example, to fulfill certain cost-accounting, tax or group requirements)? A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 8) If using asset sub-numbering, do you want to permit asset acquisitions only to the main number in the year of capitalization, and post all later acquisitions to sub-numbers? A: Q: A: Q: 10) Do you plan and budget for capital investments in your enterprise? Should assets that are capitalized directly also be included in the planning and budgeting processes? A: Q: 11) Which is the procedure from invoice receipt to posting of capitalization? Outline the different steps. A: 5.1.2.3. Questions: Subsequent Acquisition 9) Do you keep a record of costs using acquisitions to the asset under construction? 7) Do you want down payments for assets to be shown separately? 6) Do you post goods receipt to assets valuated or non-valuated?

409 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP Q: 1) Under what circumstances do you intend to post subsequent acquisitions to previously capitalized fixed assets? A:

5.1.3.
5.1.3.1. Questions:

Depreciation
Creation of Reserves from Gain from Asset Retirement

Q: 1) Under what circumstances do you intend to create reserves from profits realized on the sale of fixed assets? A: 5.1.3.2. Questions: Q: A: 1) Do you create reserves for fixed assets? [ ]Yes [ ]No 2) If so, provide examples. How do you post? What are the reasons? Reserves Carryforward

Q: A:

5.1.3.3. Questions: Q: A: Q: A:

Depreciation Processing

1) What are the methods of depreciation that you are currently using?

2) Do you calculate depreciation values to the day?

Q: 3) In certain cases do you change over from a declining-balance depreciation to straightline depreciation? If so, when? A: Q: 4) Do you want to allow negative depreciation for certain assets or categories of assets? If so, please specify. A: Q: A: 410 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc 5) Do you distinguish between a fixed and a variable depreciation portion?

ValueSAP Q: A: 5.1.3.4. Questions: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: 5.1.3.5. Questions: Q: 1) Is it necessary, from a business point of view, to post depreciation directly to cost accounting? If so, which receivers are to be debited (for example, cost centers, internal orders)? A: Q: 2) How often do you intend to post depreciation to the general ledger and to cost accounting? A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 5) Do you want to show interest only in reports, or do you want to post interest directly to cost accounting? A: 5.1.3.6. Questions: Q: 1) Do you use the unit of production method for certain assets? If so, please specify. 411 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc Unit-of-Production Depreciation 4) To which account(s) is depreciation posted? 3) Do you post depreciation to assets under construction? Depreciation Posting 3) When do you use unplanned depreciation? 2) How often do you use the manual depreciation function? 1) In which cases do you need to start depreciation manually? Manual Depreciation Planning 6) How do you handle the period control for depreciation values?

ValueSAP A:

5.1.4.
5.1.4.1. Questions:

Business Transactions
Settlement of Asset under Construction

Q: 1) Do you wish to manage "Assets under construction" in Asset Accounting? If yes, describe the capitalization process. Explanation: 1. Classic asset under construction or investment measure A: Q: A: Q: A: 3) With respect to capitalization, are you bound by specific laws? [ ]Yes [ ]No 4) Is it possible that an asset under construction is capitalized as a low value asset? 2) What is the timing for the capitalization process?

Q: A:

Q: 5) Do you intend to use summary settlement or line item settlement for assets under construction? A: Q: A: Q: A: 7) Do you use partial capitalization? [ ]Yes [ ]No 6) To which receiver(s) do you settle assets under construction?

Q: 8) What kind of information flow do you have for when an investment measure is completed and the asset under construction is ready for settlement to the final asset? A: Q: A: 9) Do you display down payments to assets under construction separately? [ ]Yes [ ]No 412 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP -

Q: A:

10) What kind of information flow do you have for the settlement of down payments?

5.1.4.2. Questions:

Post-capitalization

Q: 1) What circumstances make post-capitalization necessary in your enterprise? One amount on the asset should have a different depreciation start date than the original asset Explanation: For example: - Someone neglected to capitalize an asset (if so, for what reason?) - One amount on the asset should have a different depreciation start date than the original asset - Other A: Q: 2) How do you intend to post post-capitalization: - Gross, that is, with historical values (APC and depreciation)- Net, that is, depreciation begins on the posting date using the net book value. A: Q: A: 5.1.4.3. Questions: Q: A: Q: 2) Describe the reasons for a fixed asset revaluation, the process used, and give examples of the assets which are to be revaluated. A: 5.1.4.4. Questions: Q: 1) Is it necessary to transfer assets from one company code to another? Reposting 1) Do the value of your assets appreciate, and if so, do your ledgers need to be adjusted? Write-up 3) Do you want to post to a separate sub-number for post-capitalization?

Explanation: Settings for company code transfer A: Q: 2) Do you sometimes split an asset into one or more new assets? If so, please specify. 413 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP A: Q: A: Q: 4) Is the changing of an assigned cost center or a business area, for example, a reason for a transfer posting? A: Q: A: 5) How do you find out about necessary transfer postings in asset accounting? 3) Do you transfer between different asset classes? Give examples.

5.1.5.
5.1.5.1. Questions: Q: A:

Specific Valuations
Closing of Insurance Contract

1) Do you want to display insurance values for your fixed or leased assets? [ ]Yes [ ]No 2) With which insurance companies do you have insurance agreements?

Q: A: Q: A:

3) Are your low value assets part of an insurance contract? [ ]Yes [ ]No 4) What is the basis for the calculation of an asset's insurable value?

Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A:

5) Do you index your insurance values?

6) Do you intend to use a separate asset valuation area for your insurance values?

7) Is there any interaction between insurance of assets and your leasing agreements?

414 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP Q: A: 5.1.5.2. Questions: Q: 1) For what business reasons do you need to index your asset values (for example for insurance replacement values, cost-accounting revaluation, inflation etc.)? A: Q: A: 5.1.5.3. Questions: Q: A: 1) Do you carry out fixed asset revaluations? If so, give examples Revaluation 2) What types of index figures do you intend to use? Index Series 8) How do you wish to make your insurance payments?

5.1.6.
5.1.6.1. Questions:

Investment Support
Application for Investment Support

Q: 1) How do you proceed when a new kind of investment support becomes available and you want to apply for it? A: Q: 2) Is investment support available for certain fixed assets, and do you apply for this investment support (e.g. from the federal government)? A: [ ]Yes [ ]No 3) Do you want to show investment support in asset master records? [ ]Yes [ ]No

Q: A:

Q: 4) If you choose to show investment support in the asset master record, do you want it shown on the liabilities side, on the assets side (that is, reducing APC), or only as information? A: Q: 5) Is it possible that you could have more than one investment support measure per asset? How many? A: 415 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP -

Q: A: Q: A:

6) What kind of data has to be made available?

7) Does investment support apply to low value assets as well? [ ]Yes [ ]No 8) To which accounts do you post investment support?

Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A:

9) How do you link new investment support to your assets?

10) How do you post investment support? Is it deducted directly from acquisition value?

11) Do you consider investment support in depreciation? [ ]Yes [ ]No 12) What reasons might there be to update investment support manually?

Q: A:

5.1.7.
5.1.7.1. Questions:

Group Requirements
Transfer Within a Client

Q: 1) What are your enterprise and/or statutory requirements for transferring assets to associated companies? A: 5.1.7.2. Questions: Q: 1) Do you need to manage and depreciate certain parts of your asset portfolio in the form of group assets? A: Q: 2) Who is responsible for creating asset maser records? Who provides which information? 416 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc Creation of Master Record for Tangible Assets

ValueSAP A: Q: 3) Which organizational units and/or which functional areas have authorization for creating or displaying asset master records? A: Q: 4) The asset master record can be divided up into tab pages. How should the asset master record field groups be ordered for your organization? Explanation: Customizing layout of screen layout and assignment to asset class. A: 5.1.7.3. Questions: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 3) What types of acquisition occur in your enterprise? 2) Describe your capital procurement requirements. 1) Describe the information flow for asset acquisitions in your enterprise. Processing of Asset Acquisition

Explanation: Acquisition integrated via invoice receipt/goods receipt (Logistics - Materials Management) Acquisition via goods receipt - accounts payable accounting Acquisition with automatic clearing account offsetting entry A: Q: 4) Are asset acquisitions posted on a net basis (deducting any discounts) or as a gross amount (discounts are deducted only on payment)? Explanation: Document type settings: Net document type indicator A: Q: 5) Do you want to show acquisitions to certain depreciation areas differently than you do in the book depreciation area (for example, to fulfill certain cost-accounting, tax or group requirements)? A: Q: A: 417 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc 6) Do you post goods receipt to assets valuated or non-valuated?

ValueSAP -

Q: A:

7) Do you want down payments for assets to be shown separately?

Q: 8) If using asset sub-numbering, do you want to permit asset acquisitions only to the main number in the year of capitalization, and post all later acquisitions to sub-numbers? A: Q: A: Q: 10) Do you plan and budget for capital investments in your enterprise? Should assets that are capitalized directly also be included in the planning and budgeting processes? A: Q: 11) Which is the procedure from invoice receipt to posting of capitalization? Outline the different steps. A: 9) Do you keep a record of costs using acquisitions to the asset under construction?

5.1.8.
5.1.8.1. Questions: Q: A: Q: A:

Retirements
Retirement

1) How and when is asset accounting informed of the retirement of an asset?

2) Do you sell or transfer assets to affiliated/associated companies? [ ]Yes [ ]No

Q: 3) How do you process retirement of a low value asset (e.g. retirement with zero value; retirement with revenue; account assignment for retirement with revenue)? A: Q: A: 5.1.8.2. Questions: Q: 1) When retiring assets, is there ever a need to retire a large number of assets at the same time? 418 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc Mass Retirement 4) Who issues invoices for asset sales?

ValueSAP -

A: Q: 2) If yes, how many assets are normally concerned? Please provide an example with documents. A:

5.1.9.
Questions: Q: A:

Closing Operations [Asset Accounting]

1) What activities are included in the month-end process for asset accounting?

Q: 2) Which internal and external asset valuations belong to month-end closing process? Please provide a sample of all required valuations. A: Q: A: Q: 4) Which internal and external asset valuations belong to year-end closing process? Please provide a sample of all required valuations. A: 5.1.9.1. Questions: Q: 1) Do you have parallel valuation for your asset, e.g. for group valuation, for cost accounting purposes or for legal reasons? A: Q: A: Q: 3) Is there a distinction necessary between book depreciation (for balance sheet) and tax values (for a tax balance sheet)? A: 5.1.9.2. Questions: Q: 1) When do you close your fiscal year? 419 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc Preparations for Year-End Closing in Asset Management 2) Do you have to valuate your assets in different currencies? Multiple Valuations 3) What activities are included in the year-end closing process for asset accounting?

ValueSAP A: Q: 2) Do you run the year-end closing process in asset accounting separate from general ledger? A: Q: A: 5.1.9.3. Questions: Q: 1) Do you include planned capital investments in addition to capitalized assets when forecasting depreciation? A: [ ]Yes [ ]No Depreciation Simulation / Forecast 3) Are leased assets treated like any other fixed assets in year-end closing?

Q: 2) Describe the process for distributing planned depreciation. For example, do you distribute based on asset class, cost centers or estimate the percentage depreciated? A: Q: A: Q: 4) Do you wish to use different methods of valuation or different depreciation methods in your simulation? If so please specify. A: Q: 5) Do you include additional asset transactions in the simulation? If so, which transactions are relevant? A: 5.1.9.4. Questions: Q: 1) In your enterprise, who has authorization to change a large number of assets simultaneously? A: Q: A: 2) Do you need to make changes to a large number of assets simultaneously? [ ]Yes [ ]No 420 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc Mass Change 3) Do you simulate retirements of low value assets in your asset history sheet?

ValueSAP -

Q: A:

3) If so, under what circumstances? Please describe.

5.1.9.5. Questions:

Recalculation of Depreciation

Q: 1) Does it sometimes occur that you need to change depreciation methods or calculation rules during the course of a fiscal year? If so, please provide an example and reason why a change was necessary). A: Q: 2) Does it sometimes occur that you introduce a new depreciation valuation area during the course of a fiscal year? If so, please provide an example and reason why a new valuation area was necessary). A: 5.1.9.6. Questions: Q: 1) Is it necessary, from a business point of view, to post depreciation directly to cost accounting? If so, which receivers are to be debited (for example, cost centers, internal orders)? A: Q: 2) How often do you intend to post depreciation to the general ledger and to cost accounting? A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 5) Do you want to show interest only in reports, or do you want to post interest directly to cost accounting? A: 5.1.9.7. Questions: Carry Out Year-End Closing in Asset Management 4) To which account(s) is depreciation posted? 3) Do you post depreciation to assets under construction? Depreciation posting

421 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP Q: 1) How do you conduct the physical inventory for fixed assets (e.g. manually, using barcode scanner)? A: Q: A: Q: 3) What is the relation between the inventory number of an asset and the number of the asset master record? A: Q: A: 5.1.9.8. Questions: Q: 1) What is the relationship between investment measures and fixed assets in the planning process? A: Q: A: 5.1.9.9. Questions: Q: 1) Which periodic reports do you carry out in general ledger accounting? Periodic Reports 2) Is your plan activity-dependent or not activity-dependent? Integrated Planning in CO 4) Do you create inventory lists using the SAP R/3 System, or using a non-SAP system? 2) Who is responsible for the physical inventory of the fixed assets?

Explanation: see subsidiary ledgers too. A: Q: A: Q: 3) What are the critical monthly, quarterly and annual reports that you need for Asset Accounting? A: Q: 4) Which kind of reports do you use to reconcile asset accounting with the general ledger? 422 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc 2) What type of information flow do you have for the results of periodic asset reporting?

ValueSAP A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 7) By which organizational units (or combinations of units) are asset reporting functions structured (for example, company, cost center etc)? A: 6) How do you create your inventory lists? Do you use barcodes? 5) Are there any particular reports you would like for low value assets?

5.2.

Handling of Leased Assets

Questions: Q: 1) What kind of leasing agreements do you normally make? Operating leases (not necessarily shown in Asset Accounting) or Capital Leases (Asset capitalized)? A:

5.2.1.
5.2.1.1. Questions: Q: A:

Asset Maintenance
Asset Master Record Change

1) Do you transfer your assets from one legal entity to another? [ ]Yes [ ]No

Q: 2) If not transferred between legal entities, do you create a new master record when location changes? A: Q: 3) Describe possible ways of processing changes in location. What procedures are currently in place? A: Q: A: 4) Does changing of location apply to low value assets? [ ]Yes [ ]No 5.2.1.2. Questions: 423 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc Mass Change

ValueSAP -

Q: 1) In your enterprise, who has authorization to change a large number of assets simultaneously? A: Q: A: 2) Do you need to make changes to a large number of assets simultaneously? [ ]Yes [ ]No 3) If so, under what circumstances? Please describe.

Q: A:

5.2.2.
5.2.2.1. Questions:

Receipts
Acquisition of Leased Asset

Q: 1) Who is responsible for the acquisition of a leased asset? Who will negotiate the leasing agreement? A: Q: 2) Describe the process for the acquisition of a leased asset, from the purchase order to capitalization in Asset Accounting. A:

5.2.3.
5.2.3.1. Questions: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A:

Depreciation
Depreciation Processing

1) What are the methods of depreciation that you are currently using?

2) Which depreciation method is used particularly for leased assets?

3) Do you calculate depreciation values to the day?

Q: 4) In certain cases do you change over from a declining-balance depreciation to straightline depreciation? If so, when? A:

424 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP Q: 5) Do you want to allow negative depreciation for certain assets or categories of assets? If so, please specify. A: Q: A: Q: A: 5.2.3.2. Questions: Q: 1) Is it necessary, from a business point of view, to post depreciation directly to cost accounting? If so, which receivers are to be debited (for example, cost centers, internal orders)? A: Q: 2) How often do you intend to post depreciation to the general ledger and to cost accounting? A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 5) Do you want to show interest only in reports, or do you want to post interest directly to cost accounting? A: 4) To which account(s) is depreciation posted? 3) Do you post depreciation to assets under construction? Depreciation Posting 7) How do you handle the period control for depreciation values? 6) Do you distinguish between a fixed and a variable depreciation portion?

5.2.4.
5.2.4.1. Questions: Q: A:

Business Transactions
Transfer Leased Asset

1) Do you transfer leased assets between companies? [ ]Yes [ ]No 2) Would a transfer of a leased asset affect the leasing agreement? If so, please describe. 425

Q:

Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP A: 5.2.4.2. Questions: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 3) In cases where changes to a leasing agreement are necessary, how many assets would be affected? A: Q: A: Q: 5) What is the information flow in your enterprise regarding a change in asset location or a change of an asset to a different organizational unit? A: 5.2.4.3. Questions: Q: 1) Describe the payment conditions of your leasing agreements. Differentiate if necessary between different kinds of agreements. A: Q: A: 2) How often are your leasing payments due? Lease Payment 4) Does a change of location affect your leasing agreement? In what way? 2) What type of changes are most frequent? Provide examples. 1) How often are changes in a leasing agreement necessary? Change in a Leasing Agreement

5.2.5.
5.2.5.1. Questions: Q: A:

Specific Valuations
Closing of Insurance Contract

1) Do you want to display insurance values for your fixed or leased assets? [ ]Yes [ ]No 2) With which insurance companies do you have insurance agreements? 426

Q: A:

Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP -

Q: A:

3) Are your low value assets part of an insurance contract? [ ]Yes [ ]No 4) What is the basis for the calculation of an asset's insurable value?

Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A:

5) Do you index your insurance values?

6) Do you intend to use a separate asset valuation area for your insurance values?

7) Is there any interaction between insurance of assets and your leasing agreements?

8) How do you wish to make your insurance payments?

5.2.5.2. Questions:

Index Series

Q: 1) For what business reasons do you need to index your asset values (for example for insurance replacement values, cost-accounting revaluation, inflation etc.)? A: Q: A: 2) What types of index figures do you intend to use?

5.2.6.
5.2.6.1. Questions: Q: A: Q: A:

Retirements
Retirement of Leased Asset

1) What are the reasons for retiring a leased asset?

2) What is your process for retiring leased assets? Please describe the postings.

427 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP -

Q: 3) Do you normally buy leased assets after expiration of the leasing contract or do you return them to the lessor? A:

5.2.7.
Questions: Q: A:

Closing Operations

1) What activities are included in the month-end process for asset accounting?

Q: 2) Which internal and external asset valuations belong to month-end closing process? Please provide a sample of all required valuations. A: Q: A: Q: 4) Which internal and external asset valuations belong to year-end closing process? Please provide a sample of all required valuations. A: 5.2.7.1. Questions: Q: 1) Do you have parallel valuation for your asset, e.g. for group valuation, for cost accounting purposes or for legal reasons? A: Q: A: Q: 3) Is there a distinction necessary between book depreciation (for balance sheet) and tax values (for a tax balance sheet)? A: 5.2.7.2. Questions: Q: A: 428 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc 1) When do you close your fiscal year? Preparations for Year-End Closing in Asset Management 2) Do you have to valuate your assets in different currencies? Multiple Valuations 3) What activities are included in the year-end closing process for asset accounting?

ValueSAP Q: 2) Do you run the year-end closing process in asset accounting separate from general ledger? A: Q: A: 5.2.7.3. Questions: Q: 1) Do you include planned capital investments in addition to capitalized assets when forecasting depreciation? A: [ ]Yes [ ]No Depreciation Simulation / Forecast 3) Are leased assets treated like any other fixed assets in year-end closing?

Q: 2) Describe the process for distributing planned depreciation. For example, do you distribute based on asset class, cost centers or estimate the percentage depreciated? A: Q: A: Q: 4) Do you wish to use different methods of valuation or different depreciation methods in your simulation? If so please specify. A: Q: 5) Do you include additional asset transactions in the simulation? If so, which transactions are relevant? A: 5.2.7.4. Questions: Q: 1) In your enterprise, who has authorization to change a large number of assets simultaneously? A: Q: A: 2) Do you need to make changes to a large number of assets simultaneously? [ ]Yes [ ]No 3) If so, under what circumstances? Please describe. 429 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc Mass Change 3) Do you simulate retirements of low value assets in your asset history sheet?

Q:

ValueSAP -

A: 5.2.7.5. Questions: Q: 1) Does it sometimes occur that you need to change depreciation methods or calculation rules during the course of a fiscal year? If so, please provide an example and reason why a change was necessary). A: Q: 2) Does it sometimes occur that you introduce a new depreciation valuation area during the course of a fiscal year? If so, please provide an example and reason why a new valuation area was necessary). A: 5.2.7.6. Questions: Q: 1) Is it necessary, from a business point of view, to post depreciation directly to cost accounting? If so, which receivers are to be debited (for example, cost centers, internal orders)? A: Q: 2) How often do you intend to post depreciation to the general ledger and to cost accounting? A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 5) Do you want to show interest only in reports, or do you want to post interest directly to cost accounting? A: 5.2.7.7. Questions: Q: 1) How do you conduct the physical inventory for fixed assets (e.g. manually, using barcode scanner)? A: 430 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc Carry Out Year-End Closing in Asset Management 4) To which account(s) is depreciation posted? 3) Do you post depreciation to assets under construction? Depreciation Posting Recalculation of Depreciation

ValueSAP -

Q: A:

2) Who is responsible for the physical inventory of the fixed assets?

Q: 3) What is the relation between the inventory number of an asset and the number of the asset master record? A: Q: A: 5.2.7.8. Questions: Q: 1) Which periodic reports do you carry out in general ledger accounting? Periodic Reports 4) Do you create inventory lists using the SAP R/3 System, or using a non-SAP system?

Explanation: see subsidiary ledgers too. A: Q: A: Q: 3) What are the critical monthly, quarterly and annual reports that you need for Asset Accounting? A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: 7) How do you create your inventory lists? Do you use barcodes? 6) Are there any particular reports you run for leased assets? 5) Are there any particular reports you would like for low value assets? 4) Which kind of reports do you use to reconcile asset accounting with the general ledger? 2) What type of information flow do you have for the results of periodic asset reporting?

431 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP Q: 8) By which organizational units (or combinations of units) are asset reporting functions structured (for example, company, cost center etc)? A:

5.3.
5.3.1.

Investment Program Handling [Capital Investments]

Structuring [Investment Programs]
Program Structuring 5.3.1.1.

Questions: Q: 1) Does a (hierarchical) structure exist in your enterprise that you want to use as the basis for your investment planning process? A: Q: 2) Do you only want to manage only investments in your investment program, or also all expenses in your enterprise? A: Q: 3) Do you want to represent the hierarchical structure of your investment planning and budgeting using an investment program? A: Q: 4) Which organizational units should be considered when you structure your investment program? A: Q: A: 5) Do you want the investment program to include more than one controlling area? [ ]Yes [ ]No 6) Do the controlling areas have different currencies?

Q: A: Q: A:

7) In which currency should the investment program be managed?

Q: 8) How do you represent your investment planning and budgeting in the system (hierarchically by areas of responsibility, or other methods)? A: Q: A: 432 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc 9) How many future fiscal years do you want to consider in your investment program?

ValueSAP -

Q: 10) Are your investment measures generally more complex, so they should be represented using several levels? A: Q: 11) Do you want to carry out program budgeting separately for costs to be capitalized and costs that are not capitalized (that is, do you want to use budget categories)? A: Q: 12) Do you intend to distribute the budget from the program directly to the investment measures? A: [ ]Yes [ ]No 13) Do you want to use a uniform naming convention for investment program positions? [ ]Yes [ ]No 14) How do you want to represent your investments?

Q: A:

Q: A:

Q: 15) What criteria did you use to decide if direct capitalization is used for investments or measures? A: Q: A: Q: A: 17) What type of planning do you want at program level? 16) Do you want to limit the settlement of projects, orders and appropriation requests?

5.3.2.
5.3.2.1. Questions:

Cost Planning [Investment Programs]

Program Cost Planning

Q: 1) How does your company intend to group various projects together for planning purposes? A planning program will allow you to plan and monitor the total plan of all individual projects. A: Q: A: Q: 3) Do you want to adopt plan values automatically from the measures or appropriation requests? 433 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc 2) How do you want to manage budget values?

ValueSAP -

A:

[ ]Yes [ ]No 4) Would you like to have several plan versions for program planning? [ ]Yes [ ]No

Q: A:

Q: 5) Which plan versions of measures or appropriation requests should be adopted by the investment program? A: Q: A: Q: A: 7) Do you want to be able to check your planning using line items? [ ]Yes [ ]No 6) How does your enterprise plan?

5.3.3.
5.3.3.1. Questions:

Fiscal Year Change [Investment Programs]

Fiscal Year Change for Program

Q: 1) During the fiscal year change, do you want to copy the investment program structure to the next fiscal year? A: [ ]Yes [ ]No

Q: 2) Do you have measures that are carried out over a number of years? Do you want to carry them forward to the next fiscal year, using the fiscal year change program? A: Q: A: Q: 4) Do you also want to carry forward unused budget amounts to measures in the next year? A: [ ]Yes [ ]No 3) Which values do you want to carry forward to the next year?

5.3.4.
5.3.4.1. Questions:

Budgeting [Investment Programs]

Program Budgeting

434 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP Q: 1) How does your company intend to group various projects together for budgeting purposes? A: Q: A: Q: 3) Do you intend to distribute budget top down, directly from the investment program to the measures? A: Q: A: Q: 5) If you wish to distribute budget from the investment program to the measures, is it possible for you to make this decision using the program type? A: Q: A: 6) Do you want to derive the budget values from the plan values? [ ]Yes [ ]No 4) If you want to use budget distribution, check the master data settings 2) How do you want to manage budget values?

Q: 7) Do you want to update your budget later using budget supplements or returns (that is, using separate budget items in addition to the original budget values)? A: [ ]Yes [ ]No

5.4.
5.4.1.

Handling Simple Investment Measures

Appropriation Request [Investment Orders]
Appropriation Request Processing 5.4.1.1.

Questions: Q: A: Q: A: 2) Do you want your appropriation requests to be automatically replaced by measures? [ ]Yes [ ]No 1) For what purposes do you use appropriation requests?

Q: 3) Do you want the numbers of your measures to be managed in the same way as the numbers of your appropriation requests? A: [ ]Yes [ ]No 435 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP -

Q: A:

4) How do you represent your appropriation requests today?

Q: 5) Do you want the numbers of your measures to be identical with the numbers of the appropriation requests? A: Q: 6) Do you use appropriation requests that are submitted to detailed cost planning?

Explanation: Answer: Yes. Then you can plan the investment volume of your appropriation request using the Easy Cost Planning function. A: [ ]Yes [ ]No 5.4.1.2. Questions: Q: A: Q: A: 2) Do you want your appropriation requests to be automatically replaced by measures? [ ]Yes [ ]No 1) For what purposes do you use appropriation requests? Creation of an Alternate Group of Appropriation Requests

Q: 3) Do you want the numbers of your measures to be managed in the same way as the numbers of your appropriation requests? A: [ ]Yes [ ]No 4) How do you represent your appropriation requests today?

Q: A:

Q: 5) Do you want the numbers of your measures to be identical with the numbers of the appropriation requests? A: 5.4.1.3. Questions: Q: 1) In your enterprise, do you create different plan values on appropriation requests for expenses and revenues, depending on how the request is actually implemented? 436 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc Variant Processing

ValueSAP A: Q: 2) Do you want the system automatically to calculate the preinvestment analysis figures for planned investments? A: [ ]Yes [ ]No

Q: 3) After the appropriation request is approved, do you want to be able to process the resulting investment measure only? A: Q: 4) Do you also want to use your appropriation requests for planning the investment program positions? A: [ ]Yes [ ]No 5.4.1.4. Questions: Q: 1) Can you determine the plan values for appropriation requests using a costing model? Appropriation Request Planning

Explanation: In this case, you can use the functions of Easy Cost Planning for appropriation requests and to enter costing models in the system. A: [ ]Yes [ ]No 5.4.1.5. Questions: Q: A: 1) What strategy do you use for releasing appropriation requests? Appropriation Request Approval

5.4.2.
5.4.2.1. Questions:

Measure Processing
Processing of Internal Orders [Investment Order]

Q: 1) Should some of orders be used for information purposes only, while the real posting is made to the cost center? A: [ ]Yes [ ]No

Q: 2) Are your internal orders that represent investment measures created from appropriation requests? A: [ ]Yes [ ]No 437 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP -

Q: A:

3) Do you want orders to be released automatically after they are created? [ ]Yes [ ]No 4) Do you use model orders to propose certain values or fields for your orders? [ ]Yes [ ]No

Q: A:

5.4.3.
5.4.3.1. Questions: Q:

Measure Planning
Order Planning

1) Do you intend to use the investment profile?

Explanation: For the period-end closing, you have to show costs that require capitalization using an asset under construction. You can use the investment profile to specify an asset class as the default asset class for this asset under construction. Do you intend to use this option? A: [ ]Yes [ ]No 2) Should the system automatically create the asset under construction? [ ]Yes [ ]No 5.4.3.2. Questions: Q: 1) What costs is the cost estimate based on when you compute overhead for internal orders? A: Q: A: Q: A: 3) Will you perform automatic recovery of overheads on specific types of costs/expenses? [ ]Yes [ ]No 2) Specify the overhead rates. Overhead calculation

Q: A:

Q: 4) List the different groups of costs/expenses (for example, applying a fixed percentage rate for recovery of overhead to material issues). A: 438 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP Q: 5) For each assignment type, do you distribute overhead as a fixed percentage or based on the actual total costs? A: Q: 6) Describe in detail how each of these assignments is performed today in your organization. A: Q: A: 5.4.3.3. Questions: Q: 1) Do you have an approved funding or buildup of reserves process for orders in your enterprise? A: Q: A: 2) Will you use an order plan as a basis for the budget? [ ]Yes [ ]No 3) How are budget changes made and monitored? Order Budgeting 7) What postings do the assignments create?

Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A:

4) Do you have specific controls for over-expenditures?

5) Are portions of the budget not released until after a period of time?

6) How is this release process carried out and managed?

7) Will you set exact budget values for each year?

Q: 8) Are your goods receipts valuated or unvaluated (that is, is the commitment related to the time of goods receipt or invoice receipt)? 439 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP A: Q: A: Q: 10) Do you have an approved funding or buildup of reserves process for orders in your enterprise? A: Q: A: 11) Will you use an order plan as a basis for the budget? [ ]Yes [ ]No 12) Do you update your budget values by entering budget supplements or returns? [ ]Yes [ ]No 13) How are budget changes made and monitored? 9) Do you update your budget values by entering budget supplements or returns?

Q: A:

Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A:

14) Do you have specific controls for over-expenditures?

15) Are portions of the budget not released until after a period of time?

16) How is this release process carried out and managed?

17) Will you set exact budget values for each year?

18) Do you update your budget values by entering budget supplements or returns?

Q: 19) Are your goods receipts valuated or unvaluated (that is, is the commitment related to the time of goods receipt or invoice receipt)? A: 440 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP -

Q: 20) Do you have an approved funding or buildup of reserves process for projects in your enterprise? A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: 25) Are portions of the budget not released until after a period of time? [ ]Yes [ ]No 26) How is this release process carried out and managed? 24) Do you have specific controls for over-expenditures? 23) How are budget changes processed and controlled? 22) Do you use a project plan as a basis for the budget? 21) How are these funds allocated to the WBS structure?

Q: A: Q: A:

27) Do you set exact budget values for each year?

Q: 28) Are your goods receipts valuated or unvaluated (that is, is the commitment related to the time of goods receipt or invoice receipt)? A: Q: 29) When manual budgeting is used, do you want to ensure that only projects assigned to program positions can be budgeted? A: [ ]Yes [ ]No 30) Do you update your budget values by entering budget supplements or returns? [ ]Yes 441 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

Q: A:

ValueSAP [ ]No Q: 31) Do you want to plan and control the budget of the order using availability checks?

Explanation: Budgeting for orders makes it possible to create a total budget value for a given order or given orders. In addition, you can carry out an availability control for this budget that includes both actual expenses and commitments (deducted from the budget). Do you use this type of budget control in your enterprise? A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 34) Who has authorization to distribute these funds in your project? Describe this distribution process. Explanation: When you use Investment Management (IM) to administer your capital budget, consider whether you want to add additional budget amounts to the project alongside the budget distribution of IM. A: Q: A: Q: 36) Do you budget your project, or monitor project spending, by period? 35) Do you do your budgeting top-down or bottom-up? 33) Do you assign an overall budget or is it broken down into annual values? 32) Describe the process for creating reserves for projects in your enterprise.

Explanation: You can control tolerance levels for postings that are allowed on WBS element by using budget amounts. When the tolerance limit is reached, the system can send a warning to the project manager or it can reject the posting. A: Q: 37) Do you want to be informed when you reach the project's budget tolerance? (Consider the use of warning messages issued by availability control.) A: Q: 38) Is budget control on all spending or only on certain categories of expenses? (You can configure availablity control accordingly.) A: 442 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP -

Q: 39) Do you continue to charge against the project after the budget is consumed? (Consider the effects on customizing for availablility control.) A:

5.4.4.
5.4.4.1. Questions: Q:

Release and Implementation of Measure

Order Release

1) On what criteria do you base the release of an order in your enterprise?

Explanation: If SAP status management is not sufficient for the criteria, you can define and use a user status. user status. user status. A: 5.4.4.2. Questions: Q: 1) Will you maintain specific material reservations (for sales, for production) for your stock materials? A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 4) Do you make specific types of reservation (reserved for sales, reserved for production) with respect to your stock materials? A: [ ]Yes [ ]No 5) Which documents are exchanged when you return goods to the vendor? 3) In which cases would you want to use manual reservations? 2) How far in advance are materials to be allowed to be reserved? Reservation Processing

Q: A: Q: A:

6) How long after the reservation date are open reservations canceled?

5.4.4.3. Questions:

Direct Activity Allocation

443 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP Q: A: 1) Do you measure, enter, and allocate organizational activities performed? [ ]Yes [ ]No 2) Describe your direct activity allocation processes that are based on activity prices.

Q: A: Q: A:

3) Do you want to record inspection costs?

Q: 4) Do you want to manage non-conformity costs (such as rework costs, warranty costs, or defect costs)? A: [ ]Yes [ ]No

Q: 5) Identify the different categories of labor or activities performed by employees that you use to plan, cost, or bill labor. A: [ ]Yes [ ]No

Q: 6) Do you need to create additional labor categories for billing effort? (see documentation field) Explanation: If you use activity types to bill customers for labor expense, confirm that the activity types identified for activity settlement are in agreement with the activity types used for billing. A: 5.4.4.4. Questions: Q: A: Q: 2) How do you wish to document which materials were received specifically for a work order? A: Q: A: 3) How do you record materials ordered for specific work orders? 1) How do you document materials that are ordered for specific work orders? Goods Issue Processing [Stock Material]

444 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP Q: 4) How will the consumption of these parts be entered and who will post the return in the system? A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 7) How much time elapses between the actual goods issue and its posting in the system? 6) How do you record materials supplied by subcontractors? 5) How do you record which materials were received specifically for a work order?

Explanation: Info on process steps. A: Q: 8) Is the posting made online or in batch mode?

Explanation: Steps in system A: Q: 9) Are deliveries posted individually or for each group of goods issues?

Explanation: Steps in system A: Q: 10) Which documents are generated in conjunction with this posting and what information do they contain? Explanation: 1-step goods issue in which the GR at the receiving site is posted simultaneously to the GI at the DC. simultaneously to the GI at the DC. A: 5.4.4.5. Questions: Q: 1) Does your company create manual funds reservations (manual commitments) for expenses they expect to incur but do not yet know the source of? These will appear on the reports as receivables against the budget. A: Manual Funds Reservation

445 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP Q: A: 5.4.4.6. Questions: Q: 1) Do you plan for non-costed units such as square feet, number of calls, number of PCs to upgrade, and so on? (If so, identify these units and describe how they are used.) A: 5.4.4.7. Questions: Q: 1) When you use manual funds reservation, describe the reduction process for the manual commitment. Explanation: Note: Unlike the commitments for purchase requisitions and purchase orders, the commitment created by the manual funds reservation is not automatically reduced by actual incurrence of costs. Therefore you need to clarify by whom, at which time, and in which form (single or collective processing) the commitment is to be reduced. A: Manual Funds Reduction Manual Entry of Statistical Key Figures 2) Describe how you carry out and reverse this reservation.

5.4.5.
5.4.5.1. Questions: Q: A:

Updating [Investment Orders]

Budget Update [Capital Investment Order]

1) How often do you permit budget changes by means of supplements or returns?

5.4.6.
5.4.6.1. Questions:

Analysis
Depreciation Simulation/Forecast [Investment Project]

Q: 1) Describe the process for distributing planned depreciation. For example, do you distribute based on asset class, cost centers or estimate the percentage depreciated? A: Q: A: Q: 3) Do you wish to use different methods of valuation or different depreciation methods in your simulation? If so please specify. A: 2) Do you simulate retirements of low value assets in your asset history sheet?

446 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP Q: 4) Do you include additional asset transactions in the simulation? If so, which transactions are relevant? A: 5.4.6.2. Questions: Q: 1) During depreciation simulation, do you want to consider plan values only? g depreciation? A: Q: 2) Describe the process for distributing planned depreciation. For example, do you distribute based on asset classes or cost centers, or estimate the percentage depreciated? A: Q: A: Q: 4) Do you want the system to propose a given asset class for the depreciation simulation or primary cost planning? A: Q: A: 5) Do you want to post the depreciation values in CO? [ ]Yes [ ]No 5.4.6.3. Questions: Q: 1) Which critical factors for order analysis are necessary (e.g. plan/budget vs. actual analysis, order group analysis, detail line item analysis)? A: 5.4.6.4. Questions: Q: A: Q: A: 5.4.6.5. Integrated Planning in CO 447 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc 2) Will you need other currencies for reporting? 1) What reports will you need for program analysis? Program Analysis Order Analysis [Investment Order] 3) Which of the following do you want the depreciation simulation to focus on? Processing of Depreciation Simulation Data

ValueSAP Questions: Q: 1) What is the relationship between investment measures and fixed assets in the planning process? A: Q: A: 2) Is your plan activity-dependent or not activity-dependent?

5.4.7.
5.4.7.1. Questions:

Period-End Closing and Settlement

Overhead Calculation [Investment Order]

Q: 1) What costs is the cost estimate based on when you compute overhead for internal orders? A: Q: A: Q: A: 3) Will you perform automatic recovery of overheads on specific types of costs/expenses? [ ]Yes [ ]No 2) Specify the overhead rates.

Q: 4) List the different groups of costs/expenses (for example, applying a fixed percentage rate for recovery of overhead to material issues). A: Q: 5) For each assignment type, do you distribute overhead as a fixed percentage or based on the actual total costs? A: Q: 6) Describe in detail how each of these assignments is performed today in your organization. A: Q: A: 5.4.7.2. Questions: 448 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc Settlement Account Assignment 7) What postings do the assignments create?

ValueSAP Q: A: Q: A: Q: 3) Describe the flow of information for individual investment measures: - In which functional area should the settlement of the investment measure to completed assets take place? A: Q: A: Q: 5) Do you want to display values by line item, as totals, or by cost element groups for fixed assets (that is, by origin). What type of settlement is best for your enterprise (based on the information you will need later)? A: Q: A: Q: 7) Do you want to differentiate between costs that require capitalization and costs that are not capitalized for individual depreciation areas in your asset under construction? A: [ ]Yes [ ]No 8) Do you settle your investment measures? 6) To which receivers do you settle during final settlement? 4) Enter which costs are capitalized and which are not. 2) To which receivers do you settle during the fiscal year? 1) How often would you like to create a balance sheet?

Q: A: Q: A:

9) Do you settle using percentages, equivalence numbers or by amounts?

Q: 10) If you create interim balance sheets, do you show the overall costs for assets under construction? A: Q: A: Q: 12) How do you handle settlement at the moment? 449 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc 11) How do you find out to which final asset your investment measure is to be settled?

ValueSAP A: 5.4.7.3. Questions: Q: 1) During periodic settlement, do you want to settle all costs to the asset under construction? Explanation: Using preliminary settlement rules, you can specify which parts should not be settled to the AuC. A: 5.4.7.4. Questions: Q: 1) During full settlement, do you want all costs to be settled from the AuC to the completed asset? Explanation: Using a final settlement rule, you can specify which part of the costs, which were already settled to the AuC, should not be settled to the completed asset. A: [ ]Yes [ ]No Investment Settlement [Investment Order] Periodic Settlement

5.5.
5.5.1.

Handling Complex Investment Measures

Appropriation Request
Appropriation Request Processing 5.5.1.1.

Questions: Q: A: Q: A: 2) Do you want your appropriation requests to be automatically replaced by measures? [ ]Yes [ ]No 1) For what purposes do you use appropriation requests?

Q: 3) Do you want the numbers of your measures to be managed in the same way as the numbers of your appropriation requests? A: [ ]Yes [ ]No 4) How do you represent your appropriation requests today?

Q: A:

Q: 5) Do you want the numbers of your measures to be identical with the numbers of the appropriation requests? 450 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP -

A: Q: 6) Do you use appropriation requests that are submitted to detailed cost planning?

Explanation: Answer: Yes. Then you can plan the investment volume of your appropriation request using the Easy Cost Planning function. A: [ ]Yes [ ]No 5.5.1.2. Questions: Q: A: Q: A: 2) Do you want your appropriation requests to be automatically replaced by measures? [ ]Yes [ ]No 1) For what purposes do you use appropriation requests? Creation of an Alternate Group of Appropriation Requests

Q: 3) Do you want the numbers of your measures to be managed in the same way as the numbers of your appropriation requests? A: [ ]Yes [ ]No 4) How do you represent your appropriation requests today?

Q: A:

Q: 5) Do you want the numbers of your measures to be identical with the numbers of the appropriation requests? A: 5.5.1.3. Questions: Q: 1) In your enterprise, do you create different plan values on appropriation requests for expenses and revenues, depending on how the request is actually implemented? A: Q: 2) Do you want the system automatically to calculate the preinvestment analysis figures for planned investments? A: [ ]Yes [ ]No 451 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc Variant Processing

ValueSAP -

Q: 3) After the appropriation request is approved, do you want to be able to process the resulting investment measure only? A: Q: 4) Do you also want to use your appropriation requests for planning the investment program positions? A: [ ]Yes [ ]No 5.5.1.4. Questions: Q: 1) Can you determine the plan values for appropriation requests using a costing model? Appropriation Request Planning

Explanation: In this case, you can use the functions of Easy Cost Planning for appropriation requests and to enter costing models in the system. A: [ ]Yes [ ]No 5.5.1.5. Questions: Q: A: 1) What strategy do you use for releasing appropriation requests? Appropriation Request Approval

5.5.2.
5.5.2.1. Questions:

Measure Processing
Project Structuring

Q: 1) Do you make use of the project profile to propose certain values for your operative projects? A: Q: A: Q: 3) Do you make use of the project profile to propose certain values for your operative projects? A: 2) Based on what criteria would you like to define your projects and project hierarchies?

5.5.3.
5.5.3.1. Questions:

Measure Planning
Planning Project Dates (Relevant to PS)

452 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP Q: 1) Are there any specific date constraints (for example, must start on or end before a specific date)? (If yes, consider using the date constraints available on the network activities.) A: Q: 2) Are there dependencies between your activities? (If yes, consider having relationships between network activities.) A: Q: 3) Are there any lags between tasks that delay of a successor task? (If yes, consider having an offset time on the relationship between network activities.) A: Q: 4) Are there any leads between tasks that cause the acceleration of a task? (If yes, consider having an offset time on the relationship between network activities.) A: Q: 5) Do you need to track total float/free float availability? (If yes, consider using the project planning board to display these values.) A: Q: 6) Do you need to reduce the duration of the critical path on your projects? (If yes, consider using reduction strategies for your project scheduling.) A: 5.5.3.2. Questions: Q: A: Q: 2) Do you calculate project-specific overhead? (If yes, you can stipulate an overhead structure for each project type.) A: Q: A: Q: 4) Do you calculate overhead on materials/labor? (Consider the implications this has for determining cost objects and overhead cost rates.) 3) Do you have different overhead costs by business area? 1) Do you allocate overhead to your projects? Overhead Costing/Cost Planning (Relevant to PS)

453 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP Explanation: Depending on which general costs element you are assigning work and materials to, you can work with different base rates and calculation rates. A: Q: A: Q: 6) Do you calculate percentage overhead? (Overhead can be specified as values or percentages.) A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: 5.5.3.3. Questions: 454 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc Network Cost Planning (Relevant to PS) 14) Who is responsible for overhead costs? 13) Does the basis for the overhead costs change during the lifecycle of the project? 12) To which accounts/cost elements are the overhead costs posted? 11) How often do you calculate overhead costs? 10) What is the formula/schema for applying overhead costs? 9) Is the basis for planned overhead the same as for actual overhead? 8) What is the basis for the overhead costs? 7) Is the calculation dependent on time periods (monthly %, and so on)? 5) At what level of detail do you plan for overhead?

ValueSAP Q: 1) Is your cost planning dependent on time scheduling? (If yes, consider using network cost planning.) A: Q: 2) Do you want to separate the functions of scheduling the project and costing the project? (If yes, consider using WBS cost planning or base object cost planning.) A: Q: 3) Do you distribute your costs over the duration of the activity? (If yes, consider using the distribution key on the activities.) A: Q: 4) Do you have any direct costs that relate to the entire project (such as insurance)? (If yes, consider using general cost activities.) A: Q: 5) Do you save a cost baseline? (If yes, consider using snapshot versions, CO plan versions, or simulation versions to save the baselines.) A: Q: 6) Do you plan revenues as of particular dates and do you plan down payments at the same time? (If yes, use the invoicing plan assigned to the network activity.) A: 5.5.3.4. Questions: Q: 1) How do you plan dates at each stage of the project life cycle? Manual WBS Date Planning

Explanation: You should use the predefined top-down scheduling scenario in the early stages, the predefined bottom-up scenario in later stages when more detail estimates of duration and expenditue are available. A: Q: 2) Do you do only summary level date planning on your project? (If yes, consider WBS time scheduling.) A: Q: 3) Do you plan start and finish dates for the entire project? (If yes, enter a start and finish date in the project definition. Bear the effects of this in mind when choosing a predefined scheduling scenario.) A: 455 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP -

Q: A:

4) Do constraints affect the project schedule? (If yes, consider using network scheduling.)

Q: 5) Which date types do you want to monitor? (Examples: planned basic data enter manually, forecast/actual dates, earliest start/finish, latest start/finish) A: Q: 6) Which reports do project managers use to monitor dates? (Remember that the information system offers a wide range of schedule reports.) A: Q: 7) Do you currently track date revisions? (If yes, consider using project snapshot versions and simulation versions to track schedule baselines.) A: Q: 8) Do you want to graphically view your project schedule? (If yes, consider using the Gantt chart view in the project planning board.) A: 5.5.3.5. Questions: Q: 1) Do you do cross project scheduling? (If yes, consider using overall network scheduling and consider the performance implications.) Explanation: Overall network scheduling involves scheduling activities, which are assigned to WBS elements and belong to different projects, in a single run. A: Q: A: Q: 3) Do all the networks belong to the same responsible person/plant? (If yes, consider using overall network scheduling. Bear system performance in mind.) A: 5.5.3.6. Questions: Q: 1) Do you have an approved funding or buildup of reserves process for projects in your enterprise? 456 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc Project Budgeting [Investment Project] 2) Do you schedule groups of networks together? Overall Network Scheduling (Relevant to PS)

ValueSAP -

A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: 6) Are portions of the budget not released until after a period of time? [ ]Yes [ ]No 7) How is this release process carried out and managed? 5) Do you have specific controls for over-expenditures? 4) How are budget changes processed and controlled? 3) Do you use a project plan as a basis for the budget? 2) How are these funds allocated to the WBS structure?

Q: A: Q: A:

8) Do you set exact budget values for each year?

Q: 9) Are your goods receipts valuated or unvaluated (that is, is the commitment related to the time of goods receipt or invoice receipt)? A: Q: 10) When manual budgeting is used, do you want to ensure that only projects assigned to program positions can be budgeted? A: [ ]Yes [ ]No 11) Do you update your budget values by entering budget supplements or returns? [ ]Yes [ ]No 12) Do you budget your projects from the top down from the investment program? 457 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

Q: A:

Q:

ValueSAP -

A:

[ ]Yes [ ]No 13) Do you make use of the option to manage commitments on your WBS elements? [ ]Yes [ ]No

Q: A:

Q: 14) Will you update your budget values using supplements or returns (that is, by special line items in addition to the originally entered budget)? A: 5.5.3.7. Questions: Q: A: Q: A: 2) How is this release process performed and managed? 1) Are portions of the budget released over time? Budget Release

5.5.4.
5.5.4.1. Questions: Q: A: Q: A: 5.5.4.2. Questions:

Release and Implementation of Measure

Project Release

1) Describe the project lifecycle today in your company.

2) How do you separate the planning and execution phases of your project?

Reservation Processing

Q: 1) Will you maintain specific material reservations (for sales, for production) for your stock materials? A: Q: A: Q: 3) In which cases would you want to use manual reservations? 458 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc 2) How far in advance are materials to be allowed to be reserved?

ValueSAP A: Q: 4) Do you make specific types of reservation (reserved for sales, reserved for production) with respect to your stock materials? A: [ ]Yes [ ]No 5) Which documents are exchanged when you return goods to the vendor?

Q: A: Q: A:

6) How long after the reservation date are open reservations canceled?

5.5.4.3. Questions:

Manual Funds Reservation

Q: 1) Does your company create manual funds reservations (manual commitments) for expenses they expect to incur but do not yet know the source of? These will appear on the reports as receivables against the budget. A: Q: A: 5.5.4.4. Questions: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 4) Do you manage non-conformity costs (such as rework costs, warranty costs, or defect costs)? A: Q: 5) Can you calculate using periodic prices, average prices, or cumulated activity prices? 459 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc 3) Do you want to record inspection costs? 2) Examples follow 1) Describe your direct activity allocation processes that are based on activity prices. Direct Activity Allocation 2) Describe how you accrue and reverse this reservation.

ValueSAP -

A: Q: 6) Identify the different activity types performed by employees - do you use these to plan, cost, or bill activities? A: Q: 7) Do you need to create additional labor categories for billing effort? (see documentation field) Explanation: If you use activity types to bill customers for labor expense, confirm that the activity types identified for activity settlement are in agreement with the activity types used for billing. A: Q: A: 5.5.4.5. Questions: Q: A: Q: 2) How do you wish to document which materials were received specifically for a work order? A: Q: A: Q: 4) How will the consumption of these parts be entered and who will post the return in the system? A: Q: A: Q: A: 460 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc 6) How do you record materials supplied by subcontractors? 5) How do you record which materials were received specifically for a work order? 3) How do you record materials ordered for specific work orders? 1) How do you document materials that are ordered for specific work orders? Goods Issue Processing [Stock Material] 8) This means that an activity is planned, entered, and assigned.

ValueSAP -

Q:

7) How much time elapses between the actual goods issue and its posting in the system?

Explanation: Info on process steps. A: Q: 8) Is the posting made online or in batch mode?

Explanation: Steps in system A: Q: 9) Are deliveries posted individually or for each group of goods issues?

Explanation: Steps in system A: Q: 10) Which documents are generated in conjunction with this posting and what information do they contain? Explanation: 1-step goods issue in which the GR at the receiving site is posted simultaneously to the GI at the DC. simultaneously to the GI at the DC. A: 5.5.4.6. Questions: Q: 1) Do you plan for non-costed units such as square feet, number of calls, number of PCs to upgrade, and so on? If so, identify these units and describe how they are used. A: 5.5.4.7. Questions: Q: 1) When you use manual funds reservation, describe the reduction process for the manual commitment. Explanation: Note: Unlike the commitments for purchase requisitions and purchase orders, the commitment created by the manual funds reservation is not automatically reduced by actual incurrence of costs. Therefore you need to clarify by whom, at which time, and in which form (single or collective processing) the commitment is to be reduced. A: Manual Funds Reduction Manual Entry of Statistical Key Figures [Investment Project]

5.5.5.
5.5.5.1. Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

Updating [Investment Projects]

Budget Update [Capital Investment Project] 461

ValueSAP -

Questions: Q: A: 1) How often do you permit budget changes by means of supplements or returns?

5.5.6.
5.5.6.1. Questions:

Analysis
Processing of Depreciation Simulation Data

Q: 1) During depreciation simulation, do you want to consider plan values only? g depreciation? A: Q: 2) Describe the process for distributing planned depreciation. For example, do you distribute based on asset classes or cost centers, or estimate the percentage depreciated? A: Q: A: Q: 4) Do you want the system to propose a given asset class for the depreciation simulation or primary cost planning? A: Q: A: 5) Do you want to post the depreciation values in CO? [ ]Yes [ ]No 5.5.6.2. Questions: Q: 1) What is the relationship between investment measures and fixed assets in the planning process? A: Q: A: 5.5.6.3. Questions: Q: 1) Describe the process for distributing planned depreciation. For example, do you distribute based on asset class, cost centers or estimate the percentage depreciated? 462 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc Depreciation Simulation/Forecast [Investment Project] 2) Is your plan activity-dependent or not activity-dependent? Integrated Planning in CO 3) Which of the following do you want the depreciation simulation to focus on?

ValueSAP A: Q: A: Q: 3) Do you wish to use different methods of valuation or different depreciation methods in your simulation? If so please specify. A: Q: 4) Do you include additional asset transactions in the simulation? If so, which transactions are relevant? A: 5.5.6.4. Questions: Q: A: Q: A: 2) Will you need other currencies for reporting? 1) What reports will you need for program analysis? Program Analysis 2) Do you simulate retirements of low value assets in your asset history sheet?

5.5.7.
5.5.7.1. Questions:

Period-End Closing and Settlement

Project Structuring

Q: 1) Do you plan resources such as personnel or machines on your tasks? (If yes, consider using network activities because WBS elements do not support the assignment of people or machines).) A: Q: 2) Are several people responsible for maintaining project activity information. (If so, consider using one or more networks per WBS element to handle network locking.) A: Q: 3) Do you need to allow for other responsible people or departments to do the detailed planning for a task? (If yes, consider using subnetworks to be able to control authorization.) A: Q: 4) Do you plan for dependencies between activities? (If yes, consider using network activities with relationships (since activity elements do not support dependencies.) A: 463 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP -

Q: 5) Is your project time limited? (If yes, consider using activity constraints to control this during date planning.) A: Q: 6) Do you do rough cut planning and break the tasks down into greater detail later? (If yes, consider using activity elements .) A: Q: 7) Do you assign more than one department or work center to work on a task? (If yes, consider using activity elements.) A: Q: 8) Do you use important milestones to monitor project progress? (If yes, consider using progress analysis based on the milestone technique in conjunction with milestone trend analysis.) A: Q: 9) Do your milestones creation and release of other network activities or do they start workflow tasks? (If yes, consider using network milestones because WBS milestones do not contain these functions.) A: Q: 10) Do you want to trigger billing based on project progress? (If yes, consider using milestones to control the release of billing blocks.) A: Q: 11) Do you need to model your project before making it operational? (If yes, consider using project simulation.) A: Q: 12) Do you evaluate projects based on best case, worst case, and most likely? (If yes, consider using project simulation.) A: Q: 13) Do you need to evaluate the impact of the project on resource capacity loads? (If yes, consider using project simulation.) A: Q: 14) Do you need a baseline for the project costs, schedule, or other structural elements? (If yes, consider using project snapshot versions or simulation versions to do baselining.) 464 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP -

A: Q: 15) Are some of your projects simply variants of a configurable standard project? (If yes, consider using variant configuration to structure your projects.) A: Q: 16) Do you have firmly defined rules or task used to create a project? (If yes, consider using variant configuration. (If yes, consider using variant configuration. If not, might using variant configuration be too complex.) A: Q: 17) Are parts of the projects similar? (If yes, consider referencing existing WBS subtrees or templates when creating new subprojects.) A: Q: 18) How long do your projects and activities last? (Consider the effects on the planning period for the project and project planning board profile.) A: Q: 19) Do your projects go through different phases that you must controls? (If yes, consider using user statuses to control each phase.) Explanation: The user status can regulate access to a project element on the basis of the authorization object in the status profile. In addition, you can control what type of commercial events are possible if a particular user status is set. So, for example, you can have the system block assignment of a purchase to a WBS element when a particular user status is reached. A: Q: 20) Do you want to include documentation throughout the project structure? (If yes, consider using DMS or PS texts.) A: Q: A: Q: 22) Do you calculate project-specific overhead? (If yes, you can stipulate an overhead structure for each project type.) A: Q: 23) Do you calculate overhead on materials/labor? (Consider the implications this has for determining cost objects and overhead cost rates.) 465 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc 21) Do you allocate overhead to your projects?

ValueSAP -

Explanation: Depending on which general costs element you are assigning work and materials to, you can work with different base rates and calculation rates. A: Q: 24) Do you calculate percentage overhead? (Overhead can be specified as values or percentages.) A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 30) How do you compare target and actual overhead? (Requirements in reporting affect the type of overhead settlement.) A: Q: 31) For how many project structures do you calculate overhead rates? (Consider the performance implications.) Explanation: From Release 4.0, the overhead cost calculation support automatic paralleling. Program ZPSPERGR splits projects into packages of equal sizete, called "variants". You can use these variants for overheads (4.0), settlement (4.5), and the interest calculation (4.0). See note number 109296. A: 5.5.7.2. Questions: 466 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc WBS Cost Planning 29) Who is responsible for overhead costs? 28) Does the basis for the overhead costs change during the lifecycle of the project? 27) How often do you calculate overhead costs? 26) What is the formula/schema for applying overhead costs? 25) Is the basis for planned overhead the same as for actual overhead?

ValueSAP Q: 1) How do you plan costs? (Consider whether you plan by cost element, WBS, overall, annually, by period, and so on.) A: Q: A: Q: 3) Do you do top-down or bottom-up cost planning? (Top down: Consider using the WBS only for cost planning. Bottom up: Consider using network activities only for cost planning.) A: Q: 4) Do you have different levels of detail in your plans based on the phase of the project? (If yes, ensure that you use either WBS cost planning OR network cost planning.) A: Q: 5) Do you keep monthly versions of your cost plans? (If yes, consider using project snapshot versions to allow for comparative reporting.) A: Q: 6) Do you keep different versions or snapshots of your plans? (If yes, consider using different CO versions for tracking the different plan versions.) A: Q: 7) Do you plan for detailed use of material and resources? (If yes, consider using network activities for cost planning.) A: Q: 8) Do you estimate a project based on standard estimates and do you need to separate cost planning from time scheduling? (If yes, consider using base object costing in conjunction with CO versions.) A: Q: 9) Do you track changes to plans? (If yes, consider configuring change documents for your plan line items.) A: Q: 10) Do you need to do detailed analysis of the plan (plan line items)? (If yes, consider using plan line item reporting in the information system.) A: 5.5.7.3. Project Progress Analysis 467 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc 2) It is possible to plan costs at different levels of detail. How do you plan costs?:

ValueSAP Questions: Q: 1) PS has many earned value techniques included in the standard system such as, milestone based, time proportionality, and estimates. Do you use earned value techniques? A: Q: A: Q: 3) What methods are used to determine percentage of completion (POC) and how is it calculated in each case? A: Q: A: Q: 5) What are the methods you use to determine percentage of completion (POC) and how is it calculated in each case? A: Q: A: Q: 7) It is possible to use the POC as the basis for revenue recognition. Does it have a financial impact on work in progress (WIP)? If so, describe in detail of the procedure involved. A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: 468 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc 11) Do you calculate quantity-based earned value? 10) Who is responsible for project progress? 9) Which variances do you monitor to keep a check on project progress? 8) Which reports are used today to analyze project results? Please provide examples. 6) How is this percentage of completion then used by project management? 4) Do your project managers perform progress analysis on projects? 2) How is this percentage of completion then used by project management?

ValueSAP -

Q: A: Q: A:

12) Do you evaluate the earned value (EV) at particular levels of the project or overall?

13) What version is the basis of the planned costs for EV?

Q: 14) Do different persons required different views of the earned value report? (If yes, consider creating a profile for each view and assign this to each parameter ID.) A: Q: A: 5.5.7.4. Questions: Q: A: Q: 2) For each allocation category, do you distribute overhead as a fixed percentage or based on the actual total costs? A: Q: A: Q: 4) For each of these assignments, what causes the overhead (for example, direct labor expense, labor hours, total WBS expense, others)? A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: 7) Will you perform automatic recovery of overheads on specific types of costs/expenses? [ ]Yes 469 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc 6) Define overhead rates. 5) What postings do the assignments create? 3) If you use fixed percentages for assignments, how do you handle remaining variances? 1) Do you assign overhead expenses to projects? Overhead Calculation 15) Which dates are used as the basis for earned value?

ValueSAP [ ]No 5.5.7.5. Questions: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 3) Describe the flow of information for individual investment measures: - In which functional area should the settlement of the investment measure to completed assets take place? A: Q: A: Q: 5) Do you want to display values by line item, as totals, or by cost element groups for fixed assets (that is, by origin). What type of settlement is best for your enterprise (based on the information you will need later)? A: Q: A: Q: 7) Do you want to differentiate between costs that require capitalization and costs that are not capitalized for individual depreciation areas in your asset under construction? A: [ ]Yes [ ]No 8) Do you settle your investment measures? 6) To which receivers do you settle during final settlement? 4) Enter which costs are capitalized and which are not. 2) To which receivers do you settle during the fiscal year? 1) How often would you like to create a balance sheet? Account Assignment for Settlement [Investment Project]

Q: A: Q: A:

9) Do you settle using percentages, equivalence numbers or by amounts?

Q: 10) If you create interim balance sheets, do you show the overall costs for assets under construction? A: Q: 11) How do you find out to which final asset your investment measure is to be settled? 470 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP -

A: Q: A: 5.5.7.6. Questions: Q: 1) During periodic settlement, do you want to settle all costs to the asset under construction? Explanation: Using preliminary settlement rules, you can specify which parts should not be settled to the AuC. A: 5.5.7.7. Questions: Q: 1) Does your country require interest to be calculated on the capital invested in an asset under construction? A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: 6) Do you settle interest? [ ]Yes [ ]No 5.5.7.8. Questions: 471 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc Investment Settlement [Investment Project] 5) How do you calculate interest for projects? 4) How do you calculate this interest? 3) What revenue and/or expense accounts do you use to determine interest? 2) Do you incur interest charges for projects on revenue, costs, or payments? Interest Calculation [Capital Investment Measure] Periodic Settlement [Investment Project] 12) How do you handle settlement at the moment?

ValueSAP Q: 1) During full settlement, do you want all costs to be settled from the AuC to the completed asset? Explanation: Using a final settlement rule, you can specify which part of the costs, which were already settled to the AuC, should not be settled to the completed asset. A: [ ]Yes [ ]No

5.6.
5.6.1.

Direct Capitalization
Blanket Order
Processing of Internal Orders [Direct Investment Capitalization] 5.6.1.1.

Questions: Q: 1) Do you want to consider directly-capitalized assets in your investment planning and budgeting? A: [ ]Yes [ ]No

Q: 2) Do you want to use availability control on your budget for direct capitalization of assets linked to measures? A: Q: A: 3) Do you also manage down payments in connection with direct capitalization? [ ]Yes [ ]No 5.6.1.2. Questions: Q: 1) Do you have an approved funding or buildup of reserves process for orders in your enterprise? A: Q: A: 2) Will you use an order plan as a basis for the budget? [ ]Yes [ ]No 3) Do you update your budget values by entering budget supplements or returns? [ ]Yes [ ]No 4) How are budget changes made and monitored? 472 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc Order Budgeting [Investment - Direct Capitalization]

Q: A:

Q: A:

ValueSAP -

Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A:

5) Do you have specific controls for over-expenditures?

6) Are portions of the budget not released until after a period of time?

7) How is this release process carried out and managed?

8) Will you set exact budget values for each year?

9) Do you update your budget values by entering budget supplements or returns?

Q: 10) Are your goods receipts valuated or unvaluated (that is, is the commitment related to the time of goods receipt or invoice receipt)? A:

5.6.2.
5.6.2.1. Questions:

Procurement and capitalization

Creation of Master Record for Tangible Assets

Q: 1) Do you need to manage and depreciate certain parts of your asset portfolio in the form of group assets? A: Q: A: Q: 3) Which organizational units and/or which functional areas have authorization for creating or displaying asset master records? A: Q: 4) The asset master record can be divided up into tab pages. How should the asset master record field groups be ordered for your organization? Explanation: Customizing layout of screen layout and assignment to asset class. 473 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc 2) Who is responsible for creating asset maser records? Who provides which information?

ValueSAP A: 5.6.2.2. Questions: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 3) What types of acquisition occur in your enterprise? 2) Describe your capital procurement requirements. 1) Describe the information flow for asset acquisitions in your enterprise. Processing of Asset Acquisition

Explanation: Acquisition integrated via invoice receipt/goods receipt (Logistics - Materials Management) Acquisition via goods receipt - accounts payable accounting Acquisition with automatic clearing account offsetting entry A: Q: 4) Are asset acquisitions posted on a net basis (deducting any discounts) or as a gross amount (discounts are deducted only on payment)? Explanation: Document type settings: Net document type indicator A: Q: 5) Do you want to show acquisitions to certain depreciation areas differently than you do in the book depreciation area (for example, to fulfill certain cost-accounting, tax or group requirements)? A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 8) If using asset sub-numbering, do you want to permit asset acquisitions only to the main number in the year of capitalization, and post all later acquisitions to sub-numbers? A: Q: A: 474 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc 9) Do you keep a record of costs using acquisitions to the asset under construction? 7) Do you want down payments for assets to be shown separately? 6) Do you post goods receipt to assets valuated or non-valuated?

ValueSAP -

Q: 10) Do you plan and budget for capital investments in your enterprise? Should assets that are capitalized directly also be included in the planning and budgeting processes? A: Q: 11) Which is the procedure from invoice receipt to posting of capitalization? Outline the different steps. A:

5.6.3.
5.6.3.1. Questions:

Analysis
Depreciation Simulation/Forecast [Investment Project]

Q: 1) Describe the process for distributing planned depreciation. For example, do you distribute based on asset class, cost centers or estimate the percentage depreciated? A: Q: A: Q: 3) Do you wish to use different methods of valuation or different depreciation methods in your simulation? If so please specify. A: Q: 4) Do you include additional asset transactions in the simulation? If so, which transactions are relevant? A: 5.6.3.2. Questions: Q: 1) During depreciation simulation, do you want to consider plan values only? g depreciation? A: Q: 2) Describe the process for distributing planned depreciation. For example, do you distribute based on asset classes or cost centers, or estimate the percentage depreciated? A: Q: A: 475 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc 3) Which of the following do you want the depreciation simulation to focus on? Processing of Depreciation Simulation Data 2) Do you simulate retirements of low value assets in your asset history sheet?

ValueSAP Q: 4) Do you want the system to propose a given asset class for the depreciation simulation or primary cost planning? A: Q: A: 5) Do you want to post the depreciation values in CO? [ ]Yes [ ]No 5.6.3.3. Questions: Q: 1) Which critical factors for order analysis are necessary (e.g. plan/budget vs. actual analysis, order group analysis, detail line item analysis)? A: 5.6.3.4. Questions: Q: A: Q: A: 5.6.3.5. Questions: Q: 1) What is the relationship between investment measures and fixed assets in the planning process? A: Q: A: 2) Is your plan activity-dependent or not activity-dependent? Integrated Planning in CO 2) Will you need other currencies for reporting? 1) What reports will you need for program analysis? Program Analysis Order Analysis [Direct Investment Capitalization]

6. Real Estate Management

6.1. Real Estate Management
Questions: Q: 1) Do you plan to copy Customizing settings of one company code to another company code? A: 476 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP -

Q: A:

2) Do you intend to copy all sample text modules from a source client to a target client? [ ]Yes [ ]No 3) What legacy data do you have and how should it be transferred?

Q:

Explanation: How: Direct input (only possible for rental unit, rental agreement) batch input manual input manual What data: Real estate: rental agreement data, rental adjustment data Applicant data, offer data, service charge settlement data data, offer data, service charge settlement data Other areas: FI, CO, FI-AA,... A:

6.1.1.
Questions: Q:

Rental

1) Which letters do you intend to use? To which partners do you intend to send them?

Explanation: Define the correspondence for the application cases: Rental (rental agreement) Rental adjustment Service charge settlement Other correspondence (such as one-time correspondence or invoices) A: Q: 2) Which fixtures and fittings characteristics do you intend to print in the correspondence? Which do you not intend to print? A: 6.1.1.1. Questions: Q: 1) Do You Want To Map Applications/Rental Requests In The System? If Yes, How Many? Application/Rental Request Processing

Explanation: The system differentiates between application (general information about the applicant/application) and the actual rental request. You can create several rental requests for one application. A: Q: 2) What number range do you want to create for the objects (documents)?

Explanation: The standard Customizing has default values for the object and document number ranges and you can usually copy these default values. You can define the number ranges for each company code for the master data objects, business entity, property, building, rental unit, and for contracts. A: 477 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP -

Q: A: Q:

3) Do You Want Numbers To Be Internally Or Externally Assigned?

4) Which object fields are required, optional, display or hidden?

Explanation: Determine field status A: Q: 5) If you intend to map information and settings related to accommodation entitlement certificates, which priority levels, groups of persons and additional information on the CEA will you use? A: Q: 6) If, for applications, you intend to use editing and preselection indicators as well as the editing status, which ones will you use? A: Q: 7) If you intend to make entries for acquisition information (acquisition from where, reason for acquisition, enquiry method), which will you use? A: Q: A: Q: 9) Who edits the objects and processes? 8) Which fixtures and fittings characteristics will you be able to select for a rental request?

Explanation: If necessary, consider the use of the authorization group field. If necessary, consider the use of the authorization group field. A: 6.1.1.2. Questions: Q: 1) What selection criteria do you want to use for the search? Rental Unit <-> Application Assignment

Explanation: Use only that search criteria that is maintained for the rental units. If you use any other search criteria, the system will be unable to find any suitable objects. A: 6.1.1.3. Blueprint_FICO_1.doc Offer Processing 478

ValueSAP -

Questions: Q: A: Q: 2) What number range do you want to create for the objects (documents)? 1) If you intend to have the system map offers, how many are required?

Explanation: The standard Customizing has default values for the object and document number ranges and you can usually copy these default values. You can define the number ranges for each company code for the master data objects, business entity, property, building, rental unit, and for contracts. A: Q: A: Q: 4) Which object fields are required, optional, display or hidden? 3) Do You Want Numbers To Be Internally Or Externally Assigned?

Explanation: Determine field status A: Q: 5) Do you want to substitute or validate values when you are editing the objects or processes? If yes, what do you want to substitute or validate and how? A: Q: 6) If you intend the system to copy offer data to lease-outs, should the system automatically change applicants to ten ants with customer accounts (as is the case in standard Customizing)? A: Q: A: Q: 8) Do you want to maintain additional texts for the lease-out or offer? ones? If yes, which 7) Which offer statuses do you intend to use?

Explanation: You can maintain additional text categories and store sample texts that will be offered to the clerks when they are processing contract supplements. These sample texts can also be tailored to meet the requirements of any particular contract. A:

479 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP Q: 9) Who edits the objects and processes?

Explanation: If necessary, consider the use of the authorization group field. If necessary, consider the use of the authorization group field. A: 6.1.1.4. Questions: Q: A: Q: 2) How many lease-outs for each contract type (for instance commercial or residential lease-outs, or those for publicly funded accommodation) do you intend the system to manage? A: Q: 3) Which adjustment types do you want to use? 1) Which lease-out types do you intend to use? Lease-Out Processing

Explanation: The permissable adjustment types on a rental agreement are dependent on the usage type of the rental unit. The permissable adjustment types on a general contract are dependent on the contract type A: Q: A: Q: 5) If you intend to map sales-based lease-outs in the system, how many sales types and which ones will you use? A: Q: 6) Do any minimum contract terms or adjustment frequencies exist for certain contracts and adjustment types? Explanation: For example, you could define a minimum term of 120 months for graduated rental agreements. A: Q: A: Q: 8) Do you want to map collective lease-outs in the system? 7) If you intend to use adjustment blocks, which ones will you use? 4) If you intend to map sales-based lease-outs in the system, how many do you need?

480 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP Explanation: If a tenant rents several objects, a rental agreement is concluded for each object. When a customer has more than one rental agreement, they can be grouped together in a collective rental agreement. You can add rental agreements to existing collective rental agreements. A: [ ]Yes [ ]No 9) What number range do you want to create for the objects (documents)?

Q:

Explanation: The standard Customizing has default values for the object and document number ranges and you can usually copy these default values. You can define the number ranges for each company code for the master data objects, business entity, property, building, rental unit, and for contracts. A: Q: A: Q: 11) Which rules do you want to have for forming the lease-out numbers 10) Do You Want Numbers To Be Internally Or Externally Assigned?

Explanation: Definition: - Building/property included in the rental agreement number - Number of places for the business entity, building or property, rental unit - Hyphens - Fill character A: Q: 12) Do you want to substitute or validate values when you are editing the objects or processes? If yes, what do you want to substitute or validate and how? A: Q: 13) Which object fields are required, optional, display or hidden?

Explanation: Determine field status A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 16) If you intend to make entries for acquisition information (acquisition from where, reason for acquisition, enquiry method), which will you use? 481 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc 15) Do you want to use a user status for this object and if yes, which ones? 14) Do you want to use the user-fields and if yes, how do you want to fill these objects?

ValueSAP -

A: Q: 17) Do you want to maintain additional texts for the lease-out or offer? ones? If yes, which

Explanation: You can maintain additional text categories and store sample texts that will be offered to the clerks when they are processing contract supplements. These sample texts can also be tailored to meet the requirements of any particular contract. A: Q: 18) Which apportionment units do you want to be able to define for these objects?

Explanation: Apportionment units can be maintained for either the rental unit or the rental agreement (such as the number of aerial connections on a rental unit and the number of people on the rental agreement). A: Q: 19) What is the selection of conditions you want for this object?

Explanation: You can have different conditions for each condition group (rental unit, rental agreement, management contract, general contract). A: Q: A: Q: 21) In which hierarchy level do you want a new condition category to be when you are adding new conditions to the selection? Explanation: Observe account determination for this special G/L transaction. Figures available for the hierarchy display when adding new conditions Figures available for the hierarchy display when adding new conditions When you are adding new conditions in the maintenance dialog for rental units, rental agreements, management contracts and offers (respective condition groups), the figure entered here specifies the hierarchy level on which the condition type appears. hierarchy level on which the condition type appears. When you activate the "Insert new condition types", the hierarchy level 0 displays all the conditions that have not yet been used. The additional condition types of level 1, level 2 and so on can be displayed by activating "Display +". displayed by activating "Display +". The figure 9 can be used to specify conditions that you do not want to be included in the selection available to the user. We recommend using the figure 9 when: using the figure 9 when: - Conditions still exist on the "old" contracts but will not be used in the new contracts - The condition type "cash deposit" has to be permissible for the rental agreement but cannot be entered in the condition screen (but in the "Rental collateral" dialog box) - Rent reductions are to be maintained in the dialog box "Rent reductions" and not directly in the rental agreement. 482 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc 20) In which order should the condition types be displayed?

ValueSAP A: Q: 22) Which conditions do you want to have as mandatory, hidden (when creating) and for which conditions is the zero value (preassignment field save) permissible? Explanation: Defects recording for the inspection lot. "Save Preassignment" Field: When, as is usually the case, the indicator is not set, condition items with values the same as in Customizing or for which no values (or, the zero value) have been entered are automatically deleted during saving. You can prevent this automatic deletion of condition items by setting the indicator "Save conditions identical with preassignment" for the corresponding condition type. corresponding condition type. We recommend a "zero condition" if no advance payments have been specified for the condition "Advance payment sales-based rent" or the conditions (even if they have a zero value) are the same as the sales agreements but you still want to save them. agreements but you still want to save them. A: Q: 23) Which condition categories are used (for instance basic rent, advance payments, flat rates, surcharges)? A: Q: 24) Which condition types are mutually exclusive, and which conditions of one category are possible for each object (rental unit, contract) (min./max./exactly one, unlimited)? A: Q: 25) Should the conditions of the lease-out be transferred to the rental unit at rental end? If so, what amount? A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: 483 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc 30) Which reasons would you like to use for lease-outs opting for input tax? 29) Which deposit types do you intend to use? 28) Do you intend to rent rooms individually? 27) If you have garages to manage, are they always linked to another rental unit? 26) Should the conditions of the lease-out be used for the next lease-out at rental end?

ValueSAP -

Q:

31) Which notice rules do you want to implement?

Explanation: In Customizing you can define the notice rules and deadline rules depending on the Customizing. A: Q: 32) Which reasons for notice do you want to use?

Explanation: The reason for notice contains the notice type (notice given by tenant or landlord). A: Q: A: Q: 34) Which preassignments do you want to have when you create lease-outs? 33) Which reasons for notice rejection do you plan to use?

Explanation: Possible preassignments: - Payment methods (credit memo, debit memo) Transfer conditions from the previous rental agreement - Transfer conditions from rental agreement to rental unit when notice is given + transfer percentage rate - Sales tax data (sales tax indicator, indicator, input tax opting, opting reason) A: Q: 35) Do you want to maintain a value for the account determination for the object (RU, RA, general contract)? Explanation: This value is the account determination key for the account determination. Use this account determination value to define an object- specific account determination. A: Q: 36) Who edits the objects and processes?

Explanation: If necessary, consider the use of the authorization group field. If necessary, consider the use of the authorization group field. A: Q: 37) Do you plan to use Workflow to help you create or change the object or process? If yes, how? A: 6.1.1.5. Questions: 484 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc Lease-Out Activation

ValueSAP -

Q: A:

1) How do you intend to activate objects? 6.1.1.6. Conclusion of Preliminary Contract

Questions: Q: 1) Do you want to map provisional contracts in the system and if yes, which ones?

Explanation: "Conclude provisional agreement" usually affects commercial agreements. Provisional agreements are taken into account for input tax processing. A: 6.1.1.7. Questions: Q: 1) Which notice rules do you want to implement? Notice Processing

Explanation: In Customizing you can define the notice rules and deadline rules depending on the Customizing. A: Q: 2) Which reasons for notice do you want to use?

Explanation: The reason for notice contains the notice type (notice given by tenant or landlord). A: Q: A: Q: 4) Do you want to substitute or validate values when you are editing the objects or processes? If yes, what do you want to substitute or validate and how? A: Q: 5) Who edits the objects and processes? 3) Which reasons for notice rejection do you plan to use?

Explanation: If necessary, consider the use of the authorization group field. If necessary, consider the use of the authorization group field. A: Q: 6) Do you plan to use Workflow to help you create or change the object or process? If yes, how? A: 485 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP -

6.1.1.8. Questions:

Lease-Out Renewal

Q: 1) If you intend to use renewal options for lease-outs, for what percentage of your rental agreements? A: Q: 2) Who edits the objects and processes?

Explanation: If necessary, consider the use of the authorization group field. If necessary, consider the use of the authorization group field. A: Q: 3) Do you plan to use Workflow to help you create or change the object or process? If yes, how? A: 6.1.1.9. Questions: Q: A: Q: 2) Who edits the objects and processes? 1) Which status for rental unit inspection do you intend to use? Rental Unit Inspection

Explanation: If necessary, consider the use of the authorization group field. If necessary, consider the use of the authorization group field. A: Q: 3) Do you plan to use Workflow to help you create or change the object or process? If yes, how? A: 6.1.1.10. Questions: Q: 1) Who edits the objects and processes? Rental Deposit Release

Explanation: If necessary, consider the use of the authorization group field. If necessary, consider the use of the authorization group field. A: 486 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP 6.1.2.
Questions: Q: 1) Which payment methods do you want to use?

Rental Accounting

Explanation: Refer to the corresponding section in FI for detailed questions on setting up payment methods. A: Q: 2) Which payment grouping do you want to use?

Explanation: For example, payment grouping according to rental agreement and not according to customer. A: Q: 3) Which dunning methods do you want to use? Which payment methods are to be dunnable and which partner(s) is to be a dunning recipient? Explanation: Refer to the corresponding area in FI for detailed questions on dunning methods. A: Q: 4) Which account statement procedures do you want to use?

Explanation: Procedures: - Interpretation of rental agreement number - Bank procedure (Germany) - POR procedure (Switzerland) - POR procedure (Switzerland) Refer to the corresponding section in FI or TR for detailed questions on account statement transfer. on account statement transfer. A: Q: 5) Which number range (per year) do you want the system to propose automatically for posting activities? Explanation: The documents that are generated during automatic posting are assigned a description in the field "Reference number". This description consists of: - description of the process - the fiscal year - the number range that is to be defined - the number range that is to be defined The following processes access the number range: VSTB Input tax treatment MVSO Debit position rental agreements MVAB RA accrual/deferral ENKA Owner settlement service charge costs FHKA Third-party settlement heating expenses MVUM Sales-based settlement rental agreement ANPA Adjustment flat rates MESO Debit position rental units - vacancy VSTX Input tax distribution VSTA Input tax adjustment according to transfer EIGA Owner settlement VWSO Debit position management contract MVEB Onetime posting rental agreements VWAB Management contract settlement XTAX Transfer taxes for advance payments CNBU Posting contract MVDC Transfer items to a new customer MVDC Transfer items to a new customer A: 487 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP -

Q: A: Q: A:

6) Which information do you want to print in dunning notices?

7) Which information should appear on payment advice notes?

Q: 8) Which correspondence do you want the system to map for rental accounting? Do you want to print the correspondence of other related business activities? A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 12) Which number range for customers will you use and which customers will you create in RE? A: Q: 13) Will you make postings for business transactions that are not related to RE (for instance claims settlements) in the same customer account? If so, how will you handle these in the tenant account? A: Q: 14) Will you use tenants (customers) that are also vendors? If so, do you plan to clear receivables with payables? A: Q: A: Q: A: 488 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc 16) If you manage deposits, how do you plan to handle cash deposits at rental end? 15) Will more than one lease-out be assigned to a tenant (customer)? 11) Which customer group do you intend to use for RE? 10) What is your planned retention time for financial accounting documents? 9) Which information do you want to print for payment method 'Check'?

ValueSAP -

Q: 17) If you have a head office/branch office relationship in your organization, who bills the tenants? A: Q: 18) Which assignment criteria do you want to use for the incoming payment and in what order do you want these assignment criteria to be prioritized? Explanation: Typical criterial are: Due date Posting date Flow type Rental agreement type Begin date of rental agreement A: Q: A: Q: 20) Do you plan to use the collective rental agreement number for clearing purposes? 19) What do you plan to do with incoming payments that cannot be assigned?

Explanation: In the system the collective rental agreement number can only be used for manual processing and not for automatic processing (electronic bank statement, collection authorization). A: Q: 21) Do you intend to invoice revenue/expense surpluses on the level of the object?

Explanation: The SAP reporting system focuses on reports concerned with profit and loss and balance sheets. A: 6.1.2.1. Questions: Q: 1) For which time periods in years do you want the planning records for conditions to be automatically updated? Explanation: The time period is defined for each product category: IMA IME IMV IVW ICN ICN A: Q: 2) Which document types (including reference document types) do you intend to use? Rental Accounting Debit Position

Explanation: Flow type: Classifies a movement of the cash flow. The flow type influences the account determination. The flow type is normally derived from the condition type. condition type. You require reference flow types for the following activities: 2 Follow-up postings due to a condition increase 3 Credit from settlements 4 Receivables from settlements 5 Deferrals 489 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP 6 Accruals 7 Write back deferrals 8 Write back accruals 32 Follow-up postings due to condition decrease 33 Vendor postings management contract 34 Transfer postings general contract 38 Vacancy 39 Own usage 50 Service charge legacy data transfer A: Q: 3) Which criteria would you like to use for account determination?

Explanation: In addition to the required flow type, you can use the following criteria: - Main usage type (derived from the asset class of the leading assets assigned on the condition that the Asset Management component is designated as installed. In other cases it can be entered manually) - Company relationship (defined for the business partner) - Freely defined account determination value (entered with the rental unit or the rental agreement) unit or the rental agreement) A: Q: A: Q: 5) Do you intend to use different sales deduction accounts for individual rent reduction conditions? Explanation: Define the necessary flow types with the relevant account determination. A: 6.1.2.2. Questions: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 3) What number range do you want to create for the objects (documents)? 2) Which document type do you plan to use for the process? 1) Which flow types do you want to designate as one-time postings? Posting of One-Time Debit-Side Receivables 4) How frequently do you intend to carry out the debit position?

Explanation: The standard Customizing has default values for the object and document number ranges and you can usually copy these default values. You can define the number ranges for each company code for the master data objects, business entity, property, building, rental unit, and for contracts. A: 6.1.2.3. Questions: 490 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc Incoming Payments - Manual

ValueSAP -

Q:

1) Do you want to use manual incoming payments or electronic bank statements?

Explanation: In this case a clerk could complete the transfer slip. A: Q: 2) Which assignment criteria do you want to use for the incoming payment and in what order do you want these assignment criteria to be prioritized? Explanation: Typical criterial are: Due date Posting date Flow type Rental agreement type Begin date of rental agreement A: Q: A: 3) Do you intend to use fast entry for incoming payments? [ ]Yes [ ]No 4) Which document type do you plan to use for the process?

Q: A: Q:

5) Do you intend to have the system map residual items?

Explanation: For an incoming payment, should the remaining amount due that is not substantial enough to clear all items be treated as payment on account, or should it be cleared and a new receivables item created? (This applies to manual fast entry and electronic account statement entry.) A: [ ]Yes [ ]No 6) Which payment methods do you want to use for over and under payments?

Q: A: Q:

7) Do you want the Assignment field to be automatically filled?

Explanation: The field can be automatically filled with the (rental) contract number and a descriptive abbeviation. A: [ ]Yes [ ]No

Q: 8) Which flow type and corresponding account determination do you intend to use for rejected incoming payments? 491 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP A: Q: A: 6.1.2.4. Questions: Q: A: Q: A: 6.1.2.5. Questions: Q: A: Q: 2) Which flow type and corresponding account determination do you intend to use for rejected incoming payments? A: 6.1.2.6. Questions: Q: 1) If you intend to carry out debit positions for vacancies, would you like to assign the costs to the rental unit or to the cost center? A: Q: 2) For which time periods in years do you want the planning records for conditions to be automatically updated? Explanation: The time period is defined for each product category: IMA IME IMV IVW ICN ICN A: Q: 3) Which document type do you want to take into account for posting vacancies? Vacancy Debit Position 1) Which document type do you plan to use for the process? Incoming Payment Postprocessing 2) Do you want to use installment payments? 1) Which document type do you plan to use for the process? Account Maintenance 9) Do you want to use installment payments?

Explanation: The document type is set when the account determination is defined. A: 492 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP -

Q:

4) Which condition types do you want to post as vacancy costs?

Explanation: Define reference flow types for the relationship key 38 (vacancy) for the basic rent if you want to post the basic rent but do not want to post the advance payments for the service charge costs. post the advance payments for the service charge costs. A: 6.1.2.7. Questions: Q: A: Q: 2) If you intend to map sales-based lease-outs in the system, how many sales types and which ones will you use? A: Q: A: Q: A: 6.1.2.8. Questions: Q: A: 6.1.2.9. Questions: Q: 1) Do you want to calculate risk apportionment costs using the corresponding reports and display them in the balance? Explanation: If not you can work with the value of the advance payments and flat- rates (procedure without report) A: Select Apportionable Costs 1) Do you intend to carry out accruals/deferrals on lease-outs (daily/monthly)? Carrying Out Accruals/Deferrals 4) At what intervals do you want to enter sales reports (once a month, quarter or year)? 3) Which settlement variants will you use (for instance yearly, twice-yearly,...)? 1) If you intend to map sales-based lease-outs in the system, how many do you need? Sales Report Entry

6.1.3.
Questions: Q:

Rent Change

1) Which rent adjustment methods do you plan to use? 493

Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP -

A: Q: 2) Which adjustment types do you want to use?

Explanation: The permissable adjustment types on a rental agreement are dependent on the usage type of the rental unit. The permissable adjustment types on a general contract are dependent on the contract type A: Q: 3) Which combinations of adjustment types and adjustment methods do you plan to allow?

Explanation: Decide whether to use standard Customizing or to change it. A: Q: 4) Which legal requirements as regards the frequency of rent adjustments, rent caps, excessive rent limits would you like the system to observe? Explanation: Most countries have introduced legal requirements to control these issues. However companies often use percentage rates lower than the legal rent cap or impose rent adjustments at less frequent intervals than their legal entitlement. A: Q: A: Q: 6) If you intend to use rent adjustments based on representative lists of rent (specific to Germany), for which geographical areas? A: Q: 7) Which rounding amounts do you want to use for the adjustment? 5) If you intend to use index-linked rent adjustments, which index series will you use?

Explanation: Define these amounts for each company code, adjustment procedure, condition type and currency. A: Q: A: Q: A: 494 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc 9) If you intend to use adjustment blocks, which ones will you use? 8) Do you want to have reasons for irregular rent increases? If yes, which ones?

ValueSAP Q: 10) Which letters do you intend to use? To which partners do you intend to send them?

Explanation: Define the correspondence for the application cases: Rental (rental agreement) Rental adjustment Service charge settlement Other correspondence (such as one-time correspondence or invoices) A: 6.1.3.1. Questions: Q: 1) Which minimum amounts for an increase/reduction of advance payments and flat rates do you intend to use? A: Q: 2) Which default value for "Number of months up to valid-from date for new advance payment" do you intend to use? A: 6.1.3.2. Questions: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 3) Do you intend to use different sales deduction accounts for individual rent reduction conditions? Explanation: Define the necessary flow types with the relevant account determination. A: 6.1.3.3. Questions: Q: 1) Which apportionment units or distribution keys (areas per rental unit and so on) do you want to use? Explanation: If you want to use consumption-dependent apportionment factors for the service charge settlement, you need to have the corresponding meter for the rental unit. A: Modernization Measure Processing 2) Which reasons for rent reduction do you use? 1) Which conditions (payment terms) would you like to trigger rent reductions? Rent Reduction Processing Advance Payment/Flat Rates Adjustment

495 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP Q: 2) Which percentage share of expenses for structural changes do you intend to prorate to the tenants? Explanation: Most countries have their own laws and regulations. Sometimes companies use a lower percentage rate than the official one. use a lower percentage rate than the official one. A: 6.1.3.4. Questions: Q: A: 6.1.3.5. Questions: Q: 1) How many comparative groups of apartments do you intend to use? How many objects will they contain? A: Q: 2) Will your comparative groups of apartments contain internal objects only, or also external objects? A: 6.1.3.6. Questions: Q: 1) For which part of your portfolio is the cost efficiency analysis, in accordance with the II calculation procedure relevant? Explanation: (Country-specifika Germany) A: Q: A: 6.1.3.7. Questions: Q: 1) Which naming conventions for the user identification of adjustment runs should the employees observe? A: Q: 2) Which parameters do you want to have available for selection? 496 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc Generating Rent Adjustment Data 2) Which cost groups, financing groups, expense groups and types do you intend to use? Data Entry for Cost Efficiency Analysis Comparative Group Rent Adjustment Preparation 1) Which reasons for surcharges or reductions do you intend to use? Expert Opinion Processing

ValueSAP -

Explanation: Example Adjustment of rental agreements, rental units or both? Adjust inactive rental agreements? A: Q: A: Q: A: 4) Do you plan to make any changes to the calculated adjustment records? [ ]Yes [ ]No 6.1.3.8. Questions: Q: 1) Do you want the system to propose a date for the approval when you activate a contract? Explanation: If you enter a date, this will be adopted as the approval date for all selected rental adjustments that have not yet been activated nor reversed and for which no approval date has been assigned. These adjustments can then be activated directly. adjustments can then be activated directly. adjustments can then be activated directly. A: [ ]Yes [ ]No 2) Which reminder procedure for approving rent adjustments do you intend to use? Activating Rent Adjustment (Including Approval) 3) If you intend to use adjustment reasons, which ones?

Q: A: Q: A:

3) Which reservations of rejection reasons of the tenant do you intend to use?

6.1.4.
Questions: Q:

Service Charge Settlement

1) Which letters do you intend to use? To which partners do you intend to send them?

Explanation: Define the correspondence for the application cases: Rental (rental agreement) Rental adjustment Service charge settlement Other correspondence (such as one-time correspondence or invoices) A: Q: 2) If you intend to use account assignment models for invoices, which ones are they? 497 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP A: Q: A: Q: 4) How do you plan the invoice entry process in your company with regard to apportionable costs? Explanation: Here you have to consider that the exact assignment of costs to a particular settlement unit has usually not been made at the time of invoice entry. This results in the need to make adjustments runs. A: Q: 5) Which accounts do you have to create and take into account for the service charge settlement? Explanation: Example: Clearing accounts Accounts for rounding differences Accounts for nondeductible input taxes A: Q: 6) Which apportionment units or distribution keys (areas per rental unit and so on) do you want to use? Explanation: If you want to use consumption-dependent apportionment factors for the service charge settlement, you need to have the corresponding meter for the rental unit. A: Q: 7) Where do you want to define the apportionment units? 3) If you intend to use entry screens for creating invoices, which ones will you use?

Explanation: Define which apportionment units you want to define on the rental unit and the ones that are to be defined on the rental agreement. Example: Arial connections can be defined on the rental unit and the number of persons on the rental agreement A: Q: 8) Should the system prevent the multiple assignment of rental units to settlement units with the same service charge key? A: [ ]Yes [ ]No 9) Do you want to allow more than one apportionment factor per settlement unit?

Q:

Explanation: For example, should the factor could be 40% area and 60% consumption. 498 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP -

A:

[ ]Yes [ ]No 10) Will you have to create year-dependent settlement variants?

Q:

Explanation: As a rule, for the year of first usage of a real estate object, you have to choose a corresponding year-dependent settlement variant once. Example: First usage of a real estate object on 5/1 of the year. For the "Valid-from date" of the settlement unit, you choose 5/1 of the year. For a settlement variant with no year dependence and a "Valid-from date" as per 1/1 of the year, the system interprets the real estate object to be vacant for the first four months and apportions the costs to the owner. A: Q: 11) Which is the first period for which you will generate a cost collector for a settlement unit? Explanation: It is not possible to generate cost collectors for an earlier period if cost collectors already exist for a later period. You must therefore carefully consider what the first period should be. As a rule, you should only generate cost collectors as late as possible in the project phase, as changes to the settlement unit or cost collector are not anticipated once they have been generated. A: Q: 12) What area types do you want to use?

Explanation: Area types are defined for buildings, properties, rental units and rooms. They are usually used for the service charge settlement. A: Q: A: Q: 14) How will the characteristics of service charges be defined? 13) Which assignments of area types to apportionment units should apply?

Explanation: Characteristics of service charge keys: - Operating costs or heating expenses? Apportionable? - Which apportionment unit is assigned (persons, per rental unit, water consumption, usage space etc.)? A: Q: 15) How will the assignment of service charges to advance payments and flat rates be defined?

499 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP Explanation: You can assign service charges to service charge groups (normal case) as well as directly to conditions. as well as directly to conditions. Example Example Assignment of condition To service charge group ------------------------------------------------------------------------ ----------------------- AP and flat rates operating costs Operating costs AP and flat rates heating expenses Heating expenses AP and flat rates heating expenses Heating expenses Assignment of condition To service charge key ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- AP elevator 4711 elevator A: Q: 16) Do you want to make a consumption-dependent service charge settlement (using meter readings)? Explanation: In this case you have to define which meters are to be created for which rental units and the number range. A: Q: 17) Do you plant to have the heating expenses settlement carried out by an external settlement company using data medium exchange (DME)? A: Q: A: 6.1.4.1. Questions: Q: 1) Which is the first period for which you will generate a cost collector for a settlement unit? Explanation: It is not possible to generate cost collectors for an earlier period if cost collectors already exist for a later period. You must therefore carefully consider what the first period should be. As a rule, you should only generate cost collectors as late as possible in the project phase, as changes to the settlement unit or cost collector are not anticipated once they have been generated. A: Q: A: 6.1.4.2. Questions: Q: 1) Which SCS-relevant material/services have to be ordered? How should the purchase order be made? Which services will be provided without a purchase order? 500 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc Ordering of SCS-relevant material 2) Should the cost collectors be generated individually or by mass processing? Cost Collector Generator 18) Do you want to settle operating and external heating costs together?

ValueSAP -

Explanation: Do you want to order via MM? Should settlement units be assigned a settlement unit when the order is made? A: Q: 2) If you intend to issue purchase orders using MM, will you make account assignments on the settlement units? A: 6.1.4.3. Questions: Q: 1) What number range do you want to create for the objects (documents)? Measurement Document Creation

Explanation: The standard Customizing has default values for the object and document number ranges and you can usually copy these default values. You can define the number ranges for each company code for the master data objects, business entity, property, building, rental unit, and for contracts. A: Q: A: Q: 3) Who and how do you want to enter the meter readings into the system? 2) How do you want to record the meter readings in the rental units?

Explanation: Usually a company is responsible for reading the meters in the rental unit. A: 6.1.4.4. Questions: Q: A: Q: 2) Which accounts do you have to create and take into account for the service charge settlement? Explanation: Example: Clearing accounts Accounts for rounding differences Accounts for nondeductible input taxes A: Q: 3) Do you want to settle operating and external heating costs together? 501 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc 1) Which usage types will be used in the service charge settlement? Carrying Out Service Charge Settlement

ValueSAP A: Q: 4) Should the system charge a percentage surcharge on the settlement result (for instance, in the case of risk of rent loss or management costs surcharge)? A: Q: 5) How do you want to adjust advance payments and flat-rate payments within the framework of the SCS? A: Q: 6) Which minimum amounts for an increase/reduction of advance payments and flat rates do you intend to use? A: Q: 7) Which rounding amounts do you want to use for the adjustment?

Explanation: Define these amounts for each company code, adjustment procedure, condition type and currency. A: Q: 8) Which default value for "Number of months up to valid-from date for new advance payment" do you intend to use? A: 6.1.4.5. Questions: Q: 1) Do you want to read in the D-tape of a settlement company or do you want to do it manually? A: 6.1.4.6. Questions: Q: 1) Should the system charge a percentage surcharge on the settlement result (for instance, in the case of risk of rent loss or management costs surcharge)? A: Q: 2) Which minimum amounts for an increase/reduction of advance payments and flat rates do you intend to use? A: External Settlement Result Posting D-Tape Import

502 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP Q: 3) Which rounding amounts do you want to use for the adjustment?

Explanation: Define these amounts for each company code, adjustment procedure, condition type and currency. A: Q: 4) Which default value for "Number of months up to valid-from date for new advance payment" do you intend to use? A:

6.1.5.
Questions: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q:

Third-Party Management

1) For what percentage of objects should the system map management contracts?

2) For what percentage of objects do you plan to carry out owner settlements?

3) How many owners should the system map?

4) Do you want the owner settlement to be made on the management contract?

Explanation: In this case an owner settlement is made. Specify what you want to display and in what form. A: 6.1.5.1. Questions: Q: 1) What number range do you want to create for the objects (documents)? Management Contract Maintenance

Explanation: The standard Customizing has default values for the object and document number ranges and you can usually copy these default values. You can define the number ranges for each company code for the master data objects, business entity, property, building, rental unit, and for contracts. A: Q: A: 503 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc 2) Do You Want Numbers To Be Internally Or Externally Assigned?

ValueSAP -

Q:

3) Which object fields are required, optional, display or hidden?

Explanation: Determine field status A: Q: A: Q: 5) What is the selection of conditions you want for this object? 4) Do you want to use a user status for this object and if yes, which ones?

Explanation: You can have different conditions for each condition group (rental unit, rental agreement, management contract, general contract). A: Q: A: Q: 7) In which hierarchy level do you want a new condition category to be when you are adding new conditions to the selection? Explanation: Observe account determination for this special G/L transaction. Figures available for the hierarchy display when adding new conditions Figures available for the hierarchy display when adding new conditions When you are adding new conditions in the maintenance dialog for rental units, rental agreements, management contracts and offers (respective condition groups), the figure entered here specifies the hierarchy level on which the condition type appears. hierarchy level on which the condition type appears. When you activate the "Insert new condition types", the hierarchy level 0 displays all the conditions that have not yet been used. The additional condition types of level 1, level 2 and so on can be displayed by activating "Display +". displayed by activating "Display +". The figure 9 can be used to specify conditions that you do not want to be included in the selection available to the user. We recommend using the figure 9 when: using the figure 9 when: - Conditions still exist on the "old" contracts but will not be used in the new contracts - The condition type "cash deposit" has to be permissible for the rental agreement but cannot be entered in the condition screen (but in the "Rental collateral" dialog box) - Rent reductions are to be maintained in the dialog box "Rent reductions" and not directly in the rental agreement. A: Q: 8) Which conditions do you want to have as mandatory, hidden (when creating) and for which conditions is the zero value (preassignment field save) permissible? Explanation: Defects recording for the inspection lot. "Save Preassignment" Field: When, as is usually the case, the indicator is not set, condition items with values the same as in Customizing or for which no values (or, the zero value) have been entered are automatically deleted during saving. You can prevent this automatic deletion of condition items by setting the 504 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc 6) In which order should the condition types be displayed?

ValueSAP indicator "Save conditions identical with preassignment" for the corresponding condition type. corresponding condition type. We recommend a "zero condition" if no advance payments have been specified for the condition "Advance payment sales-based rent" or the conditions (even if they have a zero value) are the same as the sales agreements but you still want to save them. agreements but you still want to save them. A: Q: 9) Which condition categories are used (for instance basic rent, advance payments, flat rates, surcharges)? A: Q: 10) Which condition types are mutually exclusive, and which conditions of one category are possible for each object (rental unit, contract) (min./max./exactly one, unlimited)? A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 13) How many calculation bases do you intend to use for event-driven fees? 12) If you intend to use event-driven fees, which events (fee types) should be defined? 11) Which fee types would you like to define for event-driven fees?

Explanation: For instance: - Rental unit basic rent - Rental unit reference area - Building purchase price - Building selling price A: Q: 14) Do you want to maintain a value for the account determination for the object (RU, RA, general contract)? Explanation: This value is the account determination key for the account determination. Use this account determination value to define an object- specific account determination. A: Q: 15) Who edits the objects and processes?

Explanation: If necessary, consider the use of the authorization group field. If necessary, consider the use of the authorization group field. A: Q: 16) Do you plan to use Workflow to help you create or change the object or process? If yes, how? 505 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP A: 6.1.5.2. Questions: Q: A: Q: 2) Who edits the objects and processes? 1) How many events do you plan to create on average per month? Management Event Maintenance

Explanation: If necessary, consider the use of the authorization group field. If necessary, consider the use of the authorization group field. A: 6.1.5.3. Questions: Q: 1) For which time periods in years do you want the planning records for conditions to be automatically updated? Explanation: The time period is defined for each product category: IMA IME IMV IVW ICN ICN A: Q: 2) Which document types (including reference document types) do you intend to use? Management Contract Debit Position

Explanation: Flow type: Classifies a movement of the cash flow. The flow type influences the account determination. The flow type is normally derived from the condition type. condition type. You require reference flow types for the following activities: 2 Follow-up postings due to a condition increase 3 Credit from settlements 4 Receivables from settlements 5 Deferrals 6 Accruals 7 Write back deferrals 8 Write back accruals 32 Follow-up postings due to condition decrease 33 Vendor postings management contract 34 Transfer postings general contract 38 Vacancy 39 Own usage 50 Service charge legacy data transfer A: 6.1.5.4. Questions: Q: A: 1) Which cost elements do you plan to settle in the owner settlement? Owner Settlement

6.1.6.
Questions: Q: A:

General Contract

1) Do you want the system to map leased-out objects? 506

Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP -

6.1.6.1. Questions: Q: A: Q: A:

Editing General Contract

1) Do you want to use vendor, customer or mixed contract types?

2) Which contract types do you plan to use for general contracts?

Q: 3) How many contracts for each contract type (such as lease-in) the system to manage? A: Q: 4) Which adjustment types do you want to use?

do you intend

Explanation: The permissable adjustment types on a rental agreement are dependent on the usage type of the rental unit. The permissable adjustment types on a general contract are dependent on the contract type A: Q: A: Q: 6) What number range do you want to create for the objects (documents)? 5) Do you want to create contracts that do not reference objects? If so, which ones?

Explanation: The standard Customizing has default values for the object and document number ranges and you can usually copy these default values. You can define the number ranges for each company code for the master data objects, business entity, property, building, rental unit, and for contracts. A: Q: A: Q: 8) Do you want to substitute or validate values when you are editing the objects or processes? If yes, what do you want to substitute or validate and how? A: Q: 9) Which object fields are required, optional, display or hidden? 7) Do You Want Numbers To Be Internally Or Externally Assigned?

Explanation: Determine field status 507 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP -

A: Q: A: Q: 11) What is the selection of conditions you want for this object? 10) Do you want to use a user status for this object and if yes, which ones?

Explanation: You can have different conditions for each condition group (rental unit, rental agreement, management contract, general contract). A: Q: A: Q: 13) In which hierarchy level do you want a new condition category to be when you are adding new conditions to the selection? Explanation: Observe account determination for this special G/L transaction. Figures available for the hierarchy display when adding new conditions Figures available for the hierarchy display when adding new conditions When you are adding new conditions in the maintenance dialog for rental units, rental agreements, management contracts and offers (respective condition groups), the figure entered here specifies the hierarchy level on which the condition type appears. hierarchy level on which the condition type appears. When you activate the "Insert new condition types", the hierarchy level 0 displays all the conditions that have not yet been used. The additional condition types of level 1, level 2 and so on can be displayed by activating "Display +". displayed by activating "Display +". The figure 9 can be used to specify conditions that you do not want to be included in the selection available to the user. We recommend using the figure 9 when: using the figure 9 when: - Conditions still exist on the "old" contracts but will not be used in the new contracts - The condition type "cash deposit" has to be permissible for the rental agreement but cannot be entered in the condition screen (but in the "Rental collateral" dialog box) - Rent reductions are to be maintained in the dialog box "Rent reductions" and not directly in the rental agreement. A: Q: 14) Which conditions do you want to have as mandatory, hidden (when creating) and for which conditions is the zero value (preassignment field save) permissible? Explanation: Defects recording for the inspection lot. "Save Preassignment" Field: When, as is usually the case, the indicator is not set, condition items with values the same as in Customizing or for which no values (or, the zero value) have been entered are automatically deleted during saving. You can prevent this automatic deletion of condition items by setting the indicator "Save conditions identical with preassignment" for the corresponding condition type. corresponding condition type. We recommend a "zero condition" if no advance payments have been specified for the condition "Advance payment sales-based rent" or the conditions (even if they have a zero value) are the same as the sales agreements but you still want to save them. agreements but you still want to save them. 508 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc 12) In which order should the condition types be displayed?

ValueSAP -

A: Q: 15) Which condition categories are used (for instance basic rent, advance payments, flat rates, surcharges)? A: Q: 16) Which condition types are mutually exclusive, and which conditions of one category are possible for each object (rental unit, contract) (min./max./exactly one, unlimited)? A: Q: 17) Which notice rules do you want to implement?

Explanation: In Customizing you can define the notice rules and deadline rules depending on the Customizing. A: Q: 18) Which reasons for notice do you want to use?

Explanation: The reason for notice contains the notice type (notice given by tenant or landlord). A: Q: 19) Which preassignments do you want made when a general contract is being created?

Explanation: These can be defined for each contract type. Each field can be selected. A: Q: A: A: Q: 22) Which renewal options do you want to enter? 20) Which resubmission rules would you like to use?

Explanation: Example: - As many times as required in a year - Every 1/2/2/4 years A: Q: 23) Do you want to maintain a value for the account determination for the object (RU, RA, general contract)? Explanation: This value is the account determination key for the account determination. Use this account determination value to define an object- specific account determination. 509 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP -

A: Q: 24) Who edits the objects and processes?

Explanation: If necessary, consider the use of the authorization group field. If necessary, consider the use of the authorization group field. A: Q: 25) Do you plan to use Workflow to help you create or change the object or process? If yes, how? A: 6.1.6.2. Questions: Q: 1) For which time periods in years do you want the planning records for conditions to be automatically updated? Explanation: The time period is defined for each product category: IMA IME IMV IVW ICN ICN A: Q: 2) Which document types (including reference document types) do you intend to use? Periodic Posting (General RE Contract)

Explanation: Flow type: Classifies a movement of the cash flow. The flow type influences the account determination. The flow type is normally derived from the condition type. condition type. You require reference flow types for the following activities: 2 Follow-up postings due to a condition increase 3 Credit from settlements 4 Receivables from settlements 5 Deferrals 6 Accruals 7 Write back deferrals 8 Write back accruals 32 Follow-up postings due to condition decrease 33 Vendor postings management contract 34 Transfer postings general contract 38 Vacancy 39 Own usage 50 Service charge legacy data transfer A: Q: A: 3) Do you want to distribute condition amounts between other real estate objects?

6.1.7.
Questions: Q: A: Q:

Input Tax Treatment

1) For which percentage of objects will you opt for sales tax?

2) Which reasons would you like to use for lease-outs opting for input tax? 510

Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP A: Q: 3) Should the system calculate the option rate according to a set procedure (area, cubic volume), or will this be determined by the tax office and the data manually entered? A: Q: 4) If you want to calculate the option rate using areas, which areas do you want to use for this calculation? Explanation: You can only use reference areas for calculating the option rates. A: Q: A: Q: 6) How do you want to treat the assets in construction for the purpose of sales tax? 5) Do you want costs from the input tax treatment to flow into the plant maintenance?

Explanation: Prerequisite: You are opting for sales tax. A: 6.1.7.1. Questions: Q: 1) Which automatic process do you intend to use to calculate the option rate? Periodic Determination of Option Rates

Explanation: Automatic procedures: - Area - Cubic volume - Cubic volume If the system is to calculate the option rate on the basis of the cubic volume, the cubic volume data should be maintained on the rental unit. volume, the cubic volume data should be maintained on the rental unit. Additional information: In the case of consumption-dependent settlement units, a correction posting is carried out automatically according to the actual consumption. A: 6.1.7.2. Questions: Q: 1) Which accounts do you want to use for non-deductible input tax? Carrying Out Input Tax Distribution

Explanation: You can define accounts for each cost element as well as using a default account. A: 6.1.7.3. Questions: 511 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc Advance Tax Return

ValueSAP Q: A: 6.1.7.4. Questions: Q: 1) What number range do you want to create for the objects (documents)? Input Tax Treatment for Correction Items 1) How often do you plan to carry out advance sales tax returns?

Explanation: The standard Customizing has default values for the object and document number ranges and you can usually copy these default values. You can define the number ranges for each company code for the master data objects, business entity, property, building, rental unit, and for contracts. A: Q: A: Q: 3) Which expense account and which revenue account will be posted for (non-) deductible input tax on assets in the tax correction phase? Explanation: Changes result in: Increased option rates for revenues Lower option rates for expenses A: 2) Do You Want Numbers To Be Internally Or Externally Assigned?

6.1.8.
Questions: Q: A: Q: A:

Real Estate Controlling

1) If you plan to use profit center accounting, what is the structure of the profit center?

2) How do you want to update down payments?

Q: 3) Which cost element structure (cost element hierarchy) do you want to use for reports or planning? Explanation: You can define different hierarchies. A: Q: 4) Would you like to assign CO internal orders to your Real Estate objects to evaluate them in the information system? 512 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP Explanation: Example: depreciation costs from FI-AA A: Q: 5) Do you intend to introduce a budget control for real estate activities?

Explanation: Using statistical CO internal orders. A: Q: 6) Does the cost element determine on which real estate object the settlement is made?

Explanation: Example: Plant maintenance costs on the business entity or building level. level. Note: This question is relevant for the CO settlement to (not from) real estate object(s). A: 6.1.8.1. Questions: Q: 1) If you intend to do planning on real estate objects, which costs, revenues and activity types will you include in the planning? A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: A: Q: 5) Which cost and revenue elements do you want to plan? At what time intervals and from which departments? Explanation: Example: Planning the plant maintenance costs by technology A: Q: 6) Do you want to define statistical key figures for your real estate objects? 4) Which planning profile do you require for your real estate planning? 3) Would you like to use the online and offline Excel-supported functionality for planning? 2) For which periods and with what degree of detail do you intend to plan? Planning (RE)

Explanation: Example: Key figures can be defined for the apportionment and distribution of costs. 513 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP -

A: Q: A: 6.1.8.2. Questions: Q: 1) Would you like to carry out a CO settlement for your real estate objects on other CO recipients? Explanation: Example: Settlement of rental agreement costs for own usage on a cost center. A: Q: 2) Which cost elements would you like to take into account in the CO settlement of real estate objects on other CO objects? A: Q: 3) Which forms do you want to use from the standard CO settlements? Carrying Out CO Settlement 7) Do you want to make plan or actual comparisons for real estate objects?

Explanation: Example: Settlement of a business entity on an asset or settlement of WBS element on a business entity WBS element on a business entity A: Q: 4) Do you want to define the selection variant for the collective settlements?

Explanation: Use selection variables if you always use the same selection values; the same settlement variant for all buildings and another one with restricted values. A: Q: A: 6.1.8.3. Questions: Q: 1) If you intend to carry out a cost center assessment on real estate objects, which rules / key figures will you use? Explanation: You can use the apportionment factors of the service charge settlement as statistical key figures. 514 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc Assessment on RE Object 5) Do you want to make settlements periodically (in which intervals) or non-periodically?

ValueSAP A:

6.1.9.
Questions: Q: A:

Information System

1) Who should receive which information and reports, and how often?

Q: 2) Do you have a different reporting system (for instance for objects for third-party rental, own usage or third-party management)? A: 6.1.9.1. Questions: Q: 1) Which reports do you require? Which are already available and which have to be created or modified? A: Evaluation Report

7. HR Funds and Position Management

7.1. Additional Integration with Funds Management and Payroll

Questions: Q: 1) Please note that you require answers from Funds management and the Personnel Department before you work through this step. A: Q: 2) Which phases are involved in your overall budget?

Explanation: Examples include creation, execution, and completion of overall budget. Examples include creation, execution, and completion of overall budget. A: Q: A: Q: 4) Which types of financing would you like to use? 515 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc 3) Which activities do you perform in the various phases?

ValueSAP -

Explanation: - Direct financing of employees - Financing of positions that have not yet been staffed - Financing of persons according to the position they hold A: Q: 5) Do you finance persons on the basis of default values or simulated payroll results?

Explanation: You can use each of the two methods for a group of employees. A: Q: 6) Would you like to finance all employees, or only a portion of these employees?

Explanation: If only a group of employees are to be financed, list the criteria for this. A: Q: 7) Is personnel expenditure assigned for specific purposes in your Funds Management system? Explanation: This assignment is used for proposing default values for financing. A: Q: 8) Are there any events that might affect the funds required?

Explanation: Examples include long-term absences, changes in pay scale classification, and changes in working times. Please make a list of these. A: Q: 9) What are the basic conditions for financing?

Explanation: Examples of initial conditions include: - Budgets that are available only for specific employees - Can the pay scale classification of the budget funds be different to the pay scale classification of the persons and/or positions financed? - Are budget funds reserved for specific organizational areas? A: Q: 10) What are the basic conditions for staffing positions?

Explanation: Examples of initial conditions include: - A person may not be assigned to an unclassified position - Service type and category of position different to those of employee Pay scale classification of position different to that of employee - Pay scale classification of position different to that of employee - Pay scale classification of position different to that of employee 516 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc

ValueSAP A: Q: A: 11) Do you have to finance work (positions) before you actually staff these positions? [ ]Yes [ ]No

Q: 12) Do you want to copy the budget hierarchy and financing details to the new financial year? A: [ ]Yes [ ]No 13) At what time should the overall budget be carried forward?

Q: A:

Q: 14) If you carried forward an overall budget, do you make any changes to carried-forward data in the previous budget period? A: [ ]Yes [ ]No

Q: 15) Name the person(s) to whom information on unclear issues regarding the carryforward should be sent. A:

517 Blueprint_FICO_1.doc